HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D08-137 - WESTFIELD SOUTHCENTER MALL - ZUMIEZ - TENANT IMPROVEMENTZUMIEZ
2646 SOUTHCENTER MAIL
D08 -137
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY
This certificate is issued pursuant to the requirements of Section 110.2 of the 2006 edition of the
International Building Code. At the time of issuance, this structure or portion thereof has been
inspected for compliance with the requirements of this code for the occupancy and division of
occupancy and the use for which the proposed occupancy is classified.
Building Permit No.: D08 -137
Occupant /Tenant: ZUMIEZ
Building Address: 2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL, SUITE NO.
Parcel No.: 6364200010
Property Owner: WESTFIELD PROPERTY TAX DEPT
PO BOX 130940 , CARLSBAD CA 92013
Use: RETAIL
Occupancy Group /Division: M
Type of Construction: II -B
Automatic Sprinkler System: Provided: Y
Required: Y
Design Occupant Load:
47
THIS CERTIFICATE TO BE CONSPICUOUSLY POSTED ON THE PREMISES
Cityitf Tukwila
Parcel No.: 6364200010
Address: 2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW
Suite No:
Tenant:
Name: ZUMIEZ
Address: 2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL , TUKWILA WA
Owner:
Name: WESTFIELD PROPERTY TAX DEPT
Address: PO BOX 130940 , CARLSBAD CA 92013
Phone:
Contact Person:
Name: DAVID MURPHY
Address: 2101 9 AV #211 , SEATTLE WA 98121
Phone: 206 341 -9875
Contractor:
Name: FUTURE BUILDERS INC
Address: 1008 NE 122 AV , PORTLAND OR 97230
Phone: 503 252 -9197
Contractor License No: FUTURBI952C2
doc: IBC -10/06
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
DEVELOPMENT PERMIT
* *continued on next page **
Permit Number: D08 - 137
Issue Date: 04/24/2008
Permit Expires On: 10/21/2008
Expiration Date: 03/13/2009
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
INTERIOR RENOVATION OF A RETAIL SPACE INCLUDING NEW FINISH, STORE FIXURING, CASEWORK, STOREFRONT,
LIGHTING, AND MODIFICATIONS TO THE EXISTING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
Value of Construction: $225,000.00 Fees Collected: $3,585.00
Type of Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS International Building Code Edition: 2006
Type of Construction: IIB Occupancy per IBC: 0019
D08 -137 Printed: 04 -24 -2008
Public Works Activities:
Channelization / Striping: N
Curb Cut / Access / Sidewalk / CSS: N
Fire Loop Hydrant:
Flood Control Zone:
Hauling:
Land Altering:
Landscape Irrigation:
Moving Oversize Load:
Sanitary Side Sewer:
Sewer Main Extension:
Storm Drainage:
Street Use:
Water Main Extension:
Water Meter:
Permit Center Authorized Signature:
doc: IBC -10/06
City ATukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 -431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
N
N
N
Print Name E' S ' r
Permit Number: D08 - 137
Issue Date: 04/24/2008
Permit Expires On: 10/21/2008
Number: 0 Size (Inches): 0
Start Time: End Time:
Volumes: Cut 0 c.y. Fill 0 c.y.
Start Time: End Time:
Private: Public:
Profit: N Non - Profit: N
Private: Public:
Date:
I hereby certify that I have read and ed this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances
governing this work will be complie • , whether specified herein or not.
The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating
constructi • s or the performance work. I authorized to sign and obtain this development permit.
Signature` Date: (— z1/4-(-0F3
This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended
or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection.
D08 -137 Printed: 04 -24 -2008
Parcel No.: 6364200010
Address: 2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW
Suite No:
Tenant: ZUMIEZ
1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * **
S
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
PERMIT CONDITIONS
O
Permit Number: D08 -137
Status: ISSUED
Applied Date: 03/14/2008
Issue Date: 04/24/2008
2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the
Building Official.
3: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center
(206/431- 3670).
4: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to
start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is
granted.
5: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the non - building structures seismic design
requirements of ASCE 7.
6: Partition walls that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced
to the building structure.
7: All construction shall be done in conformance with the approved plans and the requirements of the International
Building Code or International Residential Code, International Mechanical Code, Washington State Energy Code.
8: Fire retardant treated wood shall have a flame spread of not greater than 25. All materials shall bear identification
showing the fire performance rating thereof. Such identification shall be issued by an approved agency having a service
for inspection at the factory.
9: All rack storage requires a separate permit issued through the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Rack storage over 8 -feet
in height shall be anchored or braced to prevent overturning or displacement during seismic events. The design and
calculations for the anchorage or bracing shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State
of Washington.
10: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building
inspector. No exception.
11: A Certificate of Occupancy shall be issued for this building upon final inspection approval by Tukwila building
inspector.
12: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the Cityof Tukwila
Permit Center.
13: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building
Department (206- 431 - 3670).
14: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of,
any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits
presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila
shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the
doc: Cond -10/06
D08 -137 Printed: 04 -24 -2008
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
O
Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data.
15: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * **
16: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the
following concerns:
17: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is
calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A,
20B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 3 -2.1)
18: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or
brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so
that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand -held portable fire extinguishers having a gross
weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the
floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand -held extinguishers shall not be less than 4
inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9)
19: Fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view. In rooms or areas in which visual obstruction cannot
be completely avoided, means shall be provided to indicate the locations of the extinguishers. (IFC 906.6)
20: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available
for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the
hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5)
21: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that
indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the
service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge
procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the
inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these
required surveys. (NFPA 10, 4 -3, 4 -4)
22: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.
(IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2)
23: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle
is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10)
24: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the
International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC
1008.1.8.1)
25: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10)
26: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress
travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress
travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access
corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the
nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1)
27: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with
the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having
a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I ", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be
less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire
doc: Cond -10/06
D08 -137 Printed: 04 -24 -2008
0
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
O
Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high
contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not
energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction
cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1011.5.1)
28: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90
minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system
provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3)
29: Means of egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated at all times the building space served by the means
of egress is occupied. The means of egress illumination level shall not be less than 1 foot -candle (11 lux) at the
floor level. The power supply for the means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by the premise's
electrical supply. In event of a power failure an emergency power system shall provide power for a duration of not less
than 90 minutes and shall consist of storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2,
1006.3)
30: Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all portions of the building and the required width of the
aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1013.4)
31: Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating
and/or adding sprinkler heads. (IFC 901.4)
32: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide such as ducts, decks, open grate
flooring, cutting tables, shelves and overhead doors. (NFPA 13- 8.6.5.3.3)
33: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and
approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler
systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk
Insurers Kemper or any other representative designated and /or recognized by the City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to
the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #2050)
34: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and
City Ordinance #2051.
35: Local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #2051)
36: Maintain fire alarm system audible /visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require
relocation and/or addition of audible /visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2051)
37: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire
Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2051) (IFC
104.2)
38: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206- 431 -3670) is required for this
project.
39: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70)
40: New and existing buildings shall have approved address numbers, building numbers or approved building identification
placed in a position that is plainly legible and visible from the street or road fronting the property. These numbers
shall contrast with their background. Address numbers shall be Arabic numbers or alphabet letters. Numbers shall be a
minimum of 4 inches (102mm) high with a minimum stroke width of 0.5 inch (12.7mm). (IFC 505.1)
41: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth
in Table No. 803.5 of the International Building Code.
doc: Cond -10/06
D08 -137 Printed: 04 -24 -2008
• 0
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
42: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2050 and
#2051)
43: This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed
description of intended use.
44: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of
such condition or violation.
45: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at
(206)575 -4407.
doc: Cond -10/06
* * continued on next page **
D08 -137 Printed: 04 -24 -2008
SignaturlA
Print Name: � �L� S tiVT
• o
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 -431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and
this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not.
The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work
construction or the performance of work.
doc: Cond -10/06 D08 -137
Date: -- Z t b
ordinances governing
or local laws regulating
Printed: 04 -24 -2008
Site Address:
Tenant Name:
Name:
Company Name:
CITY OF TUKWILA
Community Development Department
Public Works Department
Permit Center
6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100
Tukwila, WA 98188
http://www.ci.tukwila. wa. US
Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review.
Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax.
* *Please Print **
SITE LOCATION
ZbLt6 5t -E 1 N4A1.-L
7_UM i t:e.
Property Owners Name: \ FSr1 t p (cl p o & fl ON I NC. .
Mailing Address: 116 01 W l LCI-I' i E Ala! D t'C� i f ot) LOS AN CA Ci CO ZS
City r State Zip
CONTACT PERSON — who do we contact when your permit is ready to be issued
tAJiD MV{iPNY
Mailing Address: Z.1 DI CI ./60/5.. t - 211
E -Mail Address: dMVC'PIn u An or rilyNI re,- COM
GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION —
(Contractor Information for Mechanical (pg 4) for Plumbing and Gas Piping (pg 5))
Mailing Address:
Contact Person:
E -Mail Address:
Contractor Registration Number:
AR OF RECORD — All plans must be wet stamped by Architect of Record
Company Name:
Mailing Address:
Ay \/P(L Y 1 PS
Z I O I °l /iJ ?A
1
Contact Person: t /'f iV MUtLPI -1 `(
E -Mail Address: dMJr $w) e6 tof'PlAy Y 2 re 5 ,, C OM
ENGINEER OF RECORD — All plans must be wet stamped by Engineer of Record
Company Name:
Mailing Address:
N1lF-V--1 or ASS.oc- 4.f$
'i✓( 0 1 9 •1 "A" Pcl.)-rt v t l. -t..E. /&g_
Contact Person: .%�(Ar le
E -Mail Address: f" , r LZrr i Son -Frrr an , ( oM
Q:\Applications \Forms - Applications On Line \3 -2006 - Permit Applicalion.doc
Revised: 9 -2006
bh
Building Permit No.
Mechanical Permit No.
Plumbing /Gas Permit No.
Public Works Permit No.
Project No.
(For office use only)
fx9) F
King Co Assessor's Tax No.:
(-6(1 -Polo
Suite Number: Floor: Z
New Tenant: Yes ❑..No
Day Telephone: (206) e4 — q 4 6f-5
SEA tr V►I A el t 2
City State Zip
Fax Number: (7.a.,) — 9f q1-
City
Day Telephone:
Fax Number:
Expiration Date:
Fax Number:
State
f.� \NA
City State
Day Telephone: (706) LI I
Fax Number: (,'ZO(, > 3N
City State
Zip
Zip
—C leg5
Zip
Day Telephone: (410I) 64.4 - 0
C4 ) 293 - q %,
Page 1 of 6
Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard:
Q:Wpphcations\Forns- Applications On Line \3-2006 - Permit Application.doc
Revised: 9 -2006
bh
E
F
BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION — 206 - 431 -3670
Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 2Z c,. trxO(7 Existing Building Valuation: $
Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): 1. fc 10 (t Fit- Ov-ATt oN O F Q
ItJ C LU ►1 vJ
Loa . .
it
_ .`.
• r •
11•1
W (giiTW‘ , d MO Dl*FtcATic tSS ST 1) M E? CN.AP iCA1r 4 F O cTf .1CAL S`(ST .
Will there be new rack storage? 1 Yes ❑.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required.
Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below
PLANNING DIVISION:
Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches)
*For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following:
Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling:
*Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence.
Compact: Handicap:
Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes No If "yes ", explain:
FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS:
Sprinklers ❑ Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify)
Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes f $ No
If "yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8 -1 /2" x 11 " paper including quantities andMTaterial Safety Data Sheets.
SEPTIC SYSTEM
❑ ..... .. On-site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health
Department.
Page 2 of 6
Existing
Interior Remodel
Addition to
Existing
Structure
New
Type of
Construction per
IBC
Type of
Occupancy per
IBC
1st Floor
2 Floor
' ,1 421
3 1 1
6
PI
3r Floor
Floors thru
Basement
Accessory Structure*
Attached Garage
Detached Garage
Attached Carport
Detached Carport
Covered Deck
Uncovered Deck
Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard:
Q:Wpphcations\Forns- Applications On Line \3-2006 - Permit Application.doc
Revised: 9 -2006
bh
E
F
BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION — 206 - 431 -3670
Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 2Z c,. trxO(7 Existing Building Valuation: $
Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): 1. fc 10 (t Fit- Ov-ATt oN O F Q
ItJ C LU ►1 vJ
Loa . .
it
_ .`.
• r •
11•1
W (giiTW‘ , d MO Dl*FtcATic tSS ST 1) M E? CN.AP iCA1r 4 F O cTf .1CAL S`(ST .
Will there be new rack storage? 1 Yes ❑.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required.
Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below
PLANNING DIVISION:
Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches)
*For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following:
Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling:
*Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence.
Compact: Handicap:
Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes No If "yes ", explain:
FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS:
Sprinklers ❑ Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify)
Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes f $ No
If "yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8 -1 /2" x 11 " paper including quantities andMTaterial Safety Data Sheets.
SEPTIC SYSTEM
❑ ..... .. On-site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health
Department.
Page 2 of 6
PUBLIC WORKS PERMIT INFORMATION — 206 - 433 -0179
Scope of Work (please provide detailed information):
NA5 4
Water District
(�, ..Tukwila ❑ ...Water District #125
❑ ...Water Availability Provided
ewer District
AA ..Tukwila El . .. ValVue ❑ .. Renton
❑ ...Sewer Use Certificate ❑ ...Sewer Availability Provided
Submitted with Application (mark boxes which apply):
❑ ...Civil Plans (Maximum Paper Size — 22" x 34 ")
❑ ...Technical Information Report (Storm Drainage)
E l ...Bond ❑ .. Insurance ❑ .. Easement(s)
Proposed Activities (mark boxes that apply):
❑ ...Ri -of -wa Use - Nonprofit for less than 72 hours
El ...Right -of -way Use - No Disturbance
E l ...Construction /Excavation/Fill - Right -of -way
Non Right -of -way
❑ ...Total Cut
El ...Total Fill
cubic yards
cubic yards
El ...Sanitar Side Sewer
E l ...Cap or Remove Utilities
El ...Fronta Improvements
El ...Traffic Control
❑ ...Backflow Prevention - Fire Protection
Irrigation
Domestic Water
Q:\Applications\Fonns- Applications On LineN3 -2006 - Permit Application.doc
Revised: 9 -2006
bh
.cAt) \'G&F•( - .- PDnAS -r( L u1A
to O.
Call before you Dig: 1- 800 - 424 -5555
El .. Highline
V
Please refer to Public Works Bulletin #1 for fees and estimate sheet.
Septic System:
❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department.
❑ .. Geotechnical Report
❑ .. Maintenance Agreement(s)
❑ .. Renton
❑ .. Seattle
❑ . . Right -of -way Use - Profit for less than 72 hours
El .. Right -of -way Use — Potential Disturbance
E l .. Work in Flood Zone
El .. Storm Drainage
El .. Abandon Septic Tank
❑ .. Curb Cut
❑ .. Pavement Cut
❑ .. Looped Fire Line
El ...Permanent Water Meter Size... 3/4 " WO #
❑ ... Temporary Water Meter Size .. WO #
El ...Water Only Meter Size WO # ❑ ...Deduct Water Meter Size
El ...Sewer Main Extension Public X Private
❑ ...Water Main Extension Public )( Private
E l ...Traffic Impact Analysis
❑...Hold Harmless — (SAO)
❑ ... Hold Harmless — (ROW)
❑ .. Grease Interceptor
El .. Channelization
❑ .. Trench Excavation
❑ .. Utility Undergrounding
FINANCE INFORMATION
Fire Line Size at Property Line Number of Public Fire Hydrant(s)
:..Water ...Sewer ❑ ...Sewa Treatment
Monthly Service Billing to:
Name: Day Telephone:
Mailing Address:
City State Zip
Water Meter Refund/Billing:
Name:
Mailing Address:
Day Telephone:
City
State Zip
Page 3 of 6
•
PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Applicable to all permits in this application
Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject
to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules.
Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation.
Building and Mechanical Permit
The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be
requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition).
Plumbing Permit
The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not exceeding 180 days. The extension shall be requested
in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 103.4.3 Uniform Plumbing Code (current edition).
I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER
PENALTY OF P URY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT.
BUILDIN UTHORIZED AGENT:
Signature: Date: 7 c � / 7445'
Print Name: PAV It, MU {Z- p{ -AY
Mailing Address: Z.101 0 4' : -t 11\
I Date Application Accepted:
*11(41(19
Q:\Applications\Forms- Applications On I-me \3 -2006 - Permit Applcation.doc
Revised: 9 -2006
bh
Day Telephone: (Z 06) - 1-11 -1
cr�ri VJJ /2,111
City
State Zip
Date Application Expires:
Staff Initials:
Page 6 of 6
RECEIPT NO: R08 -01329
Initials:
User ID:
JEM
1165
Payee: FUTURE BUILDERS, INC.
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 -431 -3670
Fax: 206 -431 -3665
Web site: http: //www. ci. tukwila. wa. us
SET ID: 0424 SET NAME: ZUMIEZ
SET TRANSACTIONS:
Set Member Amount
DO �7.� 2,174.50
D08 -157 93.00
M08 -094 316.00
PG08 -097 140.00
TOTAL: 2,723.50
TRANSACTION LIST:
Type Method Description Amount
Payment Check 3065
ACCOUNT ITEM LIST:
Description
BUILDING - NONRES
MECHANICAL - NONRES
PLUMBING - NONRES
STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE
SET RECEIPT
TOTAL:
Payment Date: 04/24/2008
Total Payment: 2,723.50
2,723.50
2,723.50
Account Code Current Pmts
000/322.100 2,258.50
000.322.102.00.0 316.00
000.322.103.00.0 140.00
000/386.904 9.00
TOTAL: 2,723.50
1582 04/24 9711 TOTAL 2723.54
Payee: MURPHY VAREY, P.S.
ACCOUNT ITEM LIST:
Description
PLAN CHECK - NONRES
•
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 -431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
TRANSACTION LIST:
Type Method Descriptio Amount
Payment Check 11994 1,410.50
RECEIPT
Parcel No.: 6364200010 Permit Number: D08 -137
Address: 2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: PENDING
Suite No: Applied Date: 03/14/2008
Applicant: ZUMIEZ Issue Date:
Receipt No.: R08 -00757 Payment Amount: $1,410.50
Initials: JEM Payment Date: 03/14/2008 12:50 PM
User ID: 1165 Balance: $2,174.50
Account Code Current Pmts
000/345.830 1,410.50
Total: $1,410.50
9961 03/14 1 710 TOTAL 1410.50
doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 03 -14 -2008
COMMENTS:
C D at c Pf rJ JF D C a IQ 4,, - A e p t,v -0
Type of Inspection:
t- 14V la I
a .) fe.a..,-,‘ N1C9 AD , cC
Address:
aCa y (o v'(
C
yLi ep - Arpi
Special Instructions:
Date Wanted:
( o\ ■kCle-rw,004e fr
Requester:
C,001( PA ue 'I A
Phone No:
-
Project:
2 Lt Al i FS
Type of Inspection:
t- 14V la I
Address:
aCa y (o v'(
Date Called:
Special Instructions:
Date Wanted:
a.m.
Requester:
Phone No:
-
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit c)G -1
INSPE ION NO. PERMIT NO.
CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION IR-'
6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -36
Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval.
Inc
AAAJtri
Date:
UI
00 REINSPECTION F`tEiE REQ RED. Prior to inspection, fee must be
at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection.
Receipt No.:
'Date:
COMMENTS:
.
l rr
Ner..�Iaw9 /e 1.o _J eieeki
C e. •/i ,1t GG t/c.• /'
/0i/
�� ,.i,�� e, ar
.5ug .
C .1 . 11,0 >•, am% •
Date Wanted:
7 / /e /Qs
p.m.
Requester:
�'-
Phone N 503 766 g' ff
Project:
Type of Inspection:
Address:
l
Date Called:
Special nstructions:
Date Wanted:
7 / /e /Qs
p.m.
Requester:
�'-
Phone N 503 766 g' ff
EMI
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO.
CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION IQ.
6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670
Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval.
Inspector:
I Date: 7 / /eA
El $60. EINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be
pai t 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection.
1 Receipt No.:
'Date:
I
Project: 1
G } ,
Type of Inspection 1474 hq
Address: 2-. y(m
in �GL
Date Called:
Special Instructions:
Date Wanted: 7 /14 /o 9 ,
a.m.
p.m.
Requester:
Phone No:. 12 O -9D1 ` O7 )
5
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO.
CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION V-
6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670
Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval.
COMMENTS: e l
Inspector:
P 8- i37
'Date: i //` / f
$60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REdUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be
paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection.
(Receipt No.:
'Date:
ti
Project:
2.
Type of Inspection:
A
Address:
2-6 tiG
Date Called:
Special Instructions:
Date Wanted:
G- 3P- 4
p.
Requester:
Phone No: 3v A49? on
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
INSPECTION NO.
CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION
6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188
OPf-l3 7
PERMIT NO.
(206)431 -3670
El Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval.
COMMENTS: p /^r
B4 c nom R c.cd . 4?
Inspector:
3 I 4
U $60.00INSPECTION- : FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be
paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection.
Receipt No.:
'Date:
/1
Project:
2 zirn re 2
Type of Inspection:
F ri4 f AI 6
Address: .„
.a.c 'z'( n1 4—it
Date Called:
Special Instructions:
Date W `rated: r' a.
Z3 •o
Requester:
Phone No:
-T46 - 90 -071
3
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
INSPECTION NO. ;± _ PERMIT NO.
CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION iZ
6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670
E] Approved per' applicable codes.
Corrections required prior to approval.
COMMENTS: 74
fZ(let" u✓Q // eteeel c ///ice,
0 $60.00
paid a
Date: 4 .. 3 i / o s r t
ifNSPECTIO FEE EE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be
00 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection.
Receipt No.:
'Date:
COMMENTS: rm.
ells -'K s )o / e r< 21171- ' 1 .Le. /4 ( ,o#_%-
/7 M/6.
L
Address
oz :; e V& 1;14/(
�� : S I / - "
�Ole— f� � t(: �,� Ns' 5/�e�r,'�i l3 �
IV4 r f1_ J 9E77F:42 p,N .•0 L --Agi$ tQ t34
r x? 4I2 Nom,- , 51:),‘,
4'C ' :toe,Yr ofwA //s ingr'J1 14 2/c..
:. .
Requester:
Proj � /er�
Type of ns /
/7 M/6.
Address
oz :; e V& 1;14/(
Date Called:
Special Instructions:
Date Wanted:
a.m.
Requester:
Phone No:
/
J
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO.
CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION' le-
6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670
0 Approved per applicable codes.
Inspector:
44
Corrections required prior to approval
(Date: / t / *
El $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be
paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. ,Call to schedule reinspection.
Receipt No.:
'Date:
Project:
Sprinklers:
Type of Inspection:
eJ AL
Address: 9. to
Suite #:
s, (. __
Contact Person:
Special Instructions:
Monitor:
Phone No.:
Needs Shift Inspection: 5
Sprinklers:
fr"
Fire Alarm:
/-/
Hood & Duct:
V
Monitor:
6.ArtA 1L .
Pre-Fire:
L/
Permits:
Occupancy Type:
0V•-
INSPECTION NUMBER
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT
444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206-575-4407
Pi Ppproved per applicable codes.
Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06
Do 3 -i37
PERMIT NUMBERS
Corrections required prior to approval.
COMMENTS:
Inspector:
5/y
Date: 72 i)e)
H
itil_ REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from
of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection.
T.F.D. Form F.P. 113
Project:
Sprinklers:
Type of Ins ction: -
Address: 494, c
Suite #:
. C p" v ,,� (
Contact Pers n:
Special Instructions:
Occupancy Type:
Phone No.:
Needs Shift Inspection:
Sprinklers:
Fire Alarm:
Hood & Duct:
Monitor:
Pre-Fire:
Permits:
Occupancy Type:
COMMENTS:
<e__ , 5 --
b
INSPECTION NUMBER
Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT
Approved per applicable codes.
1/13/06
8 -- /37
PERMIT NUMBERS
444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa 98188 206- 575
Corrections required prior to approval.
Inspector: c / y
Date:
aa �6
rs
ILIA- $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from
the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection.
T.F.D. Form F.P. 113
Project: Zvi
Sprinklers:
Type of Inspection:
Address: 2. r , W ,
Suite #:
Sc-
MALL—
Contact Person:
Special Instructions:
Permits: a '
Occupancy Type:
Phone No::
Needs ShiI .tip spection:
Sprinklers:
Fire Alarm: •
Hood & Duct:
Monitor:
Pre -Fire:
•
Permits: a '
Occupancy Type:
INSPECTION NUMBER
n Approved per applicable codes.
• —tee_
Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc
1/13/06
PERMIT NUMBERS
CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT
444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407
Corrections required prior to approval.
COMMENTS:
Wit+ wee{ ,
wwPwd; • • I . ! .. u•.nr.�.:i�a • •.. • . S.... +!s•c. a... ,.v�'o- r.v�.....•. J.aa .• .1 f p . R ••,_.' •. • ;._f r. L. ! •• •.•... • ., . .
Date: / zi / bg
Hrs.: j
El $80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from
e City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection.
T.F.D. Form F.P. 113
Project: 7 m c
Sprinklers:
Type of Inspection:
r-A / sea. r 1 12PKAL / t, -i ( H-
Address: Z.Ifly (a
Suite #:
c. _.
Contact Person:
Special Instrucctions:
Occupancy Type:
Phone No.:
Needs ShiftInspection:
Sprinklers:
Fire Alarm.,
Hood & Duct:
Monitor:
Pre -Fire:
Permits:
Occupancy Type:
INSPECTION NUMBER
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT
fic640y4 0- 9
V
o% - S - 22.-o
PERMIT NUMBERS
444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407
MENTS:
gAcv, rt NAL. — (b(A 153) - CAL -
So 2. i f.; — 1-/
Approved per applicable codes.
n Corrections required prior to approval.
Date:
.
Hrs.. I
i - V1/46APAIS } Z
00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from
$80.
City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection.
Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc
1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113
Project: Iv oA ■ k
Type of Inspection:
56t i „1C
Are Alarm:
Address: 2b'1, 5 C t p- --
Suite #:
Can ct Person:
i n, 5 -”"
tJ
Special Instructions:
Phone No.:
Needs Shift Inspection:
Sprinklers:
Are Alarm:
Hood & Duct:
Monitor:
Pre -Fire:
Permits:
Occupancy Type:
Inspector:
INSPECTION NUMBER
CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT
444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206- 575 -4407
Approved per applicable codes.
-el a,t /
Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
1/13/06
Pot
os -5 — 27-t?
PERMIT NUMBERS
Corrections required prior to approval.
COMMENTS:
a 2 " 7 ''`' '� � IA-00
n . k t ) moo
0
Date: 5/4 (ori Hrs.:
$8.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from
City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection.
T.F.D. Form F.P. 113
Project: 2 v w. t c
Type of Inspection:
f)2 t p 4 +G,Uc - _—
Address: 2 h Li (o s i c , evt A-L _
Suite #:
Contact Person:
j
Special Instructions:
Phone No.:
Needs Shift Inspection:
Sprinklers:
Fire Alarm:
Hood & Duct:
Monitor:
Pre- Fire:
Permits:
Occupancy Type:
INSPECTION RE RD
Retain a copy with it
Do -133-
INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS
CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT
�4 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206 -575 -4407
Approved per applicable codes.
Corrections required prior to approval.
COMMENTS:
0 IL
$80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from
/ th City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection.
Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc 1/13/06 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113
t t�
erg
Zumiez Retail Store
Southcenter Mall
633 Southcenter Space 2115
Seattle, WA
Structural Calculations
SWENSON SAY FAGET
EXPIRES 9/11/ 07_1
Prepared For:
Murphy Varey PS
February /1
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
2124 Third Avenue. Ste. 100
Seattle, WA 98121 T 206. 443. 6212 F 206. 443.4
REVIEWED FOR
CODE COMPLIANCE
APP OVED
MAR 2 8 2008
61—
ty Of Tukwila
BUILDING DIVISION
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
1
SE ►.AiL_ ATE_ L_ o LL
• A SE
P 1L ar R c.._T A
(s�33 S o ■ C_Er -T a
A 1 - m._E l WA 9 4 1
LAr
L
pa Asei- o5 Sac- 13•
V / 4 t
gp L 1 . t 5D, � wf
•_ 0 ,3 SD T� w �
C.L =1.v )1. =2, s, 4h= /13
p �� (0,4)(1.o) (v „,
2.s
tpogo
tLL.
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue • Suite 100 • Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206-443-6212 Fax: 206.443.4870
Tacoma. 932 Broadway-Tacoma -WA 98402
Tel: 253.284.9470 Fax: 253.284.9471
■••) ■--AL \ e �
Project
C —C tc 4 M A
S wA
2.- 8 -0s3
Date
Proj. No.
Design
l
Sheet
SE15M��.
(A.).-1(.014T Og" p T`E -1= /0
A \ uL.1TAL.._ Ft)
LL S�JF
rr
S '
q L </b
r
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue- Suite 100 • Seattle . WA 9812
Tel: 206.443 .6212 Fax: 206.443 -4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway • Tacoma • WA 98402
to 1S/ PtS101
aXax 3/42
I.6 a X X -Vi b
Project
Date
S n vT IL. 1-�/N
AT rL .P \/./ P\
v1 k.-"T 1 oF FNT'
Proj. No
Design
I
...7..o IL. \,-uvT pF 5 \t,► -1 I
1-"\ i. --A.SE St ►U �� ? c:
\,c/ =(LA cs ))e> _ 2_ C lAt
p t 6
(9‘ 0/AT) (12;.T
S R`-0, s =
=()(z o *1 akT)
Asa
II2 ST/0
,16 LIZ (i_/,
(_ ‘t-I) 1 3
(" c f)(16 4 )(
lost b.►�.
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue • Suite 100 Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206.443.6212 Fax: 206.443.4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway -Tacoma • WA 98402
v E 2 'V ST n p p E ' TL
1 \-/\ i o b• � LE. F14.1
W „ -0LN \)./.
U M\
��S\lo►J 1- �E��R- 7 t, \ x� \k3 flV
V.
L c A p hr
1" f _ (S?F)t I9-1,-
0* /4ri) C IL j. Tl t
v
V\A ra x
\Cl/ANT
col- 4,04 ) 1/4 3 �1t o
aFQ (6,54)(-.,2;
Project
it ••
\/-.4\
= IC) L 3oL. � L ►21-) )1
3 6a)L 2 lo`') U .
Proj. No. n
Design '
1^T
U� 2 'S a•
Z” --o8
Date
V I i,�
DES \lo> ►-,\ F ►..c6e t1 1 •. j- X tt0
60/LJt_ ILVAT\V S A1
1-1 -)
J2e_a1= (2 SO S fer 11121 1 --iir)
p: oR X4x /L
S S.to5 -�
5(.1 .)
3 e ms- / � )
4- 1Sc ( Z 1--r) � 'f
C
I 2 3
ttAXio` (j/
t /So ) C/2.13 b.4(0
( fib) 121,q')(//l3 1
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue • Suite 100 - Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206-443 -6212 Fax: 206
Tacoma: 932 Broadway - Tacoma • WA 98402
Project
d u.5 A
G a rt S ,477 vh SAy
17-0/ = J c r° 13v r) 7 1- /s0
1 -7 L-Alt R. Tub
-" N E.< t 4-r-Q f_
Tu 1 LE E. 3 - 75'
12 a �
..5x3* 3 /s u-✓
2 t t v e,zrl -A
6+— 1
Su.►TV9 C< t-A. ALA.
37s
,t
u t? c,A M? (,Jl I /2
o75n
Date
Proj. No.
Design ti
Chad,
0 •
° ■ fl 1Z 9--1_A lTl C>!� AT E -.>.1)
F .P EL
f.\")
?F')(1k /
Tom r6E . p..1 ON
13 t-A)-•∎ 0 w.1 PS V f 3,
C 11
Tv j . lc E. Our v F l � c�4v � - 1.4),4 3
Co
2o'
io
�
,E1». 4 L v,s
12 aC111
2,3,v�
FACE OF DEMISING WALL
NEW DEMISING STAGGER MEMEBERS
BUILT-UP COLUMN WALL STUD AS AT LEAST i@ THEIR
(� X 18 GA V REQUIRED LENGTH
w1118• r -12' 3 11 SMD s.
NEW DEMISING
WALL STUD AS
REQUIRED
A
FLANGES
STORE SIDE
PAN VIEW
SOFFIT HEADER DETAILS
SCALE 31'.O '
r TAB ( 90 BEND
BUILT -UP COLUMN
ATTACH TO la
JOISTS W /2- 910SMS
�utt_ (o to S7. LO- �3
= b, 09
/—
518' GWB TYPE x
AT SOFFIT
(2)1200XCS160 METAL
JOISTS WELD W1118. 2.12
O METALJ O I STS 1�
2 11r WIDE FLANGES
OR (3)10• DEEP
16 GA
METAL
JOISTS
WITH r
WIDE
S•r>2_ o vb
ISOMETRIC VIEW
A�C1, Iv
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue • Suite 100 • Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206.443 6212 Fax: 206.443.4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway . Tacoma • WA 98402
Project
A
2 - -a -o$
Date
Proj. No.
Design
1. •
L
Pa, (35, 1
f
Sow F\ 'S ?,1-=
� .1 fiT) f g /kT
Tol .r
n4 : (So, 5 US r) � 5, S ‘(
a
1 5 1 ( 0 ) ( .3(0 k sC \
.1,2 -e.a = (S)( 3o,$)(32))
(3 8 , 6(2A'(16 )( /A
X 02
(2-) /Zoos 2?)
(iz 'Poop 14,2'
0 .
4
� o rz
(r) aoo 2 5 °- to `b
_
Li
1
c- r 1_3 L/ A3,o\
2, t;r.
� 13;1;
(z)— a "
F A L,AI,
1
p
rr
Asa
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue -Suite 100 • Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206.4436212 Fax: 2069434870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway • Tacoma • WA 98402
Project
r A - r - rt�� W A
Date
2 --R -oa
Proj. No. J�
Design M /
Sheet
DST C\
►3/45',x1
S' /A
I Ta
3 /y " Pt- WOO
Tta'A (-\<_
2L.-r
p, 06.67
\ S ?' J b E CA .\. L L ra ? L A, - A L. 11 Q.A _ E-i
\ 'r' or Pe2- - %I: TE'I- S oFF1 r/ 4r
I D � LILEW � J� VUT = 13 "'")
` PI co r w l 4 (,
S c11 Ls-N/4 c r? " L.
�= �z S lfr) l 2 ( 2 (1 ) = 1,1 ac)
-fit 3 3 ?
��,33) l 1, 1w = 3
_') F 1 (2, C/ -/A Z 4 4.44 /J/ LT /au
1 46 2
(L I 11� J F � I oft-1 1 F t r J2ALF
1\ ASE 61-1 -�-�.
bETAIL, 4T 1L I► -��� —L ,
SiS" ,A- TFr,t_
7-,0) @ ,2 y'' g ,
1X10 7>r1M o�
Ate — vim AT
SeNF
Qt
wrsap
Jp
l2 " op x /6f
Ti2-,q (-K
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue-Suite 100 9812
Tel: 206.443 6212 Fax: 206 443.4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway. Tacoma - WA 98402
Project
\,1.7
Date
Proj. No. �1
Design
NA/g c.HT 0 F Say= Firs 2 S'' /i4r
G `JLc) s ! 4 7 3 ,e+4 L /,fie S
1 4 00 1 (2- s' iir, ` � /3 4 _ <,,e0
is Tyz o ILO Ake l- =0i31
"
•low
13 • G z-- (4 to w _ - 7 J t,/ l (opt
L) t L. W o IL K
■r A O'Sov
■ / h� L 1 17 .3 .Co 11c tA),A
\ n- LO t,►71T100J
W 1a F
E. 1.- u a l� L 13 S
6w S'$.
Me? x To/s7- .4 t: /kit, S '_ o ''_ 6,0 ,
roe_ 5 - kJ t S r4L rr PSS
Le-o w�1 � � ( /3/ 1
0 / ��'S�� O.85
= SSA
Afil
vs
2 . ES= Qz
b i r\IL_ 12- /AS, o
741'4 ,I :,::
S
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue • Suite 100-Seattle-WA 9812
Tel: 206443.6212 Fax: 206443.4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway • Tacoma -WA 98402
un� p �AS\\ W'LA \) ■TTt� t��i>z��L� \
1) ' )
P L 4N
O /)
47 —; /t4 E Ji 7 T, �T
Qt T ,T w e_
Project
. .1 - t -- 1A ( —P /_M Al — — ' - A L.•—
( c.-A TT L..--P / \A t A-
Lraz 15)
12 0� e
b
2E� 14/ASro1
Q"F
FL F So (02._
I
A 1...4_ �T�1 �rc L] 7'01
a
?SSoo
Proj. No.
Desiq S
SI B
2.- 9 -o ik
Date
c.
S T - At_.1
CA to
(u .to) (yL tcz. 1
14 t/y s? S = ;
(\ s o' (` 4»1
U , of (4,74_ 0.k,
(Ai 0 (0,
� k Ott,. ► 1 F A S1-14F-1".•
T.
AR
(2)
Foy l /a:l, Sxpa>,
'--) u.(d.= 3 + o
SAJI ? E A,f t.AT
w/ M -112‘ 1 11 - )`?" 4 " 1 -'
+ANL\.\o>z
I TAN 1 'to 1. --►
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 212'f Third Avenue • Suite 100. Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206-443 .6212 Fax: 206.443 .4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway • Tacoma • WA 98402
�-Dr Sc+LV AT \Vl�
SAS �� l
M = 15u (_.LW--)
- - 72 4„ •-•
/ ,6
�F e. <--Ak
/A S \ loir“k
t't of vt)2
ee, T C.N-u• ' .
Project
W/
'I 11-5 2XLx�/
R
5
2 — 8- o
Date
Proj. No. }�
Design/
1 o � /fir
(31 3 18 `cA Zen
ti o -.- €
Le. F it 2AJ�
w \LA.. w czz
►tit) A .
c..vL/1.1- F SF
or 1�
a) -3 14.7 LEA _
t_Nk E-TA\
I\ 1 4. s. 3
U . L.
1 YL C F O p F O
1 11
0 PIPE. sILAL,e_
— p
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue • Suite 100- Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206-443.6212 Fax: 206-443.4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway • Tacoma • WA 98402
J �A T i L Qz� *v•d-rA
v.,/, (, c /c T 1 flO r,),
�P = 0 .35 2 "(-tr
0) 15 EALb
b‘ 2-S C.7\
tt
= T� 1 1 , E 1ii41 \
Project
3Q'
Date
Proj. No. !�
Design"
/
Sheet
2.- 8--0 41
-„,,:-:.;,.!•.:. ••• •Y:,.?:,-;.:,.. 2 :.- • D
Dii '.*, , . -. .
PLF3037 1
1 0
0 - 1 1
1/2 1
1/22 1
11/ 1
1/2
25.4 0
0 - 30.2 9
9.5 7
7.1 3
38.1 2
22.2
PLF3050 1
1% 0
0 - 13/16 1
1/2 1
11 /32 1
1% 1
1%2
34.9 0
0 - 39 7 1
127 8
87 4
492 2
294
PLF3062 1
1% 0
0- 2%6 5
5/8 t
th 2
21/22 1
1 /16
46.0 0
0 - 55.6 1
15.9 1
12.7 5
59.5 3
36.5
PLF3075 2
2%6 0
0 - 1 3/4 3
3/4 %
% 3
3 1
1%
55.6 0
0 - 44.5 1
19. 1
159 7
76.2 4
445
• Dimensions: .,•.• , .. ° . • ''
UNISTRUT
0.
Ei u.
a)
411
r
PLF3037 thru PLF3075
R
V
1
PLF9037 thru PLF9100
eanvtlampsAi
Threaded Rod & Nut
Not Included
■
•
Threaded Rod & Nut
- Not Included
-..--1 Z H-T-h
I i
,.. !
--„ ...
• 4-.: v /IT \., - I ;----------,,
:.,
___
, ; ,
....... s-:' - ( , S 1 ; •
•
_ . i
, 1 V
1 ■
_j
)
, I
v""----____\, i /
, ,
n L.
(When used for
- sprinkler systems only.)
Material: Malleable Iron
Material: Malleable Iron
Safety Factor: 4
Flange Clamp
Max.
Allowable
Part Rod Wt/100 pcs Load Torque
Number •Size • .-LbS (kg) Lin (kg) Ft-Lbs
PLF3037 3 /8" 53 270 15
24.0 122 5
PLF3050 1/2' 91 450 29
204,1
PLF3062 W
186
84.4
PLF3
Safety Factor: 5
PLF9075 3/4°
PLF9100 1•
151.5
900
408.2
69
1,350 130
612.3
Flange Clamp
69
131
eneral Fittings
UNISTRUT
0.
Ei u.
a)
411
r
PLF3037 thru PLF3075
R
V
1
PLF9037 thru PLF9100
eanvtlampsAi
Threaded Rod & Nut
Not Included
■
•
Threaded Rod & Nut
- Not Included
-..--1 Z H-T-h
I i
,.. !
--„ ...
• 4-.: v /IT \., - I ;----------,,
:.,
___
, ; ,
....... s-:' - ( , S 1 ; •
•
_ . i
, 1 V
1 ■
_j
)
, I
v""----____\, i /
, ,
n L.
(When used for
- sprinkler systems only.)
Material: Malleable Iron
Material: Malleable Iron
Safety Factor: 4
Flange Clamp
Max.
Allowable
Part Rod Wt/100 pcs Load Torque
Number •Size • .-LbS (kg) Lin (kg) Ft-Lbs
PLF3037 3 /8" 53 270 15
24.0 122 5
PLF3050 1/2' 91 450 29
204,1
PLF3062 W
186
84.4
PLF3
Safety Factor: 5
PLF9075 3/4°
PLF9100 1•
151.5
900
408.2
69
1,350 130
612.3
Flange Clamp
69
131
eneral Fittings
Span
In
Max ;
Allowable
Uniform Load
Lbs
Defl : at
. Uniform
., Load :
In
Uniform Loading at.Deflection
24
Span /180 Span /240 Span /360
Lbs Lbs Lbs
24
4.680
*
0.02
4,680
*
4.680
*
4.680
*
36
4,680
*
0.05
4,680
*
4.680
*
4,680
4,800
48
4,680
`
0.08
4,680
*
4.680
-
4,680
*
60
3.870
2.460
0.13
3,870
1,900
3.870
2,720
3.870
1,740
72
3,220
3,000
0.19
3.220
1,520
3,220
1,570
3,220
2,130
84
2,760
. 11 ?0
0.26
2,760
460
2,760
230
2,510
114
96 •
2,420
320
0.34
2,420
•
168
-. 19
470
410
1.87
2.45
230
180
170
130
120
90
216
230
360
330
3.10
3.82
140
110
110
90
70
60
P5500 &'P55011
nne
BEAM LOADING - P5500
COLUMN LOADING - P5500
Parameter.
Area of Section
Axis 1 -1
Moment of Inertia (I)
Section Modulus (S)
Radius of Gyration (r)
Axis 2 -2
Moment of Inertia (I)
Section Modulus (S)
Radius of Gyration (r)
ELEMENTS OF SECTION
P5500/P5501
• P5500 P5501
0.726 In 1.453 In
0.523 In' 2.811 In
0.391 In' 1.15„3 In
0.848 In 1.391 In
0.335 I n'
0.412 In'
0.679 In
0.669 In'
0.824 In
0.679 I n
%'- := iFraning�Systeri
BEAM LOADING - P5501
LJNISTRUT
COLUMN LOADING - P5501
Notes:
Load limited by spot weld shear.
" >200
1. Above loads include the weight of the member. This weight must be
deducted to arrive at the net allowable load the beam will support.
2. Long span beams should be supported in such a manner as to
prevent rotation and twist.
3. Allowable uniformly distributed loads are listed for various simple
spans. that is, a beam on two supports. If load is concentrated at the
center of the span, multiply load from the table by 0.5 and corre-
sponding deflection by 0.8.
4. See page 61 for lateral bracing reduction charts.
5. For Pierced Channel, Beam Load Values in the tables are multiplie
by the following factor:
"T" Series...85% "KO" Series .. 95%
"SL" Series...85% "HS" Series .. 90%
/9
>e.
A
2
1/ (-s 0
SADDLE TIE WITH t6 GA WEE OR 2 STRANDS _X
OF 18 GA WIRE
CORRUGATED METAL CEILING ATTACH WITH 110 SMS
AT :6 ILWS
MAX OC TO FAT CNkL
C1 SUSPENDED METAL CEILING
NOT TO SCALE
�� TO TOP OU BETWEEN
METAL DEC(CORiUGATIONS
TOP CHORD RE OF EXISTING BEAM I
3✓8' DIAMETER ALL 'DREAD
SECURE WITH NUT ON TOP AND BOTTOM
OF U10STRUT TO RESIST VERTICAL MOVEMENT
PS500T UIDSTRUT AT CO' OC BETWEEN EXISTING BEAMS. EXISTING STRUCTURE
ALIGN WITH I VT CHANNELS BELOW
FASTEN TO UNISTRUT.
2001 PULLOUT MIN
9 GA GALVANIZED STEEL
WIRE AT 70' O.C. ALONG
THE I IC CHANNEL
I try VERTICAL CHANNEL STRUT
AT 11-V O.C. AND 6-0' MAX FROM WALL
AT THE CONVERGENCE OF THE SPLAYED
WIRES-
Vv r 'co 7 t e r /c /n> (T
0 oPPeiaT -./ A C. 31SC
S � y aa Oy / _- 4M C. i / ?S? JT
M TL /1A
(A)p Z _,/2s Fs9c. f f) /2,7 -5 p)e
so pJf
1 /ft
b �3p1•�)(yFf 2$
321±±14
F /LS- 65
. /2C 1 ).5
'
/ L(, , A/ 1‘) IL
A ������ 3
1 _3 1') t /( 7 F f� 2 �• /F+ 3 0
3 Tr'/ (770e>c) t) (o.o,se)
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue • Suite 100 • Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206.443.6212 Fax: 206.443.4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway . Tacoma • WA 98402
Tel: 253.284.9470 Fax: 253.284.9471
u5?& ,) /) 4471_ d e ∎ Liel
NOTES:
I. SUSPENSION OF METAL CEILING IS p N
MD SEPARATE FROM SUSPENSION DF THE IGL HT BAR AND
CASMIRAP SOFFIT BElON.
2. DO NOT HANG OR ATTACH SUSPENDED LIGHT BAR SYSTEM FROM
METAL CEAING
3. ADO ADDITIONAL LIGHT BAR TYPE SUSPENSION SYSTEM AS
REQUIRED FOR SUSPENDED MECHANICAL ITEMS
7 •
SECTION PERPENDICULAR To TRUSSES
/ 407/2' 2-1Y S i'RN r /ft
z6113
W Cr
Ea
'A ADJUST IN FIELD TO KEEP
UNISTRUT AS CLOSE TO
AP�OF TRUSS
(4) 12 GA WIRES 80 DEGREES
APART AND TIED TO CHANNEL
AT 17.0' O.C. EACH WAY.
64 MAX FROM WALL
TIP METAL HAT CHANNELS
AT70'0.0
I1 ?COWINELS
\ AT4',0'OZ.
SIP GYPSUM BOARD
Project
T /t (eris∎Or O?
TOP CHORD C OF EXISTING BEAM I
STRUCRIRE
N8• DIAMETER ALL THREAD
SECURE WITH NUT ON TOP MD BOTTOM
OF UNISTRUT TO RESIST VERTICAL MOVEMENT
PIODOT UNISTRUT CHANNELS. ALIGN WITH
1 1rr CINNELS BELOW
1 IX VERTICAL CHANNEL STRUT AT t2.6 O.C. AND 6 MAX
FROM WALL AT THE COWERGEUCE OF THE SPLAYED WIRES.
CORRUGATED METAL CEILING ,ATTACH WITH #10 WS AT 16 MAX CC TO HAT CHANNELS
712V o4s 'r Si 2S 3
rn o,(.3)S
k ,
u Se O F'/ Z S- 3 3 h ,f_T- C_
0.06 iJ9 IL CH/r/t/Iti S4P I> 1 C- It A- T c 14k -MI6
aSJw.�.
'vat 3L
3c+
2 S , .-
(2 _ /fir ( 40 125psr) 2Y,S,)j
I z O,12S I.- er 15 ( / ) 4 ff')
Ml.ta.,� Z n,za IbFf" — I r 3 Z k :._
T= (2 5 r ,)1 \ ICS F3.5 Ib sp ?s►I,
T,zy /SOkso -s L /
O,Z O; = �j2 Y
ft4 C L
3 F+
� LOJ
SECTION PARALLEL TD TRUSSES
o /c-
O
k
r /02,3 1 -4-
13 o p) a!i_ c k
5 , 0 2 .‘15 - 146 j'
( t000 K s )(0,0 9 -s
ate
Proj. No.
c 4i—
Design
Sheet 6 3
/•o i2 C#44,1Nc s4i) PoWT/ro cT
/'//}T C re t<nl/✓e e_ 64 S E
/SO NS'4 - �y
6. Deo 4)C !Z (%Z "
S7R k T
We &sT C 4-S tr 4,, t.3 t: F042
0_44A-",") et_ r c.f hay A z.
ee'IC10"e, 1e.46 .
. /2s,,, ' )(% e )Qz f/) Z z yy /6
c 7 Z 9S i t
I/ lL r C M,rt 'A/6 , s / S O i450 - 5
-4Gd0.SS oI)2.9r /It
No / 2_ S c >Z g-f
A-- es /Z
/3 � ( I/ .«e.Gtl o
15 t - (Z) /Vo / 2 Sc - /2
'5 a 39 4" (..5 o k
SWENSON SAY FAG ET
vo � Tt c t c HA - A.1w f t`
c `
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue-Suite 100-Seattle-WA 9812
Tel: 205.443.6212 Fax: 206
Tacoma: 932 Broadway • Tacoma WA 98402
Tel: 253.284-9470 Fax: 253-284.9471
•14-27
7//F
S 6�iTLl�
C.c ,fus,t)ci"k UA) is? LT
A)
e AseT' (r • t, /3eA■ p ).v dr
Z9 lb
T /2r P S'So c-) c Nit ttl n- - ere
F rZ. 1 - / o & t
P .4-t to
u 44,1 /i.C '?"-
Project
C e',u7 /2
((o sde`)C o.$) Ca = 2 ?-4
/ . 07c ®!2 7' C O 7
/S ,r4/246-4 S/iJe tr 40.4-
eo•�s �t2�/,f T /Yo•
6 /D S S 0 7 u w i s, /2
d Ser /1 / ity t r e7-oe -)
/h'nS .4 A') occuj)-
4 /V/t/ . !S
�► t'� z 2957/6 , (s - ) )(/ofsf) a 3a
t� #
--
/ F 706, z FLdN ( c
/tt Goi = 'Do 0-
ti{ 5 / O c 3 / / F 3 o b Z FL -fe1J C -e
(a:4 S i �
C aNg ., ?e /Z �/d e' 5�fa�•.J G'7�r'
P
?tR� '�4cvwe- ,eCi.� 1 5TL
/4 ' D. /S - 3Z ;
7 7- 7s //,
c z 34./- j
C 3 c ))(4—(0.1-3a : 2
/, e 7
T <
.4-1,4 c
„ /8'x7
t J Lira cJu krA t_
To [CA $ P
7.flf cr-
/9 —/U
/g rr
Date
Proj. No.
Design 'J
Sheet
4f7724' ' Sc*p, g7 foTL I
L./TC,2�G
5
4/34b.27 Sk eN.) L /) c c e ,, C—
1-> q0° 421)4,-I2.7 Ted fo e /
,/ 25735 00/7 (/)
= O. 33 (fy /D `vc . )
/ $0
fo�L /4J 7s--,r>
7 1 2(5 - T
/ Z 70,7 /h
G'%." = a /O r 4 /, Pi
t
if rz
lze s
T.4/ 7 -moo
(f)(aa
Sgt �r /, 6 7-
7
/9
o (L
Gf /2 C- cif c et) 5
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue - Suite 100 Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206.443-6212 Fax: 206.443.4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway Tacoma • WA 98
Tel: 253.284-9470 Fax: 253284.9471
T—■
U.N,Si &K r en4'AJNL
cop _ /5
Project
Proj. No
Cr
Design
t
Sheet
i f
EIETMEMEMY
CORRUGATED METAL CEILING, SE
/o co- .H,rx
?rz
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue-Suite 100 - Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206.443.6212 Fax: 206-443.4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway • Tacoma • WA 98402
Tel: 253-284.9470 Fax: 253.288.9471
EXISTING STRUCTURE
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
PLF3062 UNISTRUT BEAM CLAMP. -
ATTACH TO 10P CHORD AFTV :EEN
METAL DECK CORRUGATIONS
TOP CHORD OF EXISTING BEAM
STRUCTURE
3.18' DIAMETER ALL THREAD
P55C✓GTUNISTRUT
L 1 . / ' /%/ ." f/ ._
SEC "10 PERPENDICULAR To TRUSSES
O SUPPORT FOR SUSPENDED ITE! S 3ELOW CEILING
NOT TO SCALE
Gvot2 C-c-S e' cave -Lt7 oc -- t2
w Nc ' ( 3 ) o f T / cs S c p poc2 -r-
Re, J /roil TNC^ C rfsb' £)/L.4 P 4 r2 e
e . 70 7 rtel) 5771-t_(T
Cty L.
o k.
OF .L 3I4' DIAMETER HOLE IN
ME "AL DECK FOR THREADED ROD
C( PING. FINISHIPAINT BLACK
11 .1 1
o>s� 4
I �,., o
I' vP P
P., '/36 (S ,!-r 5.,90e- )De /3 ()Wsrr
1..../24 4./J C-(e-.0
11/11,A °- Pat T /,.. t L / /•`O.S1 h-)
i(,3z` +fi (Z /� /n z Ff) z (1 z : /
.>"'
w t,KE -A 94' -r-7 /A
r " i 2 c S . K u nt' /9711_c‘'T / ' o f L P s s:,0 cjf,¢N.t)6
�' •' •
* O 7,/k / ?o
4e ,¢
sL�
' N
/r ;
Project
z ei' C if A./F/2- o' -t/l (
NOTES:
1. SUSPENSION OF ME' U. CERI,
AND SEPARATE F -ROI SUSPEN
CASHWRAP SOFFIT E SLOW.
2. DO NOT HANG OR AT ACH SIT
METAL CEILING
3. ADDADDTIONALLIG T BAR Tt
REQUIRE) FOR EUSF _NEED M
5/8 GYPSUM SCARE
3/8' DIAMETER ALL THE SAD RC
DIPPED AT LIGHT EAR. ISE 518
ALL THREAD HOT GILD'PED /
SUSPEND LIGHT Br42 C 2 CASE
SOFFIT WHERE OCCUF ;, FDA
SEE ,FCRC SHWF
aNS.IJca- %$ t- s� / /2o
(Os ll:, 36les%) z 2,y
/A 6 7-
/ 9•' f/ / Go-ti) [��'Y�G c f c
M'yk :( 3 P - £ - t!) z (3 ("3:) .- 2,Tpl � (to F
/,w h /8 4 < 1?
%/MO /2o0 t•o rev o-
,31t,+ . F 3 p( o Z ccAt/isT
34 GG.fv'1 �S
Reekech
Gfstg 3 "g'' rij,2D /20 t�
Date
Sheet
o �
DI
�G /o V
Proj. No.
Cr act 6—
Design
1 , M �.
to as; c4Eser P x . c , u j l es t.+ / l j)
/„..)/) x 3( P ) t SrreF t 3(i/,3'�,
li) p z 3 C'/
o. 3 3 ,)
' / /)es 7s 7..4r
7/A L ,// - - /?-/c cc..4 0 fa - ? ti o,� -�
/ F ✓ i� 77
z (F))
GiJ //3�
-mac �2 I, 67
c 7e1uc s.< <Z
fr •• , S 5 ti ��Jaon r�t� / UiU /ST /2 t,/ T.
�Ndi7/�t/ /�lLO� l Ir /G /ieJ6
(3) /2 G-A- 6-4v4M2iffl wl2e5
pi— / Z C.( C dc. `�N 2-6-/
a • %Y
SWENSON SAY FAGET
A STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION
Seattle: 2124 Third Avenue • Suite 100 . Seattle • WA 9812
Tel: 206-443.6212 Fax: 206-443 4870
Tacoma: 932 Broadway Tacoma • WA 98402
Tel: 253 2849470 Fax: 253.284 .9471
L (3) 275, c / . ? ��/
2.S",)01 0 4)
?KK•+ /G 7
Project
., -/i C ,rJi' A-e. /, e
Date
2 /S10V
Proj. No.
f() Cr
Des ign
1 ^�
/
Sheet
Hat Furring (F) Channel Section Properties
(Hat)
Effective Properties
I
, In' ft -
Section
Min. Base Metal Design • .Gross
Thickness' Thickness ,P■rea'
0.0188
0.0283
0.0312
0.0346
0.0451
0.070
0.104
0.118
0.127
0.163
087F125 -18 0.0179
087F125 -27 0.0269
087F125 -30 0.0296
087F125 -33 .0329
087F125 -43 0
_ 0 .
150F125 -1
150F125 -27
150F125 -
150F125 -
150F125 -4
0.0179
0.0269
0.0296
0.0329
0.0428
0.0188
0.0283
0.0312
0.0346
0.0451
0.093
0.140
0.154
0.170
0.220
0.008
0.013
0.014
0.015
0.019
26.4
44.8
50.3
55.4
701
0.029
0.045
0.050
0.055
0.070
56.4
93.4
104.9
115.6
147.5
' Minimum base metal thi kn er deflection is of d s ign o thickness.
2
Moment inertia given given as the minimum value for either positive or negative bending.
' EEffective p properrti es are g
Effective properties based on Fy = 33 ksi. 1 1/4"
Furring (F) Channel Allowable Ceiling Spans 'L1240
t� a s r c) r pppliedload f' ti: s " 13,psf
``' Hat Spacing (In) o.c.
12
Hat'S Paoin9 (in) ° c , . 1 12 1(I
Hat Spacing (in) o.c. 16 24
16 24 12 7 .
5' 2
6' 5"
5' 11"
7 4"
6 2"
7 7"
6 4"
7' 10" M ..
3'
4' 1"
5' 1"
4' 3"
5 ' 3 "
4' 4"
5' 5"
4' 9"
5 10
Thickness Fy ,
Section
mil ksi Sans.
_ .
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Single
Multi .le
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
6' 10
8' 5"
4' 8"
5' 10"
5' 5"
6' 8"
5 ' 7"
6' 11"
5 ' 9"
7' 1"
6' 2"
7' 8"
4' 1"
5' 1"
4 ' 9 "
5' 10"
4' 10"
6' 0"
5' 0"
6' 2"
5' 5"
6' 8"
4' 6"
5' 7"
5' 2"
6 ' 5"
5' 4"
6' 8"
5' 6"
6' 10"
6' 0"
7' 5"
4' 1"
5 ' 1"
4 ' 9 "
5' 10"
4' 10"
6' 0"
5' 0"
6 ' 2"
5' 5"
6' 8"
7' 0" 7' 1 6' 3 "
7' 18"
9' 8" 8' 10" 7' 6"
9 1" 8' 3" 7 . 2 .,
11' 2" 10' 2" 8' 10"
9 4" 8' 6 " 7 ' 5 "
11' 6" 10' 6" 9' 2"
9 8" 8' 9" 7 , 8 "
11' 11" 10' 10" 9' 5"
,. ' 6" 8' 3"
6' 10"
8' 6"
7' 11"
9' 9"
8' 2"
10' 1"
8' 5"
10' 5"
9' 2"
6' 3"
7' 6"
7' 2"
8' 10"
7' 5"
9' 2"
7' 8"
9 ' 5 "
8' 3"
5' 5"
6' 1"
6' 3"
7' 9"
6' 5"
8' 0"
6' 8"
8' 3"
7' 3"
8' 11"
3' 6"
4' 0"
4' 0"
4' 11"
4' 2"
5' 1"
4' 3"
5' 3"
4 ' 7"
5' 8"
3 ' 2"
3' 5"
3' 8"
4' 6"
3 ' 9"
4' 8"
3' 10"
4' 9"
4' 2"
5' 2"
2 ' 9"
2' 10"
3 ' 2"
3' 8"
3' 3"
3' 11"
3 ' 4"
4' 1"
3' 8"
4' 6"
5' 3"
5' 10"
6' 1"
7' 6"
6' 3"
7' 9"
6' 6"
8' 0"
7' 1"
8 ' 9 "
4' 9"
5' 1"
5 ' 6"
6' 6"
5' 8"
6' 11"
5' 11"
7' 3"
6' 5"
7' 11"
3' 11"
3' 11"
4' 10"
5 ' 4"
5' 0"
5' 8"
5' 2"
5' 11"
5 ' 7"
6' 8"
I In
Steel
Mils
Thickness
Design (in)
Steel Properties
Fy (ksi) Fu(ksi)
Nominal
Weld Size
Allowable
Load (lb /in)
43
0.0451
33
45
1/16
609
54
0.0566
33
45
3/32
764
68
0.0713
33
45
1/8
963
97
0.1017
33
45
1/8
1373
118
0.1242
33
45
1/8
1677
54
0.0566
50
65
3/32
1104
68
0.0713
50
65
1/8
1390
97
0.1017
50
65
1/8
1983
118
0.1242
50
65
1/8
2422
Screw Table Notes
1. Screw spacing and edge distance shall not be less than 3 x d. (d = Nominal screw diameter)
2. The allowable loads are based on the steel properties of the members being connected, per AISI section E4.
3. When connecting materials of different steel thicknesses or tensile strength (F the lowest applicable values
should be used.
4. The nominal strength of the screw must be at least 3.75 times the allowable loads.
5. Values include a 3.0 factor of safety.
6. Applied loads may be multiplied by 0.75 for seismic or wind loading, per AISI A 5.1.3.
7. Penetration of screws through joined materials should not be less than 3 exposed threads. Screws should be
installed and tightened in accordance with screw manufacturer's recommendations.
AO
Allowable Loads for Screw Connections (lbs/screw)
Steel
Mils
18
27
30
33
43
54
68
,SteeJ(Properhes,
FY (ksi )':Eu.(ksi)°
33 45
33 45
33 45
33 45
33 45
33 45
33 45
Oia} �0 21Fi?(1n)
vShear - ..t/ Pullout,
280
394
557
124
156
196
Thi
Design (ln)
0.0188
0.0283
0.0312
0.0346
0.0451
0.0566
0.0713
I -20
:.Shear -r ,Pullout.
151
177
263
370
523
76
84
109
137
173
Shear; ''Pullout
66 39
121 59
141 65
164 . 72
244 94
344 118
111
129
151
224
�;Dia MAO 138iQn)
Shear. Pullout:
60 33
50
55
61
79
Weld Table Notes
1. Weld capacities based on AISI, section E2
2. When connecting materials of different steel thicknesses or tensile strength (F the lowest applicable values
should be used.
3. Values include a 2.5 factor of safety.
4. Based on the minimum allowance load for fillet or flare groove welds, longitudinal or transverse loads.
5. Allowable loads based on E6Oxx electrodes.
6. For material less than or equal to .1242" thick, drawings show nominal weld size. For such material, the effective
throat of the weld shall not be less than the thickness of the thinnest connected part.
Allowable Loads for Fillet Welds and Flare Groove Welds
I 9
Channel
P1000
P1100
P2000
P3000
P3300
P4000
P4100
P5000 1%
41
P5500 1
41
Channel Selection Chart
Channel Dimensions
Width Height
k
Width
In (mm)
1
41
1%
41
1%
41
1%
41
1
41
1
41
Height Steel Stainless Alum.
In (mm) gauge gauge In (mm)
1
41
1
41
1%
41
1
35
22
13 /16
21
13 716
21
3
83
2'/16
62
Steel
12 ga
14 ga
16 ga -
12 ga
12 ga
16 ga
14 ga
12 ga
12 ga
Material & Thickness Hole Pattern Styles
Stainless
Steel
12 ga
14 ga
12 ga
16 ga
P5500 0.726 2.47 0.522 0.390 9,820
___{+ 3.7 21.7 6.4 1,11/
P2001 0.684 2.32 0.618 0.381 9,570
4.41 3..5 25.7 _ _ 6.2 1.080
P9200 0.489 2.23 0.279 0.297 7,480
3.16 3.3 11.6 4.9 350
A5000 0.492 1.67 0.358 0.265 6,670
317 2.5 149 43 750
A1001 0.609 2.07 0.302 0.242 6,070
3.93 3.1 _ 12.6 4.0 690
P9000 0.387 1.88 0.166 0.205 5,150
2. _ _ _2.8 6 9 _ 3.4 58,)
P1000 0.555 1.89 0.185 0.202 5,070
3 11 2.8 7.7 70
P3301 0.790 2.69 0.176 0.201 5.060
Combinations not shown in catalog are available on special order.
Consult factory for more details.
Alum.
0.109
2.8
0.078
2.0
Area Weight I s Allow. Moment
Channel In (cm Ibs/ft (kg /m) In (cm') In In-lbs (Nom)
P5001 1.793 6.10 6.227 1.916 48,180
11.57 9.1 259.2 31.4 5.440
P1004A 1.965 6.68 4.068 1.669 41,980
12.68 9.9 169.3 27.4 4,740
P5501 1.452 4.94 2.805 1.151 28,940
9.37 7.3 116.8 18.9 3,270
P1001 C41 2.221 7.55 1.856 1.142 28,720
14.33 11.2 77.2 18.7 3.250
P5000 0.897 3.05 1.098 0.627 15,770
_ _ 5 .78 __ _ _ 4.5 45.7 10.3 1.780
P1001 1.111 3.78 0.928 0.571 14,360
7.16 5.6 38.6 9.4 1,620
P1101 0.835 2.84 0.733 0.451 11,340
5.39 4.2 30.5 7.4 1,280
P3001 1.000 3.40 0.591 0.430 10,810
6.45 5.1 24.6 7.0 1.220
HS
em
0.109
2.8
T
Channels & Combinations in Descending Order of Strength
KO
SL DS
Steel Only
H3
Area Weight I s Allow. Moment
Channel In (cm lbs/ft (kg/m) In (cm ln In-lbs (Nom)
P1100 0.418 1.42 0.145 0.162 4,060
2.69 2.1 6.0 2.6 460
P3000 0.500 1.70 0.120 0.153 3,850
3.23 2.5 5.0 2.5 430
P4101 0.579 1.97 . 0.117 0.143 3,610
_ 3.74 2.9 4.9 2.4 410 ____
P2000 0.342 1.16 0.125 0.140 3,520
2.21 1.7 5.2 2.3 •100
P4001 0.478 1.66 0.104 0.128 3,210
3.14 2.5 4.3 1 360
A3301 0.459 1.56 0.077 0.103 2,590
2.96 2.3 3.2 1.7 290 _
A1000 0.305 1.04 0.061 0.086 2,170
1.96 ___ _ 1.5 ____ 2.5 1.4 250 _
P3300 0.395 1.34 0.037 0.072 1,800
2.55 2.0 1.5 1.2 200
A4001 0.264 0.90 0.037 0.058 1,470
1.70 1.3 _ 1 5 1.0 170
P6001 0.213 0.73 0.045 0.055 1,400
_ 1.38_ _1 -1 18 0.8 _ 160
P4100 0.290 0.98 0.026 0.054 1.360
_ 1.8;' 1.5 1.1 0.9 150
P4000 0.244 0.83 0.023 0.049 1,230
1.57 1? 0.9 0.8 140
A3300 0.230 0.78 0.017 0.038 950
1.48 1.2 0.7 0.0 110
A4000 0.132 0.45 0.008 0.022 560
0.85 0.7 0.3 0. 1 60
P6000 0.107 0.36 0.009 0.020 510
0.69 0.5 0.4 60
P7001 0.148 0.50 0.007 0.018 460
9 P;` ( 0.3 50 _
P7000 0.074 0.25 0.002 0.007 170
1 . ?9
'"'�1 "�F�amin S stem:
Project Info
Project Address ZUMIEZ - SOUTHCENTER MALL
Date 2/7/2008
Area in ft
(or If for perimeter)
For Building Department Use
FOLE y
Rt RI
Covered Parking
(standard paint)
Applicant Name: ZUMIEZ
Applicant Address: TUKWILA, WA
Applicant Phone:
Project Description
❑ New Building ❑ Addition ,/ Alteration ❑ Plans Included
Refer to WSEC Section 1513 for controls and commissioning requirements.
Compliance Option
Q Prescriptive ® Lighting Power Allowance 0 Systems Analysis
(See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive & LPA spaces clearly on plans.)
Alteration Exceptions
(check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3)
❑ No changes are being made to the lighting
❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed.
Location
�'
De . i ^+ ® F ®�
Allowed Watts
per ft or per If
Area in ft
(or If for perimeter)
Allowed Watts
.r x If)
Covered Parking
(standard paint)
' 1 � S r
( ,ve
0.2 W /ft
CITY 4
0.50
Covered Parking
(reflective paint)
�� ` ^' w.
����z
0.3 W /ft
. '
1 1
Open Parking
c� B ' V \
0.2 W /ft
PERM
T CENTER
Outdoor Areas
0.� n L /�--- l
�•
0.2 W /ft
V V
Bldg. (by facade)'
) k
rs( .
0.25 W /ft
Bldg. (by perim) 1
1�
C� . ., r..gtai ICIT ,)
7.5 W /If
Location
(floor /room no.)
Occupancy Description
Allowed
Watts per ft
1.50
Area in ft
2758.0
Allowed x Area
4137.0
TENANT SPACE
RETAIL
STORAGE
STORAGE
0.50
435.0
217.5
SALES
TYPE C - CASH WRAP PENDANT
** From Table 15 -1 (over) - document all exceptions on form LTG -LPA Total Allowed Watts
4354.5
Location
(floor /room no.)
Fixture Description
Number of
Fixtures
Watts/
Fixture
Watts
Proposed
SALES
TYPE A - PENDANT
8
218.0
1744.0
SALES
TYPE B - SHOWCASE DISPLAY (EXEMPT)
SALES
TYPE C - CASH WRAP PENDANT
11
40.0
440.0
SALES
TYPE D - PORTABLE PLUG IN DISPLAY (EXEMPT)
SALES
TYPE D1 - PORTABLE PLUG IN DISPLAY (EXEMPT
SALES
TYPE H - DRESSING RM PENDANT
3
40.0
120.0
STORAGE
TYPE I - 4 FT STRIP
5
76.0
380.0
CORRIDOR
TYPE IE - 4 FT STRIP
2
76.0
152.0
SALES
TYPE J - DISPLAY LIGHTING
12
50.0
600.0
SALES
TYPE K - VANITY LIGHT
1
30.0
30.0
SALES
TYPE L - EMERGENCY FIXTURE (EXEMPT)
SALES
TYPE X - EXIT LIGHT (EXEMPT)
Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior Total Proposed Watts
3466.0
L'ghting; Summary
LTG -SUM
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Maximum Allowed Lishtinsr Wattage (Interior
Proposed Lighting Wattage (Interior)
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage (Exterior)
Revised May 2005
Notes:
1. Use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage. For hard -wired ballasts only,
the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used
2. Include exit lights unless less than 5 watts per fixture.
3. List all fixtures. For exempt lighting, not exception and leave Watts /Fixture blank.
L!ghting Permit Plans Checklist , ,
LTG -CHK
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised May 2005
Project Address ZUMIEZ - SOUTHCENTER MALL
Date 2/7/2008
The following information is necessary to check a lighting permit application for compliance with the lighting requirements in the
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code.
Applicability
(yes, no, n.a.)
Code
Section
Component
Information Required
Location
on Plans
Building Department
Notes
LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513)
no
1513.1
Local control /access
Schedule with type, indicate locations
yes
1513.2
Area controls
Maximum limit per switch
El
n.a.
1513.3
Daylight zone control
Schedule with type and features, indicate locations
n.a.
vertical glazing
Indicate vertical glazing on plans
n.a.
overhead glazing
Indicate overhead glazing on plans
yes
1513
Display /exhib /special
Indicate separate controls
El
1513.5
Exterior shut -off
Schedule with type and features, indicate location
n.a.
(a) timerw /backup
Indicate location
n.a.
(b) photocell.
Indicate location
1513.6
Inter. auto shut -off
Indicate location
yes
1513
(a) occup sensors
Schedule with type and locations
El
yes
1513
(b) auto switches
Schedule with type and features (back -up override capability);
Indicate size of zone on plans
E2
n.a.
1513.7
Commissioning
Indicate requirements for lighting controls commissioning
yes
Lighting Sum. Form
Completed and attached.
Schedule with fixture types,
lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture
E3
n.a.
1437
Elec motor efficiency
MECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation:
Local lighting control for the retail space lighting is not required per exception #1 of section
Cooling Equipment Schedule
Equip.
ID
Brand Name'
Model No.'
Capacity
Btu /h
Total CFM
OSA CFM
or Econo?
SEER
or EER
IPLV
Location
VAV:I
Trane
VCEF14
55F air
2600
51195
51195
stockroom
l
Applicant Address:
809 S.W. A Street; Suite 203—Bentonville, AR 72,71
MAR 1 4 7008
Applicant Phone:
479- 273 -7780
REVIEWED rOR
I ,e"nt•.IP e•eka nio i
P
-K' ' IT CENTER
.,, ;
Fan Equipment Schedule
Equip.
ID
Brand Name'
Model No.'
CFM
Sp'
HP /BHP
Flow Control
C
RECPervice
tTY of 1 uKVVILA
N/A
VAV1
Trans
VCEF14
Tukwila, WA
1600
51195
51195
100.000
l
Applicant Address:
809 S.W. A Street; Suite 203—Bentonville, AR 72,71
MAR 1 4 7008
Applicant Phone:
479- 273 -7780
REVIEWED rOR
I ,e"nt•.IP e•eka nio i
P
-K' ' IT CENTER
.,, ;
Heating Equipment Schedule
Equip.
ID
Brand Name'
Model No.'
Capacity
Btu /h
Total CFM
OSA cfm
or Econo?
Input Btuh
Output Btuh
Efficiency
VAV1
Trans
VCEF14
Tukwila, WA
1600
51195
51195
100.000
l
Applicant Address:
809 S.W. A Street; Suite 203—Bentonville, AR 72,71
Applicant Phone:
479- 273 -7780
REVIEWED rOR
I ,e"nt•.IP e•eka nio i
Project Info
Project Address
zumiez
Date 2/7/2008
South Center Mall
k p J #
fY e�vit
r rg �•
� [� .. 'j�d
"�fV
--- �;
# Kle'r
�piCyll14, Use
�wPt Y
- "-.
Tukwila, WA
Applicant Name:
Greg Schluterman
_ 44
l
Applicant Address:
809 S.W. A Street; Suite 203—Bentonville, AR 72,71
Applicant Phone:
479- 273 -7780
REVIEWED rOR
I ,e"nt•.IP e•eka nio i
Mechanical Summary
MECH-SUM
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Project Description
B riefly describe mechanical
system type and features.
El Includes Plans
( Compliance Option
E quipment Schedules
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Include documentation requiring compliance with comri sioniI] et
Lo
Q Simple System Q Complex System
APPROVE
MAR 2 8 2008
ellio 1416
Revised May 2005
(See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Use separate MECH -SUM for simple & complex systems.)
The following information is required to be incorporated with the mechanical equipment schedules on the
plans. For projects without plans, fill in the required information below.
' If available. 2 As tested according to Table 14 -1A through 14 -1G. 3 If required. 4 COP, HSPF, Combustion Efficiency, or AFUE, as
applicable. 5 Flow control types: variable air volume(VAV), constant volume (CV), or variable speed (VS).
Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
MECH -CHK
Revised May 200E
Project Address ZumiBB
'Date 2/7/2008
The following information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the
Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code.
Applicability
(yes, no, n.a.)
Code
Section
Component
Information Required
Location
on Plans
Building Department
Notes
HVAC REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1401 -1424)
1411
Equipment performance
n.a.
1411.4
Pkg. elec. htg.& clg.
List heat pumps on schedule
a. a.
1411.1
Minimum efficiency
Equipment schedule with type, capacity, efficiency
a. a.
1411.1
Combustion htg.
Indicate intermittent ignition, flue /draft damper & jacket loss
1412
HVAC controls
yes
1412.1
Temperature zones
Indicate locations on plans
yes
1412.2
Deadband control
Indicate 5 degree deadband minimum
n.a.
1412.3
Humidity control
Indicate humidistat
yes
1412.4
Automatic setback
Indicate thermostat with night setback and 7 diff. day types
yes
1412.4.1
Dampers
Indicate damper location and auto. controls & max. leakage
a. a.
1412.4.2
Optimum Start
Indicate optimum start controls
n.a.
1412.5
Heat pump control
Indicate microprocessor on thermostat schedule
n.a.
1412.6
Combustion htg.
Indicate modulating or staged control
yes
1412.7
Balancing
Indicate balancing features on plans
yes
1422
Thermostat interlock
Indicate thermostat interlock on plans
n.a.
1423
Economizers
Equipment schedule
1413
Air economizers
n.a.
1413.1
Air Econo Operation
Indicate 100% capability on schedule
n.a.
1413.1
Wtr Econo Operation
Indicate 100% capacity at 45 degF db & 40 deg F wb
n.a.
1413.2
Water Econo Doc
Indicate clg load & water econoe & clg tower performance
n.a.
1413.3
Integrated operation
Indicate capability for partial cooling
n.a.
1413.4
Humidification Indicate direct evap or fog atomization w/ air economizer
1414
Ducting systems
yes
1414.1
Duct sealing
Indicate sealing necessary
yes
1414.2
Duct insulation
Indicate R -value of insulation on duct
yes
1415.1
Piping insulation
Indicate R -value of insulation on piping
1416
Completion Requirements
yes
1416.1 &2
Drawings & Manuals
Indicate requirement for record drawings and operation docs.
yes
1416.3.2
Air Balancing
Indicate air system balance requirements
n.a.
1416.3.3
Hydronic Balancing
Indicate hydronic system balance requirements
yes
1416.4
Commissioning
Indicate requirements for commissioning and prelim. Report
yes
1424
Separate air sys.
Indicate separate systems on plans
yes
Mechanical
Summary Form
Completed and attached. Equipment schedule with types,
input/output, efficiency, cfm, hp, economizer
SERVICE WATER HEATING AND HEATED POOLS (Sections 1440 -1454)
1440
Service water htg.
a. a.
1441
Elec. water heater
Indicate R -10 insulation under tank
a. a.
1442
Shut -off controls
Indicate automatic shut -off
n.a.
1443
Pipe Insulation
Indicate R -value of insulation on piping
n.a.
1452
Heat Pump COP
Indicate minimum COP of 4.0
n.a.
1452
Heater Efficiency
Indicate pool heater efficiency
n.a.
1453
Pool heater controls
Indicate switch and 65 degree control
n.a.
1454
Pool covers
Indicate vapor retardant cover
n.a.
1454
Pools 90+ degrees
Indicate R -12 pool cover
•
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
no is circles for any question, proviae explanation:
PROJECT
MANUAL
FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF:
zumez
Southcenter Mall
633 Southcenter Parkway
Space #2115
Tukwila, WA 98188
February 8, 2008
Project Number 08596
REGISTERED
ARCH CT
�A D J. MURPHY
STATE OF WASHINGTON
Murphy Varey, PS
David J. Murphy, Architect, AIA
2101 Ninth Avenue, #211, Seattle, WA 98121
Telephone: (206) 341 -9875 Facsimile: (206) 341 -9177
FILE C { ?�
REVIEWED FOR
CODE COMPLIANCE
APPROVED
MAR 2 8 2008
t�
ity Of Tukwila
B ILD DM I N
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
Southcenter Mall — Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations
Southcenter Mall Tenant Construction Safety Standards
DIVISION i - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
oiioo - Summary of Work
0125o - Contract Modification Procedures
01290 — Payment Procedures
01310 — Project Management and Coordination
0132o — Construction Progress Documentation
01322 — Photographic Documentation
0133o — Submittal Procedures
01400 — Quality Requirements
0142o — References
01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls
01524 — Construction Waste Management
0160o — Product Requirements
0170o — Execution Requirements
01731— Cutting and Patching
01732 — Selective Demolition
0177o — Closeout Procedures
01781— Project Record Documents
01782 — Operation and Maintenance Data
DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE
03301— Cast -In -Place Concrete (Limited Applications)
0 355 0 — Cementitious Floor Overlayment
DIVISION 5 - METAL
05500 — Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06105 — Miscellaneous Carpentry
DIVISION 7 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07841— Through- Penetration Firestop Systems
07842 — Fire- Resistive Joint Systems
07920 — Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
o8110 — Steel Doors and Frames
08211— Flush Wood Doors
08311— Access Doors & Frames
08711— Door Hardware
08800 — Glazing
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09111— Non - Load - Bearing Steel Framing
09250 — Gypsum Board
09310 — Ceramic Tile
09653 — Resilient Wall Base and Accessories
09912 — Interior Painting
09931— Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes
DIVISION io - SPECIALTIES
10431— Signage
10523 — Fire Extinguishers
10801— Toilet & Bath Accessories
ZUMIEZ - SOUTHCENTER MALL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WestRekf
Southcenter
Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations
12/4/07
1. Introduction
The Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations will be provided to each Tenant General Contractor prior to
the start of any construction in the Tenant space. The Tenant General Contractor shall thoroughly review
this package prior to the start of any construction.
The following set of Construction Rules and Regulations has been formulated to create the most
productive work environment for all parties concerned. Your cooperation along with your associates, the
Landlord and our associates and other contractors is required and demanded for the success of the
project. No infractions to these rules will be tolerated. Any questions or circumstances that may arise
regarding these rules or the construction of your premises are to be reported to the Tenant Coordination
office immediately. The Tenant Coordination staff is here to help facilitate the construction and opening of
your client's store and we will do what is necessary to make this a productive process.
To facilitate a productive work environment, the Landlord and its representatives shall have the right to
impose fines as outlined in the Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations. The Landlord and its
representatives shall have the right to impose such fines at its own discretion with /or without notice. The
Landlord, in its sole opinion, shall have the right to eject Tenant's Contractor from the premises if said
contractor disregards the Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations or in any other way delays work by
Landlord, other Tenant's Contractor, or adversely impacts the operations of the existing center.
2. Project Directory
Tenant Coordination, Westfield Corporation, Inc.
Joshua Kimmel, Project Manager
Westfield Corporation, Inc.
Tenant Coordination
11601 Wilshire Blvd., Suite 1400
Los Angeles, CA 90025
Office: (310) 893 -4761
Facsimile: (310) 575 -5991
Email: jkimmel @westfield.com
Brooke Emerson, Tenant Services Administrator
Westfield Corporation, Inc.
Tenant Coordination
11601 Wilshire Blvd., Suite 1400
Los Angeles, CA 90025
Office: (310) 893 -4183
Facsimile: (310) 575 -5991
Email: bemerson @westfield.com
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
Gas & Electric — Puget Sound Energy
10885 NE 4 St
PO Box 97034
(425)
452 -1234
Water
600 Minkler Blvd.
Tukwila, WA 98188
(206)
433 -1863
Sewer
600 Minkler Blvd.
Tukwila, WA 98188
(206)
433 -1864
Telephone — Qwest
(800)
603 -6000
On -Site Tenant Coordination
Government Agencies
Utility Comp
Erik Barth
ebarth @westfield.com
Marcia Peddicord
mpeddicordawestfield.corn
Bryan Low
blow @westfield.com
Ryan O'Nan (Food Court Only)
ronan a(� westfield.com
633 Southcenter, trailer #2
Tukwila, WA 98188
(626) 227 -3355
(818) 402 -8923
(636) 368 -2168
(626) 216 -6156
Building Department
Brenda Holt
City of Tukwila — Building Division
6300 Southcenter Blvd. #100
Tukwila, WA 98188
(206) 431-3670
Fire Department
Al Metzler
444 Andover Park East
Tukwila, WA 98188
(206) 575 -4404
Health Department
Dept of Health — Seattle & King County
Diane Agasid Bondoc
1404 Central Avenue N, Suite 101
Kent, WA 98032
Diane.agasid @metrokc.gov
(206) 205 -1903
Landlord's required contractors:
Roofing Contractor
Pacific Rainier Roofing, Inc.
Monty
10735 Stone Ave North
Seattle, Washington 98133
(For Traffic Coating Roof only)
Pioneer Waterproofing Co., Inc.
Neil Antonini
1800 SE Water Avenue
Portland, OR 97214
Telephone: (206) 367 -2525
Cell:
Email: pacranroof(u)aol.com
Telephone: (503) 232 -9020
Facsimile: (503) 234 -4763
E -mail:
neil @pioneerwaterproofing.com
Fire Alarm Contractor
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
Sprinkler Contractors - Preferred
3. Labor Practices
While this project is OPEN SHOP, the Tenant and shall hire only professional, qualified contractors. The
Landlord reserves the right to approve the Tenant's contractors, Subcontractors and Consultants.
Tenant's General Contractor shall warrant that Tenant and Tenant's contractors will comply with the
instructions of Landlord or Landlord's General Contractor for the purpose of avoiding, ending and /or
minimizing labor disputes. Upon notice from Landlord or Landlord's General Contractor, Tenant will take
such action, including the prosecution of legal proceedings in court or with agencies such as the National
Labor Relations Board, as Landlord or Landlord's General Contractor shall deem appropriate.
4. Contractor Check -in Procedures
The following items are required prior to access to Tenant's space.
a) Building Permit
b) Proper evidence of Insurance Coverage (requirements as outlined in Section 5)
c) Company or Cashier's check for Contractor Deposit (as outlined in Section 6 — Contractor
Deposit)
d) Company or Cashier's check for all Landlord Reimbursements in full (as outlined in Section 7)
e) Final Landlord Approved set of Construction Drawings
f) Permit set of Approved Construction Documents
9)
h)
i) Signed Exhibit A confirming his /her receipt of Construction Rules and Regulations & Safety
Standards
Signed Exhibit E.3, Automatic Fines deductible from Construction Deposit for infraction of
Construction Rules and Regulations.
k) Signed copy of the Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards.
5. Insurance Requirements
j)
Guardian Security
Bob Vezzani
9435 Provost Road NW
Silverdale, WA 98383
Telephone: (206) 622 -6545
Facsimile: (360) 692 -6857
Email:
bvezzani @guardiansecurity.com
Crown Fire Protection — John Able
4932 Interurban Blvd.
Bothel, WA 98012
Western States Fire — Wes Hamilton
7102 180 Ave NE, #A105
Redmond, WA 98052
Patriot Fire Protection — Mark Fromong
2707 70 Ave. E
Tacoma, WA 98424
Cosco Fire Protection — Pat Carnahan
1500 Woodinville- Redmond Rd., B800
Woodinville, WA 98072
3 Party Reviewer (if over 50 heads)
Tuazon Engineering, PLLC
Eric P. Tuazon, PE
4322 NE 7 Street
Renton, WA 98059
Telephone: (425) 481 -7669
Telephone: (425) 881 -0100
Telephone: (253) 926 -2290
Telephone: (425) 827 -9654
Telephone: (425) 917 -1683
Facsimile: (425) 917 -1705
Construction Schedule (as outlined in Section 8 — Construction Schedule)
List of telephone numbers and addresses for all contacts.
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
A. Tenant shall secure, pay for and maintain, or cause Tenant's General Contractor to
secure, pay for and maintain, for all periods of construction and fixturing work within the
Premises, all of the insurance policies required in the amounts as set forth herein below.
Tenant shall not permit its General Contractor to commence any work until all required
insurance has been obtained and certificates evidencing such insurance have . been
delivered to Landlord.
B. Tenant's General Contractor's and Subcontractor's Required Minimum Coverage's and
Limits to Liability.
1. Worker's Compensation, as required by State law, and including Employer's
Liability Insurance with a limit of not less than Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00)
each accident, Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00) each employee by disease,
Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00) policy aggregate by disease, and any
insurance required by any Employee Benefit Acts or other statutes applicable
where the work is to be performed as will protect Tenant's General Contractor and
subcontractors from any and all liability under the aforementioned acts.
2. Commercial General Liability Insurance (including Contractor's Protective Liability)
in which the limits shall be not less than Three Million Dollars ($3,000,000.00) per
occurrence combined single limit, bodily injury and property damage. Such
insurance will provide for explosion, collapse and underground coverage. Such
insurance shall insure Tenant's General Contractor against any and all claims for
bodily injury, including death resulting therefrom and damage to or destruction of
property of any kind whatsoever and to whomever belonging and arising from its
operations under the contract whether such operations are performed by Tenant's
General Contractor, subcontractors, or any of their subcontractors, or by anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them.
3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance, including the ownership,
maintenance and operation of any automotive equipment, owned, hired and non -
owned, in the minimum amount of Three Million Dollars ($3,000,000.00) combined
single limit, bodily injury and property damage. Such insurance shall insure
Tenant's General Contractor and all subcontractors against any and all claims for
bodily injury, including death resulting therefrom and damage to the property of
others caused by accident and arising from its operations under the Contract and
whether such operations are performed by the General Contractor, subcontractors
or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them.
C. Tenant's Protective Liability Insurance - Tenant shall provide Owner's Protective Liability
Insurance insuring Tenant against any and all liability to third parties for damages
because of bodily injury (or death resulting therefrom) and property damage liability of
others or a combination thereof which may arise from work in connection with the
Premises, and any other liability for damages which Tenant's General Contractor and /or
subcontractors are required to insure against under any provisions herein. Said insurance
shall provide policy limits which shall provide, at a minimum, coverage of Three Million
Dollars ($3,000,000.00) combined single limit, bodily injury and property damage.
D. Tenant's Builder's Risk Insurance - Completed Value Builders' Risk Material Damage
Insurance policy covering the work to be performed for Tenant in the Premises as it
relates to the building within which the Premises is located. The policy shall include as
insureds Tenant, its General Contractor, all subcontractors and Landlord, as their interests
may appear. The amount of insurance to be provided shall be at one hundred percent
(100 %) of the replacement cost.
E. All such insurance policies required under this Exhibit, except as noted above, shall
include Landlord, its Architect, its Consultant, its General Contractor, subcontractors, and
parties set forth in the Lease and any other parties designated by Landlord from time to
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
time as additional insured entities, except the Worker's Compensation Insurance; further
provided, said Worker's Compensation Insurance shall contain an endorsement waiving
all rights of subrogation against Landlord, its Architect, its Consultant, its General
Contractor and subcontractors.
F. Certificates of insurance shall provide that no reduction in the amounts or limits of liability
or cancellation of such insurance coverage shall be undertaken without thirty (30) days
prior written notice to Landlord.
G. The insurance required under this Exhibit shall be in addition to the insurance required to
be procured by Tenant pursuant to the Lease.
Each policy is required to name the following as additionally insured, verbatim
"Westfield U.S. Holdings, LLC, Westfield America Limited Partnership, WEA Southcenter LLC,
and any and all of their respective, partners, subsidiaries and affiliates, together with any
mortgagee from time to time of the Landlord's interest, are named as an additional insured, as
their interests may appear."
6. Contractor Deposit
A security deposit of $10,000.00, in the form of a Cashier's Check or Company Check will be required
upon sign -in.
Security deposits are to be made payable by check to Westfield Corporation, Inc., cash will not be
accepted.
Access will be denied to the premises until the deposit has been received as stipulated above. Landlord
shall reserve the right to deduct costs incurred during the project to complete or perform work on behalf of
Tenant(s). Such work shall include but shall not be limited to a) the removal of debris from common areas,
and /or roof, b) the removal of equipment / materials from service corridors and /or common areas, c) the
repair of damage to landlord's work in common areas including roof repairs and d) the temporary sealing
of roof penetrations to prevent damage. Such deductions shall be made with or without notice to Tenant
or Tenant's General Contractor.
Upon completion of construction, with all required documentation furnished WITHIN 90 DAYS OF
STORE OPENING, the deposit will be returned. Stipulations regarding your deposit are outlined in the
following sections. Please note, fines incurred by infractions of any rules and regulations set forth in this
document by your employees, sub - contractors or clients shall be deducted from your deposit.
7. Landlord Reimbursements
Tenant's Contractor shall pay the following Landlord Reimbursements prior to access to the premises;
further detail is listed in Exhibit C.
Landlord reimbursements are to be made payable by company check or cashier's check to
Westfield Corporation, Inc., cash will not be accepted.
a) Trash Removal Reimbursement
b) Electrical Power (Disconnect and Feeders) Reimbursement
c) Sprinkler shut down Reimbursement
d) Temporary sanitary fees (temporary restrooms)
e) Grease Interceptor (if applicable)
f) Mall Flooring Reimbursement (calculation based on the linear footage of storefront 1' -0" in
front of the lease line).
g) Breakers Reimbursement
h) Fire Alarm Programming Reimbursement
i) Barricade Fees (if applicable)
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
j) Sprinkler Skeleton System (if applicable)
k) Other reimbursements for work completed by Landlord for Tenant.
8. Construction Schedule
Tenant's Contractor shall furnish a detailed construction schedule in graphic form detailing Tenant's
workflow. Essential start dates and completion dates are required for all trades. Deliveries of heavy items
or in large quantities must be noted on the schedule. Access to loading zones and freight elevators will be
limited and must be scheduled in advance.
9. General Contractor's Possession of Premises
Tenant's general contractor shall survey the premises for Landlord Work that is not complete or in
discrepancy with Tenant's Lease documents. Tenant contractor shall verify all dimensions, clearances
and utility locations. Notice of any discrepancies must be given in writing and shall be submitted within 48
hours of possession. Upon expiration of the notice period, tenant and tenant's contractor shall have
accepted the premises in as -is condition. All work necessary within the premises shall be the
responsibility of the tenant and tenant's general contractor.
10. Inspection Information
All project information must include the Tenant's post office address number.
Before any work may commence in the Tenant's Premises the following must have occurred or be
completed:
1. All plans must be approved by the City of Tukwila Building Department and one approved set must
be kept in the premises at all times.
2. All issued permit cards must be posted in the Premises before any work may proceed. Permit must
include all disciplines or individual Permits must be acquired for Building, Mechanical, Electrical &
Plumbing.
3. Additional Permits may be required. These may include Rack Storage, Exterior Signage, Gas Piping,
Fire Sprinkler, Fire Alarm and a Food Exhaust Suppression Permit (if applicable).
4. All inspections should be scheduled by the contractor or sub - contractor requiring the inspection and
Contractor shall make provisions to be in the space. Contractors must also inform Tenant
Coordination of any inspections scheduled.
5. Items not included in the Tenant's permitted plans may not be installed or in the premises prior to
obtaining a Certificate of Occupancy or Temporary Certificate of Occupancy. These items include:
furniture, shelving, merchandise fixtures, equipment, electronic equipment etc.
6. All merchandise and supplies may not be stored in the premises prior to issuance of a Certificate of
Occupancy or Temporary Certificate of Occupancy.
11. Tenant Utilities
Due to the large quantity of tenants under construction, it is required that Tenant's General Contractor
submit service work orders for utility services within the first week of construction. Contact information has
been provided for you.
• Each Tenant Contractor will complete their electrical installation to provide for a "Temporary to
Permanent" Electrical Meter and service. The Landlord will provide a disconnect switch,
conduits and feeders to the Tenant's premises. Upon possession of the space, the Tenant will
need to complete the service to have power. This will include, but not be limited to, installing a
transformer and panel to complete the service. This should be done first thing upon
possession of space. See Section 21 below for more information.
• A Gas Meter is required for tenants requiring the service (food tenants only).
• A Water Sub -Meter is required for tenants with a high daily water usage (food, salons)
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
12. Contractor Work Area and Practices
Tenant contractors must comply with the Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards attached.
Tenant Contractor's work material and supplies shall be confined to the premises. No work or material is
to be conducted on or stored in service corridors or mall common areas. Each contractor, in addition to
their premises shall be responsible for all debris and equipment left in common areas surrounding their
premises. Areas will be delineated by extending 15' — 0" out from any demising line separating premises
from common area.
It is the Tenant Contractor's responsibility to secure tools, equipment and material within their premises at
the end of each day. All trash & construction debris is to be removed promptly each night into Landlord's
designated dumpsters. No equipment, materials or debris is to be stored in common areas or service
corridors at any time.
Tenant Contractor must provide an entry carpet within their barricade to prevent dust from trailing out to
the mall common area. Tenant Contractor shall also be responsible for the mopping and sweeping of
common areas free of construction dirt and debris.
Tenant and Tenant's contractor shall wear the appropriate attire to prevent injury to their personnel and
other persons on the job site. Prior to the issuance of a CO or TCO for the base building, all Tenants and
their contractors are required to wear a HARD HAT, safety goggles and vest. Proper footwear and
clothing are required within the new construction area to prevent injury.
Tenant and Tenant Contractor shall protect their work from damage and shall protect the work of other
Tenants and Landlord from damage by Tenant, Tenant Contractor and /or employees and sub - contractors.
Tenant's work shall be coordinated with all work being performed by Landlord and other tenants work to
the extent that Tenant's work shall not interfere with or delay the completion of any other work. No
contractor or sub - contractor participating in tenant's work shall at any time damage, injure or interfere with
or delay the completion of the building or any other construction within the mall. Each contractor and their
sub - contractors shall comply with all procedures and regulations prescribed by Landlord for the integration
of Tenant's work with the work to be performed in connection with the building and other construction
within the mall.
13. Premises Permit and Documents
All Permits, Inspection Sign -off sheets and Permit Construction Documents shall be posted in a secure
location within the premises. Such documentation shall be made readily available to Landlord and /or any
governing party having jurisdiction upon demand. This procedure has been designated by the Building
Department to expedite inspections and sign -off.
14. Loading Zone and Deliveries
Access to all parking structures shall be limited to trucks limited to 7' -0" in height and weighing less than
5000 pounds loaded.
All loading and unloading of materials will be restricted to Landlord designated areas only. No vehicles are
to be left unattended, unattended vehicles will be towed at owner's expense.
Only designated freight elevators are to be used for transport of delivered materials. Common areas,
escalators, passenger elevators and freight elevators servicing the operational mall are never to be used.
Only carts or dollies with air filled or soft rubber tires or wheels will be allowed.
All large deliveries or deliveries of heavy items are to be scheduled in advance with the Tenant
Coordination office. Loading and off loading areas are limited, if your loading or off loading requirements
are in excess of hour it must be scheduled in advance or the truck will be turned away.
All delivery companies should have the Contractor's telephone number and alternate numbers.
15. Trash Removal
All construction trash and debris are to be deposited in Landlord's designated receptacles. Trash left
outside of the receptacle or use of any other area or receptacle is prohibited.
All trash removal is to be conducted through service corridors.
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
All cardboard boxes are to be flattened prior to deposit in Landlord's designated dumpsters.
Tenant's premises shall to be broom clean and all trash removed nightly.
16. Use of Service Corridors
Service corridors are for the use of all Tenants to transport material and deliveries. No work or storage of
material shall be conducted in service corridors. Any items found in the corridors shall be confiscated and
a fine will be imposed for each infraction.
17. Parking Zones
Landlord has designated parking for Tenant's contractor and subcontractors. All vehicles must be marked
with a sign in the windshield identifying the "Store" location in which work is being done and a contact
telephone number for the driver of the vehicle. Contractor's vehicles parked in NO Parking Zones,
Loading Zones and /or in non - designated areas will be towed at vehicle owner's expense and an additional
fine will be imposed for each infraction.
18. No Smoking Policy
Smoking is prohibited on the premises, common areas or base building construction site.
19. Storefront Barricade Policy
Full drywall barricades will be required for all tenants deemed not ready for the Grand Opening.
Specifications will be issued for those tenants required to erect a barricade.
20. Prohibited Work I Practices and Hazardous Materials
All construction dealing with excessive noise levels shall be performed during non -mall hours and
scheduled with the Tenant Coordination office.
Use of toxic substances including floor sealant and paint products shall be scheduled with the Tenant
Coordination office and will not be allowed between the hours of 8:00 AM and 10:00 PM of each day. If
toxic substances are used during these hours, work will be discontinued and the site will be shut down
until approval to proceed work is granted by the Tenant Coordination office and OSHA. This complies with
California Law B198.
Any use of hazardous materials must be scheduled with the Tenant Coordination office and MATERIALS
SAFETY DATA provided prior to the start of construction.
21. Temporary Power for Construction
Each Tenant Contractor will complete their electrical installation to provide for a "Temporary to Permanent"
Electrical Meter and service. The Landlord shall provide a main circuit breaker in a Landlord Electrical
room and conduit and conductors (feeders) from the circuit breaker to a Landlord provided fused
disconnect switch located within the Tenant space. Upon possession of the space, the Tenant shall install
all electrical work necessary for a complete electrical distribution system within the premises, including, but
not limited to, transformers, electrical panels, etc. to complete the service. This should be done first thing
upon possession of space.
22. Fire Alarm System
All Tenants are required to use the designated base building Fire Alarm Contractor to complete final
connection and programming of Tenant's Fire Alarm System to Landlord's Main Fire Alarm System.
WARNING: It is imperative that Tenant's Contractor do not cut or disconnect any red wiring.
23. Sprinkler System
Tenant's Contractor shall hire a Landlord approved sprinkler contractor. Tenant's Contractor shall be
responsible to ensure that all sprinklers are capped and sealed at the end of each night. The system will
be activated each night and throughout the weekends. Any damages to property and /or persons will be
the responsibility of the Tenant's Contractor.
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
Any sprinkler work being conducted after 5:00 PM must be scheduled with the Tenant Coordination office.
Contact the Tenant Coordination Site Office for further procedures and scheduled drain -down dates and
times.
24. Roof Penetrations
All roof work must be coordinated with Tenant Coordination. Tenant shall hire at Tenant's expense, the
Landlord designated roofing contractor, roof water proofing contractor and roofing inspections consultant.
Portions of the underside decking have been fire sprayed and /or insulated. The Tenant's General
Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement and /or repair of all insulation and /or fire proofing
removed or damaged.
Tenant's Contractor shall install a non - fading, durable and permanent label with Tenant's Postal Address #
to all roof top equipment servicing their space. This shall include but not be limited to HVAC equipment
and exhaust systems. Labels shall be attached to the maintenance panel covers.
25. Electrical Connections
Landlord has provided a fused disconnect in each Tenant's space. Tenants will not be given access to
base building electrical rooms.
26. Water Proofing
All tenants will be required to install a waterproof membrane in the areas of water use. A flood test may be
required at the Landlord's discretion. A five -year warranty is mandatory.
27. Hot Work
All work requiring open flames, excessive heat or sparks shall require a "Hot Work Permit ". This may be
obtained through the Tenant Coordination office. Any such work conducted without the permit will be shut
down until such permit is obtained. Tenant General Contractor may be required, as instructed by the
Landlord or local jurisdiction to post a fire watch during such work.
28. Landlord Punch -list
After the Final Building Department Inspection, a member of the Tenant Coordination team will compile the
landlord Punchlist. The punchlist must be completed in its entirety within 5 days of issuance. The Super -
intendant must be present during the completion of the punch -list. All work not completed may, at
Landlords option, be completed by Landlord. Costs for such repairs shall be deducted from contractor's
deposit and /or Tenant Improvement Allowance.
29. Corrective Work by Landlord
If Tenant's Contractor fails to make any needed repairs or replacements within 5 days of written notice.
Landlord shall have the option to complete the work at Tenant Contractor's expense. Such work will
include but not be limited to trash removal from common areas or the removal of stored items in service
corridors. Costs incurred by the Landlord will be deducted from the General Contractor's deposit.
30. Pre - Opening Requirements
The Grand Opening of the project is July 25, 2008. All Tenants not ready to open on the specified date
must erect a storefront barricade finished as specified by Landlord at tenant's expense. Tenant
Coordinators will visit Tenant spaces deemed unable to meet the opening date. At the discretion of the
Tenant Coordinator, Tenant Contractor will be instructed to erect a barricade. Tenant's Contractor, upon
such notice shall erect a barricade finished as specified by Landlord immediately.
31. Close -out Package requirements
The following items will be required as a Closeout Package to be submitted to the Tenant Coordination
office at 11601 Wilshire Blvd. 14 Floor, Los Angeles, CA 90025, WITHIN 90 DAYS OF STORE
OPENING in order receive the return of Contractor's Contractor Deposit. (See Exhibit E.1 and E.2)
a) Copy of the Original Certificate of Occupancy
b) Copy of all inspection sign off sheets
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
c) Copy of Roofing Contractor's warranty, notice of work completion and Landlord roofing
consultant sign off letter, if applicable.
d) All required Warranties
e) Full set of Construction As Build Drawings
f) Air Balance Report
g) Completed Landlord Punchlist
h) List of all sub - contractors and contract amounts
i) Original notarized Unconditional Lien Waivers from all Sub - contractors
j) Original notarized Unconditional Lien Waiver from General Contractor
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
Date:
Space #:
Tenant:
Sq. Ft.
Company:
Name:
Signature:
Date:
Exhibit A
Tenant Contractor Orientation Checklist
Contractor:
Project Mgr.:
Superintendent:
Superintendent:
❑ Building Permit (B,M,E,P, CDDD, Fire Permit)
Name:
Signature:
Date:
Westfield Corporation, Inc.
Westfiek!
SHOPPING TOWN
❑ Insurance Certificate (each policy is required to name the following as additionally insured
verbatim)
❑ Westfield America, Inc., WEA Southcenter LLC and Westfield LLC., and any and all of
their respective, partners, subsidiaries and affiliates, together with any mortgagee from
time to time of the Landlord's interest, are named as an additional insured, as their
interests may appear."
❑ Deposit ($10,000.00)
❑ Landlord Reimbursement Payment
❑ Landlord's Final Approved set of Construction Drawings
❑ Permit set of Approved Construction Documents
❑ Construction Schedule
❑ Contact List
❑ Site map
❑ Construction Rules and Regulations with Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
CASH WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED, PROVIDE COMPANY CHECKS OR MONEY ORDER
PAYABLE TO WESTFIELD CORPORATION, INC.
ATTACH CHECK HERE.
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt.:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt.:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
Construction Contact Sheet - PART 1
Space No.:
Tenant Name:
Contractor
Address:
Main Office Tel.
Main Office Fax:
Exhibit B
Construction Contact Sheet - PART 1
Sub - contractor / Supplier Listing
Project Mgr.
Office Telephone:
Office Facsimile:
Cellular/ Pager:
Superintendent:
Field Telephone:
Field Facsimile:
Cellular / Pager:
ws1I1e1t
SHOPPING TOWN
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
TRADE
Company:
Telephone:
Address:
Facsimile:
E -mail:
Contact:
Contract Amt$:
Construction Contact Sheet - PART 2
WesiReIit
SH OP PING TOWN
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
Date:
Space #:
Tenant:
Sq. Ft.
Company:
Name:
Signature:
Date:
$
$
Exhibit C
Landlord Reimbursements
Contractor:
Project Mgr.:
Superintendent:
Superintendent:
The following fees are to be paid prior to the possession of premises and start of construction. A
Company check in the specified amount is required.
Trash Removal Reimbursement to Landlord
Electrical (Disconnect & Feeders) Power Reimbursement to Landlord
Temporary Sewer Usage Reimbursement to Landlord
Grease Interceptor Reimbursement to Landlord
Sprinkler Shut Down Reimbursement to Landlord
Tenant Electrical Switch -gear breaker / fuse
Mall flooring Reimbursement to Landlord
($10 / s.f. reimbursement for the first linear feet of tile 1 foot into your Demised Premises)
Fire Alarm Programming Reimbursement to Landlord
Gas Line
Barricade Reimbursement
(Applicable if tenant does not complete construction by Grand Opening)
Sprinkler Grid Reimbursement
(Applicable if tenant does not complete construction by Grand Opening)
TOTALS
Name:
Signature:
Date:
Westfield Corporation, Inc.
Wesifiek[
S H O P P I N G T O W N
CASH WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED, PROVIDE COMPANY CHECKS OR MONEY ORDER
PAYABLE TO WESTFIELD CORPORATION, INC.
ATTACH CHECK HERE.
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcemer
Company:
Name:
Signature:
Date:
Exhibit E.1
Tenant Contractor Return Deposit Form
** *ALL CLOSE -OUT DOCUMENTS MUST BE RECEIVED BY THE TENANT
COORDINATION OFFICE IN LOS ANGELES, CA NO LATER THAN 90 DAYS FROM
STORE OPENING. * **
Space No.:
Tenant Name:
Contractor:
Address:
Attention:
Main Office Tel.
Main Office Fax:
Copy of the Original Certificate of Occupancy
Copy of all inspection sign off sheets
Copy of Roofing Contractor's warranty, notice of work completion and Landlord roofing
consultant sign off letter, if applicable.
Full set of Construction As Build Drawings
Air Balance Report
Completed Landlord Punchlist
List of all sub - contractors and contract amounts
Original notarized Unconditional Lien Waivers from all Sub - contractors
Original notarized Unconditional Lien Waiver from General Contractor
Exhibit E.2 Tabulation
TOTAL DEPOSIT :
TOTAL FINES & DEDUCTS:
TOTAL RETURN:
WesiRe1t
SHOPPING TO WN
Name:
Signature:
Date:
Westfield Corporation, Inc.
Revision date: 02105/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
Tenant Contractor Infraction Log - Page 1
Space No.:
Tenant Name:
Contractor
Address:
Main Office Tel.
Main Office Fax:
Exhibit E.2
Tenant Contractor Infraction Loq
Project Mgr.
Office Telephone:
Office Facsimile:
Cellular/ Pager:
Superintendent:
Field Telephone:
Cellular / Pager:
Wstflek[
SHOPPINGTOWN
Date:
Infraction:
Description:
Name:
Section #:
Fine Amount:
TC Signature:
Date:
Infraction:
Description:
Name:
Section #:
Fine Amount:
TC Signature:
Date:
Infraction:
Description:
Name:
Section #:
Fine Amount:
TC Signature:
Date:
Infraction:
Description:
Name:
Section #:
Fine Amount:
TC Signature:
Revision date: 02/05/08
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
a)
Unauthorized contractor completing roof work.
$1000.00
b)
Storage of materials, tools and /or debris in service corridors or other non-
authorized locations.
$250.00 / infraction or
day
c)
Use of non - approved carts on common area finishes.
$250.00 / infraction
d)
Use of vehicles in parking structures exceeding height and weight limitations.
$500.00 / infraction
e)
Parking of vehicles and /or equipment in restricted locations.
$200.00 + tow fees
f)
Use of non - approved sub - contractors for Fire Alarm work.
$500.00 / infraction
g)
Other non - listed violations.
$200.00 to $2000.00
Space No.:
Tenant Name:
Contractor
Address:
Main Office Tel.
Main Office Fax:
Company:
Name:
Signature:
Date:
Exhibit E.3
Fine Acknowledgement Affidavit
Project Mgr.
Office Telephone:
Office Facsimile:
Cellular/ Pager:
Superintendent:
Field Telephone:
Cellular / Pager:
The undersigned general contractor acknowledges and shall accept all liability for the workmanship,
conduct and actions of his /her employees, subcontractors and representatives. All employees,
subcontractors and representatives shall abide by the "Rules & Regulations" set forth by Landlord, copy of
which has been received and its receipt acknowledged by General Contractor.
General Contractor further acknowledges the following fines which may be imposed by Landlord for the
infraction of said Rules and Regulations by General Contractor and /or its employees, sub - contractors
and /or representatives.
Name:
Signature:
Date:
Westfield Corporation, Inc.
Westfie[c[
SHOPPING TOWN
Revision date: 02/05108
GC Rules & Regulations
Westfield Southcenter
{ Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor:
( 2007- 0 -05 DRAFT
Page 1 of 40
Rev.
Westfield:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
i -
W estfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor: I Westfield:
2007 -07 -05 DR `
Rev. - Page 2 of 40
HEATERS, PORTABLE 27
HEAVY, MATERIAL HANDLING AND EARTHMOVING EQUIPMENT 27
HELICOPTER LIFTS 28
HIGH VISIBILITY CLOTHING 28
HOUSEKEEPING 29
INTERNAL COMBUSTION EQUIPMENT 29
LADDERS 29
LEAD 30
LIQUIDS - CORROSIVE ACIDS AND CAUSTICS 30
LOCKOUT - TAGOUT / CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY 31
LOCATING UNDERGROUND UTILI FIES BEFORE EXCAVATING 31
MALL RING ROADS, MALL ROADS, MALL SIDEWALKS AND MALL PARKING AREAS 31
M/E/P SYSTEM IMPAIRMENT 32
MOTOR VEHICLES 32
OVERHEAD UTILITIES 32
PERMITS 32
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 33
PNEUMATIC TOOLS 33
POSTING REQUIREMENTS 33
POWDER - ACTUATED TOOLS 33
PROTECTION OF OPENINGS 34
PUBLIC CONTACT 34
PUBLIC PROTECTION PLAN 34
SANITATION 34
SCAFFOLDS 34
SMOKING AREAS 35
STEEL ERECTION 35
TAR AND MELTING POTS / HOT ROOFING 36
TILE FLOORING (STONE OR CERAMIC) 36
WARNING SIGNS 37
WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 37
V. ADVANCE PLANNING SUGGESTIONS 39
AUDIT OF TENANT GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS 40
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor L — __ Westfield:
2007- 0 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Page 3 of 40
I. INTRODUCTION AND BASIC ELEMENTS
SAFETY PHILOSPHY
Westfield is dedicated to the principle that a safe project is a successful and profitable project for our Centers,
our Guests, and our Tenants. We are committed to the safety of our project's workers, the surrounding
community, and the environment.
The Tenant General Contractor is responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the performance of their contract. All Employees share in that responsibility as
well, and are expected to work safely and to contribute to the safety of others.
Incident prevention contributes to the Contractor's well being by avoiding injury or illness to Contractor and
Subcontractor Employees, improving productivity, contributing to quality, and reducing costs. The community
also benefits directly from incident prevention efforts when potential damage to the environment or members of
the community is effectively managed.
To say that all incidents can be prevented is a realistic goal, not just a theoretical objective. It is achievable, in
part by eliminating sources of hazards and unsafe acts, but where this is not practical, by incorporating
measures such as safety engineering controls, proper training, safe operating procedures and personal
protective equipment to meet this goal.
In order for all Employees to understand this Safety Philosophy and to meet its expectations, both general and
specific training is required. That training is the responsibility of every level of supervision for each Contractor.
Safety training and the prevention of incidents are logical and appropriate parts of how we expect each the
operations of each Contractor and Subcontractor to be conducted.
OBJECTIVES
These Construction Safety Standards have been designed to establish the minimum standards of which the
Contractor's Injury and Illness Prevention Program / Safety Program must meet or exceed. The Safety
Standards contained in this document were developed as minimum guidelines to assist in the elimination or
reduction of hazards and risk associated with the construction project. These minimum guidelines also assist the
Contractor's efforts to prevent incidents, ensure the safety of the general public, reduce employee injuries,
prevent damage to property, promote efficiency, and effect savings by reduction of unplanned business
interruptions.
The Tenant General Contractor is responsible for the implementation and enforcement of the Safety Standards.
Westfield and its' authorized representatives will neither assume nor relieve any Contractor of their direct
responsibility for the safety and health of their employees and /or their Subcontractors, the protection of visitors
and the public, or the protection of equipment and property.
CONFLICT BETWEEN CODES AND SAFETY STANDARDS
In the case of conflict between codes, applicable standards, drawings and other Contract Documents, the most
stringent requirements shall govern. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Tenant Coordinator. The
Tenant Coordinator reserves the right to issue a final determination for conflicts.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Contractor:
Page 4 of 40
Westfield:
ABBREVIATIONS and ACRONYMS
Following is a list of acronyms and terms used in this document.
ACM Asbestos Containing Material
AHA Activity Hazard Analysis
AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction
ANSI American National Standards Institute
CDL Commercial Drivers License
Contractor As used herein, Contractor refers to all the Tenant General Contractor and their
Subcontractors of all tiers, as well as vendors and service providers at the
project site for the benefit of the Tenant General Contractor's work
CPM Contractor's Project Manager
CPR Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
Tenant General Contractor Where used, Tenant General Contractor is applicable to the responsibilities of
the Tenant's General Contractor
HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Air
LBP Lead Based Paint
LEL Lower Explosive Limit
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
MUTCD Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Federal OSHA or State Occupational Safety & Health agency
PACM Presumed Asbestos Containing Material
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
RPM Revolutions per Minute
UL Underwriters' Laboratories
USDOT United States Department of Transportation
WATCH Work Area Traffic Control Handbook
FORMS
Environmental Health & Safety Incident Report (TSFT -01). The Environmental Safety & Health Investigation
Report is to be completed by the Contractor for all applicable incidents and submitted to the Tenant Coordinator
within 24 hours of the incident.
•
Westfield Tenant Construction Safe Standards Contractor: Westfield:
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev. Page 5 of 40 [ _
Westfield — Tenant Construction
ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY INCIDENT REPORT (TSFT -01)
INDENTIFYING INFORMATION
Contractor
Project
Tenant General Contractor:
Contract Number:
Location Of Incident
Date Of Incident
Time (24 hour clock)
Date of Report
Injury ❑ Illness
• Property Damage
❑ Environmental Incident
Injured's Name
Property Damaged
❑ Haz Mat Spill ❑ Transportation
El Water Quality Q Tank Leak
❑ Waste Handling /Disposal ❑ IAQ
Fire /Smoke ['Other
Job Title
Time in Position
Nature of Damage /Loss
Nature of Injury /Illness
Cost ❑ Estimated j] Actual
Cost ❑ Estimated ❑ Actual
Part(s) of Body
Activity Being Performed
Object, Equipment, Substance Inflicting Damage
Nature of Damage / Loss
Object, Equipment, Substance Inflicting
Harm
Person in Control of Activity at Time of
Occurrence
Task/Activity Being Performed At Time of
Occurrence
Severity of the Injury (check all that apply)
Q Fatality ❑ Lost Workdays ❑ Restricted Duty [] OSHA Recordable [( Medical Treatment II First Aid Q Other
DESCRIPTION
Describe How the Incident Occurred
CAUSE
ANALYSIS
Describe The Events And Conditions That Contributed To The Accident
Ntrld
NOIIOV
What Corrective Actions Have Been Or Will Be Taken to Prevent Similar Occurrences? (include estimated time lines for completion)
REGULATORY
Has There Been Contact With A Government Agency Regarding This Incident? (if yes, describe)
Documentation Attached (list)
Prepared By:
Title:
Employer:
Phone No.
i
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor: I
2007 -07 -0 DRAFT
r --
(Rev.
Page 6 of 40
Westfield:
EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBERS
PROJECT NAME:
ADDRESS:
CROSS STREETS:
PHONE NUMBER:
AMBULANCE:
FIRE and RESCUE:
HOSPITAL NAME:
PHONE:
PHYSICIAN / CLINIC:
PHONE:
ALTERNATE:
PHONE:
POLICE:
OSHA:
MALL OFFICE:
MALL OPERATIONS:
MALL SECURITY:
MALL PARKING:
911 or
911 or
POST ON PROJECT BULLETIN BOARDS AND NEAR ALL PHONES.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Contractor:
Page 7 of 40
Westfield:
UTILITY EMERGENCY NUMBERS
PROJECT NAME:
ADDRESS
CROSS STREETS
PHONE #
GAS COMPANY
PHONE #
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PHONE #
WATER COMPANY:
PHONE #
PHONE COMPANY
PHONE #
TRAFFIC SIGNAL AGENCY
PHONE #
FIBER OPTIC COMPANY
PHONE #
CABLE COMPANY
PHONE #
TELEPHONE COMPANY
PHONE #
UTILITY LOCATING SERVICE:
PHONE #
PHONE #
PHONE #
POST ON PROJECT BULLETIN BOARDS AND NEAR ALL PHONES.
I . Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Page 8 of 40
Westfield:
GENERAL EMERGENCY PROCEDURES:
JOB SITE EMERGENCIES (FIRE, INCIDENTS, AND MEDICAL EMERGENCIES)
1. All job site emergencies must be reported immediately to the Tenant General Contractor and Tenant
Coordinator after any appropriate EMS notifications have been made.
2. Project Emergency Telephone Numbers and Utility Emergency Telephone Numbers are to be posted on the
job site bulletin board. The Tenant General Contractor is to complete these lists and distribute them to all
Contractors.
3. A local street map clearly identifying the project, the project address, the EMS response locations for the
Mall and construction site as determined in conjunction with the Mall and local EMS, the Evacuation Refuge
Area(s) and active entrances is to be created and maintained current by the Tenant General Contractor.
The map is to be posted on the job site bulletin board by the Emergency Telephone Numbers and
distributed to all Contractors.
4. The Tenant General Contractor and each Contractor are to have a sufficient number of Employees trained
in First Aid and CPR to provide for adequate coverage of the project.
5. In the event that there are no hard -wire ( "land line ") telephones available at the project site, the Tenant
General Contractor is to coordinate with local EMS to identify and post an alternate number (in addition to
911) to be used to contact emergency service providers via cell phone. This is necessary as dialing 911 on
a cell phone does not always provide a direct connection to local Emergency Services.
FIRE
1. Call 911 or the Local Fire Department/Agency. Provide the location of the fire and the appropriate project
entrance. Send an individual to meet EMS at the designated project entrance.
1.1. In case of fire in any building, evacuate the immediate area, and activate the fire alarm system (if
available).
1.2. For fire outside of buildings, evacuate the immediate area.
2. Notify the Tenant Coordinator, Tenant General Contractor and notify Mall Security
MEDICAL EMERGENCY
1. Call 911 or the local Emergency Medical Services. Provide the location of the incident and the appropriate
project entrance. Send an individual to meet EMS at the designated project entrance.
2. Provide prompt first aid from qualified persons to the injured to the extent possible.
3. Call or report the job site emergency immediately to the Tenant Coordinator and Tenant General Contractor.
4. Notify Mall Security
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
_2007 -07 -05 DRAFT - --
Rev.
Contractor: j Westfield:
Page 9 of 40
PROJECT CONDUCT AND SITE SECURITY INFORMATION
EMPLOYEE CONDUCT
1. All Employees must maintain professional behavior at all times. Horseplay, fighting, sexual harassment,
possession or use of alcohol and /or unauthorized drugs, possession of firearms and gambling are not
allowed and will result disciplinary action, up to and including immediate removal of the Contractor and /or
the Employee(s) from the site.
NEWS MEDIA AND CONTRACTOR CONDUCT
1. Contractor employees are to refer questions from news media personnel (radio, television, newspaper, etc.)
to the Tenant Coordinator.
2. Project incidents /incidents resulting in news media coverage (radio, television, newspaper, etc.) are to be
immediately reported to the Tenant Coordinator.
CONSTRUCTION VEHICLE PARKING
1. Employees are to park in authorized areas only. Do not block or obstruct intersections, fire lanes and fire
hydrants, traffic lanes, driveways or parking lot entrances. Private vehicles are not permitted on the project
except in authorized and designated parking areas. Offending vehicles may be towed without notice at the
vehicle owner's expense.
IDENTIFICATION
1. Contractors are to follow the security badge requirements of the Center where applicable.
2. Hard hats should display the Contractor's name and or logo.
3. Equipment and vehicles entering and /or working at the site should have the company name /identification
clearly displayed on the vehicle.
GENERAL MALL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
1. The Contractor is responsible for all dust, odor, and noise control arising from its' operations.
2. The Contractor will not interfere with the normal activity of the Mall.
3. The Contractor will not interfere with Mall traffic patterns or pedestrian paths.
1 Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards I Contractor: ( Westfield:
07
20-07 -05 FT DRA ._. �...._._._ .._
Rev. Page 10 of 40
II. RESPONSIBILITIES
SAFETY RESPONSIBILITIES
The Tenant General Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, supervising, and enforcing all
safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract for the on -site safety of
their Employees and Subcontractors performing work for the benefit of this project. This includes
responsibilities for vendors, delivery and transportation services, and service providers at the project location.
The Tenant General Contractor's senior -most manager / supervisor for the project is responsible for the
administration of the aforementioned safety precautions and programs, including the implementation and
enforcement of these Safety Standards for this project.
Each Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances, codes
and regulations affecting safety and health, including but not limited to the OSHA Standards.
Each Contractor shall comply with the most stringent of the following: applicable State OSHA Standards and
Safety Orders or Federal OSHA Standards (Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29), the Employer's Site - Specific
Safety Program, and Westfield's Tenant Construction Safety Standards.
TENANT SUBCONTRACTOR SAFETY RESPONSIBILITIES
Tenant Subcontractors are responsible for initiating, maintaining, supervising and enforcing the safety
requirements outlined by the Westfield Project Safety Standards and the Tenant General Contractor's Site -
Specific Safety Program, even though the requirements may be above and beyond the Subcontractor's own
safety policies and federal and state OSHA requirements.
TENANT GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE
1. The Tenant General Contractor shall designate a responsible and qualified English- speaking member of its
organization to serve as the Contractor's Safety Representative at the work site who has the following:
1A . Authority to enforce the Contractor's Safety Program,
1.2. Responsibility to assure compliance with the OSHA Act, and
1.3. Responsibility to identify and obtain correction of hazards.
2. The Tenant General Contractor shall designate a responsible and qualified English- speaking member (or
members) of its organization to serve as the Alternate Contractor's Safety Representative at the work site
when the Tenant General Contractor's Safety Representative is not on the project.
3. The Tenant General Contractor's Safety Representative shall have at minimum:
3.1. Authority to stop work when a serious safety hazard or imminent danger is identified.
3.2. Authority to implement corrective actions.
3.3. Relevant construction experience in the type of work the Contractor performs.
3.4. Current First Aid and CPR training from a recognized provider.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards - _ Contractor:
2007-07-05 DRAFT .
Rev. I Page 11 of 40
Westfield:
TENANT GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S OVERALL RESPONSIBILITIES
1. The Tenant General Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, supervising and enforcing all
safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the contract for the on -site safety of
their Employees and Subcontractors performing work for the benefit of this project. This includes
responsibilities for vendors, delivery and transportation services, and service providers at the project
location.
2. Each Contractor shall have an effective and written Site - Specific Safety Program in accordance with OSHA
requirements. This must include, but not be limited to, specific components that address existing and
predictable hazards applicable to the Contractor's work.
3. The Contractor is to ensure that all personnel are properly trained and instructed for all jobs that require
specific training and /or competency to meet all applicable OSHA regulations, state and federal law, and the
requirements herein.
4. Each Contractor is responsible for handling, on a daily basis, rubbish and debris generated by its work. The
Contractor must keep the work place clean.
5. The Tenant General Contractor is responsible for ensuring that corrective action is taken when Audits are
conducted.
6. The Tenant General Contractor will cooperate in inspections by OSHA and other regulatory agencies. The
Contractor is to notify the Tenant Coordinator of any and all such inspections. The Contractor shall submit
copies of all regulatory agency citations and notices to the Tenant Coordinator.
INCIDENT INVESTIGATION
1. All incidents and near - misses are to be investigated to determine the cause(s) and determine corrective /
preventative action(s). The TSFT -01 is to be used for all incidents. The Tenant General Contractor is to
provide immediate verbal notification of any incident to the Tenant Coordinator. The Tenant General
Contractor will furnish the Tenant Coordinator with a copy of the completed TSFT -01 no later than 24 hours
after knowledge of the incident or injury.
CONTRACTOR / SUBCONTRACTOR SAFETY NON - COMPLIANCE
1. The Tenant Coordinator reserves the right to stop any work activity imminently dangerous to life or health
until safety hazards are corrected. Such action does not replace or relieve the Contractor of their obligation
to provide a safe workplace, nor does such action give justification for an extension of contract time.
2. The Tenant Coordinator may require that a Contractor employee be excluded from the site for a designated
period for safety - related non - compliance. The removal procedure may be accelerated and /or expanded to
include removal of a Contractor's /Subcontractor's entire workforce where non - compliance is widespread, or
where the Contractor does not demonstrate good faith efforts. Such action does not replace or relieve the
Contractor of their obligation to provide a safe workplace.
3. Contractors and Employees may report legitimate unsafe actions /activities of other Contractors to the
Tenant Coordinator without fear of reprisal.
k Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
j Rev.
Contractor:
Page 12 of 40
Westfield:
IV. CONTRACTOR SAFETY STANDARDS
Following are the minimum safety requirements and guidelines for this project.
No attempt has been made to restate applicable OSHA, ANSI, NFPA, State /Federal Agency, or State and
Local standards in their entirety.
In some instances, the Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards are more stringent than the
applicable OSHA standards. In other instances due to variables in State OSHA programs, the applicable
State OSHA standards may be more stringent than the Safety Standards. The Contractor is reminded
that the most stringent requirement shall apply.
AIR TESTING EQUIPMENT
1. Approved air testing equipment shall be used to test utility holes, cable vaults, pits, confined spaces and
similar spaces for flammable, toxic, or oxygen deficient atmospheres. The Contractor is responsible for the
provision, maintenance, calibration and testing of said equipment.
2. Employees must be trained per manufacturer requirements on the use, limitations and alarm modes of each
air - testing device that they use.
3. Equipment must be carried with the Employee or placed immediately adjacent to the work area and set to
operate in a continuous monitoring mode. Employees must immediately leave a work area whenever an
equipment alarm sounds due to:
3.1. Low or high oxygen level (acceptable range is 19.5% to 23.5% oxygen).
3.2. Combustible gas detected above 10% lower explosive limit (LEL).
3.3. Set point for a toxic gas level is reached (e.g., 10 ppm hydrogen sulfide)
3.4. Sensor failure, a defect alarm, a low battery alarm or failure of the equipment.
ASBESTOS
1. Asbestos is to be handled only by qualified and certified Employers and Employees. Abatement
Contractors must be approved in accordance with applicable State, Federal, and Local requirements to
perform removal and disposal of asbestos containing material and encapsulation.
2. Contractors must determine the existence of asbestos content in buildings/ building materials PRIOR to any
construction, remodeling, or demolition activities.
3. Upon discovery of any asbestos containing materials (ACM) or presumed asbestos containing materials
(PACM), the Contractor shall stop work and notify the Tenant Coordinator.
4. The Contractor shall ensure Employees are trained in asbestos awareness to identify ACM and PACM.
5. All asbestos abatement/removal work must follow all regulations of OSHA, the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) or applicable state agency, and the applicable Air Quality Management District.
BARRICADES
1. Barricade performance and end product requirements may be specified by the Tenant Coordinator. The
Contractor is responsible to meet the performance and end product requirements.
2. The Contractor is not to destroy or otherwise displace temporary fencing, handrails, safety rails,
floor /roof /wall opening protection, or any other type of barricade. Contractor personnel found destroying or
( Westfield:
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor:
2007-07-05 DRAFT
Rev.
Page 13 of 40
displacing such protective devices may be removed from the project. Costs incurred by Owner or Tenant
Coordinator to repair /replace such protective devices will result in a deductive Change Order being filed
against the Contractor.
3. If the Contractor damages or removes a previously installed form of barricades, guardrails or fall protection
(floor hole cover, etc.) to perform its' work, Contractor is to provide appropriate fall protection for its'
employees to perform said work, and to provide appropriate fall protection for others when Contractor
leaves said work area. Contractor may be assessed charges plus penalties to replace barricades,
guardrails or fall protection it has removed or damaged.
4. Barricades must be suitable for the area of their use, and are required around excavations, holes or
openings in floor or roof areas, edges of roofs and elevated platforms, around certain types of overhead
work, and wherever necessary to warn or protect people against falling in, through or off. Barricades may
also be used to isolate people (such as employees of other crews or Contractors, other project / Owner /
Tenant Coordinator personnel, and the public) from work activities as required by the activity, potential
hazards created by the activity, or the location of the activity.
5. To ensure the safety of the general public, the Contractor (unless alternate arrangements are in effect) is to
provide and maintain adequate protection, such as chain link fences, gates and barricades, to separate
work areas from areas outside job site limits.
5.1. Barricades must be suitable for the area of use (i.e., blinker type barricade or protective barricade to
provide physical protection from falling).
5.2. Solid (e.g. plywood, drywall, etc.) barricades in public areas are not to have hardware, protrusions,
or irregular surfaces on their public- facing exterior, upon which a person could strike against, or
snag or catch clothing or body parts.
5.3. Barricades /fences are to be placed around all construction trenches as required to provide
adequate protection for the exposures present and foreseeable.
5.4. Portable fencing shall be installed around construction work areas, contractor storage areas, and
contractor's heavy equipment if they are not otherwise protected within the confines of the Project's
perimeter barricade.
5.5. Chain link fencing shall be free from barbs, icicles (excess galvanizing material that may form sharp
projections) or other projections that may cause injury.
5.6. Fencing must be in good repair and installed /braced to ensure stability of the fencing from being
knocked over by Employees, the general public, or the wind.
5.7. Base supports of portable fencing shall be installed /placed to eliminate tripping hazards when
fencing is placed adjacent to sidewalks and walkways.
BURNING, CUTTING, WELDING AND HOT WORK
1. The Tenant General Contractor shall have a Hot Work Program for fire prevention during hot work activities
that meets or exceeds the requirements of the AHJ or NFPA 51B-1999, "Standard for Fire Prevention
During Welding, Cutting and Other Hot Work ".
2. Hot work includes, but is not limited to, the following activities: grinding, cutting, welding, brazing or
soldering, heating, hot air welding or other operations that generate heat, flames, arcs, sparks or other
sources of ignition.
3. Prior to performing hot work, the Contractor shall evaluate the following: type of hot work to be performed,
site preparation, atmospheric conditions, use of appropriate personal protective equipment, and fire fighting
equipment. Site preparation should include a survey for the following: combustible materials; hazards
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Contractor: L
Page 14 of 40
Westfield:
posed by heat transfer; flammable, corrosive, or toxic residues; equipment linings; appropriate lock/tagout
application; and housekeeping.
4. An approved fire extinguisher and/or other fire protection equipment is to be provided by the Contractor for
each hot work operation in accordance with OSHA and local Fire Marshal / Fire Code requirements.
Equipment is to be located on the same elevation(s) of the work, and within 25 feet of the work,
5. The Contractor shall procure and post all permits necessary for hot work as required by the AHJ and/or the
Mall (contact the Tenant Coordinator to determine if there are Mall- specific requirements). The Tenant
General Contractor shall be provided with a copy of all such permits. A copy of all permits is to be posted in
the Tenant Space at all times hot work is taking place.
6. When air monitoring is required, the Lower Explosive Limit must be non - detectable (0% LEL), prior to any
type of burning, welding, or hot work being conducted by the Contractor. Air monitoring will be required
around or near any areas that may pose a potential fire or explosion threat, such as from flammable or
combustible vapors.
7. The Contractor is to provide appropriate shields to prevent others from viewing welding arcs.
CLOTHING / PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
1. The Contractor shall require each Employee, Agent, or Subcontractor to wear appropriate attire of a form in
accordance with the provisions of the Safety Standards, and exposures. Sleeved shirts that cover the
midriff and long pants must be worn at all times on the site. Sleeveless shirts and tank tops are not
permitted.
2. Professional Conduct:
2.1. Equipment Operators are prohibited from operating their equipment while conducting any (personal
or business) cellular telephone conversation.
2.2. Radios and other personal entertainment devices may be prohibited.
COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS, GAS CUTTING AND WELDING
1. All cylinders must be labeled as to the nature of their contents, and secured and transported in an upright
position at all times.
2. Oxygen and fuel gas cylinders must be separated at least 20 ft., or a 5 foot high barrier with a 1/2 hour fire
rating when in storage, and stored away from potential contact (a) that may rupture the tanks or (b) with
electricity.
3. Cylinder valves shall be turned to the off position if cylinders are left inactive for 30 minutes or longer.
4. Cylinders designed for valve protection caps must have the valve protection caps installed when in storage
or when being transported.
5. Cylinders, hoses, and fittings shall be checked for leaks and damage on a regular basis.
6. Cylinders shall not be taken into confined spaces.
7. Cylinder storage areas shall have appropriate warning signage and firefighting equipment.
8. Torches and hoses shall not be left connected to cylinders overnight or stored in unventilated gang boxes or
storage containers.
9. Flashback arrestors and check valves are to be installed on all oxy -fuel cutting rigs.
r Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards I Contractor: I _ ^ Westfield:
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev. Page 15 of 40
1---
CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
1. Concrete Construction
1.1. The creating Contractor must guard all protruding reinforcing steel or other similar projections to
eliminate impalement hazards.
1.2. Protective devices used on reinforcing steel are to meet the requirements of Cal /OSHA 8CCR1712.
A copy of 8CCR1712 is available from the Tenant Coordinator upon request.
2. Structural Concrete
2.1. The Contractor must not remove any forms or shoring until a determination has been made by the
testing lab and structural engineer that the concrete has gained sufficient strength to support its own
weight and that of superimposed Toads.
2.2. The Contractor must not place loads on any concrete structure until concrete has reached a
compressive strength predetermined by the structural engineer of record. The Tenant General
Contractor shall be the central point of contact for information regarding this item.
2.3. Where concrete shoring /reshoring is employed, a shoring /reshoring plan specific to the project shall
be available for review at the project.
2.3.1. Deviations from the shoring /reshoring plan will require the issuance of a new
shoring /reshoring plan.
2.3.2. The addition of superimposed Toads on the floor (such as aerial lifts, scissor lifts, and
other equipment and /or materials) not considered in the reshoring plan shall be
construed as a deviation from the plan.
3. Pouring and Pumping Operations
3.1. Permanent and temporary power lines shall be identified prior to the start of a concrete pour.
Appropriate safeguards shall be implemented for the pumping, pouring and finishing operations.
3.2. A site traffic control plan is required for concrete truck traffic and concrete pump locations. It is to
include provisions for concrete truck traffic routing and control, as well as pedestrian traffic routing
and control (if applicable). Trained spotters and Flaggers are to be used as necessary for worker
and public safety.
3.3. Employees involved in pouring and finishing activities shall have appropriate personal protection
equipment, including gloves, rubber boots, and eye protection.
3.4. Concrete truck washout shall be in an area acceptable to the Tenant Coordinator, and located out of
vehicular and pedestrian travel areas.
3.5. Diapers or the equivalent shall be provided for the pump and concrete trucks when the truck to
pump transfer occurs on a finished surface or in a public street or other public area.
4. Masonry Construction
4.1. Masonry walls shall be braced and /or supported as required by OSHA and /or local requirements.
4.2. Unauthorized personnel shall be prohibited from entering the work area.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor:
2007 07 -05 DRAFT
Rev. Page 16 of 40
Westfield:
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
1. The Contractor must abide by the applicable OSHA standards for all confined space entry operations and
furnish all appropriate personnel, equipment, and support.
2. All water feature vaults and similar vaults in existing Mall areas are deemed to be confined spaces for the
purposes of these Safety Standards.
3. Employees must be trained in the hazards of confined space work, including operating and rescue
procedures, the use of respiratory equipment, and instructions as to the hazards they may encounter.
4. The Contractor shall develop a written, understandable confined space operating and rescue procedure.
This procedure must be made available to all affected Employees.
5. The Contractor is required to provide all necessary entry- rescue equipment required for all entries into
confined spaces (tripod, full body harness, wristlets, lifeline or equivalent, etc.) as required by the applicable
Standard.
6. Prior to entry into a confined space, the Contractor shall ensure all lines that may convey flammable,
injurious, or incapacitating substances into the space are disconnected, blinded, or blocked off by other
positive means in accordance with Lockout/Tagout regulations.
7. Prior to each entry into confined space, the Contractor shall test the air with an appropriate device or
method for, at minimum: (1) oxygen content, (2) flammable gases and vapors, and (3) potential toxic air
contaminants. A written record is to be made and maintained for each confined space.
8. The confined space shall be emptied, flushed, or otherwise purged of flammable or injurious substances to
the extent feasible. The Contractor is required to provide the proper ventilation equipment.
9. Where a Standby Employee is required, the Standby Employee must have a valid certificate in First Aid and
CPR training.
10. Visual contact or two -way communication must be available with entrants at all times.
11. The Contractor must establish a means of communication with outside Emergency Services.
CONNECTIONS TO UTILITIES
1. The Contractor and /or Subcontractor shall not, make any temporary service connections to the Owner's
electrical, water, air or steam utilities without approval of the Owner or Tenant Coordinator.
CORE DRILLING and SAW CUTTING — ELEVATED SLABS
1. The Contractor is responsible to determine if the slab is post- tensioned. If the slab is post- tensioned, the
Contractor is responsible to procure x -ray services and provide evidence of the slab x -ray to the Tenant
Coordinator prior to the commencement of any drilling or cutting.
2. The Contractor is to provide appropriate safeguards for personnel, property and utilities under the floor
being impacted and on the floor /ground level below drilling and cutting activities.
CRANES, BOOM TRUCKS AND RIGGING
1. The term crane as used in this section shall be construed to include boom trucks and similar truck - mounted
cranes manufactured to meet the requirements of ANSI B30.5.
i Westfield Tenant Construction Safes Standards Contractor:
1 2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
ev. ! Page 17 of 40
Westfield:
2. Cranes and derricks shall not be used in lifting service until the equipment has been certified by an
approved certifying agent. Current annual and quadrennial (where required) inspection certificates shall be
maintained on each crane. Cranes that do not have evidence of an annual /quadrennial inspection will not
be permitted to operate.
2.1. Current daily and periodic inspection records shall be maintained on each crane.
2.2. Any crane or boom truck involved in an incident shall be re- inspected by an approved certifying
agent, and a new certificate of inspection issued prior to being returned to service. The Tenant
Coordinator may also request an inspection be performed at any time.
3. Only Employees authorized by the Contractor and trained, or known to be qualified, in the safe operation of
cranes or hoisting apparatus shall be permitted to operate such equipment. Where required, Operators
shall have valid evidence of current Licensing or Certification in accordance with State and Local
requirements. Operators not having such evidence where required shall not be permitted to operate
applicable machinery (except under terms and conditions prescribed for Trainees by applicable regulations).
4. All mobile cranes having either a maximum rated boom length exceeding 200 feet or a maximum rated
capacity exceeding 50 tons shall be equipped with an operable load indicating device or a load movement
device and an operating anti two -block device.
5. Cranes shall be equipped with a boom angle or a boom radius indicator and clearly legible load chart in
clear view from the Operator's position.
6. An effective, audible warning and operating signal device (such as a horn) shall be provided on the outside
of the crane. The controls shall be in easy reach of the Operator.
7. When required by the manufacturer's or certifying agent's instructions, outriggers shall be set so that wheels
or crawler tracks within the boundary of the outriggers shall be relieved of all weight by the outrigger jacks or
blocking.
8. Suitable blocking is to be provided under the crane's outriggers when a lift is performed from an asphalt
surface. (This requirement does not mean or imply that blocking is not required for other surfaces.)
9. The Contractor shall ensure that a qualified person visually inspects the crane, derrick, or hoist's controls,
rigging and operating mechanism prior to the first operation of any work shift. Records of daily inspections
by the Operator or other qualified person shall be maintained on the crane, and must be available for review
upon request.
10. Crane adjustments and repairs shall only be made by a qualified person.
11. Operations shall be conducted and the job controlled in a manner to prevent loads from being passed
directly over workers, occupied workspaces, or occupied passageways.
12. A qualified signal person shall be provided when the point of operation is not in full and direct view of the
Operator unless a signaling or control device is provided. Only one person shall be permitted to give signals
to the Operator. However, any employee involved in the operation may give a "stop" signal if such a signal
is warranted.
13. A legible chart depicting and explaining the system of crane signals used shall be conspicuously posted in
the vicinity of the hoisting operation.
14. No employee is permitted to ride on loads, hooks, or slings of any derrick, hoist, or crane.
15. Swing radius protection must be provided where persons may be caught between rotating parts and fixed
objects or non - rotating crane components.
Westfield Tenant Construction S afety Stand ards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT •
Rev.
— Contractor:
Page 18 of 40
Westfield:
16. Tag lines are to be used on all loads except where their use presents a greater hazard. They should be
insulated to prevent shock, and be free of knots or splices that may snag on an object.
17. Cranes, hoists, or derricks shall not be left unattended while the load is suspended unless the load is over
water, a barricaded area, or is blocked up or otherwise supported.
18. Before leaving the crane unattended, the Operator shall:
18.1. Land or properly secure any attached load
18.2. Set travel, swing, boom brakes, and other locking devices unless otherwise specified by the
certifying agents
18.3. Put controls in the "off' position, stop the engine, and secure the crane against accidental travel
19. In all operations where the weight of the load being handled is unknown, a qualified person shall determine
the magnitude of the load unless the crane is equipped with a load- indicating device.
20. The Contractor shall provide a qualified person to direct the lift. The qualified person shall see that the
crane is properly leveled for the work being performed and blocked where necessary and that the load is
well secured and properly balanced before it is lifted more than a few inches.
21. A designated person shall monitor the clearance between crane booms, load lines, and loads, and power
lines and alert the Operator when necessary. For power lines rated 50k V, or less, minimum clearance
between the lines and any part of the crane or load is 10 feet. For power lines rated over 50k V, minimum
clearance between the lines and any part of the crane or load shall be 10 feet plus 0.4 inch for every 1k V
over 50k V.
22. Ropes shall be inspected for proper lubrication, excessive wear, broken strands, etc..
23. Rigging, Slings and Hooks
23.1. Hooks shall have safety latches.
23.2. Hooks with cracks or deformation shall be removed from service.
23.3. Before each use, all slings, fastenings and attachments are to be inspected for damage or defects
by a qualified person. Damaged or defective items are to be removed from service.
23.4. Slings manufactured with a fold -back splice and field- fabricated slings are not permitted.
23.5. Slings shall have permanently affixed tags with the manufacturer's name or trademark and the
rated capacity.
CRANE OPERATOR LICENSING
Where applicable, Crane Operator licenses are to be checked prior to the operation of a crane at the project.
As of May 1, 2006, the following states require crane operators to be licensed:
California Connecticut Hawaii Massachusetts
Minnesota Montana Nevada New Jersey
Mew Mexico New York Oregon Rhode Island
Utah West Virginia
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT 1
Rev.
Contractor:
Page 19 of 40
Westfield:
As of May 1, 2006, the following cities require crane operators to be licensed:
Chicago, IL
Omaha, NE
Los Angeles, CA
Washington, DC
CRITICAL LIFTS (CRANES, BOOM TRUCKS, DERRICKS, ETC.)
1. A Critical Lift Plan shall be prepared by the Contractor for all lifts that:
1.1. exceed 75% of the lifting device's capacity as it is configured for that lift; or
1.2. are deemed a critical lift by the Owner or Tenant Coordinator by reason of potential negative
consequences to safety, structure, or schedule; or
1.3. involve two or more cranes or lifting devices.
New York, NY New Orleans, LA
2. A qualified person shall prepare the Critical Lift Plan. The qualified person preparing the plan may be the
crane Operator, lift supervisor, or rigger. The crane Operator, lift supervisor, and rigger shall participate in
the preparation of the plan. The plan shall be documented, and a copy provided to the Contractor and the
Tenant Coordinator. The plan shall be reviewed by, and signed by, all personnel involved with the lift.
2.1. The plan shall specify the exact size and weight of the load to be lifted and all crane and rigging
components that add to the weight. The manufacturer's maximum load limits for the entire range of
the lift as listed in the load charts shall also be specified.
2.2. The plan shall specify the lift geometry and procedures, including the crane position, height of the
lift, the load radius, and the boom length and angle, for the entire range of the lift.
2.3. The plan shall designate the crane Operator, lift supervisor, and rigger, and state their qualifications.
2.4. The plan will include a rigging plan that shoes the lift points and describes rigging procedures and
hardware requirements.
2.5. The plan will describe the ground conditions, outrigger or crawler track requirements, and, if
necessary, the design of mats, necessary to achieve a level, stable foundation of sufficient bearing
capacity for the lift.
2.6. The plan will list environmental conditions under which lift operations are to be stopped.
2.7. The plan will specify coordination and communication requirements for the lift operation.
2.8. For tandem or tailing crane lifts, the plan will specify the make and model of the cranes, the line,
boom and swing speeds, and requirements for an equalizer beam.
DEMOLITION
1. Utility companies shall be notified, and all utility service shut off, capped, or otherwise controlled, at the
building or curb line before starting demolition. The Tenant General Contractor is responsible to verify that
these actions have been taken.
1.1. The Contractor shall develop an Utility Emergency Call List using the SFT -24 for all known utility
owners prior to the start of demolition activities.
1.2. A site plan shall be marked up prior to the start of demolition to show the locations of known utilities,
and the nearest identified shut -off valves /controls. This plan shall be available in the Contractor's Site
Office. The Tenant Coordinator shall be provided with a copy.
—�
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards ( Contractor: Westfield:
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Page 20 of 40
Prior to the start of demolition operations, an engineering survey shall be made by a competent person to
determine the condition of the structure, as well as the possibility of unplanned collapse of any portion of the
structure during and /or due to demolition operations and preventative actions that may be required to avoid
an unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure. The survey is to be in writing.
3. Existing alarm systems shall be identified and taken out of service prior to commencing demolition
operations. Alarm service providers and monitors shall be notified that the alarm will be taken out of service
before taking the system out of service.
4. The Contractor shall determine if any type of hazardous chemicals, gases, explosives, flammable materials,
or similarly dangerous substances have been used in any pipes, tanks, or other equipment on the property.
When the presence of hazardous substances is apparent or suspected, testing and purging shall be
performed and the hazard eliminated prior to demolition.
5. During demolition, continuing inspections shall be made as the work progresses to detect hazards resulting
from weakened, load burdened, or deteriorated floors or walls or loosened materials. The Contractor shall
ensure that floor load limits are not exceeded during demolition operations.
6. Adequate dust control measures shall be provided during demolition and all related operations.
7. The Contractor shall ensure safe passage of persons around the area of demolition. Operations are to be
conducted to prevent damage to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and people.
8. The Contractor is to provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or supports as may be required to prevent
movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished, and to adjacent facilities.
DRY CUTTING OF CONCRETE, MASONRY AND STONE PRODUCTS
1. Dry cutting, grinding, and profiling of concrete, masonry and stone products shall be prohibited except in
instances where it is determined in a manner consistent with applicable safety and health standards that the
use of water in the cutting, grinding or profiling is not feasible.
2. If it is determined that the use of water is infeasible:
2.1. The Contractor shall use engineering and work practice controls to control the dust, such as a
vacuum with a high efficiency particulate air filter (HEPA), or other dust control system;
2.2. Any dry cutting which occurs shall be done in a designated area away from other employees if
possible; and
2.3. The Contractor shall provide affected Employees with appropriate respiratory protection as part of a
respiratory protection program in accordance with applicable OSHA standards.
ELECTRICAL
1. All temporary power panels are to be properly covered. All circuits must be clearly labeled.
2. The Contractor is to supply ground fault circuit interrupters ( "GFCI ") for all temporary electrical wiring cords
and equipment. GFCI devices shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's requirements, and test
records are to be maintained. GFCI devices with an automatic reset feature are not permitted.
3. Temporary lighting is to be mounted at least eight (8) feet above the working level and is not to be
suspended by its' extension /power cord unless the cord and light are designed for this means of
suspension.
4. Temporary lighting must be equipped with guards to prevent contact with the bulb.
_ Westfield Tenant C Safety Standards 1 Contractor:
2007 -07 -0 D RAFT
i Rev. 1 Page 21 of 40
5. Extension cords must be at minimum 12- gauge, three -wire hard service cords.
6. Power tools must be double insulated or properly grounded, and inspected prior to use.
7. The Contractor must properly tagout and /or lockout any equipment within their responsibility when
LockoutiTagout is required. Control of the lock and /or tag is also the Contractor's responsibility.
8. The Contractor shall coordinate instances that require multi - Employer lockout /tagout activities involving their
devices /equipment.
9. Ground pins shall not be removed from electrical cords.
10. Damaged or defective tools and cords shall be removed from service.
11. Energized panels are to have the approved covers installed at all times unless a qualified electrician is
performing work in the panel.
12. Doors to energized electrical rooms are to be locked unless a qualified electrician is working in the room and
all live parts are appropriately guarded.
ELEVATING WORK PLATFORMS AND AERIAL DEVICES
1. Only authorized and trained personnel shall operate an aerial device or elevating work platform.
2. Elevating work platforms and aerial devices shall be inspected in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions prior to each shift, and as needed throughout the shift.
3. Employees shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket or platform or use planks, ladders, guardrails or
other devices to gain greater height.
4. Elevating work platforms and aerial devices are not to be used for lifting and hoisting materials unless such
activity is permitted by the manufacturer.
5. Controls shall be plainly marked as to their function and guarded to prevent accidental operation.
6. Tie off to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working from an aerial device is not permitted.
Aerial baskets or platforms shall not be supported by adjacent structures when workers are on the platform
or in the baskets while in an elevated position.
7. Where required, personnel in an aerial device shall be secured to the identified anchorage point through the
use of a full body harness and lanyard for fall protection.
8. All safety chains and gates are to be installed /closed as required by the manufacturer's instructions.
EMERGENCY ACTION / EVACUATION PLAN
1. The Tenant General Contractor is responsible for the development of a project -wide emergency action plan
that shall take into account probable and possible emergency situations. This plan is to include appropriate
signage for the site.
2. Each Contractor is to develop a written job- specific emergency action plan that shall take into account
probable and possible emergency situations specific to their operations. This plan shall be shared with and
coordinated with the Tenant General Contractor. The Plan is to be revised as needed throughout the
course of the project to reflect changed conditions.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards j Contractor:
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT 1
Rev. Page 22 of 40
Westfield:
3. At minimum, the Plan is to contain the following:
3.1.0. Project site map.
3.1.1. Street map of immediate area showing the project location. The map must clearly identify one -
way and dead -end streets.
3.1.2. Emergency notification list and emergency notification procedures.
3.1.3. Evacuation procedures, including the evacuation route and evacuation refuge area.
3.1.4. Map and directions to the designated Clinic(s) and Hospital(s).
EMERGENCY CONTACT LIST
1. The Tenant General Contractor shall provide the Tenant Coordinator with an Emergency Contact List.
Contractors shall provide the Tenant General Contractor a list specific to their firm. This list shall include 24-
hour contact information for key project personnel. The Contractor shall maintain this list throughout the
duration of the contract, and provide a revised copy when made necessary by changes to personnel or their
contact information.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
1. Spills of hazardous materials (including cutting oil, fuel, solvents, antifreeze etc.) must be reported
immediately to the appropriate regulatory agencies and /or to the Tenant Coordinator. The party responsible
for the spill is responsible for the cleanup costs.
2. Secondary Containment: Cutting equipment must have secondary containment (drip pans, sandboxes).
Drums, fuel storage tanks /areas, and other tanks /containers must have secondary containment.
3. Containers must be kept in good condition, and appropriate for the materials to be stored in them.
4. Containers must be labeled with their contents and precautions for use.
5. Containers containing hazardous waste must be properly stored and labeled as "Hazardous Waste" in
addition to listing their contents on the label.
6. Weekly inspections must be performed by the Contractor to assure compliance with this section.
7. The Creating Contractor is responsible for proper disposal of its hazardous wastes unless otherwise
addressed in the Contract. A copy of the completed Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest must be provided
to the Tenant General Contractor (if applicable) and Tenant Coordinator.
EQUIPMENT / TOOLS
1. Contractor equipment and tools must be in proper working condition and routinely (i.e. daily or prior to use)
inspected for defects. Any equipment or tool found to be damaged or defective must be removed from
service and repaired before it can be returned to service.
2. Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed with respect to equipment/tool operation, guarding, and training
requirements. Tools and equipment are to be used only by trained and authorized employees.
3. Proper guards or shields must be installed as required by the manufacturer on all power tools before use.
4. All guards must be manufactured by and /or approved by the manufacturer for that particular piece of
equipment. The practice of "wedging or pegging" guards on circular saws or other equipment and rendering
the guard non - functional is not permitted.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor:
2007 -07 -05 D RAFT
Rev. Page 23 of 40
Westfield:
5. No internal combustion vehicle or machinery is to be operated inside structures unless proper engineering
controls have been implemented to minimize carbon monoxide levels. In such cases where vehicles or
machinery are operated inside structures, carbon monoxide levels shall be monitored as often as required
by the Contractor to ensure a safe work environment. Any required ventilation is to be provided by the
Contractor.
EXCAVATIONS
1. The Contractor shall obtain a permit for excavation work where required by the AHJ.
2. Trenching or excavating activities must be under the supervision of a Competent Person. A Competent
Person must inspect all excavations in accordance with OSHA requirements and be present when
excavation work or work in excavations is taking place.
3. Excavated soils, materials or equipment are to be kept at least two feet from the edge of the excavation.
4. The Contractor must provide appropriate barricades to protect others from falling into the excavation.
5. Ladders or other means of egress must be provided by the Contractor for access and spaced within 25 feet
of any worker inside the excavation when the depth of the excavation exceeds 4 feet (48 ").
6. Walkways are to be provided over any excavation or trench point that Employees may need to cross. If the
potential fall distance exceeds 6', the walkway must have a complete guardrail system.
7. Where pedestrian traffic must be accommodated over excavations, suitable non -skid plates or other suitable
material capable of withstanding at least twice the maximum intended load must be provided to serve as a
pedestrian runway for safe passage. The edges of the runway shall be tapered to minimize trip hazards. In
the alternative, the approach to the runway shall be tapered with a suitable and durable material or the
runway set into the surface to minimize trip hazards.
8. Rescue equipment must be provided by the Contractor (full body harness and lifeline, breathing apparatus,
basket stretcher, etc.) when hazardous atmospheric conditions are expected to exist.
FALL PROTECTION
1. Where a fall hazard exists, efforts must be made to eliminate the hazard; provide protection against the
hazard; or establish alternative methods to control the hazard.
2. Where a fall hazard cannot be avoided, fall protection shall be provided and used at all times ( "100% Fall
Protection ") by all employees exposed to a fall hazard of six (6) feet or more.
3. Personal Fall Arrest and Restraint Systems
3.1. The only allowable type of body restraint system allowed is a full body harness with a lifeline,
lanyard, and deceleration device. Safety belts are not permitted for any application.
3.2. The use of non - locking snap -hooks is prohibited.
3.3. A Personal Fall Restraint System shall not allow the Employee to fall. Anchorage points used for
fall restraint shall be capable of supporting 4 times the intended load.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPAIRMENT / SHUTDOWN
1. Fire alarm system impairment/shutdown must be coordinated with the Tenant Coordinator and Mall
Operations prior to any such activity. The AHJ may also have coordination and notification requirements.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
E 2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
1 Rev.
Contractor:
Page 24 of 40
Westfield:
2. Fire alarm system impairment/shutdown is subject to the requirements and codes of the AHJ, as well as the
requirements and procedures of the Mall.
FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION
1. The Contractor must develop a fire protection program to be followed throughout all phases of construction
which includes the most stringent of OSHA and AHJ requirements.
2. Fire fighting equipment must be conspicuously located or conspicuously marked.
3. A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 2A, shall be provided for each 3,000 square feet of floor area and
fraction thereof. Floors less than 3, 000 square feet require at least one fire extinguisher. The clear and
unobstructed travel distance from any point of the protected area to the nearest fire extinguisher shall not
exceed 75 feet.
4. In multi -story buildings, at least one fire extinguisher shall be provided on each floor and located adjacent to
the stairway.
5. A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 10B, shall be provided within 50 feet of wherever more than 5 gallons
of flammable or combustible liquids are stored.
6. Portable fire extinguishers shall be fully charged, inspected monthly and serviced annually.
7. Indoor storage of more than 25 gallons of flammable liquids shall be in a NFPA approved storage cabinet.
Not more than 120 gallons of Class I, II, or IIIA liquids may be stored in a storage cabinet.
8. A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 20 -B, shall be located outside of, but not more than 10 feet from the
door opening of storage rooms.
9. A portable fire extinguisher rated at least 10B:C shall be kept near operations where fuel gas
cylinders /bottles are being used.
10. Portable fire extinguishers must be readily available for use where temporary heating devices are used.
11. "No Smoking" signs shall be posted as required by regulation, code, operations or material exposures.
12. The Owner and Tenant Coordinator reserve the right to designate no smoking areas on the project.
13. Visqueen, tarpaulins and similar items are to be made of fire- retardant materials.
FIRE SPRINKLER IMPAIRMENT / CHARGING / RECHARGING
1. Sprinkler impairment/shutdown must be coordinated with the Tenant Coordinator and Mall Operations prior
to any such activity. The AHJ may also have coordination and notification requirements.
2. Sprinkler impairment/shutdown is subject to the requirements and codes of the AHJ, as well as the
requirements and procedures of the Mall.
3. The Contractor is responsible for any delays and damages caused by draining and charging /recharging
activities.
FIRST AID
1. Each Contractor is to provide a suitable number of First -Aid and CPR trained personnel.
2. Each Contractor is to provide at least one appropriately sized, stocked and weatherproof first -aid kit.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor:
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev. Page 25 of 40
Westfield:
3. Eye wash facilities shall be provided by the Contractor when required by the MSDS or operation.
FLAMMABLES AND COMBUSTIBLES
1. The Contractor is required to supply sufficient fire protection devices (extinguishers, etc.) for the immediate
work area where flammable and combustible material is stored or used.
2. All Contractor flammable and combustible liquids must be stored in approved metal safety containers.
3. All containers must be properly labeled and stored when not in use.
4. Plastic cans or containers are not allowed for flammable or combustible liquid storage.
5. The Contractor shall identify non - compatible materials in advance, and provide for separate storage as
required.
6. Interior storage in excess of 25 gallons of flammable liquids or 60 gallons of combustible liquids shall be
within cabinets constructed to the requirements of NFPA 30.
7. All outside storage areas must be at least 20 feet from any building.
8. Exterior storage areas and storage tanks are to have adequate physical protection against vehicle damage.
9. For roof work, (a) no more than a one -day supply of flammables may be placed on the roof during working
hours, (b) all flammables must be removed from the roof at the end of each workday by the Contractor, and
(c) at least two extinguishers appropriate for the type and quality of flammable materials present must be
provided if flammables are present.
10. Flammables and combustibles must be kept away from sparks, heaters, and other heat sources.
FORKLIFTS (INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS AND TRACTORS)
1. Only drivers authorized by the Contractor and trained in the safe operations of industrial trucks shall be
permitted to operate forklifts.
2. All forklifts, industrial trucks and tractors shall be equipped with an audible back -up alarm which can be
clearly heard above the surrounding noise level from a distance of 200 feet (Cal /OSHA) and /or above the
ambient noise level.
3. The rated capacity shall be displayed on the vehicle and readily visible to the Operator.
4. No riders shall be permitted on vehicles unless the vehicle is equipped with adequate seating.
5. Employees shall not ride on, or be elevated on, the forks of lift trucks.
6. Industrial lift trucks may be used to elevate Employees in accordance with applicable OSHA Standards
using appropriate personnel platforms.
7. Employees shall not be allowed to stand, pass, or work under the elevated portion of an industrial truck,
loaded or empty.
8. Operators shall inspect the vehicle prior to the start of the shift, and as required throughout the shift.
9. The driver shall slow down and sound the horn at crossings and locations where vision is obstructed.
10. Grades shall be ascended or descended slowly.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007- -07 -05 DRAFT
t . Rev.
•
Page 26 of 40
Westfield:
11. The forks shall always be carried as low as possible.
12. When leaving a vehicle unattended, the power shall be shut off, brakes set, the mast brought to the vertical
position, and forks left in the down position.
HAZARD COMMUNICATION
1. The Tenant General Contractor shall maintain (a) a copy of all Material Safety Data Sheets, and (b)
chemical inventory lists, for all hazardous substances used at the jobsite by their firm, as well as for all
hazardous substances used at the jobsite by all Subcontractors regardless of tier.
2. Each Contractor must have a job site binder which contains at minimum the following items:
2.1. Their written Hazard Communication Program.
2.2. A chemical inventory listing all hazardous materials brought onto or used on the project site by the
Employer.
2.3. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS's) for all hazardous materials used on the project site.
3. The Contractor shall ensure that Employees are trained in the safe use of the materials that they are
working with.
4. The Contractor shall ensure that all containers are properly labeled as to their contents, including, but not
limited to, water, gas and diesel containers.
HEATERS, PORTABLE
1. All heaters must be Factory Mutual and /or Underwriters Laboratory approved.
2. The Contractor must notify the Tenant General Contractor and Tenant Coordinator prior to using liquid /gas
fueled heaters. Use of liquid /gas fueled heaters inside of buildings requires Tenant Coordinator approval.
Such approval does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for the maintenance and safe operation
of said heater(s), including air monitoring and ventilation as may be required.
3. Tent Heater use — basic requirements:
3.1. Use only in tents made of fire resistant material.
3.2. Avoid contact with heating elements or other hot parts.
3.3. Keep flammable and combustible materials and clothing away from hot equipment.
3.4. Do not use heaters in a utility hole or in a tent that covers a utility hole.
3.5. Ensure adequate ventilation is provided when using a tent.
3.6. Secure at least one fire extinguisher within the tent in an accessible location.
HEAVY, MATERIAL HANDLING AND EARTHMOVING EQUIPMENT
1. Equipment shall be maintained in good working order, and inspected prior to each shift.
2. All vehicles shall have operable brake lights.
3. All vehicles shall be equipped with an adequate audible warning device (horn) at the Operator's station.
Rev.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
' 2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
I— Contractor: 1 Westfield:
Page 27 of 40 1
4. All vehicles must have a back -up alarm audible above the surrounding noise level for a distance of 200 feet
(Cal /OSHA) and /or above the ambient noise level.
5. All vehicles with cabs shall be equipped with windshields and powered wipers
6. Cracked or broken windshields shall be promptly replaced.
7. Windshields and mirrors shall be kept clean and clear such that vision is not compromised or obstructed.
8. Seat belts with proper anchorage points shall be installed in all haulage, earth moving, and material
handling heavy equipment. The Contractor shall ensure use of seat belts as required.
9. Trucks with dump bodies shall be equipped with positive means of support (a.k.a. "safety prop ") to prevent
accidental lowering of the body while maintenance or inspection work is being done.
10. All rubber -tired motor vehicle equipment shall be equipped with fenders.
11. All vehicles in use shall be inspected at the beginning of each shift in accordance with the instructions of the
manufacturer.
12. Before starting the motor, the Operator shall check to make sure that all operating controls are in the neutral
position.
13. Before starting the equipment, or before moving the equipment after re- entering the cab, the Operator shall
walk entirely around the equipment to make sure no other personnel, equipment or material will be struck by
the equipment.
14. At no time shall a piece of equipment be left unattended while the motor is running.
15. Block or chock wheels when parking on inclines, or stopping to load /discharge on inclines.
16. Machines shall be operated at speeds and in a manner consistent with conditions on the project.
17. No employee other than the Operator shall ride on equipment unless proper seating is provided.
18. During refueling operations, smoking is prohibited and engines are to be turned off.
19. Unattended equipment must be left in a secure area not accessible to members of the public or
unauthorized third parties. Keys shall be removed from all unattended equipment.
20. Spotters and /or Flaggers must be used when the equipment Operator's view is obstructed, whether moving
forward or backward.
HELICOPTER LIFTS
1. Helicopter lifts are to be performed in accordance with the Westfield Helicopter Lift Planning and Safety
Guidelines, as well as all applicable regulatory requirements.
HIGH VISIBILITY CLOTHING
1. All personnel exposed to vehicular and equipment traffic on the project site, such as during site work, utility
installation and paving operations, shall wear a safety vest or similar bright colored shirt.
2. All personnel exposed to vehicular and equipment traffic on active streets, roadways and parking lots shall
wear Class II (for Class I and Class II exposures) or Class III safety vests and high visibility / reflective
clothing as required by the exposure and applicable requirements.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Contractor: ' Westfield:
Page 28 of 40
HOUSEKEEPING
1. All construction materials must be stored in an orderly manner.
2. All exits and access ways must be kept unobstructed.
3. All Contractor work areas must be cleaned daily and maintained free of debris and lunch /break trash.
4. The Contractor is not permitted to use Mall dumpsters or compactors.
5. Dumpsters that are accessible to the public are to have lockable covers installed, and are to be kept
covered when not in use.
6. The Contractor is responsible for the proper disposal of construction materials and debris generated by their
activities in accordance with the instructions provided on product Material Safety Data Sheets.
7. Puncture hazards (nails, staples, fasteners, etc.) created by stripped formwork, scrap lumber, pallets,
shipping materials, etc. shall be eliminated or controlled by the creating Contractor.
8. Metal containers with covers must be provided for disposal of oily and paint soaked rags.
9. Emergency exits must be available. Panic hardware, where present, must remain unobstructed.
10. Walkways and sidewalks must be kept free of construction materials, debris, dirt, tools and extension cords.
11. Where steel plates are used to bridge excavations or other similar type construction activities in walkways or
sidewalks, the leading edges of the steel plates must be tapered or feathered with temporary asphalt or
other suitable materials to prevent trip hazards.
12. Dumpsters are to be located in an area inaccessible to the public to control attractive nuisance concerns
and maintain a positive public image. If dumpsters are accessible to the public, then the dumpster is to
have a lockable lid or cover that is secured when the dumpster is not in use.
INTERNAL COMBUSTION EQUIPMENT
1. No internal combustion vehicle, equipment or machinery is to be operated inside enclosed structures unless
proper engineering controls have been implemented to minimize carbon monoxide levels. In such cases
where vehicles or machinery are operated inside structures, carbon monoxide levels are to be monitored by
the Contractor as often as provided to ensure a safe work environment. The Contractor is to supply any and
all ventilation required.
LADDERS
1. The following types of ladders are prohibited: Type II, Type III, aluminum and metal.
2. The Contractor shall provide a training program for each employee using ladders and stairways, as
necessary. The program shall enable each employee to recognize hazards related to ladders and stairways,
and train each employee in the procedures to be followed to minimize these hazards.
3. Broken or defective ladders must be immediately removed from service.
4. Employees must maintain a 3 -point contact while climbing ladders.
5. Job -Made ladders shall be constructed in accordance with OSHA provisions.
6. Extension Ladders
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor:
2007 -0 AFT
7 -05 DR 1. - -.. _.... .
Rev. — . _ .. _ _ Page 29 of 40
6.1. Portable ladder feet shall be placed on a substantial base.
6.2. Straight and extension ladders must be tied off or secured to prevent displacement.
6.3. No more than one person is allowed on a ladder unless the ladder is built for multiple users.
6.4. Ladders are not to be used for braces, workbenches, or any other purpose other than climbing.
6.5. All straight and extension ladders must be equipped with nonskid safety feet.
6.6. Ladders must extend no less than 36 inches above their upper landing.
6.7. Ladders shall be used at such a pitch that the horizontal distance from the top support to the foot of
the ladder is about one - quarter of the working length of the ladder (a 1:4 base:height ratio).
7. Step Ladders
7.1. Stepladders must be fully open and the spreader set in the open and locked position.
7.2. The top two rungs and top cap are not to be used as steps.
7.3. Do not exceed the designated weight capacity.
7.4. No more than one person is allowed on a ladder unless the ladder is built for multiple users.
8. All types of ladders must be inspected at least daily for:
8.1. cracks, splits, splinters, and decay.
8.2. protruding nails and loose rivets.
8.3. loose, bent or broken braces, tie rods, guide irons, locks, pulleys and strand hooks.
8.4. broken, worn or defective spurs and pads.
LEAD
1. The Contractor shall identify any Lead Based Paint (LBP), sheet lead, or other lead containing products
within the proposed scope of work PRIOR to any construction, remodeling, or demolition activities.
2. The Contractor shall arrange for disposal of the hazardous waste stream (e.g., paint chips), through an
approved waste disposal facility and follow applicable regulatory requirements.
3. All Employees and supervisors who perform lead abatement work shall have a current training certificate by
an approved trainer where required by law or regulation.
LIQUIDS - CORROSIVE ACIDS AND CAUSTICS
1. Emergency eyewash and /or shower facilities must be provided by the Contractor when working with acids
and caustics in accordance with the requirements of the MSDS.
2. Proper personal protection used is to be in accordance with the MSDS and /or manufacturer's usage
instructions.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor Westfield:
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Page 30 of 40
LOCKOUT - TAGOUT / CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY
1. The Contractor's written Lock - out/Tag -out program for the control of hazardous energy must meet or exceed
OSHA standards.
2. Equipment, energized systems, and pressurized systems shall be completely de- energized before
beginning the Lock- ouUTag -out procedure and subsequent cleaning, servicing, or adjusting operations.
3. Moveable parts shall be mechanically blocked or locked out prior to cleaning, servicing, or adjusting
operations. Equipment that has lockable controls or that is readily adaptable to lockable controls shall be
locked out or positively sealed in the off position.
4. Accident prevention signs or tags shall be placed on the controls of equipment, machines, and prime
movers during repair work.
5. In multiple lockout situations, each Contractor must affix their own lock and tag.
6. Locks and /or tags must be removed at the end of the job by the originator. Never remove another person's
tag or lock to operate a switch, valve, or device.
LOCATING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES BEFORE EXCAVATING
1. The Contractor must locate buried utilities before excavating or boring. Prior to excavation or horizontal
boring, all known owners of underground facilities in the area shall be notified by calling the appropriate One
Call Notification System, 811, or AHJ.
2. The nearest shut off valve or control point for all known utilities shall be identified on a site plan maintained
by the Tenant General Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall check the entire job site for visual signs of substructures. This includes such items as
manhole covers, water meter boxes, ditch lines, pavement patches, previous location marks, pole risers,
and the obvious absence of overhead utilities.
4. The Contractor must expose utilities and substructures by hand after approximate locations are determined.
The Contractor shall be careful not to damage the utility or substructure during hand locating efforts.
5. The Contractor shall be aware of the possibility of joint use of an excavation /trench for power, telephone,
gas, fiber optics, cable, etc. Joint use may result in these utilities being at different elevations within the
same excavation /trench.
MALL RING ROADS, MALL ROADS, MALL SIDEWALKS AND MALL PARKING AREAS
1. Contractor vehicles, including delivery vehicles, are not to be left unattended in Ring Roads and Mall Roads.
2. Contractor vehicles and delivery vehicles in Mall Roads are to have appropriate traffic control provisions in
place, including Flaggers where required.
3. Contractor equipment and materials are not to be left in Mall Parking Areas and Mall Sidewalks.
4. Areas of the Mall Parking may be designated for Contractor use. Such areas are to be secured against
public access with appropriate barricades.
5. Contractors impairing passage on Mall Sidewalks must provide alternative safe access for pedestrian traffic.
6. Contractors are to follow Mall traffic rules.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07-05 DRAFT
Rev.
Contractor:
Page 31 of 40
M /E /P SYSTEM IMPAIRMENT
1. The impairment of any mechanical, electrical or plumbing system must be coordinated with the Tenant
Coordinator and Mall Operations. Where applicable, Mall requirements for the control of these systems and
the control of hazardous energy will govern such operations in addition to applicable regulatory
requriements.
MOTOR VEHICLES
1. Drivers on the project site and Mall property shall obey speed and traffic signage and laws.
2. Drivers shall check the mechanical condition of vehicles used on the project at least daily.
3. Drivers are required to observe the "right of way" rule. Yield to other drivers whose driving actions demand
the right -of -way. Pedestrians are also deemed to have the right of way.
4. Employees driving and riding in Contractor vehicles must wear seat belts.
5. Block or chock vehicle wheels when parking on inclines, or loading /discharging on inclines.
6. All vehicles must be shut off when unoccupied.
7. Parking shall be in specified areas only. Do not block entrances or park in reserved spaces.
8. The Contractor is responsible for the stability of any material being hauled.
9. Personnel are not allowed to ride in the open bed of a pickup truck.
10. Unauthorized passengers shall not be transported in any vehicle or on any equipment at any time.
OVERHEAD UTILITIES
1. The Tenant General Contractor shall identify all overhead utilities on the property prior to the start of work.
2. The Tenant General Contractor shall identify the voltage carried by each power line, and identify the
minimum required clearances prior to commencing work in the vicinity of the line. Identifications of all lines
(including those within 45' of the site perimeter) and minimum clearances shall be documented on a site
plan that is made available to all Contractors, vendors and suppliers. Temporary utilities shall be added to
the site plan as required.
3. Proper distances must be maintained from all overhead power lines, such as by the use of a signal person.
4. A minimum clearance distance of 10 (ten) feet shall be maintained by apparatus or equipment from power
lines of 50Kva or less.
5. Warning signs are to be posted where overhead power lines are present to warn drivers and operators of
the presence of overhead power lines.
PERMITS
1. Unless otherwise relieved via contract provisions, each Contractor shall obtain required permits pertinent to
the safety of employees and operations.
2. Where copies of permits are not required to be submitted to the Tenant Coordinator, permits shall be
available for review at the job site upon request of the Tenant Coordinator.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Contractor:
Page 32 of 40
Westfield:
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
1. The Contractor shall ensure that employees are trained in the proper use, care and sanitation, and
limitations of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) in accordance with applicable standards and
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
2. Contractors are required to assess the workplace to determine if hazards that require the use of personal
protective equipment are present or are likely to be present.
3. Contractors must select and have affected Employees use properly fitted personal protective equipment
(PPE) suitable for protection from existing hazards.
4. All persons must wear hard hats complying with or exceeding the Class A or Class B requirements of ANSI
Z891 -1986. Hard hats that do not provide protection to electrical exposures of at least 2200 volts are not
permitted. Hard hats are to be worn in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Aluminum, metal,
"Cowboy" and similar novelty-type hard hats are prohibited.
5. Contractors are responsible for the use of required personal protective equipment by their Employees as
necessitated by employee exposure.
6. Safety glasses meeting or exceeding ANSI Z87.1 -1989 requirements shall be worn by all personnel at all
times while on the project. Side shields are required.
6.1. All safety glasses, goggles, and face shields must meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI 287.1-
1989. Users of face shields that do not meet the requirements of Z87.1 shall wear safety glasses
meeting the requirements of Z87.1 under the face shield.
6.2. The addition of side shields to prescription safety glasses is not permitted unless the requirements
of Z87.1 are met.
7. Sturdy work boots / work shoes are required at all times on the job site. Tennis shoes, running shoes,
casual street shoes, dress shoes, high heels, sandals or shoes made of other thin material shall not be worn
on the job site.
PNEUMATIC TOOLS
1. All air hoses exceeding 1/2 inch inside diameter shall have a safety device (commonly known as an "OSHA
valve ", "Hansen valve" or "safety check valve ") at the source of air supply or branch line origin / manifold to
reduce pressure in the event of hose failure, and a positively engaged safety cable (commonly known as a
"whip check ").
POSTING REQUIREMENTS
1. The Tenant General Contractor shall construct a weatherproof job site bulletin board at the main project
entrance. This bulletin board shall at minimum contain project emergency information, project maps and
diagrams as required by the Safety Standards, the project address and the applicable OSHA poster. This
does not relieve other Contractors of their posting obligations.
POWDER - ACTUATED TOOLS
1. Only trained workers holding a valid Operator's card can use a powder- actuated tool.
2. Misfires shall be placed in a clearly labeled container of water.
3. Warning signs must be posted bearing the words: "POWDER- ACTUATED TOOLS IN USE" within 50 feet
of the point of use.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards _ j Contractor: 1 Westfield:
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev. 1 Page 33 of 40
PROTECTION OF OPENINGS
1. Contractors who create a floor, roof, or wall opening in the course of their work are responsible for providing
a cover or guardrails for the opening, as well as proving necessary fall protection for their personnel.
Covers and guardrails must meet or exceed OSHA requirements. Covers must be adequate for the type of
traffic they will be subjected to.
PUBLIC CONTACT
1. Employees are not to interface with, or interfere with, Mall Tenants or customers at any time. There is to be
no whistling, cat calling, or mingling of any kind. Employees who do not follow this requirement may be
permanently removed from the project.
PUBLIC PROTECTION PLAN
1. The Contractor shall develop a Public Protection Plan if required by the Tenant Coordinator.
SANITATION
1. The Tenant General Contractor must provide in a clean and sanitary condition (unless otherwise addressed
in the Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations):
1.1. adequate toilet facilities as required by the AHJ,
1.2. hand wash facilities where such facilities are required by state standards
1.2.1. where hand wash facilities are not required by state standards, each Contractor is
required to provide appropriate hand wash facilities as required by their scope of work
and products that they use
1 -3. appropriate containers for disposal of garbage,
1.4. all necessary insect or rodent control for items 1.1 to 1.3 of this subsection.
2. A minimum of one separate toilet facility is to be provided for each 20 Employees or fraction thereof per sex.
3. Toilet facilities shall be kept clean, maintained in good working order, designed and maintained in a manner
that will assure privacy, and provided with an adequate supply of toilet paper.
SCAFFOLDS
1. Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, dismantled or altered only under the supervision and direction of a
Competent Person qualified in scaffold erection, moving, dismantling or alteration.
2. All scaffolds are to be inspected daily by a Competent Person. Scaffolds are to be tagged at their access
point with a green tag (safe to use), red tag (not safe to use), or yellow tag (special requirements for use
apply that must be described on the tag). Red - tagged scaffolds and untagged scaffolds are not to be used.
Activities on yellow- tagged scaffolds are to be conducted under the direction and control of a Competent
Person. Refer to the SFT -34 for sample tags.
3. All scaffolds are to be labeled or tagged with the name of the Contractor who owns or controls (via
lease /rental) the scaffold.
4. All scaffolds 26'4" and higher or five frames and higher are to have a stair tower or integral internal
stair /ladder system for employee access.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards Contractor. Westfield:
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev. Page 34 of 40
5. The Employer shall have a Competent Person determine the feasibility and safety of providing fall protection
for Employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds. Fall protection is required for Employees
erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds where the installation and use of such protection is feasible and
does not create a greater hazard.
6. All scaffold users are to have appropriate Scaffold User Training.
7. Employees involved in erecting, disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, maintaining, or inspecting a
scaffold are to be trained by a Competent Person to recognize any hazards associated with the work in
question.
8. Handrails, midrails and toeboards are required on all scaffolds over six (6) feet high and scaffolds four (4) or
more feet in height where the minimum horizontal dimension of the platform is 45 inches or less. If the
guardrail system is incomplete or missing, appropriate personal fall protection is required.
9. A ladder or other acceptable means for scaffold platform access must be provided.
10. Wheels must be locked on rolling scaffolds before use. Scaffold 'surfing" is prohibited.
11. All connections, including casters, on rolling scaffolds shall be pinned.
12. The Contractor must keep the platform load within the safe platform work load limit.
13. Scaffolds must be erected level on a firm base. When the scaffold is resting on earth or other such material,
the uprights shall rest on and be secured to an appropriate base.
14. Suspended scaffolds must have adequate anchorage points. Occupants shall have a full body harness,
lifeline and deceleration device that is attached to a separate anchorage point than that of the scaffold prior
to stepping out onto any suspended scaffold.
15. Scaffold planks must be laid tight and secured to prevent movement. Planks must overlap between 6 and
12 inches over the scaffold supports.
16. Stilts are not permitted.
SMOKING AREAS
1. The Tenant Coordinator reserves the right to identify and designate areas of the project (up to and including
the entire site) as "No Smoking" areas.
STEEL ERECTION
1. Fall protection for steel erection is to be in accordance with the FALL PROTECTION section of these Safety
Standards.
2. Trusses and beams shall be braced laterally and progressively during construction to prevent buckling or
overturning.
3. During placing of structural members, the load shall not be released from the hoisting line until the members
are secured with not less than two bolts drawn up wrench tight.
4. Where skeleton steel is being erected, a tightly planked and substantial floor shall be maintained with two
stories or 30 feet, whichever is less, below and directly under that portion of each tier of beams on which
any work is being performed.
5. Open web steel joists shall not be placed on any structural steel framework unless such framework is safely
bolted or welded.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev. ? Page 35 of 40
Contractor: Westfield:
6. Containers shall be provided for storing or carrying rivets, bolts, and drift pins, and secured against
accidental displacement when aloft.
7. When bolts or drift pins are being knocked out, means shall be provided to keep them from falling.
8. Impact wrenches shall be provided with a locking device for retaining the socket.
9. Connections of equipment used in plumbing -up shall be properly secured.
10. Turnbuckles shall be secured to prevent unwinding while under stress.
11. Plumbing -up guys shall be removed only under the supervision of a Competent Person.
12. Employees working above grade or any surface and exposed to protruding reinforcing steel or other similar
projections shall be protected against the hazard of impalement by the use of guardrails, or approved fall
protection systems, or protective covers.
13. Exposed edges of all temporary planked or temporary metal decked floors at the periphery of the building,
or at interior openings, such as stairways and elevator shafts shall be protected by a single 3/8 -inch
minimum diameter wire rope located between 42 and 45 inches above design finish floor height. Midrail
protection shall be installed at the completion of the installation of decking.
14. Employees shall be trained in accordance with applicable OSHA standards and project - specific
requirements.
TAR AND MELTING POTS / HOT ROOFING
1. Any melting chamber must be vented and must have a working thermometer.
2. Melting pots or tar kettles cannot be located on roof surfaces. Melting pots and kettles must be on the
ground outside, and at least 25 feet from any building.
3. Tar pipelines shall be adequately braced or supported to prevent collapse.
4. Barricades must be provided below when hot liquids are present overhead on a roof or upper floor.
5. Buckets containing hot asphalt or pitch shall not be carried on ladders.
6. A 20:BC or greater fire extinguisher shall be kept near each kettle in use.
7. Kettle and tanker pumps shall be provided with a means of stopping the flow of hot asphalt or pitch manually
from the rooftop in emergencies.
8. Pumper pipelines shall be securely fastened at rooftop and not supported by ladders used for access.
9. Appropriate personal protective equipment is to be used for hot roofing operations. Depending on the task,
this may include long sleeved shirts fastened snugly at the wrists, gloves that fit snugly at the wrist, pants
without cuffs, and full face shields.
TILE FLOORING (STONE OR CERAMIC)
1. The Contractor is to protect exposed edges of tile work subject to public passage.
2. The Contractor is to provide an adequate transition between exposed tile edge and substrate via
commercially available products that provide a smooth, ADA- compliant transition slope.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Contractor: Westfield:
Page 36 of 40
3. Where sufficient room exists to use physical barricades and maintain access /egress requirements, Tenant
Coordinator may allow Contractor the option to use adequate physical barricades."
WARNING SIGNS
1. The Contractor is to post site access and warning signage, including emergency contact information, in
accordance with applicable requirements.
2. Persons shall obey all warning signs.
3. Signage shall be maintained in legible condition, and cleaned or replaced as necessary to maintain legibility.
4. Warning signs and barricades must be removed when the hazard no longer exists. The Contractor shall
monitor conditions to ensure timely and accurate removal of these devices.
WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
1. The Contractor shall establish work area protection zones necessary to protect employees and the public
when work is performed in areas where pedestrians or vehicles have access.
2. All employees in roadway work zones shall wear Class II (for Class I and Class II exposures) or Class Ill
reflectorized garments in accordance with the requirements of the MUTCD.
3. Traffic control shall be established in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), State and local traffic control regulations, the WATCH Handbook
(where required by the AHJ), or other contract - referenced documents /standards.
4. The Contractor shall establish Work Area Protection in consideration of the location of the worksite,
pedestrian and traffic conditions, and the time of day (daylight or dark).
5. The Contractor shall ensure adequate protection to passing vehicles on a roadway by providing a Flagger
when barricades, signs and signals may be insufficient.
6. Work zones must be made safe for pedestrians by using appropriate means, methods and devices.
7. All night work requires adequate illumination to light the work area and warn public and vehicular traffic.
8. The illumination used to light the work area shall be aimed such that it does not create glare for, or blind,
pedestrians or the public driving through the work zone.
9. Flagging Operations
9.1. Flagging Operations shall be conducted in accordance with the following unless a more specific
standard applies:
9.1.1. Flaggers shall be trained in the proper fundamentals of flagging (signaling) traffic before
being assigned as Flaggers.
9.1.2. The Flagger must be protected and the motorist forewarned by use of advance warning
signs and cones.
9.1.3. During the hours of darkness the Flaggers shall be outfitted with a reflectorized
garment, and the Flagger's position shall be illuminated.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
Contractor: Westfield:
Page 37 of 40
10. Plate Bridging
10.1. Trenches, excavations, or other surface openings or significant depressions must be covered with a
bridge plate to permit safe and unobstructed flow of traffic and pedestrians.
10.2. Trench /bridge plates must be secured from movement by a holding device(s) such as cleats,
angles, bolts, tack welding, etc., and are to be installed to produce a minimum amount of noise.
10.3. Trench /bridge plates should extend a minimum of one foot beyond the edges, with pavement
materials feathering the edges for a reasonably smooth transition.
10.4. Trench /bridge plates shall not be smooth steel.
10.5. Advance warning signs shall be posted when steel plates are used in a travel path.
10.6. Where required by the exposure present, a guardrail system is to be provided to prevent falls to the
lower elevation.
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards _ Contractor: T Westfield:
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev. Page 38 of 40
V. ADVANCE PLANNING SUGGESTIONS
Each operation of a construction job should be planned in advance. Such planning is needed at all stages of the
project. Advance planning will benefit all aspects of the project— safety, productivity and quality, and will
eliminate some incidents by creating a well- organized job.
1. Safe Access and Movement
(a) Workers
1) Adequate work areas, access and egress
2) Adequate walkways and runways
3) Adequate ladders, stairways, or elevators
4) Work areas and passageways clear of rubbish, debris, nails, etc.
5) Protection for perimeter, floor and roof openings
6) Adequate illumination
(b) Vehicles and Equipment
(1) Adequate site roads, including turning space
(2) Separate materials storage areas and dump areas
(3) Adequate signs, signals, etc., to route vehicles on job
(4) Adequate maintenance and repair of vehicles
(c) Location of Utilities and Service
(1) Locate saw shops, tool sheds, offices, etc., in a safe, convenient place
(2) Consider location of high - voltage lines. Arrange to move, de- energize, or erect
a barrier if contact is a possibility
(3) Locate sanitary facilities, drinking water, power, etc., for safety and convenience
2. Schedule Work for Safety
(a) Have safety materials on job when needed, i.e., personal protective equipment, etc
(b) Plan work so that too many trades are not in a sMall area at the same time
(c) Plan work considering product usage and the effect on adjacent trades (i.e. — hot tar roofing,
solvent based paints, etc.)
(d) Plan work considering tasks and their effect on adjacent trades (i.e. — sandblasting, grinding,
cutting and welding, etc.)
3. Work Procedures
(a) Materials Handling
(1) Methods of elevating and handling materials.
(A) Adequate space.
(B) Proper auxiliary equipment, i.e., cranes, hoists, elevators, trucks, etc.
(2) Methods of loading and unloading.
(A) Adequate space.
(B) Proper auxiliary equipment, i.e., cranes, rigging, fork lifts, etc.
(b) Tools and Equipment
(1) Inspection, repair, maintenance, and care.
(2) Adequate supplies of the right tools for each part of job.
(c) Workers and Foremen
(1) Adequate training and supervision, including proper job placement.
(2) Adequate manpower.
(3) Plans for maintaining interest in safety.
(A) Safety bulletins, record charts, and posters.
(B) Recognition for groups or individuals.
(C) Investigation and reporting on all accidents.
(D) Knowledge of safety orders.
(E) Safety meetings.
(Adapted from Cal/OSHA 8CCR1938)
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards i Contractor: •
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev. Page 39 of 40
Tenant
Tenant Contractor
Tenant Coordination
Leasing Coordinator
Project Manager
Project Superintendent
AUDIT OF TENANT GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS
Center
Tenant Name Space No.
Tenant Contractor
Date Time Audited by:
Documentation, Postings and Signage Check one:
Is there documentation or posting for the following: Yes No N/A
1. A copy of the Contractor's Safety Program? ❑ ❑
2. Project Emergency Phone Numbers and Project Emergency Procedures? El El
3. Hot Work Permits? El ❑ El
4. Powder Actuated Tool in Use signage? El ❑ ❑
5. Laser in Use signage? El ❑ ❑
6. Slab penetration instructions? ❑ ❑ ❑
7. Hazard Communication Program and Material Safety Data Sheets? El El
Work Practices
1. Is a Supervisor and /or Safety Representative present?
2. Is the space clean?
3. Are Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters used for all electrical tools and equipment?
4. Is dust from cutting /grinding /profiling of concrete or masonry products controlled?
5. Are compressed gases properly handled and stored?
6. Are there at least two fire extinguishers present?
7. Is there adequate lighting?
8. Is there protection from falling from height and/or protection from falling objects?
9. Are ladders being used correctly?
10. Are scaffolds being used correctly?
11. Are tools and equipment safe for use?
12. Is personal protective equipment (PPE) available and being worn where hazards exist?
All Parties:
Tenant
Contractor:
Tenant /
Lessee:
Westfield:
The above items have been audited by Westfield to assist the Lessee and their contractor(s), named above, to
carry out their work safety, and to meet their occupational safety and health obligations while undertaking their work
in the Tenant Space identified above.
Note: Neither this Audit, nor any safety information or advice issued to the Lessee or Lessee's contractor(s) by
Westfield in any way relieves the Lessee or their contractor(s) of their occupational safety and health obligations
under the Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations or any applicable regulatory requirements.
The Contractor named above is advised that non - compliance with any of the above items places you in
breach of the Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations and/or OSHA requirements, and may result in
injury to your employees.
This is a copy of an audit of your contractor's activities. You are required to review the results and:
(1) Ensure that any non - compliance is rectified before any further work Is•undertaken
(2) Ensure compliance with the Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations and related occupational
safety and health requirements at all times.
The contractor named above has been advised that non - compliance with any of the above items places them in
breach of the Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations and/or OSHA requirements, and may result in injury to their
employees.
The Lessee has been provided with a copy of this audit of their contractor's activities. The Lessee has been
instructed to review the results and:
(1) Ensure that any non - compliance is rectified before any further work is undertaken
(2) Ensure compliance with the Tenant Contractor Rules and Regulations and related occupational safety
and health requirements at all times.
Audited by:
Title
Distribution:
Optional Distribution:
Westfield Tenant Construction Safety Standards
2007 -07 -05 DRAFT
Rev.
-t
Contractor:
Page 40 of 40
Date
Time
Check one:
Yes No N/A
n ❑
n00
❑ ❑ ❑
El 0 ❑
El ❑ ❑
❑ ❑ II
El El ❑
Westfield:
Murphy Varey, PS — 2006 ZUMIEZ — SOUTHCENTER MALL
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
SUMMARY
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Type of the Contract.
3. Work phases.
4. Work under other contracts.
5. Owner- furnished products.
6. Use of premises.
7. Owner's occupancy requirements.
8. Work restrictions.
9. Specification formats and conventions.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
B. Owner: Zumiez, Incorporated; 6300 Merrill Creek Parkway; Everett, Washington 98203.
F. The Work consists of the following:
11/02
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
A. Project Identification: Project consists of interior renovation of an existing 3,181 square foot leased
space.
1. Project Location: Southcenter Mall; 633 Southcenter Parkway; Space #2115; Tukwilla, WA
98188.
C. Architect: The Contract Documents, dated February 8, 2008, were prepared for Project by Murphy
Varey, PS, David J. Murphy, Architect, AIA; 2101 9 Avenue, Suite 211; Seattle, Washington 98121.
D. Contractor: TBD.
E. Project Coordinator: Zumiez, Incorporated; 6300 Merrill Creek Parkway; Everett, Washington 98203
will serve as Project Coordinator.
1. The Work includes interior demolition, interior finishes, mechanical systems and associated
electrical work.
01100 - 1
Murphy Varey, PS — 2006 ZUMIEZ — SOUTHCENTER MALL
1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.
1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
11/02
A. Separate Contract: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations
at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.
This contract will include:
1. Supply and Install Sign: TBD.
2. Supply and Install Storefront (steel, colored glass): TBD.
3. Supply and Install Overhead Coiling Grille (excluding electrical connections and installation of E-
release): TBD.
4. Faux Finish.
B. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out
smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this
Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
1. Notify the Owner and Architect zo days in advance of the dates when the separate contrac-
tors may execute their work.
2. Coordinate workflow with separate contractors and indicate on the project schedule.
3. Assure job conditions are prepared for the work and the separate contractor can proceed
without delay.
4. Work delays or material costs experienced by the separate contractor but due to incomplete
work, unsatisfactory job conditions or schedule changes after notification will be the respon-
sibility of the General Contractor.
1.6 OWNER - FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Owner will furnish items as scheduled in the drawings. The Work includes providing support
systems to receive Owner's equipment including electrical connections.
SUMMARY
1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor,
upon request.
2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner- furnished items according to Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
3. After delivery, Contractor shall inspect delivered items for damage and notify Owner immedi-
ately if items are damaged.
4. If Owner- furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for re-
placement.
5. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner- furnished prod-
ucts. Using Owner- furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate de-
livery dates of Owner- furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Con-
struction Manager noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.
7. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner- furnished items at
Project site. Provide forklift or other lifting device as necessary.
8. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner- furnished items from damage during storage
and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
9. If Owner- furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall
repair or replace them.
01100 - 2
Murphy Varey, PS — 2006 ZUMIEZ — SOUTHCENTER MALL
B. Owner- Furnished Products: See drawings.
1.7 USE OF PREMISES
1.8 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
SUMMARY
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public.
11/02
10. Contractor is responsible for quantification of materials received and shall submit quantities
received to the architect immediately.
11. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner- furnished items into the Work.
A. General: Each Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to area defined within the lease line, unless
otherwise approved by the building owner or property manager.
3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking garage, loading areas, and entrances
serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles
at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials
and equipment on -site.
C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction
period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate
Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day -to -day operations.
Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities
without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with
the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to
minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's
operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities
without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
01100 - 3
Murphy Varey, PS — 2006 ZUMIEZ — SOUTHCENTER MALL
1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS
11/02
C. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to
place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion,
provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of
equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the
Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of building.
q. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for
occupied portions of building.
A. On -Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during hours
specified by the Owner.
1. Refer to Supplemental Section, "Construction Rules & Regulations ".
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager, and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed
utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Construction Manager and Owner's written
permission.
1.10 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-
division format and CSI /CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross -
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are
not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine
numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the
Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents
is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but
not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shalt be interpreted as
plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of
the Contract Documents indicates.
SUMMARY 01100 - 4
Murphy Varey, PS — 2006 ZUMIEZ — SOUTHCENTER MALL
SUMMARY
11/02
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to
describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so
noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
1.11 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01300
oiioo - 5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ o1/o6/o6
SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B. See Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing
allowances.
C. See Division i Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue, through Construction Manager, supplemental instructions authorizing Minor
Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on
AIA Document G7io, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner- Initiated Proposal Requests: Construction Administrator will issue a detailed description of
proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract
Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and
Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests issued by Construction Manager are for information only. Do not consider
them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a
quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary
to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish
times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
B. Contractor- Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Construction
Manager.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01250 - 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and
activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract
Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Division i Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G7o9 for Proposal Requests.
1.4 ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the
difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work -
in- place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes,
normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance
described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's
handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within seven days of receipt of the
Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject
claims submitted later than 14 days after such authorization.
1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what
could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower -
priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Construction Manager will issue a Change Order for
signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G7o1.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Construction Manager may issue a Construction Change Directive
on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a
change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also
designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract
Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01250 -2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01250
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01250 - 3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART i - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and
schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Construction Manager at earliest possible date but no later
than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Submit draft of AIA Document G7o3 Continuation Sheets.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation
of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table
of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.
q. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and
stored, but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include
total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a
change in the Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Construction Manager and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
ZUMIEZ of /o6 /o6
01290-1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for
Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Construction Manager by the
25' day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on
the last day of the month.
D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G7o2 and AIA Document G7o3 Continuation Sheets
as form for Applications for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Construction Manager will return
incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Construction Manager by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include
waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
i. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien
from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and
related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Schedule of unit prices.
5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
8. Copies of building permits.
9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of
the Work.
10. Initial progress report.
11. Report of preconstruction conference.
12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
01290-2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing ioo percent completion for portion of the
Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously
for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
). Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that
taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G7o6, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G7o6A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G7o7, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date
of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for
corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
ZUMIEZ o1/o6/o6
01290-3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination Drawings.
2. Project meetings.
3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field - engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control
points.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or
after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required
for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work
is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Pagel
Murphy Varey, PS - 2oo6
1.4 SUBMITTALS
ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates
maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is
required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
i. Content: Project- specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the
following information, as applicable:
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such
conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered
changes to the Contract.
2. Sheet Size: At least 8 -1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 3o by 4o inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one
copy.
4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those
Sections.
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting
dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the
meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at
a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the
Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the
meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
i. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor
and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall
attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Preparation of Record Documents.
I. Use of the premises and existing building.
m. Work restrictions.
n. Owner's occupancy requirements.
o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
p. Construction waste management and recycling.
q. Parking availability.
r. Office, work, and storage areas.
s. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
t. First aid.
u. Security.
v. Progress cleaning.
w. Working hours.
3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
a. The Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules.
I. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
i. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of
scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular
activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and
reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings
with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other
items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate
to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in
relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind
schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so.
Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
i) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
i) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off -site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
io) Hazards and risks.
I1} Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Status of correction of deficient items.
14) Field observations.
15) RFIs.
16) Status of proposal requests.
17) Pending changes.
18) Status of Change Orders.
19) Pending claims and disputes.
20) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)
A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and
if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form
specified.
1.
2.
ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised
schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be
returned with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or
work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the
following:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Contractor.
4. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
10. Contractor's signature.
11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
C. Hard -Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A.
1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow
three working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:0o p.m. will be
considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Requests for approval of submittals.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's
time for response will start again.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract
Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section
"Contract Modifications."
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within five days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to
affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within five days if Contractor disagrees with
response.
F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit
log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.28. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 6
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submittals Schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Field condition reports.
ZUMIEZ o1 /io /o6
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
C. See Division Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and
controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time
and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when
activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly
owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule
milestones and Contract completion date.
E. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire network for
entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to
show entire schedule for entire construction period.
i. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD -R, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and
date on label.
D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.
E. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction
activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them
in proper sequence.
1.5 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by
construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
i.6 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial
Completion.
i. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically
allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead
items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 6o days, as separate activities in
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01 /10/06
schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,
purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
a. HVAC Units
b. Delivery of OFCI items scheduled
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division i Section
"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's
Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than three days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial
Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for
certification of Substantial Completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as
follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
i. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.
2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not
limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion, and the following
interim milestones:
i. Demolition
2. Special Inspections
3. Installation of GWB
4. Delivery of OFCI fixtures
5. Punch list Review
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time- impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
proposed change on the overall project schedule.
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -chart-type,
Contractor's Construction Schedule within ten days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was
received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
i.8 REPORTS
i. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated
completion percentage in ten percent increments within time bar.
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information
concerning events at Project site:
List of subcontractors at Project site.
i. Equipment at Project site.
2. Material deliveries.
3. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
4. Accidents.
5. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
6. Meter readings and similar recordings.
7. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
8. Services connected and disconnected.
9. Equipment or system tests and startups.
B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the
Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for
interpretation on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together
with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
1.9 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At hi-weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such
meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Construction Manager, Owner, separate
contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -
to -know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END SECTION 01320
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ o1 /io /o6
SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record
Documents at Project closeout.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for
location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include
same label information as corresponding set of photographs.
B. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within three days of taking
photographs.
1. Format: 5 -by -7 -inch smooth - surface matte prints on single - weight commercial -grade
photographic paper, punched for standard 3 -ring binder.
2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber - stamped impression
with the following information:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and address of photographer.
c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.
g. Unique sequential identifier.
3. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal of
prints on CD -ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit
images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped.
1.3 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed TIFF format, produced by a digital camera with
minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1024 by 768
pixels.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to
clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out -of -focus areas will not be accepted.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without
alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image - editing software.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ oi/io /o6
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD -ROM in the field office at Project site,
available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Architect.
Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation, commencement of demolition, and
starting construction, take digital photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing
items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Construction Manager.
3. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.
4. Take eight photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the
Work.
5. Take eight photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately
record physical conditions at start of construction.
C. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 12 digital photographs weekly, with timing each month
adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select
vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
END SECTION 01322
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.1 SUMMARY
ZUMIEZ o1 /io /o6
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule.
C. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs.
D. See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for
mockup requirements.
E. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
F. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
G. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action.
Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing wilt not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related
construction activities.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the
Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
i. Initial Review: Allow five days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as
initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow five days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
i) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., o6ioo.oi). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., o6ioo.oi.A).
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
I. Other necessary identification.
E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect
observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as
final submittal.
i. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken
and will be returned.
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from
sources other than Contractor.
i. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G8io.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
i. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Approved" or "Approved as Noted."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
1.
ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Approved" or "Approved as
Noted" taken by Architect.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:
The use of information requested and transferred herewith, whether in print or electronic
format, is at the recipients sole risk, and such information may only be used for the project
for which such information was prepared. The Information may not include final data or
represent exact as -built conditions. The accuracy of the information, or the viability of
electronic files, is not guaranteed and the recipient shall be solely responsible to verify and
check all field conditions against the Information and to make all adjustments necessary to
utilize such Information for its work. If a conflict between the print copy and electronic
information exists, the print copy will have control. The recipient agrees to indemnify and
hold harmless the Owner, the Architect, and the Architect's consultants from any and all
claims, expenses, damages and liability, arising out of use or modifications of such
Information. In no event shall the Owner, the Architect, or the Architect's consultants be
liable for any loss of profit or consequential damages arising from the use or modification of
the Information transferred herewith.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type
of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g•
h.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Wiring diagrams showing factory- installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Compliance with specified referenced standards.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record
Document.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project- specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of
Architect's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
i. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following
information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field- installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
1. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field - installed
wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full -size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8 -1/2 by ii inches but no larger than 3o by qo inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return
one copy.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal
and actual component as delivered and installed.
i. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in
one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full -size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from
same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following:
partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of
materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture,
and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample
sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a
Project Record Sample.
E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
i. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division i Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division i Section "Payment
Procedures."
H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division i Section "Payment
Procedures."
I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A.
i. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies.
i.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed
by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division i Section
"Quality Requirements."
B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division i Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division i Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification
(WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized
by manufacturer for this specific Project.
5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
J.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements
in the Contract Documents.
K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests
performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
L. Research /Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of
product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before
installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation
of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the
Contract Documents.
P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division i
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
Q.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance
and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load
diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include
page numbers.
R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product
or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer.
S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory- authorized service
representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 6
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements
and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
U. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic
Documentation."
V. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to
Architect.
1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal.
1.7 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products
and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated- Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these
services.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and
location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of
Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
1.9 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will
return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
7
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
Approved
i. Rejected
2. Submit specific item
3. Furnish as corrected
4. Revise and submit
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will
if it does not comply with requirements.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable,
without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it
Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 8
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01 /10/06
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and - control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality- assurance and - control services required by
Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
Section.
C. See Divisions 2 through i6 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality- Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality- Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed
construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities
performed by Architect.
C. Laboratory Mockups: Full -size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify
performance characteristics.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with
specified criteria.
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
F. Source Quality- Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant,
mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality- Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation of
the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer /Applicator /Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,
Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
f.
1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be
performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to
tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most
stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently
equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum
quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply
with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for
the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
q. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
io. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
ii. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the
Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ o1 /i0/o6
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in- service performance.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production
capacity to produce required units.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the
kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system,
assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall
be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing
the Work.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience
and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required
by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
H. Factory- Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's
products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
I. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in
individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality - control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide quality - control services specified and those required by authorities
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
having jurisdiction. Perform quality - control services required of Contractor by authorities having
jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality- control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing
or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality- control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified
written report, in duplicate, of each quality- control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents
are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory- authorized service representative
to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections.
Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."
D. Retesting /Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality- control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties.
Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work
during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests are
conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or
accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar
quality- control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ 01 /10/06
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and -
control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities
having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality- control procedures
and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
i.8 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality- control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility
for quality- control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES
1.1 DEFINITIONS
ZUMIEZ o1 /io /o6
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved ": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and
requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions
of the Contract.
C. "Directed ": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D. "Indicated ": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in
Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,"
"scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations ": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish ": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install ": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide ": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site ": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is
shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied
directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of
the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms
are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the
standards and regulations in the following list.
REFERENCES 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards
DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS)
FED -STD Federal Standard (See FS)
FS Federal Specification
FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)
ICC -ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
MIL (See MILSPEC)
MIL -STD (See MILSPEC)
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards
NES National Evaluation Service (See ICC -ES)
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale
Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the U.S."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)
AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The)
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association
ACI ACI International (American Concrete Institute)
REFERENCES 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
AF &PA American Forest & Paper Association
AGA American Gas Association
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The)
AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA)
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
Al Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects (The)
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association
APA Architectural Precast Association
API American Petroleum Institute
ARI Air - Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air - Conditioning Engineers
ASME ASME International
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASTM ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
REFERENCES
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
AWCI AWCI International
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International)
AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCSC)
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood - Preservers' Association
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA Brick Industry Association (The)
BICSI BICSI
BIFMA BIFMA International
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association International)
BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee
CCC Carpet Cushion Council
CDA Copper Development Association Inc.
CEA Canadian Electricity Association
CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CGSB Canadian General Standards Board
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
CPA Composite Panel Association
CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The)
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSA CSA International
REFERENCES
4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01 /10/06
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The)
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association
EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
ESD ESD Association
FCI Fluid Controls Institute
FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur
(The International Basketball Federation)
FIVB
Federation Internationale de Volleyball
(The International Volleyball Federation)
FM Factory Mutual System (Now FMG)
FMG FM Global
(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors
Association, Inc.
FSA Fluid Sealing Association
FSC Forest Stewardship Council
GA Gypsum Association
GANA Glass Association of North America
GRI (Now GSI)
GS Green Seal
GSI Geosynthetic Institute
HI Hydraulic Institute
HI Hydronics Institute
HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM)
REFERENCES
5
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ o1/10/06
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International)
IBF International Badminton Federation
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The)
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
ITS Intertek
ITU International Telecommunication Union
KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA)
LPI Lightning Protection Institute
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
MH Material Handling (Now MHIA)
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America
MIA Marble Institute of America
MPI Master Painters Institute
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and
Fittings Industry Inc.
REFERENCES 6
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
NAAMM
NACE
NADCA
NAGWS
NAIMA
NBGQA
NCAA
NCMA
NCPI
NCTA
NEBB
NECA
NeLMA
NEMA
NETA
NFHS
NFPA
NFRC
NGA
NHLA
NLGA
NOFMA
NRCA
NRMCA
NSF
NSSGA
NTMA
REFERENCES
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE International
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
National Air Duct Cleaners Association
National Association for Girls and Women in Sport
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The)
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
National Collegiate Athletic Association (The)
National Concrete Masonry Association
National Clay Pipe Institute
National Cable & Telecommunications Association
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
National Electrical Contractors Association
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
National Federation of State High School Associations
NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)
National Fenestration Rating Council
National Glass Association
National Hardwood Lumber Association
National Lumber Grades Authority
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
National Roofing Contractors Association
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc.
7
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01 /10/06
NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now RTI)
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA)
OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc.
PCI Precast /Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute
PTI Post - Tensioning Institute
RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections
RFC! Resilient Floor Covering Institute
RIS Redwood Inspection Service
RTI (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers
Association)
(Now TRI)
SAE SAE International
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SDI Steel Door Institute
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
SEI Structural Engineering Institute
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council
SIA Security Industry Association
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA)
5)1 Steel Joist Institute
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
(Formerly: SPI /SPFD - The Society of the
Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
REFERENCES 8
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
SPI /SPFD Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The)
Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (Now SPFA)
SPRI SPRI
(Single Ply Roofing Institute)
SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
STI Steel Tank Institute
SWI Steel Window Institute
SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.
TIA /EIA Telecommunications Industry Association /Electronic
Industries Alliance
TMS The Masonry Society
TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
TPI Turfgrass Producers International
TRI Tile Roofing Institute
(Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute)
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UNI Uni -Bell PVC Pipe Association
USAV USA Volleyball
USGBC U.S. Green Building Council
USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC)
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council
(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers
Association)
WDMA
REFERENCES
Window & Door Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and
Door Association)
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
9
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
WI Woodwork Institute
(Formerly WIC - Woodwork Institute of California)
WIC Woodwork Institute of California
(Now WI)
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (Now ICC)
CABO Council of American Building Officials (Now ICC)
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical
Officials
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (Now ICC)
ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (Now ICC -ES)
ICC International Code Council
(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials)
ICC -ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
NES National Evaluation Service (Now ICC -ES)
SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (Now ICC)
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission
DOC Department of Commerce
DOD Department of Defense
DOE Department of Energy
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FDA Food and Drug Administration
ZUMIEZ 01 /10/06
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
CE Army Corps of Engineers
REFERENCES 10
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
GSA General Services Administration
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB)
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
PBS Public Building Service (See GSA)
PHS Office of Public Health and Science
RUS Rural Utilities Service (See USDA)
SD State Department
TRB Transportation Research Board
USDA Department of Agriculture
USPS Postal Service
E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs
Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation
CPUC California Public Utilities Commission
TFS Texas Forest Service
Forest Products Laboratory
REFERENCES
ZUMIEZ of /10/06
11
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for
products in those Sections.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,
insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are
closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow
other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited
to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7 MATERIALS
ZUMIEZ o1 /io /o6
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric
service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use
as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
A. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, 8 feet high, framed with four 2 -by -4 -inch rails, with preservative -
treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet apart.
B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry."
C. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular -
type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01 /10/06
D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with
maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
1.$ EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations
and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self -
contained, liquid- propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline- burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary
use during construction, provide filter with MERV of eight at each return air grille in system
and remove at end of construction.
1.9 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they wilt serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no
longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
1.10 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities
are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore
these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip
pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from
pans.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for
curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect
on completed installations or elements being installed.
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed
installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient
condition required and minimize energy consumption.
G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install two telephone line(s) for each field office.
1.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each
field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including police and fire
departments, Contractor's home office, Construction Manager's office, Architect's office,
Owner's office, Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two -way radio for use when away
from field office.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including
electronic mail in field office.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
General: Comply with the following:
1.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as
indicated on Drawings. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking
entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
3
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste- collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply
with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
1.12 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize
possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
B. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed
areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism,
theft, and similar violations of security.
C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress
and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
D. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor -to- ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration
and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3 -mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover
floor with 2 Layers of 3 -mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls.
Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire - retardant plywood.
a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not
less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water - dampened foot mats in vestibule.
2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas.
3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.
4. Protect air - handling equipment.
5. Weather strip openings.
6. Provide walk -off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire- protection facilities of types needed to protect
against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
7. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
8. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources
of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
9. Develop and supervise an overall fire- prevention and - protection program for personnel at
Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
1.13 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse,
limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ of /to /o6
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation,
and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to
avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection
facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed
because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and
replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner
reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction
period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
02/03 (R 05/06)
B. See Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of hazardous waste.
C. See Division 4 Section "Stone Veneer Assemblies" for disposal requirements for excess stone and
stone waste.
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from
construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective
demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off -site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,
reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for
reuse.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Develop waste management plan that results in end -of- Project rates for salvage /recycling
of 5o percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work.
B. Salvage /Recycle Requirements: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous
demolition and construction waste as possible including the following materials:
C. Salvage /Recycle Requirements: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous
demolition and construction waste as possible. Owner has established minimum goals for the
following materials:
1. Contact Owner for a list of demolition and construction waste that is to be salvaged or
recycled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 7 days of date established for the Notice of
Award.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01524-1
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ 02/03 (R 05/06)
B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit three
copies of report. Include separate reports for demolition and construction waste. Include the
following information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes).
q. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes).
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.
C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit three copies of
calculated end -of- Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste
generated by the Work.
D. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by
recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,
receipts, and invoices.
E. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and
incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and
invoices.
F. LEED Submittal: LEED letter template for Credit MR 2.1 and 2.2, signed by Contractor, tabulating
total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that
requirements for the credit have been met.
G. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
H. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for
recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery
was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date
refrigerant was recovered.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA - approved certification program.
B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification and waste reduction work plan. Include
separate sections in plan for demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or
volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction
waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or
disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type
of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01524 - 2
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ 02/03 (R 05/06)
1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name,
address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location
on Project site where materials separation will be located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Construction Manager. Provide
handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement
waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.
B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures,
as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on -site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
1.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are
to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and
dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on -site workers.
B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only; available recycling
receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Central facility is maintained by the Landlord.
C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shalt be shared equally by Owner and Contractor.
D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524-3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 02/03 (R 05/06)
3.3
3.4
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they
are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each
container and bin.
2. Stockpile processed materials on -site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade,
and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining
trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if
found.
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project
site. For pallets that remain on -site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and
comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for
recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut -Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or
hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on -site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and
areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Transport waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 0 - 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
END OF SECTION oi524END OF SECTION 01524
02/03 (R 05/06)
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 0 - 5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION oi600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
01/24/06
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use
in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken
from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment,"
"system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature,
that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled- content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process,
or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis -of- Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating
comparable products of other named manufacturers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title
and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors,
that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
01 /24/06
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the
Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance,
weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements
indicated.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses
and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research /evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
I. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within five days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within ten
days of receipt of request, or five days of receipt of additional information or documentation,
whichever is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number
and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.
Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product
request within five days of receipt of request, or five days of receipt of additional information
or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
C. Basis -of- Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products
for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding
of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,
storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01/24/06
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather - protection requirements for storage.
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer
for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification,
ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project - specific information and properly
executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written
document using appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
3
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
01/24/06
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed
for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named
product that complies with requirements.
2. Manufacturer /Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a
product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
3. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
4. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with
requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
5. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified
product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product or system.
6. Basis -of- Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and
other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named
manufacturers.
7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for proposal of product.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
01/24/06
8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from
manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies
with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns,
textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from
manufacturer's product tine that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 20 days after the Notice
to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of
Architect.
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests
without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for
redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar
considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated
results.
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests
without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated
results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Progress cleaning.
5. Starting and adjusting.
6. Protection of installed construction.
7. Correction of the Work.
B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner- accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and
final cleaning.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous
materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE (not used)
1.4 EXAMINATION
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water - service piping; and underground electrical services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator
present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to
be installed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
1.5 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and /or Owner that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically
on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a
detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation."
1.6 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in
relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify
Architect promptly.
1.7 FIELD ENGINEERING
ZUMIEZ 01 /10/06
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points
during construction operations.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction
for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
1.8 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and
ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory
prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
1.9 PROGRESS CLEANING
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for
joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials
lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is
expected to rise above 8o deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire
work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on -site will not be permitted. Washing waste
materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials
already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or
deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
I.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period.
1.10 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning
units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory- authorized service representative is required to inspect
field- assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
1.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
1.12 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with
matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that
cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
SECTION 01731- CUTTING AND PATCHING
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting
and patching individual parts of the Work.
C. See Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire -rated construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least five days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the
following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why
they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to In -Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utility Services and Mechanical /Electrical Systems: List services /systems that cutting and
patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services /systems that will be relocated and
those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how tong services /systems will be
disrupted.
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural
elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement
with original structure.
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their
load- carrying capacity or load- deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a
manner that could change their load- carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to
perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence
of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied
spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory
manner.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01 /10/06
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
1.5 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in -place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of in -place materials.
1.6 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be
performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in -place finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.7 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to
adjoining areas.
D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical /Electrical Systems: Where existing services /systems are
required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services /systems before cutting to
prevent interruption to occupied areas.
1.8 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of
other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original
condition.
B. Cutting: Cut in -place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with
original Installer's written recommendations.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering
and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core
drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and
repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and
appearance. Remove in -place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to
achieve uniform color and appearance.
3. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in -place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane
surface of uniform appearance.
4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove
paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
ZUMIEZ o1 /io /o6
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished materials.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and
removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of
elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
B. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation."
Submit before Work begins.
C. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed
to accept hazardous wastes.
1. Comply with submittal requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste
Management."
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar
in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA - approved certification program.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI Aio.6 and NFPA 241.
E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ of /i0/o6
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct
selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as
practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with
selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a
separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire - protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
i.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
1.7 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed
and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and
preconstruction photographs.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation."
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
i.8 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL /ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services /Systems: Maintain services /systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
B. Service /System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical /electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services /systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding
with selective demolition provide temporary services /systems that bypass area of selective
demolition and that maintain continuity of services /systems to other parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
1.9 PREPARATION
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris - removal operations
to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied
and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve
stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent
unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand
toots or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to
minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed
spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before
starting flame - cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire - suppression devices
during flame - cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
i. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment
to match new equipment.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
1.11 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original
locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and
legally dispose of them in an EPA - approved landfill.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
1.12 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1.1
SUMMARY
ZUMIEZ o1 /10 /06
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for
Substantial and Final Completion.
C. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction
photographs and negatives.
D. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
E. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data for operation and maintenance manual
requirements.
F. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the
Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the
list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final
Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and
similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test /adjust /balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use,
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to
defects.
operation, and
eliminate visual
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
1.5 WARRANTIES
ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Construction Manager will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified
by Construction Manager, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Construction Manager's Substantial Completion inspection list of
items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Construction
Manager. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or
otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Construction Manager will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or
will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be
issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use
CSI Form 14.1A.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding
from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Construction Manager for designated
portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion
is indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
1.7 FINAL CLEANING
ZUMIEZ 01 /10 /06
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy -duty, 3 -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, thickness
as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- 1 /2 -by -11 -inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic - covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab
to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1.6 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of
the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or
property or that might damage finished surfaces.
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste - removal operations to comply with
local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance
program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project
site.
d. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard - surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free
of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering
of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if
visible soil or stains remain.
i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision - obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
j. Remove labels that are not permanent.
k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that
already show evidence of repair or restoration.
i) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical
nameplates.
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces
of diffusers, registers, and grills.
p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with
requirements for new fixtures.
q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess
materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage
systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.1 SUMMARY
ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data for operation and maintenance manual
requirements.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the
Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked -up Record Prints.
2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of corrected Record Transparencies and one set of
marked -up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each transparency and mark
whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of
drafting are acceptable. Architect will return transparencies and prints for organizing
into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal.
b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of marked -up Record Prints, and the following:
1) Record Transparencies: One set.
2) Copies printed from Record Transparencies: Three. Print each Drawing,
whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract
modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black -line white prints of the Contract Drawings and
Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up
Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult
to identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual
physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross -
reference on the Contract Drawings.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red - colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers,
and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record Transparencies: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion,
review marked -up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected
transparencies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Erase,
redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
2. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
3. Owner will furnish Contractor one set of transparencies of the Contract Drawings for use in
recording information.
4. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Transparencies. Architect
will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop.
C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable
sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place
transparencies in durable tube -type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of each
container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings
included.
3. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that
correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each CAD file.
4. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
1.4 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot
be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
1.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
1.7 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies
substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot
be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping
and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and
identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record
Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur;
do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field
office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record
Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record
Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.1 SUMMARY
ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Emergency manuals.
2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes, systems
and equipment.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least ten days before final inspection.
Construction Manager will return copy with comments within ten days after final inspection.
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Construction Manager's comments. Submit
three copies of each corrected manual within ten days of receipt of Construction Manager's
comments.
1.3 MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Construction Manager.
7. Cross - reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the
content of the volume, and cross - referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment,
and components of one system into a single binder.
1. Binders: Heavy -duty, 3 -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8- 1/2 -by -11 -inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple - volume sets.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to
indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment
included in the section on each divider, cross- referenced to Specification Section number
and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
1 .4 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency instructions,
and emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component for
fire, flood, gas leak, water leak, power failure, water outage, equipment failure, and chemical
release or spill.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and
similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification
of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type of
emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and required
sequences for electric or electronic systems.
1.5 OPERATION MANUALS
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use
as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual,
insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and
drawing locations.
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual
Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating procedures,
operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break -in, and control procedures; stopping and normal
shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and
required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 2
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color - coding where required for
identification.
i.6 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged
to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number
of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross - reference Specification Section
number and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection
procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and maintenance,
and repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related
services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.7 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source
information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance
and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and
warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list
name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and
cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts
and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of equipment:
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide,
disassembly instructions, and adjusting instruction] that detail essential maintenance procedures:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required
lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and
service with standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts
identified and cross - referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of
maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.8 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for
use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data
indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part
of a system.
D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only
sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or
component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,
identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data
applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure
correct illustration of completed installation.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.
F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 03301- CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast -in -place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products
and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
B. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
C. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 6o, deformed.
B. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
C. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
D. Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I /11. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
b. Ground Granulated Blast - Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B. Normal - Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable.
01/17/06
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
01/17/06
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water - soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water - Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High - Range, Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High - Range, Water - Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1o17/C 1o17M, Type II.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Vapor Retarder: Multi -ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene
sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick.
B. Joint- Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self -
expanding cork.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to
fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture - Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
F. Clear, Solvent- Borne, Membrane - Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A.
G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane - Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class
A.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.
B. Normal- Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of floor
slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS
3.3
3.4
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M,
and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 6o minutes.
A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with
longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
01/17/06
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete
into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one -fourth of
concrete thickness.
C. Isolation Joints: Install joint - filler strips at junctions with slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such
as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough- Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form - facing material with tie holes and
defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
1. Smooth - rubbed finish.
3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
01/17/06
B. Smooth- Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form - facing material, arranged in an
orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be
covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth - formed finished as-
cast concrete where indicated:
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
A. General: Comply with ACI 3o2.112 for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for
concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies
to form a uniform and open- textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears
on surface.
1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.
C. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and surfaces to receive concrete floor
topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other
bonded cementitious floor finishes, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor
and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid - applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid - applied or direct -to-
deck- applied membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo.
E. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film- finish coating system.
F. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to
surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset
or thin -set methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fine broom.
G. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete
platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface
by brooming with fiber- bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold- weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot - weather
protection during curing.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS)
4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
01/17/06
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb /sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture - Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for
curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12
inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and
waterproof tape.
2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage
during curing period.
3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.
3.10 REPAIRS
A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.
END OF SECTION 03301
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS)
5
Murphy Varey - 2006 ZU M I EZ
SECTION 0 355 0 — CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR OVERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Trowel grade latex modified concrete cementitious underlayment.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Coordinate related work specified in other areas of the Project Manual, including but not limited to
the following:
1. Section 03301— Cast -in -Place Concrete (limited applications)
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01091 and as listed herein. See Section 01091 for listed
association, council, institute, society, and the like organization for its full name and address:
1. ASTM C -1o9 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars.
(Using 2 inch or 5o mm Cube Specimens)
2. ASTM C -190 Test Method for Tensile Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
3. ASTM C -256 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Portland Cement -based trowel applied latex modified overtayment to use as a base and leveling
coat.
B. Portland Cement -based latex modified fine textured powder to achieve a smooth surface.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Resistant to indentation, tightly bonding, non- injurious adhesives and floor finishes.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
2006
A. Submittals in accordance with Section 01330 and the following:
1. Product Data: Provide completely definitive brochures including specifications, current
product literature and other data to prove compliance with specified requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Applicator of concrete floor resurfacing shall be approved by
manufacturer.
CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR OVERLAYMENT
03550 -1
Murphy Varey - 2006 ZUMIEZ
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with provisions of Section 0160o and the following: Materials shall be delivered in its
original unopened container and protected from contamination, damage or deterioration as per
manufacturer's instructions. All damaged products shall be removed from project and discarded as
per local area requirements.
1.9 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Maintain enclosed building at minimum of 5o degrees F. before, during and after installation.
Provide continuous ventilation and adequate heat to remove moisture until product has
adequately cured.
2. Contact manufacturer for hot - weather procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc., Aliquippa, Pennsylvania. Tel. (704) 203 -5000.
1. Ardex: SD -T cement -based floor leveling system, over Ardex EP 2000 epoxy primer.
B. Raeco, Inc., Seattle, Washington. Tel. (206) 763-1335, Fax (206) 768 -0175 is specified for type,
material and quantity required.
1. Raeco R -5o Cementitious Powder in pre - blended sacks, including Raeco Buttercoat Powder in
pre - blended sacks, R -5o Latex Binder Additive, and Raeco -Bond Primer, Bonding Agent.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.3 MIXING PROPORTIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR OVERLAYMENT
2006
A. Appropriate Aggregate for thickness exceeding 1/2". Refer to Product Data Sheet for type and size.
B. Technical Data:
1. Trowel grade latex modified concrete overlayment that contains no gypsum chlorides, ferrous
metals or corrosive agents.
2. Compressive Strength, 400o psi at 28 days, ASTM C -1o9
Tensile Strength, 85o psi at 28 days, ASTM C -190
Flexural Strength, 1700 psi at 28 days, ASTM C -256
Shear Bond Strength, 650+ psi at 5 days, (Dow Test Method)
Flammability, ASTM E84
a. Flame Spread o
b. Fuel Contribution o
c. Smoke Development o
3. Coverage: 5o sq. ft. per sack @ 1/8"
A. Mix proportions and methods shall be in accordance with product manufacturer recommendations.
0 355 0 - 2
Murphy Varey - 2006 ZUMIEZ
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3
A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work will constitute your acceptance of
conditions as satisfactory.
A. Condition and Cleaning of Subfloor: Subfloor shall be structurally sound, shot blast, and
contaminant free.
B. Cracks in subfloor shalt be repaired prior to installation of the underlayment to prevent telegraphing
through the underlayment.
C. Expansion joints: Allow joints to continue through the concrete resurfacing material at same width.
APPLICATION
A. Primer: Prime subfloor with specified compound. Priming instructions may vary according to type
of substrate; multiple coats may be necessary.
B. Mix and apply in accordance with manufacturer's written direction.
1. Thickness: As required to meet construction conditions. Screed and /or trowel in place to
meet tolerances set forth. Minimum 1 /4" thick, recommended.
2. Drying: Provide continuous ventilation and adequate heating to remove moisture from the
area until dry. Test for dryness in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3. Slope as required to suit conditions of construction.
4. Mix and apply R -5o Latex blended with Raeco Buttercoat Powder in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Sand surface mounting fine grit sandpaper and vacuum clean. Apply second coat of R -5o
Latex with Buttercoat Powder.
6. Re -sand surface with fine grit sandpaper and vacuum. Damp mop floor to remove remaining
dust.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Finished surface tolerances shall be 1/8" using a 10' straight edge, measuring in any direction.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect from heavy loads during construction, place temporary cover to area by means to protect
from contamination and damage.
END OF SECTION 0 355 0
CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR OVERLAYMENT
2006
0 355 0 - 3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
2. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
3. Steel weld plates and angles.
4. Miscellaneous steel trim.
5. Metal floor plate and supports.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Templates: For anchors and bolts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
01/17/06
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
B. Ferrous Metals:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
3. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36 /A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
4. Rolled- Stainless -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
5. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold- formed steel tubing.
6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is
indicated or required by structural loads.
7. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold- formed metal channels complying with MFMA -3, 1 -5/8 by 1-
5/8 inches. Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
structural steel, Grade 33, with G90 coating; o.079 -inch nominal thickness.
METAL FABRICATIONS 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
C. Nonferrous Metals:
1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6o63 -T6.
2. Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, alloy 6061 -T6.
3. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.o - F.
2.3 FASTENERS
01/17/06
A. General: Type 304 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc - plated fasteners with coating
complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless -steel fasteners for
fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either
ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims
as needed, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer
complying with MPI #79.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20, high- zinc - dust - content paint for regalvanizing welds in
steel.
C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107.
D. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete" for normal- weight, air- entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive
strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion
and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without
undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and
blended.
3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches o.c.
B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other
Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of
welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where
wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches o.c.
METAL FABRICATIONS 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
1. Exterior Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Galvanize.
E. Metal Floor Plate:
1. Fabricate from rolled -steel floor plate of thickness indicated below:
a. Thickness: As indicated.
2.6 FINISHES
B. Steel and Iron Finishes:
METAL FABRICATIONS
a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone iB): SSPC -SP 6 /NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
b. Interiors (SSPC Zone iA): SSPC -SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
01/17/06
2. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel baseplates
and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness.
C. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing
on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts.
D. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with
continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field
splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate
assembly and installation with other work.
2. Provide steel angle supports as indicated.
3. Provide flush steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of each
section.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
1. Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or
ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable.
2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with
requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal
fabrications:
3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those
with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or
masonry, to comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. is Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal
fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true.
1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as
exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior
units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication.
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be
fastened to in -place construction.
3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After
bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
C. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection.
1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up
paint with the same material as used for shop painting.
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
01/17/06
METAL FABRICATIONS 4
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006
SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
4. Wood furring and grounds.
5. Wood sleepers.
6. Interior wood trim.
7. Wood shelving and clothes rods.
8. Plywood backing panels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory- fabricated product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Include data for wood - preservative and fire - retardant treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements.
B. Research /Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect
for Project:
1. Preservative - treated wood.
2. Fire - retardant - treated wood.
3. Power - driven fasteners.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Dimension lumber framing.
2. Miscellaneous lumber.
3. Interior wood trim.
4. Shelving and clothes rods.
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC- accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,
"Principles and Criteria ":
A. Lumber: DOC P5 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules - writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC
Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end
or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance
issued by grading agency.
06105 -1
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006
3. Provide dressed lumber, S45, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD- PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS
ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact
with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to
AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material
that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of
Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior masonry or
concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or
unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on- grade.
2.3 FIRE - RETARDANT - TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C2o (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).
1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces,
and where indicated.
3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Identify fire - retardant - treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Framing for raised platforms.
2. Concealed blocking.
3. Roof construction.
4. Plywood backing panels.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
06105-2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
7. Utility shelving.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent
maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of Douglas fir;
Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) grade; WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the
following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.
3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.5 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM
A. General: Provide kiln -dried finished (surfaced) material without finger- jointing, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Clear douglas fir.
C. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7 and graded according to WMMPA WM 4.
1. Moldings for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: N -grade Douglas fir.
2. Moldings for Opaque (Painted) Finish: P -grade primed medium - density fiberboard.
2.6 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
A. Provide the following products for the stock room shelving system as manufactured by Reeve Store
Equipment Company:
1. Standard: #44Standard, 1" adjacent double slotted standard, 8' -o" tong. Finish: brillatone.
2. Rod Bracket: #71 -A14, hang rod bracket. Finish: chrome.
3. Shelf Bracket: #81 flange bracket. Finish: brillatone
4. Hang Bar: 1 1/16" garment rod. .09o" (13 ga.) material thickness. Finish: chrome.
B. Shelving
1. 3/4" x 18" wide (19 -mm) pre - finished LDF, white. Edged.
C. Shelf Cleats: 3/4- by -3 -1/2 -inch boards, of same species and grade indicated above for interior
lumber trim for opaque finish.
2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS i, Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, fire -
retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 -inch nominal
thickness.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
06105-3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
2.8 FASTENERS
A. General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure - preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 1 53/A 1 53M.
B. Power - Driven Fasteners: NES NER -272.
C. Screws for Fastening to Cold - Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and
reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers,
blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF &PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction,"
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber.
E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1. NES NER -272 for power- driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
F. Wood Trim Installation: Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full - length pieces
from maximum lengths of lumber available. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-
fitting joints with full - surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end -to -end
joints.
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2. Install trim after gypsum board joint - finishing operations are completed.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 1/32 -inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16 -inch maximum offset
for reveal installation.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection,
inorganic boron - treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA - registered borate treatment. Apply borate
solution by spraying to comply with EPA - registered label.
END OF SECTION 06105
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 07841- THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
01/25/06
A. This Section includes through- penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire- resistance-
rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through fire- resistance -rated constructions, including both empty
openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through - penetration firestop systems
that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist
passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire - resistance rating of construction
penetrated.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through- penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1 479:
1. F -Rated Systems: Provide through- penetration firestop systems with F- ratings indicated, but
not less than that equaling or exceeding fire - resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
2. T -Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through - penetration firestop systems
with T- ratings indicated, as well as F- ratings, where systems protect penetrating items
exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
b. Penetrations located outside fire- resistance -rated shaft enclosures.
3. L -Rated Systems: Where through - penetration firestop systems are indicated in smoke
barriers, provide through - penetration firestop systems with L- ratings of not more than 3.0
cfm /sq. ft at both ambient temperatures and 400 deg F.
C. For through- penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage,
provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both
during and after construction.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet -pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture -
resistant through- penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to
possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads
involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through - penetration firestop systems
not requiring removal of insulation.
D. For through- penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame - spread and
smoke - developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
01/ 25/06
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of
Firestop Contractors."
B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through - penetration firestop systems and fire -
resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that comply with
the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified
testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow -up
inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Through - penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems bearing
classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through- penetration
firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
E. Do not cover up through - penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through - penetration firestop systems
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated on
Drawings that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:
1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
2. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.
3. Hilti, Inc.
4. Johns Manville.
5. Nelson Firestop Products.
6. NUCO Inc.
7. RectorSeal Corporation (The).
8. Specified Technologies Inc.
9. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
10. Tremco; Sealant /Weatherproofing Division.
11. USG Corporation.
2.2 FIRESTOPPING
A. Compatibility: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another;
with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through- penetration
firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through -
penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each through - penetration firestop system that are needed to
install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only
components specified by through - penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by
qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
01/25/06
A. General: Install through - penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and
published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming /damming /backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross - sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming
materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating
items as required to achieve fire - resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
D. Identification: Identify through- penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels.
Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop
systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop
systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Through- Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building
Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Through- penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Through - penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (not used)
3.3 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:
1. Available UL- Classified Systems: C -A)-, C -BJ -, C -BK -, F -A -, F -B -, F -C -, W -J -, W -K -, W- L -1oo1-
1 999
B. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:
1. Available UL- Classified Systems: C -AJ -, C -BJ -, F -A -, F -B -, F -C -, W -J -, W -L- 2001 -2 999.
C. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables:
1. Available UL- Classified Systems: C -AJ -, C -BJ -, F -A -, F -B -, F -C -, W -J -, W -L- 3 001 - 3999.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
D. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays:
1. Available UL- Classified Systems: C -A)-, C -BJ -, F -A -, F -B -, F -C -, W -J -, W -K -, W - L - - 4999.
E. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes:
1. Available UL- Classified Systems: C -AJ -, C -BJ -, F -A -, F -C -, W -J -, W - L - - 5999.
F. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:
1. Available UL- Classified Systems: C -AJ -, F -A -, W -L -6001 -6999.
G. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:
1. Available UL- Classified Systems: C -AJ -, F -C -, W -J -, W -L -7001 -7999.
H. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants:
1. Available UL- Classified Systems: C -AJ -, C -BJ -, F -A -, F -C -, W -J -, W -L -8001 -8999.
END OF SECTION 07841
01/25/06
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 07842 - FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire - resistive joint systems for the following:
01/25/06
1. Floor -to -floor joints.
2. Floor -to -wall joints.
3. Head -of -wall joints.
4. Wall -to -wall joints.
5. Perimeter fire- resistive joint systems consisting of floor -to -wall joints between perimeter
edge of fire- resistance -rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide fire - resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain
original fire- resistance rating of assembly in which fire- resistive joint systems are installed.
B. Joint Systems in and between Fire - Resistance -Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly
ratings equaling or exceeding the fire - resistance ratings of construction that they join, and with
movement capabilities and L- ratings indicated as determined by UL 2079.
1. Load - bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test.
C. Perimeter Fire - Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of fire- resistance -rated floor
assemblies and exterior curtain walls, provide systems of type and with ratings indicated below and
those indicated in the Fire - Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3, as determined by
NFPA 285 and UL 2079.
1. UL- Listed, Perimeter Fire - Containment Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding fire -
resistance ratings of floor or floor /ceiling assembly forming one side of joint.
D. For fire - resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame- spread and smoke -
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each fire - resistive joint system.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Field quality- control test reports.
E. Evaluation Reports: Evidence of fire - resistive joint systems' compliance with ICBO ES AC3o, from
the ICBO Evaluation Service.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of
Firestop Contractors."
FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 1
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ
B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through - penetration firestop systems and fire -
resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide fire - resistive joint systems that comply with the
following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1. Fire - resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified
testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow -up
inspection services for fire- resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Fire - resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1
"Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following:
D. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire- resistive joint systems are installed according
to specified requirements.
E. Do not cover up fire - resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other
construction until building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined each
installation.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire - resistive joint systems that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in the Fire-
Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the fire- resistive joint systems
indicated for each application in the Fire - Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
A. Compatibility: Provide fire- resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire- resistive joint system manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components of fire- resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire- resistive joint system manufacturer
and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated.
3.1 INSTALLATION
01/25/06
a. Fire - resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
b. Fire- resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system
designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency.
A. Install fire- resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire -
resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications
indicated.
FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
01/25/06
B. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform
surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
END OF SECTION o7842
FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
01/25/06
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
1. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
2. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
B. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water -
resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint- sealant product indicated.
B. Compatibility and adhesion test reports.
C. Product certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact
or affect joint sealants to joint - sealant manufacturers for testing according to ASTM C 1087 to
determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain
rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
B. Preconstruction Field- Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for
the types of Project joints.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty
period.
JOINT SEALANTS 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
01/25/06
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 92o and other requirements indicated for each liquid-
applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications
for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain - Test - Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to
porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and
have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to
ASTM C 92o for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come
in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
E. Single- Component Neutral- Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799.
b. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000.
c. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC.
d. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI -631.
e. Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly -Glaze Plus.
f. Tremco; Proglaze SG.
g. Tremco; Spectrem 2.
h. Tremco; Tremsil 600.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0.
F. Single- Component Mildew - Resistant Neutral - Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Available Products:
JOINT SEALANTS 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
a. Pecora Corporation; 898.
b. Tremco; Tremsil 600 White.
JOINT SEALANTS
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS ( nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0.
G. Single- Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex -1a.
b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Ultra.
c. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 1.
d. Tremco; Vulkem 116.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS ( nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type 0 P, Grade NF.
B. Available Products:
1. Bostik Findley; Chem -Calk 600.
2. Pecora Corporation; AC -2o +.
3. Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; SM 820o.
4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac.
5. Tremco; Tremflex 834.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by
testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 9o.
1. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC -2o FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic- rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
1. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; BA -98.
b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
01/25/06
3
Murphy Varey, PS - zoo6 ZUMIEZ
2.6 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Preformed Silicone- Sealant System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low -
modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral - curing
silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
B. Preformed Foam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard mildew- resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining,
preformed, precompressed, open -cell foam sealant that is manufactured from high - density
urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water - repellent agent.
JOINT SEALANTS
1. Available Products:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.
b. GE Silicones; UltraSpan USisoo.
c. Pecora Corporation; Sil -Span.
d. Tremco; Spectrem Ez Seal.
1. Available Products:
a. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V.
b. illbruck Sealant Systems, Inc.; Wilseal 600.
c. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Polytite Standard.
d. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal.
e. Density: Manufacturer's standard.
2.7 JOINT - SEALANT BACKING
01/25/06
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin), 0
(open -cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as
approved in writing by joint- sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures
down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance.
D. Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer
for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint - filler materials or joint surfaces at back
of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where
applicable.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint - sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint- sealant - substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum
adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.
2. Remove laitance and form - release agents from concrete.
01/25/06
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant.
a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out
joints with oil -free compressed air.
a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint- sealant manufacturer,
based on preconstruction joint - sealant- substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply
with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
INSTALLATION
A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of
joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions
indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
JOINT SEALANTS
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
5
Murphy Varey, PS - zoo6 ZUMIEZ
01/25/06
D. Install bond - breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant
with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Installation of Preformed Silicone - Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing
protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends,
turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of
sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant
manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products
in which joints occur.
3.3 JOINT- SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint - Sealant Application: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of
exterior walls.
1. Joint Sealant: Single- component nonsag urethane sealant.
2. Joint - Sealant Color: Match adjacent surfaces.
B. Joint- Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings.
1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant.
2. Joint - Sealant Color: White.
C. joint- Sealant Application: Interior ceramic and dimension stone tile expansion, control, contraction,
and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant: Single- component pourable urethane sealant.
2. Joint - Sealant Color: match grout color.
D. Joint- Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and
counters.
JOINT SEALANTS 6
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
JOINT SEALANTS
1. Joint Sealant: Single- component mildew - resistant neutral - curing silicone sealant.
2. Joint - Sealant Color: White.
E. Joint - Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior
doors, windows and elevator entrances.
1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant.
2. Joint- Sealant Color: white.
END OF SECTION 07920
01/25/06
7
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
01/09/06
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 8o that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire - protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure
according to NFPA 252 or UL 1oC.
1. Temperature -Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that
have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 45o deg F above
ambient after 3o minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
B. Fire - Rated, Borrowed -Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 8o that are listed
and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each
individual glazed lite.
C. Smoke - Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Benchmark; a division of Therma -Tru Corporation.
3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Firedoor Corporation.
7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
8. Habersham Metal Products Company.
9. Kewanee Corporation (The).
10. Mesker Door Inc.
11. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
12. Security Metal Products Corp.
13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll -Rand company.
14. Windsor Republic Doors.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A ioo8 /A ioo8M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A ioii /A ioiiM, CS, Type B.
C. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum
A4o metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 4oZ coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 /A 1oo8M or
ASTM A io11 /A 1o11M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.
H. Glazing: Division 8 Section "Glazing."
I. Bituminous Coating: Cold - applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film
thickness per coat.
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Comply with ANSI /SDI A25o.8.
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral- board, or vertical steel - stiffener core.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire- protection and temperature -rise ratings
indicated.
b. Thermal -Rated (Insulated) Doors: R -value of not Tess than 12.3 deg F x h x sq. ft. /Btu
when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
3. Vertical Edges for Single - Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted o.042 -inch- thick, end closures or
channels of same material as face sheets.
5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic - coated steel sheet. Comply with
ANSI /SDI A25o.8 for level and model and ANSI /SDI A25o.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold- rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with
requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI /SDI A25o.8 for level and model and
ANSI /SDI'A25o.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
01/09/06
08110 - 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI /SDI A25o.6.
2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI /SDI A25o.8.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic - coated steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: o.o53 -inch- thick steel sheet.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold - rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: o.o53 -inch- thick steel sheet.
4. Frames for Wood Doors: o.o53- inch -thick steel sheet.
5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI /SDI A25o.6.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
01/09/06
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap- and - stirrup or T- shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less
than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10
inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip -on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In -Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8 -inch- diameter
bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat
reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as
follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable -type anchors with extension clips, allowing
not less than 2 -inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining
hollow metal work.
2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as door face sheet.
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high
unless otherwise indicated.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110 - 3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as frames.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4- inch -thick by 1 -inch- wide steel.
C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
B. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top
edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 8o for fire- performance rating or where indicated.
C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles
at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings
and to jambs by butt welding.
3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds
per anchor.
6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
01/09/06
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame.
Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 6o inches high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 6o to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or
fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 6o inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 6o to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or
fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in
metal -stud partitions.
08110 - 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
7. Door Silencers: Except on weather- stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.
D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware
according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8
Section "Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI /SDI A25o.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface- mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI /SDI A25o.6 and ANSI /DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division i6
electrical Sections.
E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal
work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed
lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and
frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of
installation indicated.
2.10 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: ANSI /SDI A25o.io.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI /SDI A25o.ii.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
a. Single -Door Frames: Three door silencers.
b. Double -Door Frames: Two door silencers.
01 /09/06
a. At fire - protection -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations,
field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress,
and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
o8iio - 5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
01/09/06
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing
antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder- actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged
by grout forces.
6. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on
exposed faces.
7. In -Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural
supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other
structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to
supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb
members.
9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist,
and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.
Shim as necessary.
1. Non- Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.
2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke - Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow
metal manufacturer's written instructions.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 6
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
01/09/06
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more
than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective
work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime
coat and apply touchup of compatible air - drying, rust - inhibitive primer.
C. Metallic- Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110 - 7
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid -core doors with wood- veneer, medium - density- overlay, hardboard or MDF faces.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fire- protection ratings for fire -rated doors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Ampco, Inc.
3. Buell Door Company Inc.
4. Chappell Door Co.
5. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc.
6. Eggers Industries.
7. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.
8. Haley Brothers, Inc.
9. Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood.
10. Ipik Door Company.
11. Lambton Doors.
12. Marlite.
13. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
01/09/06
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an
FSC- accredited certification body.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 8o that are listed and labeled by a qualified
testing agency, for fire - protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according
to NFPA 252.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
08211 -1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
14. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
15. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.
16. Poncraft Door Company.
17. Vancouver Door Company.
18. VT Industries Inc.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. WDMA I.S.1 -A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
2. Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets) and private toilets.
B. Particleboard -Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD -1.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard -core doors as needed to eliminate
through - bolting hardware.
3. Provide doors with either glued - wood -stave or structural- composite - lumber cores instead of
particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
C. Structural- Composite- Lumber -Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.io.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.
D. Fire - Protection -Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire -
protection rating indicated.
1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer
stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2. Pairs: Provide fire- retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed -steel edges and astragals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed
edges.
E. Mineral -Core Doors:
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality
standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire - protection rating indicated.
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw - holding capability approved for
use in doors of fire- protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through - bolting
hardware.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated -edge construction with improved
screw - holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
2.3 VENEERED -FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid -Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.
2. Species: Douglas fir.
3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
01/09/06
08211-2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.
7. Core: Particleboard, Glued wood stave or Structural composite lumber.
8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
9. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
2.4 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Interior Solid -Core Doors:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Faces: Medium- density overlay.
3. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
4. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
5. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
2.5 FABRICATION
01/09/06
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame - opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 8o for fire -rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job- Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles
and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire -rated doors. Machine doors for
hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch
from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated.
Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of
threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 8o for fire -rated doors.
D. Factory- Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
END OF SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 -3
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ oi/o6/o6
SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each door face material in specified finish.
D. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to
installation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 8o that are identical to assemblies
tested for fire- test - response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and
labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction:
1. NFPA 252 for vertical access doors and frames.
2. ASTM E 119 for horizontal access doors and frames.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in
"Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
B. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M
or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
C. Steel Sheet: electrolytic zinc - coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold - rolled steel sheet substrate
complying with ASTM A soo8 /A soo8M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
D. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) with A6o zinc- iron -alloy
(galvannealed) coating or G6o mill - phosphatized zinc coating.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08311 -1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
E. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Factory- Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer.
F. Drywall Beads: o.o299 -inch zinc - coated steel sheet to receive joint compound.
G. Manufacturer's standard finish.
2.2 ALUMINUM MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6o63 -T6, mill finish.
B. Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6o6i -T6, mill finish.
C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209.
1. Mill finish.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acudor Products, Inc.
2. Babcock - Davis; A Cierra Products Co.
3. Bar -Co, Inc. Div.; Alfab, Inc.
4. Cendrex Inc.
Dur -Red Products.
6. Elmdor /Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co.
7. Jensen Industries.
8. J. L. Industries, Inc.
g. Karp Associates, Inc.
10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
11. MIFAB, Inc.
12. Milcor Inc.
13. Nystrom, Inc.
14. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).
ZUMIEZ o1/o6/o6
B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from metallic - coated steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
2. Door: Minimum o.o6o- inch -thick sheet metal.
3. Frame: Minimum o.o6o- inch -thick sheet metal with 1 -1/4- inch -wide, surface- mounted trim.
4. Hinges: Spring- loaded, concealed -pin type.
5. Latch: Cam latch with interior release.
C. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from metallic - coated steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Door: Minimum [o.o6o- inch -thick sheet metal.
3. Frame: Minimum o.o6o- inch -thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange.
4. Hinges: Spring - loaded, concealed -pin type.
Latch: Cam latch with interior release.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08311-2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
D. Aluminum Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from aluminum sheet and
extruded - aluminum shapes.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Door: Minimum o.o8o- inch -thick aluminum sheet.
3. Frame: Minimum o.o6o- inch -thick extruded aluminum with 1 -1/4 -inch- wide rolled flange.
4. Hinges: Concealed continuous aluminum.
5. Latch: Screwdriver- operated cam latch.
E. Fire - Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from metallic -
coated steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Fire - Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
3. Temperature Rise Rating: 25o deg F at the end of 3o minutes.
4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral -fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a
minimum thickness of 0.036 inch.
5. Frame: Minimum o.o6o- inch -thick sheet metal with 1- inch -wide, surface- mounted trim.
6. Hinges: Concealed -pin type.
7. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
8. Latch: Self- latching device operated by knurled knob with interior release.
F. Fire - Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Trimtess Frames: Fabricated from metallic- coated
steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Fire - Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
3. Temperature Rise Rating: 25o deg F at the end of 3o minutes.
4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral -fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a
minimum thickness of 0.036 inch.
5. Frame: Minimum o.o6o- inch -thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
6. Hinges: Concealed -pin type.
7. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
8. Latch: Self - latching device operated by knurled knob with interior release.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces
without blemishes.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports
indicated.
D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.
Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic
grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08311 - 3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ o1/o6/o6
F. Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on
aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned
with adjacent finish surfaces.
C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08311
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311- 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
B. See Division 8 door sections for astragals and door silencers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product certificates and test reports.
C. Other Action Submittals:
DOOR HARDWARE
1. Commercial door hardware.
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.
ZUMIEZ oi/io/o6
1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication
and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in
the Contract Documents.
b. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and
frame.
2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware
item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.
3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening
including name and manufacturer.
4) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location,
sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.
2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final
keying instructions for locks.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.
1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a
qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to
consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 8o that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be
established at 4o inches or less above the sill.
08710 -1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ o1 /io /o6
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
B. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be
factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated
requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:
a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door
hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products
equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities
of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are
identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each
door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
2.2 HINGES, GENERAL
A. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into
wood doors and frames, provide only template - produced units.
B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
DOOR HARDWARE
1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless -steel pin.
2. Interior Hinges: Brass, with stainless -steel pin body and brass protruding heads.
3. Hinges for Fire -Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin.
C. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge
pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and outswinging
corridor doors with locks.
08710 - 2
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ o1 /io /o6
D. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
2.3 HINGES
A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.
C. Available Manufacturers:
2.4 SPRING HINGES
A. Self - Closing Hinges: BHMA A156.17.
B. Available Manufacturers:
2.5 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL
A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching,
or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).
B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require
more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special
knowledge for operation.
C. Lock Trim:
1. Levers: Corbin Russwin — Newport.
D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors.
DOOR HARDWARE
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded -to- the -Head Wood Screws: For fire -rated wood doors.
4. Screws: Phillips flat -head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors and
wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.
1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).
3. Cal -Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
4. Hager Companies (HAG).
5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB).
6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK).
7. PBB, Inc. (PBB).
8. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).
3. Cal -Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
4. Hager Companies (HAG).
5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB).
6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK).
7. PBB, Inc. (PBB).
8. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
08710 - 3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
E. Backset: 2 -3/4 inches (7o mm), unless otherwise indicated.
F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved
lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set.
2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with
the following:
1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2.
B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated); Series 4000.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).
b. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS).
c. Cal -Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).
e. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (FAL).
f. Marks USA (MKS).
g. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MED).
h. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ).
i. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).
j. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (SCH).
k. Security Door Controls (SDC).
I. Weiser Lock; a Masco Company (WEI).
m. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).
2.7 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.
1. Available Manufacturers:
2.8 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS
A. Exit Locks: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1, surface mounted, battery powered, housed in metal case; with
red - and -white lettering reading "EMERGENCY EXIT PUSH TO OPEN - -ALARM WILL SOUND."
DOOR HARDWARE
a. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ABL).
b. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. (ALH).
c. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).
d. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).
e. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS).
f. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
g. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (FAL).
h. Marks USA (MKS).
i. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MED).
j. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ).
k. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).
I. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (SCH).
m. Weiser Lock; a Masco Company (WEI).
n. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).
08710 - 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ of /io /o6
B. Stand -Alone Exit Alarms: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1, surface mounted on door.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Detex Corporation (DTX).
2.9 DOOR BOLTS
A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors.
B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
C. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated; designed for mortising into
door edge.
1. Available Manufacturers:
DOOR HARDWARE
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).
b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).
c. Don -Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJ0).
d. Door Controls International (DCI).
e. Glynn- Johnson; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (GJ).
f. Hager Companies (HAG).
g. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
h. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (IVS).
i. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
j. Trimco (TBM).
D. Automatic and Self - Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated;
designed for mortising into door edge.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Cal -Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
b. Door Controls International (DCI).
c. Glynn- Johnson; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (GJ).
d. Hager Companies (HAG).
e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (IVS).
f. Trimco (TBM).
2.10 EXIT DEVICES
A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching,
or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf (22 N).
C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more
than 15 Ibf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special
knowledge for operation.
D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 8o that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based
on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
08710 - 5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01 /10/06
F. Outside Trim: Pull with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.
2.11 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated].
B. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; with interchangeable
cores.
C. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:
2.12 KEYING
1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
D. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
E. Available Manufacturers:
1. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ABL).
2. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).
3. ASSA, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ASA).
4. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS).
5. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).
6. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (FAL).
7. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MED).
8. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).
9. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (SCH).
10. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A.
Incorporate decisions made in keying conference into master key system.
1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.
2. Existing System: Re -key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system.
B. Keys: Nickel silver; permanently inscribed with a visual key control number and including the
notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide three cylinder change keys
and five master keys.
2.13 OPERATING TRIM
A. Standard: BHMA A156.6.
B. Materials: Fabricate from bronze, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Available Manufacturers:
1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).
2. Don -Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
3. Forms + Surfaces (FS).
4. Hager Companies (HAG).
5. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
6. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (IVS).
7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
8. Trimco (TBM).
2.14 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
ZUMIEZ o1 /io /o6
A. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or
self - latching bolts are used.
1. Material: Polished brass or bronze, with strike plate.
2.15 CLOSERS
A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements:
1. Interior, Non - Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.
2. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 Ibf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch.
3. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more
than 3o Ibf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum
required width.
C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for
size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of
use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for
opening force.
D. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Provide type of arm required
for closer to be located on non - public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the following
material:
E. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3.
2.16 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Size: 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than door
width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets.
DOOR HARDWARE
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW).
b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR).
c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH).
d. Dor- O- Matic; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (DOR).
e. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (LCN).
f. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC).
g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).
h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).
i. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL).
08710 - 7
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
1. Material: o.o5o -inch- (1.3 -mm -) thick bronze.
2. Available Manufacturers:
2.17 STOPS AND HOLDERS
ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
a. American Floor Products Co., Inc. (AFP).
b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).
d. Don -Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO).
e. Hager Companies (HAG),
f. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
g. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. of InPro Corporation (IPC).
h. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (IVS).
i. Pawling Corporation (PAW).
j. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
k. Trimco (TBM).
A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.
1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do
not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not
appropriate, provide overhead holders.
B. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.
C. Combination Floor and Wall Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.
D. Silencers for Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled -in
application to frame.
E. Available Manufacturers:
1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH).
2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
3. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM).
4. Cal -Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
5. Don -Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO).
6. Door Controls International (DCI).
7. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH).
8. Dor- O- Matic; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (DOR).
9. Glynn - Johnson; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (61).
10. Hager Companies (HAG).
11. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES).
12. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
13. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll -Rand Company (IVS).
14. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).
15. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
16. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).
17. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
18. Trimco (TBM).
2.18 DOOR GASKETING
A. Standard: BHMA A156.22.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 8
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
B. General: Provide continuous weather -strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or
sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for
exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
C. Smoke - Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA lo5 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke - control
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke - labeled gasketing on 2o- minute -rated doors and on smoke - labeled doors.
D. Sound -Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency,
for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
G. Available Manufacturers:
2.19 THRESHOLDS
A. Standard: BHMAA156.21.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide
thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high.
C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch high.
D. Available Manufacturers:
2.20 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE
A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
1. Hager Companies (HAG).
2. M -D Building Products, Inc. (MD).
3. National Guard Products (NGP).
4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).
5. Reese Enterprises (RE).
6. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL).
7. Zero International (ZRO).
ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
1. Hager Companies (HAG).
2. M -D Building Products, Inc. (MD).
3. National Guard Products (NGP).
4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).
5. Reese Enterprises (RE).
6. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).
7. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL).
8. Zero International (ZRO).
08710 -9
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ o1 /io /o6
1. Available Manufacturers:
2.21 FABRICATION
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).
c. Don -Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO).
d. Hager Companies (HAG).
e. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB).
f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
g. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
h. Trimco (TBM).
A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated,
using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a
quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not
furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.
B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application
intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with
finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with NFPA 8o for fasteners of door hardware in fire -rated applications.
C. Finishes: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface -
applied door hardware according to ANSI A25o.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115 -W Series.
C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHl's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for
Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood
Flush Doors."
D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting
and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or
finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim
units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface - mounted items
until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as
DOOR HARDWARE
08710 -10
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ o1 /10/06
3.2 DOOR HARDWARE SETS (as indicated on drawings)
END OF SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from
an open position of 3o degrees.
2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep
period so that, from an open position of 7o degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to
move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
08710 - 11
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified
in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Interior borrowed lites.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass lites
in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and
in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified
based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated
below:
1.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Samples: 12 -inch- square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear float
glass.
C. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer.
1:4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
01/23/06
For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated.
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant
manufacturers, for testing according to ASTM C 1087, samples of each glazing material type, tape
sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass- framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric
glazing sealants:
B. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
GLAZING 1
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
2.3 GLAZING GASKETS
1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
2. EPDM, ASTM C 864.
3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.
5. Any material indicated above.
1. Neoprene.
2. EPDM.
3. Silicone.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
5. Any material indicated above.
2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
4. Class 25 Neutral- Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant:
01/23/06
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
A. Heat - Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality -Q3; of class, kind,
and condition indicated.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller- hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to
bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide Kind HS (heat - strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where
needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and
to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article.
3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass).
5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat -
strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying
with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness
required to maintain watertight seal:
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed -cell, integral - skinned gaskets of material
indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and
glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of
installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
GLAZING 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
2.5 GLAZING TAPES
GLAZING
a. Available Products:
1) Dow Corning Corporation; 799.
2) GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000.
3) GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC.
4) Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI -631.
5) Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly -Glaze Plus.
6) Tremco; Proglaze SG.
7) Tremco; Spectrem 2.
8) Tremco; Tremsil 600.
01/23/06
b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
c. Class: 25.
d. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates
indicated, 0.
1) Use 0 Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum
coated with a high - performance coating, galvanized steel and wood.
f. Applications: Interior, not exposed to elements.
A. Back - Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content
of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without
spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated;
packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for
products indicated below:
1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on
both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with
AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid
sealant.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and
with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus
5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
01/23/06
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and density
to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
2.8 MONOLITHIC FLOAT -GLASS UNITS
A. Uncoated Clear Float -Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.
1. Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING
A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant- substrate testing.
4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 5o inches.
7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
B. Tape Glazing: Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed
edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but
not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
1. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.
Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
2. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
3. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
C. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket
manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
GLAZING 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
01/23/06
1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
2. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression
gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against
faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of
openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending
stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
D. Sealant Glazing (Wet): Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant
backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure
spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant
relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
1. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
2. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent
labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting
from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating
substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by
glass manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION o8800
GLAZING
5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ o1/o6/o6
SECTION 09111 - NON -LOAD- BEARING STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non -load- bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition watts, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency.
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and
inspection agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON -LOAD- BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Goo, hot -dip galvanized, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, o.o625 -inch- diameter wire, or
double strand of o.0475 -inch- diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire
hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by
construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing
agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.
2. Powder- Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -
resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and
capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to ten times that imposed by construction
as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, o.162 -inch diameter.
NON -LOAD- BEARING STEEL FRAMING
09111 -1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
D. Carrying Channels: Cold - rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.0538 inch
and minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold - Rolled Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide
flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 6 45.
a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide[ one of] the following:
ZUMIEZ o1/o6/o6
1. Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral
bracing.
2. Double- Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to
friction fit inside runner.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness
not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series.
2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire- resistance -rated assembly indicated;
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip.
NON -LOAD- BEARING STEEL FRAMING
09111-2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
b. Metal -Lite, Inc.; The System.
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Cold - Rolled Channel Bridging: o.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide
flanges.
1. Depth: 1 -1/2 inches.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1 -1/2 by 1 -1/2 inches, o.o68 -inch- thick, galvanized steel.
F. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
2. Depth: 7/8 inch.
G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
H. Cold - Rolled Furring Channels: o.o538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide
flanges.
1. Depth: 3/4 inch.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare -steel
thickness of 0.0312 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, o.o625 -inch- diameter wire,
or double strand of o.o475 -inch- diameter wire.
I. Z- Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1 -1/4 inches, wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare -metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other
properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt- Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive - backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration
without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to
framing installation.
NON -LOAD- BEARING STEEL FRAMING
09111 -3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that
apply to framing installation.
3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that
apply to framing installation.
4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building
structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in -place hanger inserts that
extend through forms.
5. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
C. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
D. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross - furring members to each other and
butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel
members that will receive finishes.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1. Space studs as follows:
NON- LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING
09111 -4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for
door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match
framing required above door heads.
4. Fire - Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire - resistance -rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
5. Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated.
6. Curved Partitions:
D. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or
powder- driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
E. Z- Furring Members:
a. Single -Layer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
c. Tile backing panels: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire - resistance -rated
assembly indicated.
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs.
On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.
1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation ") vertically and hold in
place with Z- furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder- driven fasteners
spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending
beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw - attach short flange of furring channel to web
of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from
corner and cut insulation to fit.
NON -LOAD- BEARING STEEL FRAMING
ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
09111 -5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8
inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 09111
NON -LOAD- BEARING STEEL FRAMING
09111 -6
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire - resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to
those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413
by an independent testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of
gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
B. Type X:
C. Type C:
GYPSUM BOARD
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
3. Tile backing panels.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. BPB America Inc.
c. G -P Gypsum.
d. Lafarge North America Inc.
e. National Gypsum Company.
f. PABCO Gypsum.
g. Temple.
h. USG Corporation.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
01/09/06
09250 -1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
1. Thickness: As required by fire- resistance -rated assembly indicated on Drawings.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular -type
gypsum board of same thickness.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
F. Abuse - Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation, through -
penetration (impact resistance), and abrasion than standard, regular -type and Type X gypsum
board.
1. Core: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
G. High - Impact Type: Manufactured with Type X core, plastic film laminated to back side for greater
resistance to through- penetration (impact resistance).
GYPSUM BOARD
1. Core: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Plastic -Film Thickness: 0.020 inch.
H. Moisture- and Mold - Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold - resistant core and surfaces.
1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.2 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM
standard edges.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
products that may be incorporated into the Work
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
American Gypsum Co.
BPB America Inc.
G -P Gypsum.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
PABCO Gypsum.
Temple.
USG Corporation.
2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
B. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
01/09/06
C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's
requirements, manufacturers offering
include, but are not limited to, the
09250 - 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens -Glass Gold" by G -P
Gypsum.
2. Core: As indicated.
2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water- Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 63o /C 63oM or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. BPB America Inc.
c. G -P Gypsum.
d. Lafarge North America Inc.
e. National Gypsum Company.
f. PABCO Gypsum.
g. Temple.
h. USG Corporation.
3. Core: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Board:
1. Complying with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShield Tile Guard"
by G -P Gypsum.
2. Complying with ASTM Cii77 /C 1177M.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensArmor Plus Interior
Guard" by G -P Gypsum.
3. Core: As indicated on Drawings.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum - coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced
galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC -Bead: J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L -Bead: L- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U -Bead: J- shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
GYPSUM BOARD
01/09/06
09250 - 3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
GYPSUM BOARD
1. Material: Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
01/09/06
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC -Bead: J- shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One- piece, rolled zinc with V- shaped slot and removable
strip covering slot opening.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6o63 -T5.
4. Finish: Corrosion- resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10 -by -lo glass mesh.
4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use
setting -type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim
flanges, use setting -type taping compound.
a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting -type, sandable topping compound.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting -type, sandable
topping compound.
2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.
09250 - 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by
combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock
wool.
1. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load- bearing partitions at structural abutments,
except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge
trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural
surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction.
Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide - dimension lumber, including floor joists
and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract
wood shrinkage.
GYPSUM BOARD
01/09/06
1. Water- Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting -
type, sandable topping compound.
2. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.
3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 5o g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to
0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
09250-5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
E. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces
of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound - flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
3.3
3.4
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Type C: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.
4. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
5. Abuse - Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
6. High- Impact Type: As indicated on Drawings.
7. Moisture- and Mold- Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
GYPSUM BOARD
APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Install with 1/4 -inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural
penetrations.
2. Fasten with corrosion - resistant screws.
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with
1/4 -inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4 -inch gap where panels
abut other construction or penetrations.
C. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular -type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat
surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water - resistant panels.
D. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 84o and in specific locations approved by
Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
3. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L -Bead: Use [where indicated.
5. U -Bead: Use where indicated.
6. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
01/09/06
09250-6
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener
heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for
tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.
4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
E. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use
as exposed soffit board.
F. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction,
and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
01/09/06
09250 - 7
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Quarry tile.
2. Paver tile.
3. Glazed wall tile.
4. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
5. Waterproof membrane for thin -set tile installations.
6. Crack - suppression membrane for thin -set tile installations.
7. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples:
01/20/06
1. Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Not used)
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full -size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed,
for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
3. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable
product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Daltile; Div. of Dal -Tile International Inc.
2. American Olean
B. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1,
"Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
CERAMIC TILE 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
C. Unglazed Paver Tile CT -1: Flat tile as follows:
1. Composition: Natural day.
2. Facial Dimensions: 11 -3/16 x 11 -3/16.
3. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with square or cushion edges.
5. Basis -of- Design Product: Mexican Saltillo Paver or a comparable product of one of the
following:
D. Glazed Paver Tile CT -3: Flat tile as follows:
1. Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay or porcelain.
2. Facial Dimensions: 7 -7/8 by 7 -7/8 inches.
3. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
4. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges.
5. For latex- portland cement - mortared and - grouted paver tile, precoat with temporary
protective coating.
6. Basis -of- Design Product: As indicated on drawings.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
a. Bourget Brothers Building Materials: 1636 11 Street, Santa Monica, CA 90404
(3 6 55 6 ).
A. Thresholds: Fabricate to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. Bevel edges at 1:2
slope, limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.
1. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C 1 353
or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
a. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium - grained white stone with gray veining.
2. Fabric - Reinforced, Fluid- Applied Product: Liquid -latex rubber, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), with fabric
reinforcement.
a. Available Products:
2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.
2. Boiardi Products Corporation.
3. Bonsai, W. R., Company.
4. Bostik.
5. C -Cure.
6. Custom Building Products.
7. DAP, Inc.
8. )amo Inc.
01/20/06
1) Custom Building Products; Trowel & Seat Waterproofing and Anti - Fracture
Membrane.
2) LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.
3) MAPEI Corporation; PRP M19.
4) Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S -9000.
CERAMIC TILE 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CERAMIC TILE
9. LATICRETE International Inc.
10. MAPEI Corporation.
11. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
12. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
13. TEC Specialty Products Inc.
B. Latex- Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
C. Chemical- Resistant, Water- Cleanable, Tile- Setting and - Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC
content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 4o CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Latapoxy 300.
D. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.
E. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.
F. Polymer- Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated.
G. Chemical- Resistant Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, color as indicated. Latapoxy 2000.
1. Provide product capable of resisting continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures
of up to 140 deg F and 212 deg F, respectively, as certified by mortar manufacturer for
intended use.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement -based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile - setting materials.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L- shape, stainless steel; ASTM A 666, 30o Series exposed -edge
material.
C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not
change color or appearance of grout.
PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, that are incompatible with tile - setting materials.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to
tile - setting material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
01/20/06
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site
before installing.
E. Field - Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent
grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of
temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI Aio8 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods
indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions,
edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built -in items. Fit tile closely to
electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint
widths, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant - filled joints during installation of
setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles.
CERAMIC TILE
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI Aio8.io, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For chemical- resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI Aio8.6.
I. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI Aio8.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
1. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine that it is watertight.
J. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards
for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
1. Exterior tile floors.
2. Tile floors in wet areas.
3. Tile swimming pool decks.
4. Tile floors in laundries.
5. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.
6. Tile floors composed of rib - backed tiles.
K. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch.
3. Paver Tile: 3/8 inch.
01/20/06
4
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ
3.3
L. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as
abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
M. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
N. Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI Aio8.1A, Section 4.1.
1. Set thresholds in latex - portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
0. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
CERAMIC TILE
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
2. Glazed Wall Tile: i /i6 inch.
P. Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout- sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove
excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
1. Epoxy Adhesive: Tile- setting epoxy adhesive.
2. Grout: Chemical Resistant Epoxy Grout.
B. Interior floor installation on waterproof membrane over concrete; thin -set mortar; TCA F122.
1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer - modified sanded grout.
END OF SECTION 09310
01/20/06
A. Interior floor installation on concrete (over under -floor security system) water - cleanable epoxy
adhesive; TCA Fii6.
5
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE (not used)
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive
resilient products.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT BASE (RB -1)
A. Resilient Base:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
b. Roppe Corporation, USA.
B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1. Material Requirement: Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
3. Style: Straight (flat or toeless).
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D. Height: 4 inches.
E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
H. Finish: Matte.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09653 -1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
I. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.2 I NSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement based or blended
hydraulic- cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications
indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 4o CFR S9, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 5o g /L.
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient
products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound
and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
09653-2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ 01/06/06
END OF SECTION 0 9 6 53
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09653-3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.4
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Steel.
4. Galvanized metal.
5. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
6. Wood.
7. Gypsum board.
8. Spray- textured ceilings.
9. Cotton or canvas insulation covering.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products
List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials
applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional five percent, but not Tess than 1 gal. of each material and
color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
01/17/06
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
INTERIOR PAINTING 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
01/17/06
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers
of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.
2.2 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior /Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.3 PRIMERS /SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer /Sealer: MPI #50.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Interior Alkyd Primer /Seater: MPI #45.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
C. Wood -Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
systems indicated.
2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Quick -Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
C. Rust - Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #io7.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
D. Cementitious Galvanized -Metal Primer: MPI #26.
1. VOC Content: E Range of Ei.
E. Waterborne Galvanized -Metal Primer: MPI #
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
F. Vinyl Wash Primer: MPI #80.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
G. Quick -Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
INTERIOR PAINTING 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex -Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.6 LATEX PAINTS
A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Interior Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #44 (Gloss Level 2).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
C. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
D. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
E. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
F. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 6o deg).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
G. High - Performance Architectural Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #138 (Gloss Level 2).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
H. High - Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell): MPI #139 (Gloss Level 3).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
I. High - Performance Architectural Latex (Satin): MPI #140 (Gloss Level 4).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.
High - Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
K. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Level 1).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
L. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
J.
01/17/06
INTERIOR PAINTING 3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
M. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 6o deg).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.7 ALKYD PAINTS
A. Interior Alkyd (Flat): MPI #49 (Gloss Level 1).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Interior Alkyd (Eggshell): MPI #51 (Gloss Level 3).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
C. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
D. Interior Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.8 QUICK- DRYING ENAMELS
A. Quick -Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Quick -Drying Enamel (High Gloss): MPI #96 (Gloss Level 7).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.9 DRY FOG /FALL COATINGS
A. Latex Dry Fog /Fall: MPI #118.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Waterborne Dry Fall: MPI #
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
C. Interior Alkyd Dry Fog /Fall: MPI #55.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.10 ALUMINUM PAINT
A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.11 FLOOR COATINGS
A. Interior Concrete Floor Stain: MPI #58.
01/17/06
INTERIOR PAINTING 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
B. Interior /Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
C. Interior /Exterior Latex Floor and Porch Paint (Low Gloss): MPI #6o (maximum Gloss Level 3).
01/17/06
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
D. Exterior /Interior Alkyd Floor Enamel (Gloss): MPI #27 (Gloss Level 6).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Additives: Manufacturer's standard additive to increase skid resistance of painted surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as
follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes
and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are
dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
INTERIOR PAINTING
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to
produce paint systems indicated.
5
Murphy Varey, P5 - 2006 ZUMIEZ
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Mechanical Work:
C. Steel Substrates:
01/17/06
D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied
spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Tanks that do not have factory- applied final finishes.
e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or
other paintable jacket material.
g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory- primed finish for field
painting.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Pane[boards.
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory- primed finish for field painting.
E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave
in an undamaged condition.
F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
1. High - Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 3.1C.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer /sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High- performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High- performance architectural latex with sheen as scheduled.
1. High - Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 4.2D.
a. Prime Coat: Interior /exterior latex block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: High - performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High - performance architectural latex with sheen as scheduled.
1. Water -Based Dry-Fall System: MPI INT 5.1C.
a. Prime Coat: Quick -drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Topcoat: Latex dry fog /fall.
2. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.1M.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
INTERIOR PAINTING 6
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
INTERIOR PAINTING
b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint.
c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint.
3. High- Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.1R.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High- performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High - performance architectural latex with sheen as scheduled.
D. Galvanized -Metal Substrates:
1. High- Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.3M.
a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized -metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High - performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High - performance architectural latex with sheen as scheduled.
E. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
i. High - Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.4F.
a. Prime Coat: Quick -drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: High - performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High - performance architectural latex with sheen as indicated.
F. Glue- Laminated Beam and Column Substrates:
i. High- Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.1N.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex -based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High - performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High- performance architectural latex with sheen as indicated.
G. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork and doors.
1. High - Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.3A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex -based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High - performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High- performance architectural latex with sheen as scheduled.
01/17/06
H. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood, medium- density fiberboard and hardboard.
1. High - Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.4S.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex -based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High - performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High- performance architectural latex with sheen as scheduled.
I. Dimension Lumber Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: Including exposed joists and exposed beams.
1. High - Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.2B.
a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer /sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High - performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
7
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
1.
c. Topcoat: High - performance architectural latex with sheen as scheduled.
Wood Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Alkyd Floor Enamel System: MPI INT 6.5A.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior /interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss).
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior /interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss).
c. Topcoat: Exterior /interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss).
K. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. High- Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B.
END OF SECTION 09912
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer /sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: High- performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High- performance architectural latex with sheen as scheduled.
L. Spray- Textured Ceiling Substrates:
1. Latex (Flat) System: MPI INT 9.1A, spray applied.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer /sealer (flat).
b. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).
M. Cotton or Canvas Insulation - Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings.
1. Latex System: MPI INT 1o.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer /sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex with sheen as indicated.
01/17/06
INTERIOR PAINTING 8
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 09931- WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Interior Substrates:
a. Exposed glue- laminated beams and columns.
b. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
B. Stain Colors: Match Architect's samples.
WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES
01/09/06
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the following
substrates:
C. Product List: Printout of MPI's current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products
List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" for products and finish systems indicated.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials
applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color
applied.
1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers
of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
09931-1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
2.2 W0OD FILLERS
A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.3 PRIMERS AND SEALERS
A. Alkyd Sanding Sealer: MPI #102.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.
B. Lacquer Sanding Sealer: MPI #84.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
C. Shellac: MPI #88.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.4 STAINS
A. Interior Wood Stain (Semitransparent): MPI #90.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.5 VARNISHES
A. Interior Varnish (Flat): MPI #73, Gloss Level 1, alkyd type.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
B. Interior Varnish (Semigloss): MPI #74, Gloss Level 5, alkyd type.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.6 POLYURETHANE FINISHES
A. Interior, Oil - Modified, Clear Urethane (Satin): MPI #57, Gloss Level 4.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.7 WATERBORNE ACRYLIC FINISHES
A. Waterborne Clear Acrylic (Satin): MPI #128, Gloss Level 4.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
2.8 LACQUERS
A. Lacquer (Clear Flat): MPI #87, Gloss Level 1.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES
01/09/06
09931-2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
01/09/06
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured with an
electronic moisture meter.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes.
3. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
4. Beginning application of finish system constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrate and
conditions.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Apply wood filler paste to open -grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification
Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning,
repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged
condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
finished wood surfaces.
3.3 INTERIOR WOOD- FINISH- SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Exposed Glue - Laminated Beam and Column Substrates:
1. Alkyd Varnish Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.1K.
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent).
b. Two Finish Coats: Interior varnish (flat).
2. Alkyd Varnish Over Sealer System: MPI INT 6.1C.
a. Seal Coat: Alkyd sanding sealer.
b. Two Finish Coats: Interior varnish (flat).
3. Polyurethane Varnish Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.i).
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent).
b. Two Finish Coats: Interior, oil - modified, clear urethane (satin).
4. Polyurethane Varnish System: MPI INT 6.1D.
a. One Factory- Applied Finish Coat: Matching field - applied finish coats.
b. Two Field- Applied Finish Coats: Interior, oil - modified, dear urethane (satin).
WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES
09931-3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
5. Waterborne Clear Acrylic Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.iR.
6. Waterborne Clear Acrylic System: MPI INT 6.F.
a. Three Finish Coats: Waterborne clear acrylic (satin).
B. Finish Carpentry Substrates:
1. Polyurethane Varnish Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.3E.
2. Polyurethane Varnish System: MPI INT 6.3K.
3. Waterborne Clear Acrylic Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.3W.
4. Waterborne Acrylic Clear Over Stain System: MPI INT 6.3Q.
a. Three Finish Coats: Waterborne clear acrylic (satin).
5. Lacquer Over Stain and Sealer System: MPI INT 6.3F.
6. Lacquer Over Sealer System: MPI INT 6.3H.
END OF SECTION 09931
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent).
b. Two Finish Coats: Waterborne clear acrylic (satin).
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent).
b. Two Finish Coats: Interior, oil - modified, clear urethane (satin).
a. One Factory- Applied Finish Coat: Matching field- applied finish coats.
b. Two Field - Applied Finish Coats: Interior, oil- modified, dear urethane (satin).
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent).
b. Two Finish Coats: Waterborne dear acrylic (satin).
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent).
b. Seal Coat: Lacquer sanding sealer.
c. Two Finish Coats: Lacquer (clear satin).
a. Seal Coat: Lacquer sanding sealer.
b. Two Finish Coats: Lacquer (clear satin).
01/09/06
WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 0 993 1- 4
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 10431- SIGNAGE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Plaques.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's
"Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities;
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.
01/25/06
1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others,
and accessories.
2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille,
and layout for each sign.
C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines
and ICC /ANSI A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on both
surfaces with abrasion- resistant coating:
1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft- Ibf /in. perASTM D 256, Method A.
2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf /sq. in. per ASTM D 638.
3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,00o Ibf /sq. in. per ASTM D 790.
4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg Fat 264 lbf /sq. in. perASTM D 648.
5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber
abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1 044.
B. Applied Vinyl: Die -cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with pressure -
sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications.
2.2 PLAQUES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
SIGNAGE 1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006 ZUMIEZ
2.3 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1. Advance Corporation; Braille -Tac Division.
2. A. R. K. Ramos.
3. Mills Manufacturing Company.
4. Southwell Company (The).
3.1 INSTALLATION
END OF SECTION 10431
01/25/06
B. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated
on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings,
including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum
adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for three years for application
intended.
A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and
other defects in appearance.
2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding
objects or standing within swing of door.
B. Wail- Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more
stringent requirements apply.
1. Two -Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for
vinyl- covered or rough surfaces.
2. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8 -inch- thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with
predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods
are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment
to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above.
3. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled
holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate
as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.
4. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to
conceal mounting materials.
C. Bracket - Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for
mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings
securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
SIGNAGE 2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
A. Section includes portable, hand - carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire
extinguishers.
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
1.4 WARRANTY (not used)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND - CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
i. Moon - American.
j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc.
k. Potter Roemer LLC.
I. Pyro -Chem; Tyco Safety Products.
10523 -1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2006
ZUMIEZ 01/10/06
B. Multipurpose Dry- Chemical Type: UL -rated nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -
based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.
2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or
structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, 'with plated or
black baked - enamel finish.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
h. Potter Roemer LLC.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing,
and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket - mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter
decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Vertical.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
END OF SECTION 10523
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10523-
Murphy Varey, PS - 2003 ZUMIEZ
SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Public -use shower room accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Construction details and dimensions.
2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and
substrate preparation.
3. Material and finish descriptions.
4. Features that will be included for Project.
5. Manufacturer's warranty.
B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
02/03
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of
same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 7o,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for
access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and
servicing of accessories.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -1
Murphy Varey, PS - 2003 ZUMIEZ
1.6 WARRANTY
02/03
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying
the Work.
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312 -inch (o.8 -mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products
with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A ioo8 /A ioo8M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), o.o359
(o.9 -mm) minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G6o (Zi8o) hot -dip zinc coating.
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper -and-
theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.o mm thick.
I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile- butadiene- styrene resin formulation.
2.2 PUBLIC -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufariurers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
C. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the
following:
1. A & 1 Washroom Accessories, Inc.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10801-2
Murphy Varey, PS - 2003 ZUMIEZ
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
D. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Bobrick #273.
2. Description: Double -roll dispenser.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle. Eccentric - shaped, molded - plastic
spindle revolves one -half revolution per dispensing operation for controlled delivery; core
cannot be removed until roll is empty.
5. Capacity: Designed for 4 -1/2- or 5 -inch- (114- or 127 -mm -) diameter tissue rolls.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
E. Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser:
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Home Depot.
2. Description: Lever - actuated mechanism permits controlled delivery of paper rolls in preset
lengths per stroke.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Minimum Capacity: 8 -inch (2o3 -mm) wide, 800 -foot (244 -m) long roll.
5. Material and Finish: ABS plastic, gray.
6. Lockset: Tumbler type.
F. Grab Bar:
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Bobrick #B- 6806x.
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip- resistant texture in grip area.
4. Outside Diameter: 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm).
5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Mirror Unit:
1. Basis -of- Design Product: Bobrick #B- 165 -1836
2. Frame: Stainless -steel channel.
a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.
02/03
3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft- resistant installation, using method indicated
below.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
a. One- piece, galvanized steel, wall - hanger device with spring- action locking mechanism
to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a
special tool to remove.
4. Size: 18" wide x 36" high.
10801 -3
Murphy Varey, PS - 2003 ZUMIEZ
2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
B. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the
following:
1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
2. TCI Products.
3. Truebro, Inc.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
C. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent
direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing
coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded - plastic, white.
2.4 FABRICATION
02/03
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and
access panels with full - length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with
corrosion - resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to
substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly
anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according
to method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendal:ions.
END OF SECTION 10801
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10801 -4
March 19, 2008
David Murphy
2101 9 Av #211
Seattle WA 98121
RE: Letter of Incomplete Application # 1
Development Permit Application D08 -137
Zumiez — 2646 Southcenter Mall
Dear Mr. Murphy,
This letter is to inform you that your permit application received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center on
March 14, 2008 is determined to be incomplete. Before your application can continue the plan review
process the following items from the following department need to be addressed:
Public Works Department: Joanna Spencer at 206 431 -2440 if you have any questions concerning
the following comments.
1. Submit King County Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification Form due to addition of
restroom.
Please address the comment above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications,
and/or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) sets of revised plans, specifications and/or
other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block.
In order to better expedite your resubmittal a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every
resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Revisions must be made in person and will not
be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service.
If you have any questions, please contact me at the Permit Center at (206) 431 -3670.
Sincerely,
ifer Marshall
it Technician
Enclosures
File: D08 -137
•
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director
PAPermit Center\Incomplete Letters\2008\D08 -137 Incomplete Ltr #1.DOC
jem
0
Jim Haggerton, Mayor
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08 -137 DATE: 03 -19 -08
PROJECT NAME: ZUMIEZ
SITE ADDRESS: 2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL
Original Plan Submittal
Response to Correction Letter #
X Response to Incomplete Letter # 1
Revision # After Permit Issued
■
DEPARTMENTS:
B i 4 I g Division
Public Works
DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.)
Complete M
Comments:
Permit Center Use Only
INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED:
Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials:
LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED:
TUES/THURS ROUTING:
Please Route r Structural Review Required I No further Review Required
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS:
PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP
Structural
Incomplete
Approved Approved with Conditions
Notation:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
Permit Center Use Only
CORRECTION LETTER MAILED:
Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials:
Documents/routing slip.doc
2 -28 -02
• PERMIT COORD COPY 0
Fire Prevention I 1
DUE DATE: 03-5-08
DATE:
DATE:
Planning Division
Permit Coordinator
Not Applicable
DUE DATE: 04-22-08
Not Approved (attach comments) Ti
DEPARTMENTS:
Building. DivisiQn
ublic Works
Comments:
Please Route
TUES/THURS ROUTING:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS:
Documents/routing slip.doc
2 -28-02
• PERMIT COunu 11 /
PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP
ACTIVITY NUMBER: D08 - 137 DATE: 03 - -
PROJECT NAME: ZUMIEZ
SITE ADDRESS: 2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL
X Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter #
Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued
III AWu 5 40'06
Fire Prevention IX
Structural
DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Th rs.)
Complete Incomplete
LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED:
DUE DATE: 03-18-08
DATE:
DATE:
IP anning Division LAI
Permit Coordinator n
Not Applicable
Permit Center Use Only
INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: 0 I
Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW Staff Initials: . 1/"*.'
❑ Structural Review Required n No further Review Required
Approved Approved with Conditions n Not Approved (attach comments)
Notation:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
DUE DATE: 04 -15 -08
Permit Center Use Only
CORRECTION LETTER MAILED:
Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials:
Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through
the mail, fax, etc.
Date:
City of Tukwila
Response to Incomplete Letter # /
❑ Response to Correction Letter #
❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued
❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner
Project Name: Z u /27; Z
Project Address: 24, `/C. &z, Pd, /1 1/ 774 4z ;
Contact Person: D4 v; e /U u r A Phone Number: 4 S 5/— (S62
Summary of Revision:
hie >11 � s��, ' d ,- 6 & - )4'44 h
Sheet Number(s):
"Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision
Received at the City of Tukwila Permit ( Center by:
Entered in Permits Plus on 051(14
lapplications\fornu- applications on Iine\revision submittal
Created: 8-13 -2004
Qwials&
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 -431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http: //www.ci. tukwila. wa. us
Plan Check/Permit Number:
7>0 - /37
Steven M. Mullet, Mayor
Steve Lancaster, Director
RECEIVED
CITY OFT! 1l<WILA
MAR 19 2008
[Date]
Tukwila Building Division/Permit Center
6300 Southcenter Bl, Suite 100
Tukwila, WA 98188
• •
Tenant Acknowledgment Letter
Tenant improvement permit for [tom], Tukwila Permit No. p bi - 131 is
issued subject to the following condition:
Final inspection approval of this permit and approval of occupancy (i.e. Open for
Business) for the herein named tenant space will not be issued until the "shell"
Building Permit No. D06 -147 has received final inspection approval from the
Building Division.
This condition is hereby acknowledged by:
Title': 7 1
Tenant Name: 2- t.-/w-t LE? l NI
cnv
APR 2 4 2008
PERMIT CENTEp
of STQL11 v
1 Note that the letter is to be signed by the responsible officer of the tenant (ie business
manager, business president, vice president, CEO etc). The contractor, contact person for
the project nor the architect will not be acceptable.
Kind of Fixture
Fixture Units
No. of Fixtures
Total
Fixture Units
Public
Private
Public
Private
Bathtub and Shower
4
4
Shower, per head
2
2
Dishwasher
2
2
Drinking fountain (each head)
1
.5
Hose bibb (interior)
2.5
2.5
Clotheswasher or laundry tub
4
2
Sink, bar or lavatory
2
1
2_
Sink, Clinic flushing
8
8
Sink, kitchen
3
2
Sink, other (service)
3
1.5
1
3
Si 'tk, wash fountain, circle spray
4
3
Urinal, flush valve, 1 GPF
5
2
Urinal, flush valve, >1 GPF
6
2
Urinal, waterless
0
0
Water closet, tank or valve, 1.6 GPF
6
3
J
6
Water closet, tank or valve, >1.6 GPF
8
4
Ig King County
Department of Natural Resources and Parks
Wastewater Treatment Division
Non- Residential
Sewer Use Certification
• To be completed for all new sewer connections, reconnections or
change of use of existing connections.
• This form does not apply to repairs or replacements of existing
sewer connections within five years of disconnect.
Please Print or Type
.oit i-h(. e j? - P it
Property Street Address
City
CLM 1e.2_
Owner's Name
Subdivision Name
Subdiv. # tt ff �
Building Name ‘5-7-1. '1 / _ .e;- .i , PI 1)
(it applicable)
Owner's Phone Number (with Area Code)
Property Contact Phone Number (with Area Code)
Owner's Mailing Address
Late M errill i -rr k. f kf, 1
20
5
•
1 1) 4 - R ?
State ZIP
Lot #
Total Fixture Units
Residential Customer Equivalent (RCE)
20 fixture units equal 1.0 RCE
Total No. of Fixture Units
Block #
A. Fixture Units
Fixture Units x Number of Fixtures = Total Fixture Units
RCE
11
Print Name of Owner /Representati e
Property Tax ID # ' CAO )
Party to be Billed (if different from owner)
City or Sewer District
Date of Connection
Side Sewer Permit #
Please report any demolitions of pre - existing building on this property.
Credit for a demolition may be given under some circumstances.
Demolition of pre- existing building? ❑ Yes , No
Was building on Sanitary Sewer? ❑ Yes Vo
Was Sewer connected before 2/1/90? ❑ Yes
Sewer disconnect date:
Type of building demolished?
Request to apply demolition credit to multiple buildings? ❑ Yes 0 No
B. Other Wastewater Flow
(in addition to Fixture Units identified in Section A)
RECEIVED
Type of Facility /Process: CITY OF TUKWIL4
�9AR 1 9 2008
Estimated Wastewater Discharge:
Gallons /d a y E RM IT CENTER
Residential Customer Equivalents (RCE):
187 gallons per day equals 1.0 RCE
Total Discharge (gal /day) _
187
C. Total Residential Customer Equivalents:
(add A & B)
A
B
ss
RCE
o;nle — cAwa, Ciictnmcr
Date . .S/f
RCE
INCOMPLETE
LTR#
Rfis
PL.rsuant to King County Code 28.84, all sewer customers who establish a new service which uses metropolitan sewage facilities shall be subject to a capacity charge.
The amount of the charge is established annually by the King County Council at a rate per month per residential customer or residential customer equivalent for a
period of fifteen years. The purpose of the charge is to recover costs of providing sewage treatment capacity for new sewer customers. All future billings can be
prepaid at a discounted amount. All future billings can be prepaid at a discounted amount.
Questions regarding the capacity charge or this form should be referred to King County's Wastewater Treatment Division at 206 - 684 -1740.
I certify that the information given is understand that th capacity charge levied will be based on this information and any
deviation will require resubmission of corre ted a-for rf ation oil a revised capacity charge.
Signature of Owner /Representative
License Information
License
FUTURBI952C2
Licensee Name
FUTURE BUILDERS INC
Licensee Type
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR
UBI
602069738
Ind. Ins. Account Id
Business Type
CORPORATION
Address 1
1008 NE 122ND AVE
Address 2
PORTLAND, OR
City
PORTLAND
County
OUT OF STATE
State
OR
Zip
97230
Phone
5032529197
Status
ACTIVE
Specialty 1
GENERAL
Specialty 2
UNUSED
Effective Date
3/1/2005
Expiration Date
3/13/2009
Suspend Date
Separation Date
Parent Company
Previous License
Next License
Associated License
Business Owner Information
Name
Role
Effective Date
Expiration Date
MEYER, SHAWN
PRESIDENT
02/22/2005
Look Up a Contractor, Elect* or Plumber License Detail
Washington State Department of Labor and Industries
General/Specialty Contractor
A business registered as a construction contractor with L &I to perform
construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty
construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of
account and carry general liability insurance.
Bond Information
Bond
#3
Bond
Company
Name
OLD
REPUBLIC
INS CO
Bond
Account
Number
YLI259657
Effective
Date
10/25/2005
Expiration
Date
Until
Cancelled
Cancel
Date
Impaired
Date
Bond
Amount
$12,000.00
Received
Date
10/31/2005
OLD
0
Page 1 of 2
https: // fortress .wa.gov /lni/bbip /printer.aspx ?License= FUTURBI952C2 04/24/2008
WORK FURNISHED AND /OR INSTALLED BY OTHERS
THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING ALL THE WORK EXCEPT
AS NOTED. PORTIONS OF THE PROJECT WILL BE CONTRACTED SEPARATELY BY THE OWNER WITH
CONCURRENT INSTALLATION DURING THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S WORK.
NOTE: CONCRETE FLOOR STAINING WILL REQUIRE THE PROJECT TO SHUT DOWN APPROX. 4 DAYS
DURING INSTALLATION.
GC - GENERAL CONTRACTOR
5C - 5raeifKaNr CONTKACTO, L/NVER SEPARATE CONTtACT TO OI,Nie
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
FURNISHED
BY
INSTALLED
BY
REMARKS
OWNER
30
OWNER
00
STOREFRONT
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* SEE A3.02
LIGHT FIXTURES
* *
* *
* *
•
* * SEE A2.02 AND
ELECTRICAL
DRESSING ROOM MIRRORS
4
4
•
IRON HOOKS (SETS)
4
+
•
DOOR ROSETTE
3
v
•
CASHWRAP
1
0
O
FINISHED DECORATIVE METAL ON CASHWRAP
SOFFIT
1
•
•
DISPLAY GRID BEHIND CASHWRAP (F -502)
0
0
•
STANDARD PILASTER (F -503)
2
•
•
ENLARGED PILASTER (F -503A)
0
•
•
STANDARD PILASTER / MIRROR/SHELF (F -503B)
0
•
•
ENLARGED PILASTER / MIRROR / SHELF (F -503C)
1
•
•
SHORT STANDARD PILASTER (F -503D)
1
0
•
OUTER DRESSING ROOM MIRROR (F -518)
1
0
•
10 FOOT VERT MERCHANDISE STANDARDS (P -1)
47
•
•
SPEAKERS
8
•
•
GENERAL NOTES
A. SEE APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS FOR GENERAL NOTES OF OTHER DISCIPLINES:
ELECTRICAL., PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL
B. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS- USE DIMENSIONS ONLY.
C. DIMENSIONS "HERE SHOWN ARE NORMALLY GIVEN:
A. TO COLUMN CENTER LINE
B. TO FINISH FACE OF CMU OR GWB.
D. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON LARGER SCALE DRAWINGS GOVERN.
E. FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID, NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF UNEXPECTED
CONDITIONS OR DISCREPANCIES FROM DRAWINGS
F. ELEVATIONS AND LEVELS:
A. ALL NUMERICAL ELEVATIONS ARE TO TOP OF CONCRETE SLAB, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
G. "ALIGN" AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWING SHALL BE UNDERSTOOD TO MEAN TO ALIGN THE FINISH
MATERIAL OF THE WALLS OR COLUMNS INDICATED.
H. ALL INTERIOR GYPSUM WALL BOARD IS 5/8 " TYPE X GWB ON METAL STUDS OR FURRING CHANNELS
UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, SIZES AS DIMENSIONED ON PLANS. SEE NOTE J. FOR LOCATION OF
WATER RESISTANT GWB.
I. NOT USED
J. PROVIDE WATER RESISTANT TYPE X GWB IN ALL TOILETS, JANITOR'S CLOSETS AND BEHIND INTERIOR
BRICK WORK.
K. BEFORE PATCHING ANY FIRE -RATED CMU PARTITION, FILL ANY EXPOSED CELLS SOLID WITH GROUT
L. ALL FINISH CEILING HEIGHTS SHALL BE CONFIRMED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON REFLECTED
CEILING PLANS.
M. PROVIDE FINISH WALL UNDER AND BEHIND ALL EQUIPMENT AND CASEWORK.
N. PROVIDE ALL ACCESSIBLE SIGNAGE AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL OR APPLICABLE JURISDICTION
0. PROVIDE ONE TYPE 5E- 2A -10BC FIRE EXTINGUISHER PER 3,000 SF AND NOT MORE THAN 75 FT OF
TRAVEL DISTANCE.
P. THERE SHALL BE NO BACK -TO -BACK ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, OR OTHER OUTLETS. SEPARATE OUTLETS
BY 6° AT NONRATED PARTITIONS, SEPARATE OUTLETS BY 24" MIN. AT FIRE RATED PARTITIONS.
Q. WHERE HVAC OR OTHER MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING ITEMS PENETRATE PARTITIONS,
STUDS SHALL BE BRACED AND FRAMED TO STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE SUPPORT.
ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS SHALL BE SEALED TO PROVIDE FIRE, SMOKE AND/OR
ACOUSTICAL ISOLATION OF SPACES WITH APPROPRIATE FIRE STOP MATERIAL.
R. ABANDONED UTILITIES SHALL BE REMOVED COMPLETELY TO THEIR SOURCE. SEE ELECTRICAL AND MECHAN
WALLS, FLOORS, AND CEILING FINISHES SHALL BE PATCHED TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES.
S. REMOVE ALL EXISTING MERCHANDISING SYSTEMS UNO. CONFIRM DISPOSAL WITH MALL MANAGEMENT.
T. ALL CHANGES IN PROJECT SCOPE DUE TO CONTRACTOR GENERATED ALTERNATIVES OR EXISTING FIELD
CONDITIONS SHALL BE TRANSMITTED TO THE ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
U. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR RECEIVING AND INSTALLING OF OWNER
FURNISHED ITEMS LISTED.
V. PROVIDE EXIT ILLUMINATION PER LOCAL CODES
W. MODIFY OR REPLACE THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM TO ACCOMMODATE THE CONFIGURATION INDICATED
ON THE PLANS. COMPLY WITH ALL GOVERNING ORDNANCES AND MALL CRITERIA. CONTRACTOR SHALL
OBTAIN ALL NECESSARY PERMITS.
X. INSTALL ALL COMPONENTS OF FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES PER RATING CRITERIA.
Y. INSTALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS TO COMPLY WITH MALL CRITERIA AND LOCAL CODES AS REQUIRED.
Z. SPRINKLER HEADS MOUNTED IN HARD (GWB) CEILINGS TO BE FULLY RECESSED WITH WHITE CAPS.
AA. FOR THROUGH - PENETRATIONS IN RATED CONSTRUCTION SEE DETAIL 13/A9.01
MALL GENERAL NOTES
1. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS TO READ THROUGH AND FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH THE MALL'S
TENANT DESIGN HANDBOOK BEFORE PLACING HIS BID.
2. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS TO SUBMIT A COPY OF THE FOLLOWING ITEMS TO THE
LANDLORD BEFORE DOING ANY WORK:
A. A QUALIFICATION STATEMENT
B. CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE AS OUTLINED IN THE TENANT
CONSTRUCTION MANUAL. (SEE SPECIFICATION MANUAL)
C. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE.
D. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND CONTACTS.
E. COPY OF THE BUILDING PERMIT.
F. CURRENT CONTRACTORS LICENSE FOR LOCAL JURISDICTION
3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR MUST HAVE PRE- CONSTRUCTION MEETING WITH THE ON SITE PROJECT
MANAGER PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION.
4. A COPY OF THE LANDLORD APPROVED DRAWINGS ARE TO BE ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES.
5. FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS, REFER TO THE CENTERS TENANT DESIGN HANDBOOK
ABBREVIATIONS
ABBREVIATION
& @
ABV CLG
ACT
ADA
ADJ
AFF
ARCH
AUTO
BLDG
BL
CLG
CLR
COL
CONT
CORR
DF
DIM
DIA
DN
DS
DWG
EF
EJ
EL
ELCT
EQ
EXST
EXT
FE
FF
TERM
AND
AT
ABOVE CEILING
ACOUSTICAL TILE
AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES
ADJACENT OR ADJUSTABLE
ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
ALUMINUM
ARCHITECT, ARCHITECTURAL
AUTOMATIC
BUILDING
BLOCKING
CONTROL JOINT
CENTERLINE
CL EAR
CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT
COLUMN
CONCRETE
CONTINUOUS
CORRIDOR
DRINKING FOUNTAIN
DIMENSION
DIAMETER
DOWN
DOCUMENT SET
DRAW
DR
EXHAUST FAN
EXPANSION JOINT
ELEVATION
ELECTRICAL
ENGINEER
EQUAL
EQUIPMENT
EXISTING
EXTERIOR
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
FINISHED FACE
FIN FINISH OPNG
FIO FURNISHED AND INSTALLED OPP
BY OWNER PULAM
FLASH FLASHING
FLOOR
FLR
FND FOUNDATION
FOIC FURNISHED BY OWNER
INSTALLED BY GENERAL
CONTRACTOR
FRT FIRE RETARDANT TREATED
FS, FOS FACE OF STUD
FT FOOT, FE
GA ALV GALVANIZED
GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR
GWB GYPSUM WALLBOARD
GYP /SHT GYPSUM SHEATHING
HW HARDWARE
HDWD HARDWOOD
HM HOLLOW METAL
HOR HORIZONTAL
HR
HGT
IN
MAX
H
MIN
MIS
MTD
MTL
NIC
NO
NOM
NTS
OC
OD
HANDRAIL
HEIGHT
INCHES
INSULATION
MAXIMUM
MECHANICAL
MANUFACTURER
MINIMUM
MISCELLANEOUS
MASONRY OPENING
MOUNTED
METAL
NON APPLICABLE
NOT IN CONTRACT
NUMBER
NOMINAL
NOT TO SCALE
ON CENTER
OUTSIDE DIAMETER
PLMG
PMR
PSF
PTD
PVC
RD
REINF
RE
SD
SF
SIM
SS
STD
TPD
TRT/WD
TS
TYP
VOL /
WD
WP
ICAL.
EXIT:
23 OCCUPANTS
MIN EXIT WIDTH REQ'D: 3.525"
EXIT WIDTH PROVIDED: 36°
SYMBOL LEGEND
tHAREHMI
• ,4.xx
P -1
O
PARTITIONS
EXISTING MASONRY TO REMAIN
EXISTING NON -RATED TO REMAIN
EXISTING 1 HR. RATED TO REMAIN
EXISTING TO BE DEMOLISHED
NEW LOW WALL PARTITION
NEW NON -RATED PARTITION
NEW 1 -HR RATED PARTITION
REVISION BUG
KEYNOTE CALL OUT
ELEVATION DATUM
PARTITION TYPE:
SEE A9.01 FOR LEGEND
FINISH MATERIAL
CALL OUT
LIGHT FIXTURE,
WINDOW TYPE
OPENING
OPPOSITE
PLASTIC LAMINATE
PLUMBING
PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
PREFABRICATED
POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT
POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH
PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE
PLYWOOD
RADIUS
REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY
UNIT CONSTRUCTION)
ROOF DRAIN
REINFORCED, REINFORCEMENT
REQUIRED
SOLID CORE
SOAP DISPENSER OR
SMOKE DETECTOR
SQUARE FOOT (FEET)
SIMILAR
SQUARE
STAINLESS STEEL
STANDARD
STEEL
STRUCTURE OR STRUCTURAL
TOILET PAPER DISPENSER
TREATED WOOD (PRESERVATIVE)
TUBE STEEL
TYPICAL
UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
VERTICAL VERTICAL
VERIFY IN FIELD (EXISTING CONDITION)
VOLUME
WITH
WITHOUT
WOOD
WATERPROOFING, WATERPROOF,
WEATHERPROOF
eire.c..c�ac�.. «n.m�m�m xR:< sms
1
in
MALL CORRIDOR
A4
GRID
003
SYMBOLS
DOOR NUMBER
001 A HARDWARE GROUP
INTERIOR ELEVATION
NUMBER
SHEET NUMBER
DETAIL NUMBER
SHEET NUMBER
1_4Ei SECTION NUMBER
SHEET NUMBER
Roots NAME
ICI
�- - ROOM NUMBER
ELECTRICAL
DUPLEX UTILITY OUTLET
@ 18" AFF, UNO
EXISTING DUPLEX
UTILITY OUTLET
I TP
E
Att 4 -PLEX OUTLET
@D4D
DRESSING Rooms
DEDICATED & ISOLATED
UTILITY OUTLET
1D DATA OUTLET
a JUNCTION BOX
SPEAKER
4T TELEPHONE
lo WALL SCONCE
SPRINKLER
0 SPRINKLER HEAD
ADJACENT TENANT
ADJACENT TENANT
LIFE SAFETY PLAN
SCALE: 118 " =1' -0°
BUILDING CLASSIFICATION
OCCUPANCY:
CONSTRUCTION TYPE:
PROJECT AREA:
MAX. OCCUPANTS:
TOTAL EXIT WIDTH:
# OF EXITS REQD:
PUBLIC RESTROOMS ARE WITHIN 300' OF SPACE. THEREFORE ONLY
ONE TOILET ROOM IS NEEDED
APPLICABLE CODES
BUILDING CODE:
MECHANICAL CODE:
PLUMBING CODE:
ELECTRICAL CODE:
ENERGY CODE:
ACCESSIBILITY CODE: CHAPTER 11 IBC AND OTHER INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE
REQUIREMENTS FOR BARRIER -FREE DESIGN ACCESS INCLUDING
ICC /ANSI A117.1 -2003
;MA 41CC
VICINITY MAP
SCALE: NTS
001
•
RETAIL STORE
AREA: 2,675 SF
2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE W/ WASHINGTON STATE
AMENDMENTS
2006 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE W/ WASHINGTON STATE
AMENDMENTS
2006 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE W/ WASHINGTON STATE
AMENDMENTS
2006 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE W/ WASHINGTON STATE
AMENDMENTS
2006 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE
M - MERCANTILE
TYPE!! B, FULLY SPRINKLED
3,181 SF
RETAIL: 2,675 SF / 60 SF PER OCCUPANT = 45 OCCUPANTS
STORAGE: 313 SF / 300 SF PER OCCUPANT = 2 OCCUPANT
TOTAL: 47 OCCUPANTS
47 OCCUPANTS X 0.15 INCHES PER OCCUPANT = 7.05 INCHES
2 (FROM RETAIL)
. (loom:.
t auu
ID
N
a _ 7 wavrr- ,ar' tvin
o8 -13
EXIT:
24 OCCUPANTS
MIN EXIT WIDTH REQ'D: 3.525"
EXIT WIDTH PROVIDED: 144"
REVISIONS ._..
\--No changes shall made to the sc nri
of work without prior approval of
Tukwila Building Division submit NOTE Revisions will require a e plan
and may include additip.
FILE COPY
Permit No.
Plan review approval is subject to errors and omissions.
Approval of construction dints does not authorize
the violation of any adopted code or ordinance. Receipt
of approved Flefd : and 1.:. Is fledged:
0
City of Tukwila
BUILDING DIVISION
SEPARATE
PERMIT AND
APPROVAL
REQUIRED
'SEPARATE PERMIT '
REQUIRED FOR: •
Mechanical
Ififf Electrical
•
Plumbing
` VGas Piping
City of Tukwila
BUILDING DIVISION
INDEX TO DRAWINGS
ARCHITECTURAL
A0.01 GENERAL INFORMATION SHEET
A2.01 FLOOR PLAN
A2.02 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN & LIGHTING SCHEDULE
A3.01 STOREFRONT PLANS, ELEVATION & SECTIONS
A3.02 STOREFRONT DETAILS
A5.01 INTERIOR DETAILS
A5.02 INTERIOR DETAILS
A5.03 ROLLING RACK SYSTEM
A8.01 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A9.01 PARTITION TYPES
A9.02 FINISH AND DOOR SCHEDULES
A10.01 CASHWRAP SECTIONS AND ELEVATIONS
A10.02 OWNER FURNISHED FIXTURES AND DETAILS
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL
MP1
M1
M2
El
P1
E2
E3
E4
PROJECT TEAM
OWNER: ZUMIEZ, INC.
6300 MERRILL CREEK CENTER PKWY
SUITE B
EVERETT, WA. 98203
T: (425) 551 -1500
F: (425) 551 -1595
ARCHITECT: DAVID MURPHY, AIA
MURPHY VAREY PS
2101 NINTH AVENUE, SUITE 211
SEATTLE, WA 98121
T: 206 341 -9875
F: 206 341 -9177
MECHANICAL &
ELECTRICAL
ENGINEERS:
PROJECT
MANAGER:
Le
LANDLORD: WESTFIELD CORPORATION, INC.
11601 WILSHIRE BLVD., SUITE 1100
LOS ANGELES, CA 90025
T: (310) 893-4761
F: (310) 575 -5991
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
PROJECT NAME:
PROJECT LOCATION:
PROJECT INCLUDES THE INTERIOR DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION
OF A 3,181 SF RETAIL SPACE IN SOUTHCENTER MALL, INTO A
" ZUMIEZ" RETAIL STORE. PROJECT INCLUDES NEW FINISHES,
STORE FIXTURING, CASEWORK, STOREFRONT, LIGHTING, AND
MODIFICATIONS TO THE EXISTING MECHANICAL AND
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
MALL MAP
SCALE: NTS
MECHANICAL SPECS
HVAC PLAN
ENERGY CODE FORMS
PLUMBING PLAN
LIGHTING PLAN
POWER PLAN
ELECTRICAL DETAILS
ELECTRICAL SPECS
HARRISON FRENCH & ASSOCIATES
809 SW A STREET, SUITE 201
BENTONVILLE, AR 72712
T: 479 273 -7780
F: 479 273 -9436
JOSH KIMMEL
WESTFIELD CORPORATION, INC.
11601 WILSHIRE BLVD., SUITE 1100
LOS ANGELES, CA 90025
T: (310) 893 -4761
ZUMIEZ - SOUTHCENTER MALL
2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL
SEATTLE, WA 98188
# 2646
REVIEWED FOR
CODE COMPLIANCE
LEVEL 2 OF 3
APPROVED
MAR :.'.0I'1=
a l Of Tukwila
BU •UNN DIVISION
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWU -A
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
zirruez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL
SEATTLE, WA. 98188 `,
MURPHY AREY P 5
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
7101 Nn r" AVENUE SUITS 711
SUAmTLE, WASUUPCroN 981.21
T: 206 .341.9875
F: 206.341. 9
E: ww.IdumrrVAasx.00m
DATE:
SHEET TITLE:
SHEET NUMBER:
REGISTERED
ARCHITECT
ID J. MURPHY
SIM E OF WASHINGTON
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
FI NAL MALL REVIEW /
PERMIT
11-21 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
02 -08 -08 FINAL MALL REVIEW / PERMIT
G ENERAL
INFORMATION
SHEET
A0.01
0
0 A
U
J
Q
5' -0"
KEY TO SYMBOLS
5' -3"
1
A
MALL CORRIDOR
7 -8" 4' -6"
REFER TO SHEET A9.01 FOR PARTITION DETAILS
REFER TO SHEET A9.02 FOR DOOR & HARDWARE SCHEDULE
REFER TO SHEET A9.02 FOR FINISH SCHEDULE & LEGEND
GENERAL NOTES
A. PRIOR TO BID, SPACE IS CURRENTLY UN- OCCUPIED. COORDINATE WITH MALL FOR ACCESS
RESTRICTIONS.
B. PROTECT EXISTING MALL SURFACES DURING CONSTRUCTION.
PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQUIRED TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES
C. REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR COVERING TO BARE CONCRETE FROM ALL EXISTING
SPACES, TYP. U.N.O., PREPARE CONCRETE SURFACE TO RECEIVE FINISH.
D. REMOVE EXISTING CEILING & SOFFITS & ASSOCIATED MECH. & ELECT. U.N.O. SEE M & E
E. DO NOT ABANDON ANY UTILITIES OR MATERIALS WITHIN LEASE SPACE.
REMOVE UTILITIES BACK TO THEIR SOURCE.
F. COVER MECHANICAL RETURN AIR OPENING BEFORE AND DURING CONSTRUCTION.
1 T -10"
KEY NOTES - FLOOR PLAN
00.10 LEASE LINE
02.10 PROVIDE CAVITY IN FLOOR (MAX. DEPTH 1121 TO ACCOMMODATE NEW TILE.
MATCH EXISTING MALL TILE. REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR
SETTING REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE NEW SLOPED TRANSITION AT 1/50
TO NEW FLOOR LEVEL. SEE 14 & 15/A3.02.
03.10 NOT USED
03.11 PATCH AND REPAIR CONCRETE FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL
NEW PLUMBING, SEE DETAIL 6/A5.01.
05.10 INSTALL 4'):4 "x4' -0" STAINLESS STEEL; 10 GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL
CORNER GUARDS ON OUTSIDE CORNERS OF ALCOVE.
06.10 RECESSED DRESSING ROOM SHELF, SEE DETAIL 3/A5.01.
06.11 FIXED ACCESSIBLE BENCH, SEE DETAIL 2/A5.01.
09.10 1/8" DEEP SAWCUT AND LINE OF CONCRETE COLOR CHANGE
09.11 NOT USED
ADJACENT TENANT
I
6I' -3"
16.17
VESTIBULE
.I 1 007 (
AR
EA: 72 SF 1 _
STORAGE
AREA: 294 SF
16.11
16.110
10.1 '
TonErRodr
rr
11 11 006 1 ,
- - AREA: 5% gF, `....... :
II
D3.11 - Irg
HIM ,�,
AINF AGO
T - 6 "
Od
■� ■� ■t��� ■!1■
RESS.
43' -5"
RETAIL AREA
AREA: 2,531 SF
I`
(16.15
CASHWRAP 1
CENTERLINE OF
7 -3"
\-09.10
09.10
CONC2
CONC2
12.14
10.15
RESS.
RM
12.10
12.14
09.12
W�1��1 �r.� ■
12.14
CONC2
12.10
\ ..
12.10
10.10
16.14
x..
:s CMG MEAM
I Q� 10.12
1�
yam.e.orr�ri�GMING rr w
02.10
D
1' -! 0'
ADJACENT TENANT
26'-7"
09.12 FLOOR STANCHION IN WALL, TYP (6) LOCATIONS, ONE ON EACH SIDE OF
DOORS, SEE DETAIL 6/A9.02.
09.13 EXISTING MALL TILE, EXTEND TO STOREFRONT AS REQUIRED, REMOVE
EXISTING TILE ONLY AS REQUIRED, MALL TILE TO BE PURCHASED FROM
ON -SITE OPERATING MANAGER.
10.10 PROVIDE "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN BUILDING IS
OCCUPIED" SIGN ON GRILLE TUBE, TO BE VISIBLE IN THE OPEN
POSITION. USE IN HIGH LETTERS ON CONTRASTING BACKGROUND.
10.11 AT FRONT LOCATION ONLY, PROVIDE ADA TACTILE EXIT SIGN, MOUNT
SIGN TO STEEL ANGLE AND GRILLE TUBE, SEE DETAIL 11/A9.02.
10.12 ADA TACTILE SIGN, SEE DETAIL 11/A9.02.
10.13 PROVIDE "NOT AN EXIT" SIGN ON VESTIBULE SIDE OF TOILET AND
STOCKROOM DOORS.
10.14 PROVIDE TENANT SIGN ON DOOR TO MATCH STANDARD MALL SIGNAGE.
10.15 UNISEX "ACCESSIBLE" RAISED LETTER SIGN, CENTER @ 60" AFF ON
WALL AND DOOR, SEE DETAIL 11/A9.02
10.16 UNISEX "ACCESSIBLE" RESTROOM SIGN, CENTER @ 60" AFF ON
WALL AND DOOR, SEE DETAIL 11/A9.02
10.17 T SHAPED ADA TURNING SPACE.
10.18 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES AND MOUNTING LOCATIONS, SEE DETAIL 91A5.01.
10.19 LOCATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER.
10.20 ROLLING RACK SHELVING SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURED BY
E -Z -RACK SYSTEMS. SEE SHEET A5.03.
12.10 F.O.I.C. MERCHANDISE SYSTEM/FIXTURE, SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS.
12.11 FOIC HOOK SET, SEE DETAIL 4/A5.01
12.12. DRESSING ROOM MIRROR, MOUNT 6'-3" TO TOP OF FRAME, CENTER
ON DRESSING ROOM DOOR OPENING
12.13 ACCESSIBLE DRESSING ROOM MIRROR, MOUNT 6' -3" TO TOP OF FRAME,
CENTER ON WALL OPPOSITE OF FIXED BENCH
12.14 DOOR MEDALLIONS, TYP (3) LOCATIONS, CENTER ON DOOR, MOUNT
5 AFF TO CENTERLINE OF MEDALLION.
15.10 MOP SINK, SEE MECHANICAL.
15.11 NEW TOILET FIXTURE, SEE MECHANICAL.
15.12 NEW LAVATORY, SEE MECHANICAL.
15.13 30" X 40" ADA LAVATORY CLEAR FLOOR SPACE.
0
FLOOR PLAN
SCALE: 1/4" =1
0
1
2
1
•
■
•
.�
4
•
00.10
1
•
i
i
0•
09.13
' FOR
CODE COMPLIANCE
APPROVED
iviIkR 2, 8 2110E
City Of Tukwila
BUILDING .'VISION
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
15.14 56" X 60" ADA TOILET CLEAR FLOOR SPACE.
15.15 60" DIAMETER ADA CLEAR TURNING SPACE.
16.10 LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL PANEL, SEE ELECTRICAL.
16.11 LOCATION OF PHONE BOARD, SEE ELECTRICAL.
16.12 SURFACE MOUNTED FOURPLEX FLOOR OUTLET - ONE SIDE
DEDICATED & ISOLATED. SEE ELECTRICAL.
16.13 PROVIDE (2) 1" CONDUITS IN CASH WRAP. SEE ELECTRICAL.
16.14 PROVIDE OUTLETS IN BASE OF WINDOW SYSTEM, VIA TIME CLOCK.
PROVIDE BLACK OUTLETS AND COVERS. SEE ELECTRICAL.
16.15 SURFACE MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX FOR CASHWRAP LIGHTING, SEE
ELECTRICAL. HARDWIRE CASHWRAP INTEGRAL LIGHT TO JUNCTION BOX.
16.16 PROVIDE (2) SEPARATE TELEPHONE CABLES AND JACKS TO (2)
LOCATIONS IN CASHWRAP, SEE ELECTRICAL.
16.17 ILLUMINATED REAR DOOR BUZZER, PLACE CHIME IN CASH WRAP.
LOCATE AT EXTERIOR MALL EXIT DOOR, PLACE ON LATCH SIDE OF DOOR,
SEE ELECTRICAL.
16.18 SWITCHBANK, LOCATE ON PLAN WHERE INDICATED ON ELECTRICAL, HEIGHT
TO BE 48" MAX ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR TO SWITCH OPERATION, IF SWITCH
PLATES ARE LOCATED ABOVE EACH OTHER THEN SPACE 6" VERTICALLY
BETWEEN CENTERLINE OF SWITCHES, LABEL PER DETAIL 3/A9.02.
wmiez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
2646 SOUTHCENTER MATT.
SEATTLE, WA. 98188
MURPHY VYPS
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
7101 Norm AVENUE SurrE 711
BE/TnE, WASHINGTON 98171
T: 206.341. 9
F: 2o6 . 341. 9177
E: wiry. DluarurVAasr.cos
DATE:
11.21 -07
02 -0s -08
SHEET TITLE:
NI
D AVID J. MURPHY
STATE OF WASHINGTON
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW /
PERMIT
FLOOR PLAN
SHEET NUMBER:
A2.01
GISTERED
CHITECT
PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
FI NAL MALL REVIEW / PERMIT
LIGHTING SCHEDULE
MARK
0
I-E
0
FIXTURE MARK
O
v
1
t
1
1 1
QUANT
8
12
12
11
42
44
3
5
2
9
DECK OF UNISTRUT
SUPPORT
THREADED COUPLER AND
GIMBALED U- SUPPORT
BRACE ELEVATION
CASHWRAP SOFFIT BRACING
NOT TO SCALE
FIXTURE
FOIC
HUBBEL LIGHTING, INC. SWD- 175- E1 -AP -WH
FOIC - JUNO TRAC -LITE SERIES TRACK & HEADS (R731)
MODELS PROVIDED: #R20, #R34, #R6, BLACK
FOIC - LIGHTOLIER 478WHX 402MRIC
FOIC - RESOLUTE OLIVE TORTOISE PENDANT /
AMBER BALLS, 3619 -TOR
FOIC - JUNO TRAC -LITE SERIES TRACK *T133BL
W/2 FOOT CORD; *T308BL HOLDER
FOIC - JUNO TRAC -LITE SERIES TRACK *T133BL
W/2 FOOT CORD; *T308BL HOLDER
FOIC - RESOLUTE OLIVE TORTOISE WALL SCONCE 1
AMBER BALLS, 3629 -TOR
FOIC - LITHONIA C232- 120V -GEB
FOIC - LITHONIA C232- 120V- GEB-EL
FOIC - LITHONIA WC217 -120V -TUBI
1 ID BLACK STEEL PIPE BRACING, ATTACH
ONE END OF PIPE AT BOTTOM OF DECK OF'
UNISTRUT SUPPORT AND THE OTHER END
OF PIPE TO CASHWRAP SOFFIT, USE
SWIVEL SWAY BRACING ATTACHMENTS
LAMP
175w MH
50wMR16NSP
50w MR16
40w A -19 CLEAR
50w PAR 30 NSP
50w PAR 30 NFL
40w A -19, CLEAR
(2) 32w T-8, 4100K
(2) 32w T-8, 4100K
(2) F017 T-8,
4100K
EXISTING ACT CEILING
WHERE OCCURS
CASHWRAP SOFFIT
WATTS
218
50
50
40
50
50
40
39
39
32
TOTAL
WATTS
1744
600
600
440
2100
2200
120
195
78
32
4' -6"
12' -10"
•
r
16 8"
LJ Li � Lj
CASHWRAP SOFFIT BRACING ELEVATI
NOTES
F.O.I.C.
MOUNT BOX INDEPENDENT FROM CEILING
F.O.I.C.
F.O.I.C.
SUPPLIER - RESOLUTE LIGHTING (206) 343 -9308
MOUNT BOTTOM OF FD(T. @ 7' -0°
F.O.I.C.
F.O.I.C.
SUPPLIER - RESOLUTE LIGHTING (206) 343 -9308
MOUNT OUTLET BOX @ 7'- 8112" TO CENTER
CHAIN HUNG FROM STRUCTURE ABOVE, MOUNT @
12' -0° AFF OR SURFACE MOUNT BELOW 12' -0° AFF
CHAIN HUNG FROM STRUCTURE ABOVE, MOUNT @
12' -0° AFF OR SURFACE MOUNT BELOW 12 -0' AFF
WALL MOUNT @ 74' TO THE BOTTOM
OF THE FIXTURE
NOTE: ALL LIGHTING FOIC UNO
r
OUR 1" ID BLACK STEEL
IPE BRACES (DASHED)
ON
ATTACH
BRACES AT
BOTTOM OF
DECK OF
UNISTRUT
SUPPORT
20' -5"
09.05
.... ........... ....
8' -11"
15.02
06.01
eaeasxwaseaaawealaaeamaaneneeneeneaaseanaaseassama
an mat rt,vea
•
rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr
aeass . am ,a. R �
mz„zez...
erne e
a- - \ ...n
• ti r
.
„k.. i 1j1JJ, L
'.r r rw_r_rww..
Cj.....y.,... a....... x
Err. vaseatestem ... exas-as.,,s,,e-saseseetee
wawa-yam .a.,•aaaa .ax.x : I I..
:NOM .m....mmmmm..mmm.m.m,..........
WPM 1111111•11MPIPPIMPIPPIPMINI WWI
Ri
rrrrrrrr
Ran. -..
_�..::., T..a:....�arY�a:y�: a.., m• .:aaaa:�3•e:: .�•a,:�:s•�•e:dae: k
>trrrrrrrrrlrrr�
III III.
fr
MI Air
wn
x.,........77.:. - . _- ..x:..�a _
w,., D ,,:-max ...
° ��Spw �--. I II
Cl'',,.. ,.� .... .............
•
ea , Yaa area @ a,., wawa, x«.....: Yax., y..... e,aava aaaaa a.•.•,:.: a,.,.,.;._.1... _,• eau an,d•...,K,:.•ba,..y.,
•
,. x.xrk. � wvav x waa • n. . • a
ee
as,a,,,,,..xx.aaa.maa.aaax,.,. ?Sara . Naga. .....aa.a„x ... .
.........., .... , "5iia'➢Y"`4i:'3�..
--- aaa�•1:_a __:
b. «.�« .. ., ,..nrr any a a : 7 - 8 ' ...r < > a� .
- ..,.. x.-,. Wax.: x.:..:..x..::.aa�.,.�:.:.::x: . „.,.- x;:. -:x::: -
111111011101M AiNair r ..
aa aaxaxaa axaaa Ya xuaaaaaaaaaaa a aa.
772702.4.4a..... arr,. roaa. R9m .vvra
MN., MYNA
-.. . eMa taattOu .v`ypx..,i.h,.......,.
. 17=
........ � u .: ....i, .,..., K ..... .... Mett$, _
uma
r�n�� 1111011 -
10.01
KEY TO SYMBOLS
REFER TO SHEET A9.02 FOR
FINISH SCHEDULE & LEGEND
REFER TO SHEET A2.02
FOR LIGHTING SCHEDULE
14'-4"
CASHWRAP BRACING PLAN
GENERAL NOTES
1. DO NOT PAINT SPRINKLER LINES
2. DO NOT PAINT SPIRAL DUCTS
20' -5"
15' -9"
ATTACH BRACES AT BOTTOM
OF DECK OF UNISTRUT SUPPORT
15'-6"
20' -5"
KEY NOTES - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
05.01 HEADER SUPPORT, SEE 11A3.02
06.01 PROVIDE 3' X 3' X 1/2" CEMENT BOARD PLATFORM FOR WATER HEATER.
LOCATE TO ACCESS WATER HEATER ABOVE. ALL PLATFORM CONSTRUCTION
MUST BE NON- COMBUSTIBLE
08.01 NOT USED
08.02 PROVIDE 2' -0" X 2'-0" FLUSH METAL ACCESS DOOR IN HORIZONTAL SOFFIT,
PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACE.
09.01 GWB CEILING AT 8' -0" AFF, 6" METAL STUDS AT 16" OC. BELOW WATER HEATER
USE 6" METAL STUDS 16 GA AT 12" OC
09.02 GWB CEILING AT 10' -0" AFF, 3 5/8" METAL STUD JOISTS 16 GA AT 16" OC UNO,
MAX SPAN TO BE 9' -9 ", ATTACH ENDS OF EACH JOIST TO 16 GA STUDS IN WALLS
WITH (4) #10 SMS
09.03 GWB SOFFIT, PAINTED
09.04 SUSPENDED GWB CEILING WITH METAL FINISH AT 14' -11" AFF, SEE DETAILS
PAINT
09.05 GWB CEILING AT 9' -0" AFF, 3 5/8" METAL STUD JOISTS 16 GA AT 16" OC UNO,
MAX SPAN TO BE 9' -9 ", ATTACH ENDS OF EACH JOIST TO 16 GA STUDS IN WALLS
WITH (4) #10 SMS. PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT MALL FINISHES.
14 6" 2' -0"
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
SCALE: 1/4" =1' -0"
0 1 2 4
N e
N/5
09.06 ACT CEILING @ 14' -11 "AFF.
10.01 OWNER FURNISHED ILLUMINATED NEON SIGN, SEE ELECTRICAL.
15.01 MECHANICAL DUCT, SEE ELEVATIONS FOR HEIGHT. PAINT SIDE DIFFUSER
METALLIC SILVER. DUCT TO REMAIN UNPAINTED. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS.
15.02 EXHAUST GRILL, SEE MECHANICAL.
16.01 CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OWNER FURNISHED SPEAKERS, MOUNT TO CEILING
@ 13' -0 ", PROVIDE 1 PAIR OF CONCEALED 14 GA SHIELDED SPEAKER WIRE PER
SPEAKER TO CASH WRAP, SEE ELECTRICAL, SEE DETAIL 8/A5.01.
16.02 ELECTRICAL WIRE WAY AND SUSPENDED LIGHT, SEE DETAIL 11/A5.01.
16.03 PROVIDE "J" BOX FOR F.O.I.C. LIGHT FIXTURES
16.04 EXIT LAMP WITH BATTERY BACK -UP, MOUNT TO VERTICAL WALL, SEE ELEVATIONS,
SEE ELECTRICAL.
16.05 OWNER FURNISHED WALL SCONCE, CENTER ON DRESSING ROOM DOORS,
PROVIDE "J" BOX. SEE LIGHTING SCHEDULE FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS.
16.06 BRACE POINT FOR SUSPENDED LIGHT BAR, SEE DETAIL 11/A5.01
R c CAM
OW Of Tukwila \.\
CODE COMPLIANCE
A : P R R ,
BUILDING DIVISI9 Li
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
zumez
SOUTHCENFER MALL
2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL
SEATTLE, WA. 98188
MURPHY VAREYPS
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
aLo1 Nrrrra AVENUE SUITE 111
SEATTLE, WASHr -ETON 93121
T: ao6 . 341 , 9
F. ao6.341.9177
E: V W. MnErxTVAisT.coa
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW
PERMIT
DATE:
11-21 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
02 - - FINAL MALL REVIEW / PERMIT
SHEET TITLE:
REFLECTED
CEILING PLAN
SHEET NUMBER:
A2.02
ICI
MURPHY
OF WASHINGTON
KOKOMO OPAGft(INT G1-A55
*225 GG
KOKOMO OPAGfSINT G1,455
#709
KOKOMO OPALft(fNT GG455
*'620
KOKOMO OPA1- SCINT GG455
e2 /61-1,-
KOKOMO OPALESCENT G1-A55
w
0
..
KOKOMO OPALESCENT GL-A55
O O
O0 0
i ®i . T ® ;? : :
KOKOMO OPAGft(INT G1-A55
*225 GG
KOKOMO OPAGfSINT G1,455
#709
KOKOMO OPALft(fNT GG455
*'620
KOKOMO OPA1- SCINT GG455
e2 /61-1,-
KOKOMO OPALESCENT G1-A55
ft /0
KOKOMO OPALESCENT GL-A55
*6/ 5
518" TYPE "X" GWB
ON TENANT SIDE OF
EXISTING MALL
BULKHEAD
5/8" GWB OVER
3 5/8 ° MTL. STUDS
@16 "O.C.BY GC
BOTTOM OF SOFFIT
ELEV. 14 AFF
HEADER BY GC,
SEE
GWB PAINTED
5/8" GWB OVER 20 GA 3 5/8 " MTL. STUDS
@ 16" O.C., RUN JOISTS IN SHORT SOFFIT
DIMENSION, GWB PAINTED
SCALE: 1/2" =1 -0"
_BOTTOM OF SOFFIT
ELEV. 14 AFF
SECTION THRU ENTRY
P -3
FOIC TRACK LIGHT, GC TO
MOUNT TO HORZ.TUBE,
SEE ELECTRICAL
SCALE: 11T= V
STORE SIDE
0
1
2
STORE SIDE
SECTION THRU SIDE DISPLAY
•
1'
4
0 1 2 4
METAL RETURN TO MALL BULKHEAD
BOTTOM OF MALL
BULKHEAD
ELEV.14 -6" AFF VIF
TOP OF STEEL _
ELEV. 14'-0" AFF
BOTTOM .OF STEEL
ELEV. 1 O' -7° AFF
METAL RETURN TO 4 X 4
HORIZONTAL STEEL TUBE
3/4 " MTL CHANNEL AT SIDES AND
BOTTOM, AND 1" AT TOP OF GLASS ,
PtOV /PEP BY •STOKfff9ONT
GONre,46
CUT TO SIZE AND INSTALLED BY GC,
INCLUDING CAULK, SEE DETAIL
112" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY GC
ALL GLASS JOINTS TO BE TIGHT
/2° HIGH METAG 5 /1-1-
BY Sr2IPff,PONr
(ONreAcrae
3 HIGH METAL BASF
BY 5r9fffIPONT
(ONTRA(TaP
MALL SIDE
a MALL SIDE
BOTTOM OF MALL
BULKHEAD
ELEV. 14'-6" AFF VIF
TOP OF STEEL
ELEV. 14'-0" AFF
BOTTOM OF STEEL
ELEV. 10'-7" AFF
1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS BY GC
ALL GLASS JOINTS TO BE TIGHT
/2° HIGH METAG 5 /1-1-
BY 510e0A
(ONTPA670A
3° HIGH METAG BASE
BY STOfff,PONr
CONTPAGrat
op-6 G1-A55 50/I721.11-0
WINDOW ELEVATION
BEHIND SIGN
KEY TO WORK NOTES:
,aPK - BY 510K0•PONT CONTPA(TOe,
OAP OTHI�PS
WORK - BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR
GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S NOTES:
1. STOREFRONT DETAILS APPLY TO
BOTH SIDES OF ENTRANCE
X HaP/ZONTAG
TUBE BY STaeffeONT
CONTPACTOe
WIN- (GAP /MGG
BY SrOfPfAfONT
GONTiPA674A
EXISTING MALL
NEUTRAL PIER
EXISTING MALL
NEUTRAL PIER
i/1 GGfAR
ANOO /Zff AGM/NM
elVfAG
1/2" CLEAR
TEMPERED
GLASS BY GC
3/4 " MTL CHANNEL AT SIDES AND 1"
AT TOP OF GLASS PeOV /OOP BY
Sraeofear cONreACrae,
CUT TO SIZE AND INSTALLED BY GC,
SEE DETAIL
3/1° (GEAR
OI6-atA17 Vf G1-A55
JPf7U /IPf CHANNIG,
5ff ScHHPUGf
PANELS OfcO�PAT/Vf G1,455 PANED AT 5/P0
PROM Gfff
TO AP /6HT U5f Q Q a,
U5f SAME PANEL 005 /GN
A5 IN 50'67/ON A/11.5. 0/
p'GORAT/Vf G1,455 PANEL AT 5 /'I
TO
ago- SAME PANfG pf5 /6N
45 IN SECT /ON 4/A3.0/
Pf0O�PAT/ Vf GL-,455 PANELS
REOU/eE CHANNEL,
50 , 0HfOUGI
ANOP /ZfP AGUM /NUM
OWN-
METAG (GAO OGG
BY SroefAPONr
CONTIPACTOP
•
•
.5' HIGH METAG BASE
BY 51 00 - fKONT
(ONTPA(TOe
1 X 1 HOiP /ZONTAG STEEL TUBE
BY STOffffIPONT coNreAGralf
1 tt t jCi -_ T•. .. _ _ �._- ws
k±ti:4 #3E°,� #iEi #tiE #i'•
[�tf }S_tf`: i117`•_IE
itt1"•iiiidi- 1 - 63Et!1 3.ti #3 lf�t iE # `.B133`•41:3�
iL.tt a Ei 1t E.� t t�"I ICI #& E i l
■#E: L`ii kL't IE11 r L11µ1{E Eltii . :it
%,E7.1#«fliC
IFEs Ll1 I E i t j tT {FEit±I #E_c93#f~? }3# € DIE::.Lit i_l iS fi
e 61:i i 1p=' i diEvElEil : :FAIE HI?-1_.ifilEEDFS: Y- tilliit l6
!� , i'i't Ei ii# EI Es at
i EI'' I „}RiliiEIHIEIBIETIDIE 3tSi1391:Li1L 6
#�tI 3#F"`IiE311 #xEElli!#tw11EIIE ..
Yit!' -11 i It ` t t�rli Ea :Et
.—. s • E ^ E E e=: .E F a' S=E a
PEGatAT /VE G1-455 PANELS
iPEOU /APE CHANNEL,
50 567-100000
FOIC TRACK LIGHT, GC TO
MOUNT TO HORZ.TUBE
EQUAL EQUAL
(3) EQUAL PANELS
/2° HIGH WIN- 5 /1-1.-
BY STaPffIONT
(ONTPA(TOR
EQUAL — -,
OS4
EQ.
•
•
1 2n
H55 B X 1 X //B
GPP I-a TUBE
BY STOeffKONT
(ONreAcTO,P
TACTILE EXIT SIGN, SEE
1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS
BY GC ALL GLASS JOINTS
TO BE TIGHT
7 -8"
CONC-
TO FACE OF
HIGH BASE
A3.02
A3.02
1 EXISTING MALL
r NEUTRAL PIER
METAG CLAP Oa
BY SrOKEftONr�
GONTPACTOK
•
•
•
1
•
TO FACE OF 12°
HIGH BASE
(5) EQUAL PANELS
. fQUAL
I
12' -0"
30' -5" VIF
3/4 " MTL CHANNEL AT SIDES AND 1"
AT TOP OF GLASS PiPOV /OEO BY
STOKffKONT (ON(PA(TO,P,
CUT TO SIZE AND INSTALLED BY GC,
SEE DETAIL
EQ.
AT BORDER
•
FIO SIGN, GC TO
PROVIDE AND CONNECT
POWER TO SIGN
• /35° I70VIN STEEL (GOTH
12 X 12 $PAC /NG, GAP /MP kaa,
BY STORffPONT (ONTPAcroe
•
•
EQUAL
B STOREFRONT ELEVATION
SCALE: 1/2" =1' -0"
1 X 1 HOOP /ZONTAG
STEEL TUBE
BY 5TOAPMPONT
(ONTPA(Tae
EQUAL
EQUAL
(3) EQUAL PANELS
STOREFRONT UPPER PLAN
SCALE: 1/2" =1' -0"
1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS
I . BY GC ALL GLASS JOINTS
I TO BE TIGHT
I
0
7' pp
-0
1
i ( \STOREFRONT PLAN
5 SCALE: 1/2 = 1 1 - 0 °
0
1
1
BOTTOM OF MALL
BULKHEAD
ELEV. 14'-'6 VIF
TOP OF STEEL 1
ELEV. 14 AFF °
BOTTOM.QF STEEL .�
ELEV. 10 AFF
METAG (LAP K�AGG
BY STORfffONT
GONTAPAGTOR
3/1° GGEAe
ANOO /ZfO
ALUM /NUM
APfVfAG
EXISTING MALL
NEUTRAL PIER
1/2" CLEAR
TEMPERED
GLASS BY GC
2
2
4
4
REVIEWED � ��.
CODE COMPLIACl
APPROVED
MAR 'O
City Of Tukwila
BUILDING DIVISION
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKIMLA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
zumuez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
2646 SOUTHCENTER MALL
SEATTLE, WA. 98188
Mum'm VAMYPs
DAVID 1. MURPHY, AIA
2101 NINTH AVENGE SUITS 711
SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98171
T: 7 o6.341 . 9875
F: 7o6.341.9I77
E; wo. DluaaznYArz -.cos
DATE:
SHEET TITLE:
SHEET NUMBER:
REGISTERED
ECT
`�• J. MURPHY
STATE OF WASHINGTON
1
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW /
PERMIT
11-21-07 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
02.08 - FINAL MALL REVIEW / PERMIT
STOREFRONT
PLANS, ELEVATION,
AND SECTIONS
A3.01
STOREFRONT RESPONSIBILITIES
GC - GENERAL CONTRACTOR
5G - St:MEf40Ni GONrf4Grag UNV6t gomeAri GaNrKAGr ra 9BWIK
ITEM DESCRIPTION
FURNISHED
BY
INSTALLED
BY
REMARKS
OWNER
09
I .95
,OWNER
I o9
.95
CONSTRUCTION
LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING
•
•
GWB SYSTEM
•
•
STEEL TUBING
■
■
WOVEN STEEL CLOTH
•
•
METAL CLADDING
■
•
METAL BASE
■
■
GRILLE
OVERHEAD GRILLE & MOTOR
•
•
GRILLE TUBES
■
■
GRILLE TRACK
•
•
KEYING OF GATE CONTROLS
•
•
SET LIMITS OF GRILLE
•
•
GRILLE EMERGENCY RELEASE
•
•
NOIS
SIGN BODY
•
•
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO SIGN
•
•
9NIZd19
1/2" TEMPERED GLASS
•
•
3/4" PRE - FINISHED METAL CHANNELS
■
•
DECORATIVE GLASS PANELS
■
■
IIOO1:
ENTRY FLOOR TILE
•
•
7.:TRICAL
ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONNECTIONS
TO GRILLE MOTOR
•
•
_
GRILLE CONTROLS / SWITCHES
•
•
LIGHT FIXTURES AND TRACK
•
•
OUTLETS
•
•
CUTOUTS FOR OUTLETS
•
FINAL CLEANING
•
•
PROTECTION OF STOREFRONT
•
•
1 MISCELLAI
3/4" BLACK METAL REVEAL BETWEEN MALL
AND STOREFRONT CONSTRUCTION
■
■
BUILT -UP COLUMN
(2) 4" X 18 GA.
WELD W/ 1/8" 2 " -12"
NEW DEMISING
WALL STUD AS
REQUIRED
0
PLAN VIEW
SOFFIT HEADER DETAILS
SCALE: 3" =1'- 0"
SCALE: 1" =1'- 0"
FACE OF DEMISING WALL
NEW DEMISING
WALL STUD AS
REQUIRED
STORE SIDE
3 - #10 SMS.
518" GWB TYPE 'X' AT SOFFIT
2 1200XCS16D METAL JOISTS WELD W11 /8" 2 -12 OR ((2))�10 DEEP 14 GA ► ��
METAL JOISTS WITH
2 1/2" WIDE FLANGES
OR (3) 10" DEEP
1 GA
METAL
JOISTS
WITH 2"
WIDE
FLANGES
2" TAB ( 90 BEND @
BUILT -UP COLUMN)
ATTACH TO MTL
JOISTS W/ 2- #10SMS
ISOMETRIC VIEW
STAGGER MEMEBERS
AT LEAST 1/2 THEIR
LENGTH
KEY TO WORK NOTES:
'vex - BY 510PEfA GONTfACT0P, OAP 01H1IP5
WORK - BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR
STOREFRONT RESPONSIBILITIES - B
O
"
CANOPY CONNECTION DETAIL
SCALE: 1 112" =1'- 0"
1 1/2"
r� 1/2° TEMPIAPED GGA55
, r' �
ATTACHMENT e'
5 /DE COND /T /ON
ACCENT FLOOR SIGN
SCALE: 1" =1'- 0"
PLAN VIEW
/2 GA. SHT, MA GOVAP
// EACH 5 /DE
- - */0 MACH /NE 5C�PIff� If/ ACL2fN
NUT ON 510t1 5701, SLACK,
SPACE & /5 ° O. G.
ELEVATION VIEW
SIGN POWER
CONDUIT BY CG
COORDINATE
W/ SIGN INSTALLER,
SEE ELECTRICAL
C GLAZING CLIP
SCALE: NTS g SfaeE`,PONf GONf,PAGfO,P UNO
TIGHT JOINT
7 -5 7 /8"
0
ELEVATION
NOTE: CUT EACH LETTER FROM 1 TILE
EXCEPT THE LETTER "m"
SCALE: 1 ° =1'- 0"
PLAN AT GLAZING
1/c5° MTG. P1,-AT1 #''GD BOTTOM
CON-. GAP /ND SMOOTH,
BY STOifif�PONT ceNreAGTOf
3 SIGN ELEVATION AND SECTION
CENTERLINE
EQ EQ
COLUMN AT CORNER
SCALE: 3' 1'- OR
TIGHT JOINT
•
0//6°
7 -9"
w
\ ..
1 '
BLACK SEALANT,
TYPICAL BOTH SIDES BY GC
3/4" METAL CHANNEL
AT ALL SIDES OF GLASS,PArOV 7010
BY 5Tae1f,PONT CONTtACTae,
INSTALLED BY GC
w
,5" O. P TUBA" COLUMN
CONDITION ffliEN BASE /5
STRA /GHT (PAR OP)
MATCH EXISTING MALL TILE IN TYPE, COLOR,
SIZE, THICKNESS, GROUT COLOR, INSTALLATION
DIRECTION AND PATTERN
LETTERS:
TIGHT JOINT
NOTE: COORDINATE SIGN
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
WITH THE OWNER'S SIGN
MANUFACTURER, REFER TO
SPECIFICATIONS
EXISTING MALL
NEUTRAL PIER,
TUB1 5T11G 0,451 B11-Off CONFIGURATION
VARIES,
VERIFY IN FIELD
r
I
1
L
HT. PER SECTION
CENTERLINE OF
NEUTRAL PIER,
UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
,
,
I�
HMI
co
0
SECTION
VERIFY �.
IN FIELD
ENTRY TILE SECTION
SCALE: 1 1/2" =1'- 0"
,5m t° GGEAe
ANOD /ZD
AGUM /NUM
IP11/EAG
SEE PLAN
MALL SIDE
w
C1NTIA1- /NE 1 f 8451
TUBE 5T11G COLUMN, GLASS,
AND HOP /ZONTAG STEEL ABOVI
PILASTER PLAN - LEFT SIDE
BACK ETCHED LEXAN PANEL
W/ NEON NOT BLACKED OUT
NEON TUBING BY
SIGN CONTRACTOR
SIGN BODY BY SIGN
CONTRACTOR
12 GA COLD
ROLLED STEEL SHT.
3/4" SQ TUBING BY SIGN
CONTRACTOR
SIGN WIREWAY BY SIGN
CONTRACTOR
CANOPY STRUCTURE
AND TAG /N6 BY
STae1fKONT CONTKACT0P
GC TO PROVIDE CONCEALED
POWER TO FIO SIGN
DISCONNECT COORDINATE
LOCATION WITH SIGN
MANUFACTURER
EXISTING DEMISING WALL
J/It ° CG14e
ANOD /ZED ALUM /NUM
e1//14G
/2 GA. COLD tIGGID SHT
METAL PANELS
,5/45° TH /GK METAL BASE
STORE SIDE
a
w
w
SCALE: 1112" = 1' -0" BY ST0P1fRONT CONTeACTOt UNO
EXIST. CONC FLOOR
SAW CUT FLOOR,
CLEAN CUT,
DO NOT OVERCUT
1/4" ZINC
TERRAllO STRIP
GROUT
TILE
SETTING BED
NOTE: VERIFY CUTTING REQUIREMENTS WITH
LANDLORD PRIOR TO CUTTTING EXISTING STRUCTURE
L
C
USE Mff41. 5H 1M5 1711fff
�P�OU /�PEO BITIYEEN 6R /i
TUBE AND ANG1-1
EXISTING MALL
BEAM, VERIFY '
SIZE AND LOCATIO
G 5 X 3XJAI' AtGG l/A,—
CGAMP TO BEAM fYI TH
A BEAM CAMP ON
BOTH 5 /DES Of 1X /51/NG
BEAM, FOP CAMP OPIN /N6 ` . Ge/GG TUBE
# /DTH UP TO 745° USE UN /ST�PUT
BEAM CAMP P16505, 1H0e1 GoGIIP OPEN /NG5 UP TO 1 W/6°
USE SEAM CAMP P210/5
SCALE: 1" =1'- 0"
EXISTING DEMISING WALL
,5/1" GG14e
ANOD /ZED AGUM /NUM
IP11/EAG
/2 GA, GOLD SHT
METAL PANELS
3 /65' 11-1/GK MWTAG BASE
EXISTING MALL FINISH FLOOR
NEW ENTRY TILE PER SPEC
1/4" ZINC TERRAllO STRIP
STORE SIDE
z
0
w
w
SCALE: FULL
MALL SIDE
co
3/1 ° GG1AR
ANOD /ZED
AGUM /NUM
e11/1AG
SEE PLAN
ENTRY TILE SECTION
SECTION
BRACE AT GRILLE TUBE
VERIFY
IN FIELD
CENTIRG /NA" OF BA51,
TUBA" 51111 COLUMN, GLASS,
AND HOOP /ZONTAG STEEL ABOW
PILASTER PLAN - RIGHT SIDE
10
SCALE: 1 1/2" =1'-0" 6Y STOAWPONT cONTiPAGTae UNO
A3.02
MAX SLOPE 1:50
MALL STRUCTURE
i/1 D /AM1T1XP 4.307 MB
/J/16' X 2° SCOT
c
w
0
w
GENTAC /NE Of GAP /G1
.TU51
NOTE:
AT LOCATIONS WITH SPRAY
FIRE - PROOFING, REPLACE
TO MATCH EXISTING
PROTECTION
CODE COMPLIANCE
APPR OVED
R 2 `',
Cl � ` � s k .,: ,,
BU1 „
EXIST. CONC FLOOR
EXISTING MALL
NEUTRAL PIER,
CONFIGURATION
VARIES,
VERIFY IN FIELD
CENTERLINE OF
NEUTRAL PIER,
UNLESS NOTED
OTHERWISE
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
zumez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
2646 SouxxcENTER MATT.
SEATTLE, WA. 98188
MuHY VYPS
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
2101 NINTH Aveeme SIIIrE 211
SEirn.E, W.ug111cra2 98121
T: 206 .341 . 9
F: 206 .341 . 9177
E: m. MuararYeaar.cox
PROTECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW
PERMIT
DATE:
11.21.07 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
02-08-08 FINAL MALL REVIEW / PERMIT
SHEET TITLE:
SECTIONS
& DETAILS
SHEET NUMBER:
A3.02
1�I
ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
HC GRAB BAR
BOBRICK #B -5806
TOILET TISSUE HOLDER
BOBRICK #B -686
PAPER TOWEL HOLDER
OFFICE DEPOT #133553
MIRROR (WITHOUT SHELF)
BOBRICK #B-165 1836
r
I I
II I►
IL 11
B PARTITION BASE
SCALE: NTS
•
25 GA CONTINUOUS
1 UNPUNCHED TRACK
Li 4►
RAMSET SHOT PINS @ 12" O.C.
0.140" SHANK DIAM W/ 1 1/8"
PENETRATIONS, TYP
PARTITION BASE AND TOP
EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB
6
CONCRETE FLOOR PATCHING
SCALE: 1 1/2 " =1' -0"
NOTE: PAINT ALL SWAY BRACING
AND ATTACHMENTS BLACK
3/8" DIAMETER ALL THREAD
HOT OIL DIPPED @ 5 -0" O.C. AND
6" FROM WIREMOLD JOINT
LIGHT CORD
10 -0" ABOVE ' kjj
FINISH FLOOR o
PIPE HANGER
PIPE HANGER
PERPENDICULAR TO TRUSSES
SUSPENDED LIGHT
SCALE: 1" =1'- 0"
LIGHTING NOTES
3/4" RADIUS
CORNERS
CONTINUE BOTH DRYWALL LAYERS
OVER TOP OF WALL
8" WIDE 20 GA SHEET METAL BACKING
WHERE REQUIRED FOR COAT HOOKS,
MIRRORS, AND OTHER ATTACHMENTS,
ATTACH BACKING TO 2 STUDS
MINIMUM
FLOOR STANCHION @
DOOR BUCK,
SEE
118" REVEAL, PAINT
TOP OF BASE FLAT
BLACK
NON- PUNCHED TRACK
1 X 6 BASE
INSERT IN PARTITION
FINISH FLOOR
AS SCHEDULED
EXISTING COMPACTED FILL
(VERIFY IN FIELD)
DRILL AND INSTALL 1/2° DIAMETER STEEL
DOWELS AT 24" OC, EPDXY SET INTO EXISTING
SLAB ONLY
NEW CONCRETE SLAB, 4" THICK, 4000 PSI,
WITH ONE LAYER OF CHAIRED 6 X 610/10
WELDED WIRE FABRIC, WELDED WIRE FABRIC
MAY BE SUBSTITUTED WITH #4 REBAR AT 12" OC
EACH WAY WITH MIN OF 1 REBAR EACH WAY
10 MIL POLYETHYLENE VAPOR
BARRIER
-s` 4" OR MATCH EXISTING
F SLAB THICKNESS
WHICHEVER IS GREATER
F 4" MIN COMPACTED GRAVEL
COMPACTED FILL WHERE
OCCURS
PIPE OR CONDUIT
WHERE OCCURS
1. ELEC. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL
FASTEN TO WALL FRAMING WIREMOLD COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED
OR TOP CHORD OF EXISTING BUT NOT LIMITED TO:
ROOF STRUCTURE -FLAT ELBOW #G3011E FOR ALL 90' TURNS
1° ID BLACK STEEL PIPE -TEE CONNECTOR #G3015E AS REQUIRED
SWAY BRACING WITH SWIVEL -TAP -OFF FITTING #G3046TF FOR POWER FEEDS
ATTACHMENTS, 2. ELEC. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL
LOCATE 2 BRACES AT THE MOUNTING HARDWARE AS INDICATED
O F SUSPENDED BLACK PIPE, DEGREE OUTSIDE CORNERS AND AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION
OF
EACH BRACE TO BE AT
AT 90 DEGREES TO PIPE AS • 3. ELEC CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL
VIEWED IN PLAN _ SEISMIC BRACING AS REQUIRED BY
THE LOCAL JURISDICTION
ALL THREAD CONNECTION
TO STRUCTURE ABOVE, SEE
WIREMOLD G3008C C- HANGER
WIREMOLD G3000CE COVER
WIREMOLD G3000B BASE
3/8" ALL THREAD HOT OIL DIPPED @ 5' -0"
O.C. MAX AND 6" FROM WIREMOLD JOINT
LAMP HOLDER,
SEE LIGHT SCHEDULE
1" ID BLACK STEEL PIPE W/ THREADED
CONNECTIONS, 90'S, TEES, AND UNIONS
O
0
FRONT ELEVATION
ACCESSIBLE BENCH
SCALE: 112" =1' -0"
NON -RATED WALL
EXISTING STRUCTURE
EXISTING STRUCTURE
FOR TRACK
ATTACHMENT
SEE
WOOD BASE DETAIL
SCALE: 3" =1' -0"
PLF3062 UNISTRUT BEAM CLAMP,
ATTACH TO TOP CHORD BETWEEN
METAL DECK CORRUGATIONS
TOP FLANGE OF EXISTING BEAM
ALL THREAD HOT OIL DIPPED
ATTACHMENT WHER PIPE HANGER IS
PERPENDICULAR TO BEAMS
PLF3062 UNISTRUT BEAM CLAMP,
ATTACH TO TOP CHORD BETWEEN
METAL DECK CORRUGATIONS
TOP FLANGE OF EXISTING BEAM
3/8" DIAMETER ALL THREAD
HOT OIL DIPPED
P5500T UNISTRUT CHANNEL •
ALL THREAD HOT OIL DIPPED
ATTACHMENT WHERE PIPE HANGER IS
PARALLEL TO BEAMS
PIPE HANGER/CASHWRAP SOFFIT
CONNECTION TO STRUCTURE
12 1 SCALE: 1" =l'-0"
PARTITION PER
PARTITION TYPES
1/8" REVEAL,
PAINT TOP OF
BASE FLAT BLACK
RECESSED
1 X 6 CLEAR VG
FIR WOOD BASE
FINISH
APPLY CLEAR CAULKING ALONG
FULL LENGTH OF BACK EDGE
BETWEEN WALL AND BENCH AND
ALONG SIDE WHEN BENCH IS
SNUGGED UP TO SIDE WALL
NOTE:
ALL BENCH SURFACES
TO BE MATTE BLACK LAMINATE
SCREW BENCH SECURELY TO
WALLSTUDS AT 2 LOCATIONS,
USE METAL ANGLE CLIPS
SIDE ELEVATION
PARTITION PER
PARTITION TYPES
FOR TRACK
ATTACHMENT
SEE
1 X 6 CLEAR VG
FIR WOOD BASE
FINISH
RATED WALL CONDITION
NOTE:
REPLACE FIRE
PROOFING AS
REQUIRED TO
MAINTAIN RATING
FRONT VIEW
EQUAL ;— EQUAL
TO WALL END 1 TO WALL END
VAfiIES
O
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
PLAN VIEW
DRESSING ROOM RECESS
SCALE: 1" =1' -0"
METAL ELECTRICAL BOX, ATTACH TO UNDERSID
OF EXISTING STRUCTURE, PAINT TO MATCH CEILING
SWIVEL JOINT & COVER PLATE
1/2" RIGID THREADED CONDUIT,
PAINT TO MATCH CEILING
RUN SPEAKER WIRE INSIDE OF CONDUIT
DRILL SPEAKER BRACKET
TO RECEIVE THREADED
CONDUIT WITH NUT ON
EACH SIDE
SPEAKER SUPPORT, ATTACH
TO UNDERSIDE OF ELECTRICAL BOX
SPEAKER
5/8" HOT DIPPED THREADED ROD
THROUGH CHANNEL AT 4'-6" O.C. TO STRUCTURE
ABOVE, SEE 12/A5.01
UNISTRUT P1000T 12 GA 1 5/8" STEEL CHANNEL
1 X 10 FURRING
STRIP
1x6 CONT. SUPPOR
FOIC MTL. CORNICE
12" X 16 GA TRACK
AT PERIMETER
VERTICAL PANEL #4574
(FOIC)
3 5/8" MTL. STUDS @ 24"
3/4° PLYWOOD
FIRE TREATED
D EL.= 10' -0 "AFF
6:1•
CORNER TRIM
NOSING #800 EACH SIDE
(FOIC)
STAMPED METAL #457
FILLER PANEL (FOIC)
13
O.C.
SCALE: 3" = 1'- 0"
SECTION
SUSPENDED SPEAKER
NOT TO SCALE
ATTACH UNISTRUT TO JOIST W/#10 TRUSS HEAD SM
TYP @ 24" OC MAX AND AT ENDS
7112"
�•� 518"
1 - 0"
■
1 1/2" RADIUS �.
EDGE
CASHWRAP SOFFIT DETAIL
a
I
1
I
1
PARTITION AS
PER SCHEDULE
3/4" R. EDGE BEAD
(3) SIDES
5/8" GWB.
5/4" X 8" CLR VG FIR SHELF
EASE EDGES
2 1/4" FIR
CROWN MOLDING
5/16" RADIUS
14"
1" RADIUS
1
i
CROWN MOLDING
HALF FULL SCALE
FACE OF WALL >
LIGHT TRACK WHERE
SHOWN ON PLAN
USE CUT VERTICAL
PANELS #4574 (FOIC)
WITH BORDER EDGE
AT TOP OF THE INSIDE
VERTICAL FACE
w
HOOK SET PLACEMENT
4 ' SCALE: 1/2" =1 -0"
TRIM MOLDING
FIBERGLASS
REINFORCED PANEL
ADA CLEARANCE
NOTES:
DRESSING RM EXTERIOR LOCATION
NEW TILE FLOOR
WITH INTEGRAL COVE
TILE BASE
TYPICAL LAVATORY ELEVATIONS
TOILET ELEVATIONS AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
SCALE: 114" =1'- 0"
1. ALL PANEL MODEL NUMBERS BY AA ABBINGDON
2. FOIC ITEMS ARE LARGER PANELS OR PIECES
TEAN SHOWN AND SHALL BE CUT BY GC TO FIT
CORNER TRIM NOSING #800
AT OUTSIDE CORNERS (FOIC)
FIELD CUT
MITER CORNERS
CORNICE #806 (FOIC)
HOLES FOR
PENDANT LIGHT
FIXTURE (3 "RND),
PROVIDE J BOX
FOR OWNER FURNISHED
LIGHT FIXTURE
METAL PANEL JOINT
CORNER TRIM
NOSING #800 EACH SIDE
(FOIC)
NOTE:
CASHWRAP SHOWN
ROTATED REFER TO RCP
FOR ORIENTATION
DRESSING ROOM
PARTITION, SEE PLAN
FOIC - HOOK SET
DOOR JAMB, SEE PLAN
WALL MOUNTED
LIGHT FIXTURE
PAPER TOWEL
HOLDER
MIRROR
LEVER
HANDLES
WRAP PIPES
w
m�
o Q
c L1_
ti 0
DRESSING ROOM
PARTITION, SEE PLAN
FOIC - HOOK SET
ACCESSIBLE BENCH,
SEE PLAN
ACCESSIBLE DRESSING RM LOCATION
NOTE: ORIENT FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES TO CORRESPOND
TO PLAN LAYOUT
0
d
STAMPED METAL #4574 CENTER SOFFIT ON CASHWRAP
FILLER PANEL (FOIC) BELOW IN THIS DIRECTION
CASHWRAP SOFFIT RCP
14 SCALE: 112" =1'- 0"
/37
, 36"
DRESSING ROOM
PARTITION, SEE PLAN
FOIC - HOOK SET
TYPICAL ToI LET ELEVATIONS
5/8" HOT OIL DIPPED THREADED
ROD THRU CHANNEL 4' -6" O.C.
TO STRUCTURE ABOVE AT THREE
LOCATIONS (EACH SIDE)
TYP DRESSING RM LOCATION
NOTE: MOUNT ALL UNITS PER APPLICABLE ADA REGULATIONS
40"
HC GRAB BARS
TRIM MOLDING
FIBERGLASS
REINFORCED PANEL
FRP -1
TOILET HOLDER TISSUE
2
O
NEW TILE FLOOR
WITH INTEGRAL COVE a,
EVIEVVED FOR
TILE BASE
ODE COB'4PLYANCE
I APPROVED
I \R2 7`' 1
a sktMilft
BUILDING DIVISIOR
TYPICAL FOIC
#4574 METAL PANEL
48"
OWNER TO FURNISH
METAL PANELS AS
PRECUT
' .
CO
•
PANEL COMES WITH
PRESSED METAL PATTERN
AND BORDER ON ONE EDGE
— PIECES CUT WITH BORDER
ARE TO BE USED WHERE
NOTED ON DETAILS
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
zumez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
2646 SouirrcErmiMALL
SEATTLE, WA. 98188
MURPHY VAREYps
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
7101 NINTH AVENUE SUITE 711
SEATTLE, WABNINGTON 98191
T: 706.341. 98Th
F: 706 .341. 9174
E: rra. M➢ETHYVAASY.COY
DATE:
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW
PERMIT
11.21 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
02 - - FINAL MALL REVIEW / PERMIT
SHEET TITLE:
INTERIOR DETAILS
SHEET NUMBER:
GI TERED
HITECT
J. MURPHY
STATE OF WASHINGTON
A5.01
WAtti Ad Ae,Al Ae".
4te.: 44:
FASTEN VERT CHANNE
TO UNISTRUT CHANNEL
W /(2) NO 12 SCREWS TOP AND
9 GA GALVANIZED STEEL
WIRE AT 3' -0" O.C. ALONG
THE 1 1/2" CHANNEL
150U50 -54 MTL VERTICAL CHANNEL STRUT
AT 12' -0" O.C. AND 6' -0" MAX FROM WALL
AT THE CONVERGENCE OF THE SPLAYED
WIRES.
PLF3062 UNISTRUT BEAM CLAMP,
ATTACH TO TOP CHORD BETWEEN
METAL DECK CORRUGATIONS
TOP CHORD OF EXISTING BEAM /
STRUCTURE
3/8" DIAMETER ALL THREAD
NN
P5500T UNISTRUT CHANNEL
PLF3062 UNISTRUT BEAM CLAMP,
ATTACH TO EACH SIDE OF TOP CHORD BETWEEN
METAL DECK CORRUGATIONS
TOP CHORD OF EXISTING BEAM /
STRUCTURE
SADDLE TIE WITH 16 GA WIRE OR 2 STRANDS
OF 18 GA WIRE
CORRUGATED METAL CEILING, ATTACH WITH #10 SMS
AT 16" MAX OC TO HAT CHANNELS
SUSPENDED METAL CEILING
NOT TO SCALE
CORRUGATED METAL CEILING, SE
NOT TO SCALE
UNISTRUT BEAM CLAMP, FOR FLANGES
OF STRUCTURE UNDER 7/8" THICK USE
P1650 S, FOR FLANGES BETWEEN
3/4" AND 1 5/8" THICK USE P2401 S,
ATTACH TO TOP CHORD BETWEEN METAL
DECK CORRUGATIONS
SCALE: 1 1/2" =1' -0"
3/8" DIAMETER ALL THREAD
SECURE WITH NUT ON TOP AND BOTTOM
OF UNISTRUT TO RESIST VERTICAL MOVEMENT
P5500T UNISTRUT AT 4'-0" OC BETWEEN EXISTING BEAMS,
ALIGN WITH 1 1/2" CHANNELS BELOW
TOP CHORD OF EXISTING BEAM /
STRUCTURE
3/8" DIAMETER ALL THREAD
SECURE WITH NUT ON TOP AND BOTTO
OF UNISTRUT TO RESIST VERTICAL MOVEMENT
PROVIDE LATERAL BRACING PER
SECTION PERPENDICULAR TO TRUSSES
DRILL 3/4" DIAMETER HOLE I
METAL DECK FOR THREADED ROD
COUPLING, FINISH /PAINT BLACK
TYP
SECTION PERPENDICULAR TO TRUSSES
SUPPORT FOR SUSPENDED ITEMS BELOW CEILING
6" MAX
NOTES:
1. SUSPENSION OF METAL CEILING IS INDEPENDENT
AND SEPARATE FROM SUSPENSION OF THE LIGHT BAR AND
CASHWRAP SOFFIT BELOW.
2. DO NOT HANG OR ATTACH SUSPENDED LIGHT BAR SYSTEM FROM
METAL CEILING
3. ADD ADDITIONAL LIGHT BAR TYPE SUSPENSION SYSTEM AS
REQUIRED FOR SUSPENDED MECHANICAL ITEMS
FASTEN TO UNISTRUT,
200 # PULLOUT MIN
12 GA HANGER WIRE
AT EACH PERIMETER
MAIN TEE AND EACH
CROSS TEE
EXISTING STRUCTURE
MAIN TEE OR CROSS TEE
STABILIZER BAR TO MAINTAIN PERIMETER
TEE SPACING
SUSPENDED ACT CEILING LATERAL BRACING
P1000T UNISTRUT AT 4'-O" OC, ALIGN WITH
HANGER WIRE LOCATIONS BELOW
C ADJUST IN FIELD TO KEEP
UNISTRUT AS CLOSE TOP OP CHORD OF TRUSS
AS POSSIBLE
LS500 UNISTRUT PIVOT FITTING
AT EACH WIRE CONNECTION
12 GA WIRES 90 DEGREES
ART AND TIED TO CHANNEL
AT 12' -0" O.C. EACH WAY,
6' -0" MAX FROM WALL, WRAP WIRE (5) TURNS MIN, TYP. UNO
087F125 -33 METAL HAT CHANNELS
AT 2' -0" D.C.
150U50 -54 MTL CHANNEL
AT 4' -0" OC
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD
NOTES:
1. SUSPENSION OF METAL CEILING IS INDEPENDENT
AND SEPARATE FROM SUSPENSION OF THE LIGHT BAR AND
CASHWRAP SOFFIT BELOW.
2. DO NOT HANG OR ATTACH SUSPENDED LIGHT BAR SYSTEM FROM
METAL CEILING
3. ADD ADDITIONAL LIGHT BAR TYPE SUSPENSION SYSTEM AS
REQUIRED FOR SUSPENDED MECHANICAL ITEMS
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD
.11t
rV .
A. + 4. . Y /, 1
9 GA HANGER WIRE AT 4' O.C.
EACH DIRECTION - NO MORE
THAN 1:6 OUT -OF- PLUMB,
TYPICAL
WHERE HANGER WIRES
ARE MORE THAN 1:6
OUT -OF- PLUMB.
PROVIDE COUNTER
SLOPING WIRES
SUSPEND LIGHT BAR OR CASHWRAP
SOFFIT WHERE OCCURS, FOR LIGHT BAR
SEE , FOR CASHWRAP SOFFIT SEE
EXISTING STRUCTURE
FASTENERS INTO STRUCTURE
SUCH THAT IT WILL SUPPORT A
DESIGN LOAD OF NOT LESS
THAN 200 LBS OR THE ACTUAL
DESIGN LOAD WHICHEVER IS
GREATER WITH A SAFETY FACTOR
OF 2 WITHOUT YIELDING.
3/8" DIAMETER ALL THREAD ROD, HOT OIL
DIPPED AT LIGHT BAR, USE 5/8" DIAMETER
ALL THREAD HOT OIL DIPPED AT CASHWRAP SOFFIT
3/8" DIAMETER ALL THREAD
SECURE WITH NUT ON TOP AND BOTTOM
OF UNISTRUT TO RESIST VERTICAL MOVEMENT
P5500T UNISTRUT CHANNELS, ALIGN WITH
1 1/2" CHANNELS BELOW
1 1/2" VERTICAL CHANNEL STRUT AT 12' -0" O.C. AND 6' -0" MAX
FROM WALL AT THE CONVERGENCE OF THE SPLAYED WIRES.
CORRUGATED METAL CEILING, ATTACH WITH #10 SMS
AT 16" MAX OC TO HAT CHANNELS
TRAPEZE AS REQUIRED
TO AVOID OBSTRUCTIONS
MAINTAIN HANGER WIRE
SPACING AND CAPACITY
TOP CHORD OF EXISTING BEAM 1
STRUCTURE
u v v
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD
CORRUGATED METAL CEILING, SE
SECTION PARALLEL TO TRUSSES
DO NOT PENETRATE OR ATTACH TO ROOF DECK WHERE OCCURS
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION PARALLEL TO TRUSSES
EXISTING STRUCTURE,
PAINT/FINISH AS
REQUIRED
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD
SADDLE TIE WITH 16 GA WIRE OR 2 STRANDS
OF 18 GA WIRE
CORRUGATED METAL CEILING, ATTACH WITH #10 SMS
AT 16" MAX OC TO HAT CHANNELS
NEMO& CLAMP,
ATTACH TO TOP CHORD BETWEEN
METAL DECK CORRUGATIONS
TOP CHORD OF EXISTING BEAM /
STRUCTURE
3/8" DIAMETER ALL THREAD
P5500T UNISTRUT CHANNEL
SEE DETAIL AT LEFT FOR
NOTES
Pr IF AOM" rs 0 7
411111111111
PENDENT - MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES AND
FIXTURES WEIGHING MORE THAN 56 LBS.
SHALL BE SUPPORTED FROM STRUCTURE.
LIGHT FIXTURES WEIGHING LESS THAN 56 LBS
SHALL BE FASTENED TO STRUCTURE WITH
TWO SLACK WIRES, MINIMUM
FASTEN ALL LIGHT FIXTURES TO CEILING SYSTEM WITH WIRE TO TEES WITHIN 3" OF EACH CORNER
OF LIGHT FIXTURE FOR INTERMEDIATE -DUTY CEILING SYSTEM (NOT REQUIRED FOR HEAVY -DUTY
CEILING SYSTEM) @ TYPICAL LIGHT FIXTURE
PARTITION PER PLAN
FASTEN TO UNISTRUT,
200 # PULLOUT MIN
9 GA GALVANIZED STEEL
WIRE AT 3' -0" O.C. ALONG
CHANNELS
087F125 -33 METAL HAT CHANNELS
AT 2' -0" O.C.
150U50 -54 MTL CHANNEL
AT 4' -0" OC
SCALE: 1 1/2" =1'- 0"
SUSPENDED METAL CEILING AT WALL
NOTE:
THIS BRACING TO
BE LOCATED AT 12' OC
EACH DIRECTION, AND
WITHIN 5' OF PERIMETER
2" MAXIMUM 7r
CROSS TEE
MAIN TEE
COMPRESSION STRUT FASTENED TO STRUCTURE
AND TO GRID AT THE CONVERGENCE OF THE
SPLAYED WIRES
FOUR 12 GA WIRES SPLAYED 90- DEGREES (IN PLAN)
FROM EACH OTHER TIED TO MAIN TEE WITHIN 2" OF
CROSS TEE
M RENEWED FOR
CODE COMPLLNCE
APPROVED
O A R
r, re f• •
City Of Tukwila
BUILDING IVISION
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
zumez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
2646 SOU! IICENTER MALI.
SEATTLE, WA. 98188
MURPHY 1 VAREY PS
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
21o1 Nrnra AveNue Sum 7u
SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98471
T: 7 o 6 .94 1 .9 8 75
F: 206 .341. 91T7
E: vw. MuararVAner.cou
551
E OF WASHINGTON I
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
' ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW
PERMIT
DATE:
11.21.07
02 -08 -08
SHEET TITLE:
INTERIOR DETAILS
SHEET NUMBER:
GISTEFIED
RCHITECT
A5.02
PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
FINAL MALL REVIEW / PERMIT
eew.r xycepa:.A`rx:.an
f ■120v6 t,2 .. IXft6176ftgeaterf:TY.E av a�C Ws! CY:taD, lwe'�S 0.10,0
r k
• 4+.N'u 000C p4.0:04 0 MKtbxr"nr A=PrIC,'6^Natc..VCCatt
•
v i cy- • i.S.Cey ri n..) aw y er(.p.ti.r5+'.A•P?aw1'Cf(1
mr0ewerr e,m.vmrrxwxrzece .. e\ .a�m.'emxi•wi x
• LC f%eC a F .w)¢rr ro.w.. i[tt PCs ti. 0400,
�p
• z e>an K'e•+ row CN. aae , z rcaxwexr.>cwcrfm wn
ir .... I
vt�•c�:a a` / /
1 � .. �b
M'a't`Frsr >< • �
I
&eY
1 n .rrrooxrce
0.. 0?v,vni^�ce 0 m•.zev ~in..i.1w warp^
7e � 1 .wr .v yr"
rr �c�r... R ,sw rr nFsr �r � ""r
WrEP PS 0640.1101.10.C.17, VC CCUPPCS rep.
n. ••'_�
1
rrn,mrroxrre � ,.l er".
,� 0 ! i � f .r
..,..' ! tin
ynrw, /'
ir..roxrra .r.c rr ^.
$4141
ur POP ca.ryW00.
E- Z -RECT MANUFACTURING LTD.
b1 1TYf6 t[M. WCrg•YI WML74
c,,,r
. rryt. t ' `;0WPCC xKCMJrr.0
f •Ii00.�
RCLIVeai20345.16.411 L,emr.n
s z Rxrs.r m
; � 3 �
, rc=u.nrrx Y....,cra- waxu15.11..0nvacrcx...uenxan`r.v 00k004,00ceaco4P?CPc
. :m FVix0 iesAn 40 ix. Mi er 00r0CC.:0•�'n
0 hh
kw ca
r - 1
t -g:= amt . r
- "s'.>�'swreo6u: x.+ ••,. .i
` `
F � ,
mr vrc,6z(
7�i }T �
.�x.w•s V\ ... t.- "..ra•
" r>t„
• >w, rm 3,vfmw�+ �'r6•rrmnappra.arX:r•sumkw,
-- C,\
RDA
r ar,frrarr6
� • :1. j
1 /
rs00em. nwcros+ 0,0. aa?¢0 d
rti ;K.. V.7.0 :21.ti:a,<K
9YYSALITAI CARM
Hhm .0711S AJVIL x[]EOKa�O: Wx ...
SvIW L4:YR'N!1 �1Aa1SRJ0.•JW+Ma01M�f�AIVYlM531p
� �
L..,4 ,r..r
6 M.,e
S .+�68a-, ry
•, tn3iaRa, Mras
rwwr.,,t4M ?ruxaxi.." Segyx
Ars. t.�.+n+
I
nrrrlrrxl
`
p
i s
< �•
8
, 1xmr1.+,r,PX41:M71.
t
r
+ . te n •
\ °.
n.rbfzx.x.•c,a�tm„
:
,
I
21:9 arCMb'Y :r!/M:MMP/1.7
in:3CSJtp
`
=
) 'V
,
9•
Is rve0eu11,101PO.,r s NITENi V.. n.W22 iC4nzf.
fx.sf.wrs
rw.v
•,,.»..
'
■
I C J
M.
6H 1
",
.
1
.1r t..R. 4,00.8.:. CCA
-....
1` a
:CfAY'OOA :- MM6Td
RWFSY '9W'!i
lCY.ri' •4l1]
rrYf
EMI" l
rir
7
•yam d'Hnr.^RM4 , W'zscecogerwwf?R'axGa∎C R +h"+.A`n
+,nxnr•n wt:[arzne•.r Sf
GENERAL NOTES FOR ROLLING RACK SYSTEM:
1. SYSTEM INDICATED IS BASIS OF PRODUCT DESIGN. OTHER SYSTEMS
WILL BE CONSIDERED WITH PRIOR APPROVAL.
2. G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PURCHASE AND INSTALLATION OF
COMPLETE SYSTEM INCLUDING ENGINEERING AND PERMITS.
3. PROVIDE ALL ACCESSORIES INCLUDING THE FOLLOWING:
a. RACK SUPPORTS
b. CARRIERS
c. PARTICLE BOARD SHELVING
d. HANDLES
e. WRITING SURFACES
f. LOCKING STOPS
g. D VMDERS & SPACERS
i. MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
4. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING. NOTIFY
ARCHITECT IF THERE ARE VARIATIONS FROM THE CONFIGURATION
INDICATED.
5. IF THE WEIGHT OF ANY OBJECT SHALL EXCEED LOAD LIMITS OF (75 LBS /SF)
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS MUST BE PREPARED AND SUBMITTED BY A LICENSED
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
ecue n.x•
rter, r�era W6xr.,
w HI �� pan
6000 W
IWUw...V.M4!7F /I
ra
........7
�s II t
11 c -
0..
It� � ..............,n...:.�:J __.
•
1
J
HQ*
ew wc.rv:
1p aar�rrarn a"t,;4�irC
F
xvn r.ro•
PPM00.4 ,000pFV.[W %.'sKYa^e xw'ra0.0.40iui"il' cp.c.+0.tr..Te 4¢er:.a:yF:cf•'
rdh.NY4a0fIX`n4
'e'CF:A d'.:••
�tariPIN (_v.4'..ifiq.rt amr- 10x :rxrtxKEI:Ai7.41.W.•xd.lco,s'u wr+urc,R lary *!trpy.4., iYA
NOTES:
I. STEEL SHELVING FRAMEWORK AND NON-FIRE R, MPENI PARTICLEBOARD SHELVES, TY?.
2. USE PLASTIC NETTING IN BETWEEN ADJACENT NON.FIYE RETARDANT PARTICLEBOARD SHELVES ON SPLIT UNITS.
7v. PEG3OARD & ERASER BOARD INSTALLED A5 PER LAYOUT.
}
24
4
7 24"
24"
34' --
1
PAST CONNECTOR TATS. MUST BE
LOCKED IN PLACE FOR SAFETY, P'T.
• ■ T•
TPG
PLASTIC NETTING ON
SPLIT UNITS, TYP.
T
3 "
• 21.EMrr
, EtA
PTYSLOTS
1WD (& TSB
y FOR 30" PEEP)
TFC( (& TSB
FOR 30" OEF3)
TFCV (& T55
FOR 30" DEEP)
TFCV (& T55
FOR 30" DEEP)
1 - w
g1 FOK Q DEEP)
TAB IS TSB FOR
au' PEEP UNITS, TYP.
TFCY & TSB FOR
30" PEEP UNITS, Tyr.
1 RETI'IEWED FA R
CODE COMPLIA
APPROVEC
mAR ` '
BUILDINr
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
arrvez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
SPACE # 2115
633 SoTJTIICEVmR
SEATTLE, \ \' .1. 98188
MURPHY VAREY
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
is =1 �l.r Tri
Al PC{ Stir ?11
Sff•1TTLE. K AS111%L70%
1: 7 to 341
I': sub. :W. ql?"
F; aac 1Juxeeas3r,
DATE:
nI
a
J. MURPHY
STATE OF WASHINGTON
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
TERED
ITECT
ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW
PERMIT
11 -21-07 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
02-08-08 FINAL MALL REVIEW 1 PERMIT
SHEET TITLE:
ROLLING RACK
SYSTEM
SHEET NUMBER:
A5.03
1 \
\ /
\ /
OPEN TO
BEYOND
/ \
/ \
/ \
Panommem.
RETAIL S
sk
P -5
TORE
MTL -2 PAINT
FOIC F -503C PILASTER DISPLAY FIXTURE,
PROVIDE 12 X 20 GA SHEET METAL
BACKING, SEE
FOIC F -503D SHORT PILASTER DISPLAY
FIXTURE, PROVIDE 12 X 20 GA SHEET METAL
BACKING, SEE
FOIC F -518 DRESSING ROOM
DISPLAY FIXTURE, PROVIDE 12 X 20 GA
SHEET METAL BACKING, SEE
HVAC DUCT, UNFINISHED GALV
PAINT SIDE DIFFUSERS METALIC SILVER,
MOUNT AT 14'-4" TO BOTTOM OF DUCT
0
RETAIL STOR
Nne
A5.01
10.02
RECESSED WOOD BASE
SUSPENDED LIGHT
MOUNT AT 12' -0" AFF
TO BOTTOM OF FIXTURE
OWNER FURNISHED
CONTRACTOR INSTALLED
MERCHANDISE SYSTEM, SEE
12" WIDE X 20 GA SHEET MTL.
BACKING @ (3) LOCATIONS AT EACH
VERTICAL STANDARD, TYP. SE
MTL -2 PAINT
OWNER FURNISHED
CONTRACTOR INSTALLED
MERCHANDISE SYSTEM, SEE
HVAC DUCT, UNFINISHED GALV
PAINT SIDE DIFFUSERS METALIC SILVER,
MOUNT AT 12'-4" TO BOTTOM OF DUCT
INTERIOR ELEVATION
SCALE: 1/4" =1' -0"
SUSPENDED LIGHT
BAR, SEE
.��
0 1
FOIC
CASHWRAP
SUSPENDED LIGHT
BAR, SEE
2
4
WOOD BASE BETWEEM
VERTICAL MERCHANDISE
STANDARDS,TYP
12" WIDE X 20 GA SHEET MTL.
BACKING @ (3) LOCATIONS AT EACH
VERTICAL STANDARD, TYP. SE
CEILING MOUNTED
SPEAKER, TYP
SUSPENDED LIGHT
BAR, SEE
TACTILE EXIT
SIGN, SEE
HVAC DUCT, UNFINISHED GALV
PAINT SIDE DIFFUSERS METALIC SILVER,
MOUNT AT 12'4" TO BOTTOM OF DUCT
EXISTING MALL STRUCTURE CEILING MOUNTED
PAINT SPEAKER, TYP
WOOD BASE BETWEEM
VERTICAL MERCHANDISE ( WB -2
STANDARDS,TYP
12" WIDE X 20 GA SHEET MTL.
BACKING @(3) LOCATIONS AT EACH
VERTICAL STANDARD, TYP. SE
FOIC F -503 PILASTER DISPLAY FIXTURE,
PROVIDE 12 X 20 GA SHEET METAL
BACKING, SEE
OWNER FURNISHED
CONTRACTOR INSTALLED
MERCHANDISE SYSTEM, SEE
MTL -2 PAINT
EXISTING MALL STRUCTURE
PAINT
FULL HT. PILASTER
PAINT
PAINT SOFFIT
SUSPENDED LIGHT
BAR, SEE
"ACCESSIBLE" IDENTIFICATION
MOUNT @ 5' -O" TO CENTERLINE
WOOD BASE BETWEEM
VERTICAL MERCHANDISE
STANDARDS,TYP
FOIC F -503 PILASTER DISPLAY FIXTURE,
PROVIDE 12 X 20 GA SHEET METAL
BACKING, SEE
i Ps
�
� I
MTL -2 PAINT
SUSPENDED LIGHT
MOUNT AT 12' -0" AFF
TO BOTTOM OF FIXTURE
o8- l31
RECESSED WOOD BASE
GD WOOD BASE AT
"DEMISING WALL
12" WIDE X 20 GA SHEET METAL
BACKING AT REAR WALL
6 -0" TO CENTERLINE
INTERIOR ELEVATION
C
GWB
SCALE: 1/4" =1' -0"
0 1 2
HVAC DUCT, UNFINISHED GALV
PAINT SIDE DIFFUSERS METALIC SILVER,
MOUNT AT 12'-4" TO BOTTOM OF DUCT
INTERIOR ELEVATION
4
SCALE: 1/4" =1' -0"
0 1 2 4
INTERIOR ELEVATION
SCALE: 1/4" =1' -0"
0 1 2
4
ULL HT. PILASTE
P • NT
10.02
A5.01
RETAIL STOR
TOILET
TORAGE
P �
A* ZA 4 /Mr 7::Aff r e4WAI A=Are 14r1:7 Aag
A5.01
A5.01
A5.01
PAINT SOFFIT
TACTILE EXIT
SIGN, SEE
STOREFRONT SEE A3.01
REV EWEO FOR
CODE COMPLIANCE
APPROVED
MAR 2 ''Ji3�j
City Of Tukwila
BUILDIN'° I''I
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
wmiez
SouTxcENIIER MALL
2646 Saumxc.FNTFR MATS,
SEATTLE, WA. 98188
MuxY VYPS
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
9101 NINTH AVENUE SUITE 211
BRITTLE, WASHINGTON 98191
T: 9 c6 .341 . 9
F: 906.341 • 9177
F.: vw. Mnar$rVuex.cca
DATE:
SHEET TITLE:
INTERIOR
ELEVATIONS
SHEET NUMBER:
r
J. MURPHY
E OF WASHINGTON
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW
PERMIT
11-21-07 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
02 - - FINAL MALL REVIEW 1 PERMIT
A8.01
STRUCTURE,
TYPICAL
CEILING
WHERE
OCCURS
INSULATION
FULL HEIGHT
AS INDICATED
AO
PARTITION
PARTITION CONFIGURATION -
FULL HT. FINISH MATERIALS
BOTH SIDES
3 5/8" STUDS @ 16" O.C.
6" STUDS @ 16" O.C.
STRUCTURE,
TYPICAL
CEILING
WHERE
OCCURS
CEILING
INSULATION
ONE SIDE AT
ACOUSTIC
RATED
PARTITION
INSULATION
A9.01 PARTIAL HEIGHT
TRACK AS INDICATED
ATTACHMENT
PLAN SECTION
EXISTING METAL STUDS AT 16° OC, VERIFY IN FIELD
PARTITION (1 HR. FIRE-RATED)
CONSTRUCT PER U.L. DESIGN #U 465
(1) LAYER G.W.B.
EACH SIDE
METAL STUDS
BATT INSULATION
IF NOTED
PLAN SECTION
A9.01
SHEET MTL BACKING
WHERE INDICATED,
SEE ELEVATION FOR
SIZE AND LOCATION
- J LU
U Z
co LUCD
CD n
Q COW
U
E C-3
L am¢
STANDARD PARTITION CONFIGURATION
NO SCALE
STANDARD PARTITION CONSTRUCTION
UL DESIGN NO. U465 (SEE UL DESIGN STANDARDS FOR COMPLETE REQUIREMENTS):
NONBEARING WALL RATING -1 HR
1. FLOOR AND CEILING RUNNERS- CHANNEL SHAPED RUNNERS, 3 518" WIDE (MIN),
1 114" LEGS, FORMED FROM MIN. NO. 25 MSG. GALVANIZED STEEL, ATTACHED
TO FLOOR AND CEILING WITH FASTENERS SPACED AT 24" O.C. MAX.,,
2. STEEL STUDS- CHANNEL SHAPED, 3 5/8" WIDE (MIN.), 1 114" LEGS, 3/8" FOLDED
BACK RETURNS, FORMED FROM MIN. NO 25 MSG GALVANIZED STEEL SPACED
24" O.C. MAX., INSTALL PER SPACING AS NOTED
3. BATTS AND BLANKETS- AS NOTED
4. GYPSUM WALLBOARD- 5/8" THICK, 4 FOOT WIDE, ATTACHED TO STEEL STUDS
AND FLOOR AND CEILING TRACK WITH 1 IN. LONG, TYPE S STEEL SCREWS SPACED
8 IN OC ALONG EDGES OF BOARD AND 12 IN OC IN THE FIELD OF THE BOARD.
JOINTS ORIENTED VERTICALLY AND STAGGERED ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF THE
ASSEMBLY. SEE UL BOOK FOR ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS.
5. JOINT TAPE AND COMPOUND- VINYL, DRY, OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND,
APPLIED IN TWO COATS TO JOINTS AND SCREW HEADS; PAPER TAPE, 2 IN. WIDE,
EMBEDDED IN FIRST LAYER OF COMPOUND OVER ALL JOINT. JOINTS REINFORCED
NOTE: FIRE CAULK ALL PENETRATIONS
EXISTING ADJACENT TYPE X GWB TO REMAIN
SHEET MTL BACKING, SEE ELEVATION FOR
SIZE AND LOCATION
EXISTING METAL STUDS
1 LAYER TYPE 'X' G.W.B TO FULL HT.
BATT INSULATION IF NOTED,
SEE PARTITION DESIGNATION
1
PARTITION
STRUCTURE,
TYPICAL
CEILING
WHERE
OCCURS
CEILING
INSULATION
BOTH SIDES
AT ACOUSTIC
RATED
PARTITIONS
INSULATION
PARTIAL HEIGHT
AS INDICATED
CO
PARTITION CONFIGURATION - PARTITION CONFIGURATION -
FULL HT. FINISH MATERIALS ONE SIDE. PARTIAL HT. FINISH MATERIALS
FINISH MATERIALS TO CLG. ONE SIDE. BOTH SIDES.
3 5/8" STUDS @ 16" O.C.
6" STUDS @ 16" O.C.
U2
m LEICD
e
cn -
CD=
¢� U
t ¢1-
to ?JD ct
UL DESIGN NO. U465 (SEE UL DESIGN STANDARDS FOR COMPLETE REQUIREMENTS):
NONBEARING WALL RATING -1 HR
1. FLOOR AND CEILING RUNNERS- CHANNEL SHAPED RUNNERS, 3 5/8" WIDE (MIN), 1 1/4" LEGS,
FORMED FROM MIN. NO. 25 MSG. GALVANIZED STEEL, ATTACHED TO FLOOR AND CEILING
WITH FASTENERS SPACED AT 24" O.C. MAX.,,
2. STEEL STUDS- CHANNEL SHAPED, 3 5/8" WIDE (MIN.),1 1/4" LEGS, 3/8" FOLDED BACK
RETURNS,FORMED FROM MIN. NO 25 MSG GALVANIZED STEEL SPACED 24" O.C. MAX.,
INSTALL PER SPACING AS NOTED
3. BATTS AND BLANKETS- AS NOTED
4. GYPSUM WALLBOARD- 5/8" THICK, 4 FOOT WIDE, ATTACHED TO STEEL STUDS
AND FLOOR AND CEILING TRACK WITH 1 IN. LONG, TYPE S STEEL SCREWS SPACED
8 IN OC ALONG EDGES OF BOARD AND 12 IN OC IN THE FIELD OF THE BOARD.
JOINTS ORIENTED VERTICALLY AND STAGGERED ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF THE
ASSEMBLY. SEE UL BOOK FOR ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS.
5. JOINT TAPE AND COMPOUND- VINYL, DRY, OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND,
APPLIED IN TWO COATS TO JOINTS AND SCREW HEADS; PAPER TAPE, 2 IN. WIDE,
EMBEDDED IN FIRST LAYER OF COMPOUND OVER ALL JOINT. JOINTS REINFORCED
6° STUDS
ADJACENT STUDS/ FINISH/
STRUCTURE WHERE
OCCURS
SHEET MTL BACKING
WHERE INDICATED,
SEE ELEVATION FOR
SIZE AND LOCATION
METAL STUDS
BATT
INSULATION
IF NOTED
PLAN SECTION
STRUCTURE,
TYPICAL
ATTACH TO ADJACENT WALL
AT THE TOP AND AT LEAST
10' -0" O.C. VERTICALLY AT
EACH STUD
if
CEILING
WHERE
OCCURS
Fa
i
AS INDICATED
FULL HEIGHT
4 /
INSULATION
CONSTRUCT PER U.L. DESIGN #U 465
D" E
NOTE: FIRE CAULK ALL PENETRATIONS.
1 LAYER TYPE 'X G.W.B. EACH SIDE
SHEET MTL BACKING, SEE ELEVATION FOR
SIZE AND LOCATION
METAL STUDS
PARTITION (1 HR FIRE-RATED)
PARTITION
BATT INSULATION IF NOTED
PLAN SECTION
35/8 " STUDS @16 "O.C.
STRUCTURE,
TYPICAL
CEILING
WHERE
OCCURS
METAL STUDS
INSULATION
FULL HEIGHT
AS INDICATED
1 LAYER 1/2" ABUSE
RESISTANT GYPSUM
BOARD, EACH SIDE
1 LAYER TYPE 'X
G.W.B. EACH SIDE
PLAN VIEW
PARTITION CONFIGURATION - PARTITION CONFIGURATION -
FULL HT. FINISH MATERIALS ONE SIDE. PARTIAL HT. FINISH MATERIALS
NO FINISH MATERIAL ONE SIDE BOTH SIDES
8" WIDE 20 GA SHEET METAL BACKING
WHERE REQUIRED FOR COAT HOOKS,
MIRRORS, AND OTHER ATTACHMENTS,
ATTACH BACKING TO 2 STUDS
MINIMUM
STRUCTURE,
TYPICAL
CEILING
INSULATION
INSULATION
PARTIAL HEIGHT
PARTITION CONFIGURATION -
FINISH MATERIALS BOTH SIDES OF
PARTITION AND CEILING
AT TOP SIDE OF TOILET ROOM
CEILING USE 3/4" PLYWOOD,
FIRE RESISTANT TREATED IN
PLACE OF GWB
1 X 4 WOOD TRIM, PAINTED
CLG /PARTITION
SCALE: 3 " =1' -0°
r~
.. . 7C�6/.9��mi�rr .miQr�rrrmrl�Qrsrrrrrgco�cri;cr . r4crnrr.�
1
PARTITION CONFIGURATION -
PARTIAL HT. FINISH MATERIALS
BOTH SIDES.
6" METAL STUDS, 16 GA
@ 12" O.C.
5/8" TYPE "X" GWB
PARTITION TYPE AS NOTED
SECTION VIEW
USE THE FOLLOWING THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE:
A FIRESTOP SYSTEMS FOR METALLIC PIPES, METALLIC CONDUIT, AND METALLIC TUBING:
1. USE AVAILABLE UL- CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS: C-AJ -, C-BJ -, C-BK -, F -A , F-B -, F -C-, W-J -, W -K -,
W -L -1001 TO 1999
FOR THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS IN FIRE - RESISTANT RATED WALLS
THE APPROVED PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM IS TO HAVE AN "F" RATING OF NOT LESS THAN
THE REQUIRED FIRE - RESISTANT RATING OF THE WALL PENETRATED.
FOR THROUGH- PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS IN FIRE - RESISTANT RATED HORIZONTAL
ASSEMBLIES THE APPROVED PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM IS TO HAVE AN "F' RATING AND
A T RATING OF NOT LESS THAN 1 HOUR BUT NOT LESS THAN THE REQUIRED RATING OF THE FLOOR
PENETRATED.
B. FIRESTOP SYSTEMS FOR NONMETALLIC PIPE, NONMETALLIC CONDUIT, AND
NONMETALLIC TUBING:
1. USE AVAILABLE UL- CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS: C-AJ -, C-BJ -, F -A -, F -B -, F -C -, W-J -, W -L -2001 TO 2999
C. FIRESTOP SYSTEMS FOR ELECTRICAL CABLES:
1. USE AVAILABLE UL- CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS: C-AJ -, C-BJ -, F -A -, F -B -, F -C-, W -J -, W -L -3001 TO 3999
D. FIRESTOP SYSTEMS FOR CABLE TRAYS:
1. USE AVAILABLE UL- CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS: C-AJ -, C-BJ -, F -A -, F -B -, F -C -, W -J -, W -K -, W -L -4001 TO 4999
E. FIRESTOP SYSTEMS FOR INSULATED PIPES:
1. USE AVAILABLE UL- CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS: C-AJ -, C-BJ -, F -A -, F -C-, W -J -, W -L -5001 TO 5999
F. FIRESTOP SYSTEMS FOR MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL PENETRANTS:
1. USE AVAILABLE UL- CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS: C-AJ -, F -A, W- L-6001 TO 6999
G. FIRESTOP SYSTEMS FOR MISCELLANEOUS MECHANICAL PENETRANTS:
1. USE AVAILABLE UL- CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS: C-AJ -, F -C -, W-J -, W-L -7001 TO 7999
H. FIRESTOP SYSTEMS FOR GROUPING OF PENETRANTS:
1. USE AVAILABLE UL- CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS: C-AJ -, C-BJ -, F -A -, F -C-, W -J -, W -L -4001 TO 4999
FI RESTOP SYSTEMS AT THROUGH- PENETRATIONS
oa
oc
Od
oe
1
BATT ACOUSTICAL
INSULATION
BATT THERMAL
INSULATION
R -11
SUBSTITUTE TILE
BACKER BD. FOR
GWB. @ TILE FACE
OF PARTITION ONLY
SUBSTITUTE WATER
RESISTANT GYP. BD.
FOR GWB ON TOILET
SIDE OF WALL ONLY
SUBSTITUTE ABUSE
RESISTANT GYP. BD.
FOR GWB
MODIFICATIONS
CLG/PARTITION
SCALE: 3 " =1' -0"
wait
TYPICAL PARTITION
ACOUSTICAL PARTITION
PARTITION BASE
SCALE: NTS
THE PARTITION / WALL DESIGNATION IS A
THREE -UNIT CODE THAT DENOTES THE
CONFIGURATION, CONSTRUCTION, AND
INSULATION.
a
PARTITION DESIGNATION
EXISTING ROOF DECK
#10 SMS @ 12" O.C. - TYP.
DEEP -LEG SLIP CHANNEL TRACK
CONNECT STUDS TO SLOTS IN DEEP
LEG SLIP CHANNEL TRACK WITH
TYPE S PAN HEAD SCREWS AT EACH
STUD
WHEN NO GWB OCCURS USE
HORIZONTAL 3 5/8" 20 GA METAL
FRAMING, ATTACH HORIZONTAL
FRAMING TO STUDS ONLY. DO NOT
ATTACH TO TOP TRACK
GWB WHERE OCCURS, SEE
PARTITION WALL DESIGNATION
FINISH MATERIAL
BASE AS SCHEDULED, SEE
ELEVATIONS
WHERE WOOD BASE OCCURS, SEE
RAMSET SHOT PINS @ 12" O.C.
'SP' SERIES 0.150" SHANK DIAM.
WITH 1 1/4" PENETRATION - TYP.
REPORT ICC ESR -1799
20 GA. CONT. UNPUNCHED TRACK
ACOUSTIC SEALANT @
PERIMETER AND ALL
PENETRATIONS
PARTITION CONFIGURATION
PARTITION CONSTRUCTION
PARTITION MODIFICATION
FINISH MATERIAL
ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
RAMSET SHOT PINS @ 12" O.C.
'SP' SERIES 0.150" SHANK DIAM.
WITH 1 1/4" PENETRATION - TYP.
REPORT ICC ESR -1799
20 GA. CONT. UNPUNCHED TRACK
& SEALANT @ INTERFACE W/ FLOOR
BASE AS SCHEDULED, SEE
ELEVATIONS
WHERE WOOD BASE OCCURS SEE
PARTITION NOTES
SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR SPECIFIC PARTITION TYPES:
1. SEE LIFE SAFETY PLANS FOR LOCATION AND EXTENT OR LIMITS OF RATED
CONSTRUCTION.
9. ALL OTHER (NON- STRUCTURAL) PARTITIONS ARE TO BE CONSTRUCTED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS, MATERIALS
MANUFACTURER, AND INDUSTRY STANDARDS.
A. WALL MOUNTED CABINETS
B. WALL MOUNTED ACCESSORIES OR EQUIPMENT
C. WALL MOUNTED DOORSTOPS
D. WALL MOUNTED DOOR HOLD -OPEN DEVICES AND 1 OR CLOSERS
E. TOILET ROOM
F. TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
G. OTHER LOCATIONS AS REQUIRED BY ARCHITECT
AND INDUSTRY STANDARDS.
16. SEE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET FOR TYPICAL PARTITION CONSTRUCTION
INFORMATION.
AT NON RATED PARTITION
COMPRESSED MINERAL WOOL
AT RATED PARTITION
TOP OF WALL DETAIL
SCALE: NTS
EXISTING ROOF DECK
ATTACH G.W.B. TO STUDS ONLY.
DO NOT ATTACH TO TOP TRACK
GWB WHERE OCCURS, SEE
PARTITION WALL DESIGNATION
2. COORDINATE CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE RATED WALLS / PARTITIONS WITH DESIGN
NUMBER SPECIFIED AT EACH PARTITION TYPE
3. FRAME AND FINISH OPENINGS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AS
REQUIRED AND AS SPECIFIED ON MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS /
SPECIFICATIONS.
4. ACOUSTICAL PARTITIONS SHALL BE CONSIDERED ANY PARTITIONS CONTAINING
INSULATION.
5. PARTITIONS NOT OTHERWISE NOTED ON PLANS SHALL BE TYP
6. METAL STUD PARTITION BASE TO BE PER DETAI 14 A a
7. ALL FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES ARE BASED UPON UBC / ICBO., UL, US GYPSUM, AND
GYPSUM ASSOCIATION FIRE RESISTANCE DESIGN MANUAL GA- 600 -92 TEST DATA.
FIRE RATED PARTITIONS ARE TO BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE TESTING AGENCY(IES) LISTED. REFER TO SPECIFIC TEST
REPORTS FOR REQUIRED COMPONENTS AND ASSEMBLY. FOR PENETRATIONS
THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES SEE DETAIL 13/A9.01
8. ALL ACOUSTIC ASSEMBLIES ARE BASED UPON ASTM E 90 TEST PROCEDURES.
ACOUSTIC RATED PARTITIONS ARE TO BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF APPROVED TESTING AGENCY(IES). REFER TO SPECIFIC TEST
REPORTS FOR REQUIRED COMPONENTS AND ASSEMBLY.
10. METAL STUDS ARE TO BE 16" O.C., 20 GA UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. DECREASE
STUD SPACING AT PARTITIONS WITH ATTACHED CABINETS AND OR EQUIPMENT.
11. ALL GYPSUM BOARD IS TO BE 5/8 " THICK TYPE 'X' U.O.N.
12. PARTITION TYPES SHOWN ON THIS SHEET ARE NOT NECESSARILY ALL USED ON
THIS PROJECT
13. PROVIDE BRACING ABOVE CEILING AS REQUIRED TO LIMIT DEFLECTION TO
SPECIFIED ALLOWANCES.
14. SEE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR LIGHT GAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING,
GYPSUM BOARD, THERMAL INSULATION, ACOUSTIC TREATMENT, TRIM, & ACCESSORIES.
15. BLOCKING / BACKING IS REQUIRED AT THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS:
#10 SMS @ 12" O.C. - TYP.
DEEP -LEG SLIP CHANNEL TRACK
CONNECT STUDS TO SLOTS IN DEEP
LEG SLIP CHANNEL TRACK WITH
TYPES PAN HEAD SCREWS AT EACH
STUD
ATTACH G.W.B. TO STUDS ONLY.
DO NOT ATTACH TO TOP TRACK
GWB WHERE OCCURS, SEE
PARTITION WALL DESIGNATION
WHEN NO GWB OCCURS USE
HORIZONTAL 3 5/8" 20 GA METAL
FRAMING, ATTACH HORIZONTAL
FRAMING TO STUDS ONLY. DO NOT
ATTACH TO TOP TRACK
INSTALL FIRE STOP COATING AS REQUIRED TO MEET FIRE RATING
REQUIREMENT FOR PARTITION BELOW, FOR 1 AND 2 HOUR RATED
PARTITIONS USE 3M FIREDAM SPRAY APPLIED PER UL SYSTEM HW-DQ020, - - ,
AND PER MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS, EQUIVALENT UL APPROVE�°VI 't.��
PRODUCT MAY BE USED AS ALLOWED BY LOCAL JURISDICTION ; - ODE COMPLIANCE
APPROVED
AS REQUIRED FOR FIRESTOP , , > >z ' ; � .I
City Of Tukwur..
COATING
FIRESTOP CEILING/ROOF
CONSTRUCTION
#10 SMS @ 12" O.C. - TYP.
SEALANT, TYP. @ FIRE -RATED AND
ACOUSTICAL PARTITIONS
EDGE TRIM
DEEP -LEG SLIP CHANNEL TRACK
CONNECT STUDS TO SLOTS IN DEEP
LEG SLIP CHANNEL TRACK WITH
TYPES PAN HEAD SCREWS AT EACH
STUD
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKVVILA
MAR, 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
wmiez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
2646 SoumcENTE.$ MATT
SEA11 WA. 98288
MURPHY VAREYPS
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
2101 NINE" ATENOE SUITS 211
SE.irn2, W.EaviCroN 98121
T: 206 .341. 9875
F: 206.341.91P7
E: m. DluaEarVeaar.coa
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW 1
PERMIT
DATE:
11.21.07 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
02 -08 -08 FINAL MALL REVIEW / PERMIT
SHEET TITLE:
PARTITION TYPES
SHEET NUMBER:
GISTER D
HIT CT
J. MURPHY
STA OF WASHINGTON
A9.01
1�I
METAL EDGE
ATTACH WITH #6 SCREWS
1/4" TEMPERED GLASS
BEYOND
1/4" TEMPERED GLASS
BEYOND
METAL PANEL BEYOND,
12 GA
12 GA METAL PANELS
FLOOR
N\c\
A PRIMARY CASH REG. - END ELEVATION
SCALE: 314" =1' -0"
PROVIDE 3" DIAMETER HOLE
WITH BLACK GROMMET BELOW
RISER
1' DIAMETER
METAL HANG
BAR
10 GA PERFORATED
METAL PANEL IN WOOD
FRAME CABINET DOOR
0
1
PULL -OUT SLIDING SHELF
FOR ADA, MOUNT DRAWER
HARDWARE TO SHELF BELOW
N
I I
n
SCALE: 314" = 1'-0"
cO
OD
1 1/2"
z
METAL EDGE
1' -5" 1' -5"
0 0
of 1 1. 0 "-f'
2'-10"
3' -0"
COMPUTER
CABINET
N
OPEN
OREN
♦
OPEN
2 PRIMARY CASH REG. - REAR ELEVATION
SCALE: 314
1/4" TEMPERED GLASS
LUCIFER LIGHT 2000 -3000
SERIES LIGHT STRIP,
LOCATE AT FRONT EDGE
OF SIDE UNITS AND THE
BACK OF THE CENTER UNIT
PROVIDE WIREWAY
IN ALL UNITS
FLOOR
MOUNT OUTLET & TELEPHONE DATA
@ REAR OF CABINET, SEE ELECTRICAL
10 GA PERFORATED METAL PANEL IN WOOD
FRAME CABINET DOOR
SECONDARY CASH REG. - REAR ELEVATION
N
/
SID
1' - --'
7 "
3' -0"
0 O
OREN
CSI
OPEN -
METAL RISER BY CASHWRAP
MAKER, GC TO ATTACH
METAL RISER IN FIELD
/ N
/
12 GA METAL DOOR PANELS
1/4" TEMPERED GLASS
CLEAR BUMPER PAD
BELOW GLASS
OPEN
PEN
OPEN
/\
r
12 GA COLD ROLLED STEEL SHEET METALRISER,
PROVIDED BY CASEWORK MANUFACTURER,
INSTALLED BY GC IN FIELD
3/4" FIR PLYWOOD SHELVES,
FILL EDGES AND STAIN
ADJUSTABLE SHELVES
07
FLOOR
314" FIR PLYWOOD
SHELVES, FILL
EDGES AND STAIN
ADJUSTABLE SHELF
MOUNT OUTLET & TELEPHONE DATA
@ REAR OF CABINET, SEE ELECTRICAL
COMPUTER CABINET
12 GA METAL PANELS
LUCIFER LIGHT 2000 -3000
SERIES LIGHT STRIP,
LOCATE AT FRONT EDGE
OF SIDE UNITS AND THE
BACK OF THE CENTER UNIT
GLASS SHELVING
12 GA COLD ROLLED STEEL SHEET METAL RISER,
PROVIDED BY CASEWORK MANUFACTURER,
INSTALLED BY GC IN FIELD
PULL -OUT SLIDING SHELF
FOR ADA, MOUNT DRAWER
HARDWARE TO SHELF BELOW
1/4" TEMPERED GLASS ON TOP
OF ALL 3 UNITS
LUCIFER LIGHT 2000 -3000
SERIES LIGHT STRIP
RECESSED BASE, STAIN BLACK
B FRONT ELEVATION
2 "
10 0 0
0 0
SCALE: 3/4" =1' -0"
AT FRONT OF CABINET AT
COMPUTER LOCATION
CUT OUT BASE FOR
AIR CIRCULATION
SCALE: 1/2 " =1' -0"
,J 0 0
0
#10 TRUSS HEAD CONNECTOR
n_
H
�_ �eoo
H._
0000
O 0 O
0.
10 000
MEGA WALL SLAT WALL, CLEAR ON STEEL
10 GA PERFORATED METAL PANELS
KEYSTRIPS
1 1/2" DIAMETER METAL POST WITH
ESCUTCHEON PLATE AT BOTTOM
12 GA METAL PANELS
ers
114" TEMPERED GLASS AT SIDES
OF CENTER DISPLAY CASE
FLOOR
1/4" TEMPERED GLASS ON FRONT
OF CENTER DISPLAY CASE
12 GA METAL PANELS
•
•
B (18) LOCATIONS
LACKENED
1 1/2" EDGE FRAME
BLACKENED STEEL
ON TOP
ti
•
• •
N
CNJ
•
•
• •
a
PRIMARY CASH REG. - BACK ELEVATION
SCALE: 3/4" - -
BLACK MAT PLASTIC LAMINATE (PLAM - -1
COUNTERTOP WITH METAL EDGE —
2-6"
CASHWRAP - PLAN VIEW
i
J
A10.01
12' -3 3/4"
PULL -OUT SLIDING SHELF
FOR ADA ACCESS,
30" MIN LENGTH REQUIRED
I
FIELD CUT 3" X 1 1 /2" SLOT,
I
CENTER ON TAG REMOVER
NOTE: UL APPROVED ILLUMINATED CABINET.
INSTALL PER UL RATING.
r
;)b8- l3
, 2' -6"
EQUAL
4
t 102" X 11
VERIFY 3/4
CO
3"
AT FRONT OF CABINET AT
COMPUTER LOCATION
CUT OUT BASE FOR
AIR CIRCULATION
ACCESS WAY
AND SIDES
FIELD CUT OPENING FOR
OWNER FURNISHED
SENSORMATIC TAG REMOVER,
CENTER ON DRAWERS BELOW
ADA ACCESSIBLE COUNTER,
36" MIN. LENGTH
ACCESS WAY IN
MIDDLE PANEL
PROVIDE WIREWAY
IN ALL UNITS
n
PROVIDE WIREWAY 3
IN ALL UNITS
0 1 CASH REGISTER - SECTION
SCALE: 3/4" =1' -0"
12 GA METAL PANELS
ON TOP AND SIDES
HOLD SLOT TIGHT TO TOP ANGLE
MEGA WALL SLAT WALL,
CLEAR ON STEEL
MEGA WALL SLATWALL STRIPS
BEHIND @ 16" O.C. MAX
Exposed Side
FLOOR
NOTE: SLOT WALL SITS
INSIDE OF FRAME
TAB AT BOLT CONNECTIONS
12 GA METAL PANELS
SCALE: NOT TO SCALE
SCALE: NOT TO SCALE
3
11 I'
A SECONDARY CASH REG. - 3/4 VIEW
PRIMARY CASH REG. - 3/4 VIEW
12 GA COLD ROLLED STEEL
SHEET METAL RISER,
PROVIDED BY CASEWORK
MANUFACTURER,
INSTALLED BY GC IN FIELD
SLIDING PULLOUT SHELF WITH
KNAPE & VOGT 8405 BALL BEARING
SLIDES, MOUNT 2 SLIDES ON
UNDERSIDE OF SHELF (NOT SIDES),
PROVIDE SLIDE LENGTHS SO SHELF
MEETS ADA REQUIREMENTS
1 -5" MIN
REQUIRED
FOR ADA
ADA REQUIRED
CLEARANCE (DASHED)
1 1/2 "X1 1/2" X 1/8" STEEL
ANGLE BLACKENED
1/2" PLYWOOD BACKING
REVIEWED
CODE COMPL1 ?N .:E
APP OV C- 1
:
CASH REGISTER - SLAT WALL SECTION; city Of11ikwlc.
SCALE: 3" = 1'- 0 "U1LL)iNC DID k
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWII.A
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
zumez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
SPACE # 2115
633 SOUTIICENTER
SEATTLE, WA. 98188
MURPHY VAREY
DAVID I. MURPHY, AIA
21l4 \,. \ill .Il t1c;1 :11 211
S ,rrf.E. K.156I.G1Oti b8csl
'I': sct . :µl
F: 4;16. 341. QI77
F: vra llrerurV,1010 Alm
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW
PERMIT
DATE:
11.21.07 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
02 -08 -08 FINAL MALI REVIEW / PERMIT
SHEET TITLE:
ISLAND CASHWRAP
F -501 ELEVATIONS
& SECTIONS
SHEET NUMBER:
VID J. MURPHY
STATE OF WASHINGTON
A10.01
1�I
ti
LC
5 11
FLOOR
SCALE: 112" =1'- 0"
SCALE: 112" = l'- 0"
8 -2"
2' -2" ¶ I `- 21 -2"
Z-2" -or
0
0
0
0
0
0
tK
FRONT VIEW
ENLARGED SIZE
(PO ITEM F -503C)
FRONT VIEW (PO ITEM F -502)
DISPLAY BEHIND CASHWRAP
1-6
0
7
O
it tip
tit
mlobb
aNINt
0
a
`'? FRONT VIEW
STANDARD SIZE
(PO ITEM F -503B)
PILASTER DISPLAY Wi MIRROR
PARTITION
3/4" BOLTS
WI OVERSIZED
STL. WASHERS
1 1/2" THICK FIR SIDE RAIL
W/ CUSTOM EBONY FIN.
12 GA. PERFORATED
SHT. MIL.
WOOD FINISH:
WIPED OFF EBONY STAIN
W1 MATTE CLEAR FINISH
TIGHT JOINT
FLR.
1/4" SPAC
I PARTITION
m
DETAIL
DETAIL
SECTION
ATTACH DIRECTLY
TO STUDS
FLR.
PARTITION
3/4" DEEP FRENCH
CLEAT (STAINED)
6"
0
0
0
0
0 1 0
0
0
0
0
2 3/4"
it
MEM
0
0
DRESSING RM.
WALL
FLOOR
13
(PO ITEM F -518 FRO VIEW
FRONT VIEW
FLOOR SHORT SIZE
DRESSING ROOM DISPLAY FIXTURE
SCALE: 112" =1'- 0"
- 7r
0
O
it it
a
O
2 314"
SCALE: 1/2" =1'- 0"
2' -3"
0
0
O
SHORT PILASTER
(PO ITEM F -503D)
1' -6"
0
O
it
WNW
0
O
FRONT VIEW c� FRONT VIEW
ENLARGED SIZE I STANDARD SIZE
(PO ITEM F -503D) (PO ITEM F -503A) (P0 ITEM F -503)
PILASTER DISPLAY (NO MIRROR)
PARTITION
1
•
1
SECTION A
O
PARTITION
�1 • �
♦
PARTITION
1
■
10 VERTICAL
MERCHANDISE
STANDARD
SCALE: 112" =1'- 0"
PARTITION
16 GA. COLD
ROLLED CHANNEL
BLACKENED
DETAIL
DETAIL
3 I4" DEEP FRENCH
CLEAT (STAINED)
1
r
I" PLYWD.
MIRROR
■
MIRROR
2" PLYWD.
WOOD CLOSURE
DETAIL
PARTITION
14" SPACE
DETAIL
(6) #10 BLACK PANHEAD SCREWS PROVIDED
EACH
= r 11 AND INSTALLED VERTICAL ME BY GENERAL RCHANDISE CONTRACTOR STANDARD AT
�,�
/ ff 1
•
3/4" DEEP FRENCH
CLEAT (STAINED)
HORIZONTAL 12" HIGH X 20 GA SHEET
METAL BACKING @ 3 LOCATIONS
VERTICALLY
WHERE MERCHANDISE STANDARDS
ARE FREESTANDING INSTALL
FOIC VERTICAL SUPPORTS, SEE
LOCATION OF MOUNTING HOLES,
COORDINATE BACKING
FOIC VERTICAL MERCHANDISE (M -WALL) STANDARD
HIGHEST POINT OF FLOOR, PLUMB
AND LEVEL STANDARD FROM HIGHEST POINT
1) ESTABLISH HIGHEST POINT OF THE FLOOR
2) INSTALL THE FIRST STANDARD NO LOWER
THAN THIS POINT. MAKE SURE THAT
STANDARD IS PLUMB AND ATTACH TO
BACKING BEHIND WALL IN SHOWN
LOCATIONS
3) INSTALL THE ADDITIONAL STANDARDS
AT 48" ON CENTER, PARALLEL AND
LEVEL WITH THE FIRST ONE.
7) HARDWARE ATTACHMENTS
SUCH AS HANG BARS,
HANG BAR BRACKETS,
SHELVES, AND SHELF
BRACKETS ARE FURNISHED
AND INSTALLED BY THE
OWNER
SLOT PANEL FIXTURE
SEE SCHEDULE
SHEET A0.01 OFCI
10
NOT TO SCALE
SINGLE VALANCE
FIO
HANG BAR
FIO
BRACKET
MERCHANDISE SYSTEM ISOMETRIC VIEW
151
MULTIPLE VALANCE
FIO SHELF
BRACKET
FIO
HANG BAR
BRACKET
FIO
HANG BAR
REVIEWED FOR
CODE COMPLIANCE.
APPR,OV EP
R ? `
OW Tuwda
BUILDING DIVISION
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKW ILA
Ma 1 4 2008
PERMIT CENTER
zumez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
SPACE # 2115
633 So1ITTICRVTER
SEATTLE, WA. 98188
MURPHY VAREY
DAVID]. MURPHY, AIA
Yell �{. \TII ;11'FNrF 51'{7 !'!11
SF.ttFLE. K %G10� ij�1s1
1: 2e6 . :I ;1 . <,8! 1
}: 1176 . 3.0 . Qin
M1'eirirVsau,t:u]1
PROJECT NUMBER: 08596
2UMIEI STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
FINAL MALL REVIEW
PERMIT
DATE:
11.21-07 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
02-08-08 FINAL MALL REVIEW / PERMIT
SHEET TITLE:
OWNER
FURNISHED
FIXTU RES
& DETAI
SHEET NUMBER:
A10.02
1bI
DIVISION 15
15A: GENERAL
15A 1 -1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENTS UNDER DIVISION ONE AND THE
GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THESE
SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE A PART OF THIS SECTION.
CONTRACTOR SHALL BECOME THOROUGHLY
ACQUAINTED WITH ITS CONTENTS AS TO
REQUIREMENTS THAT AFFECT THIS DIVISION OR
SECTION. THE WORK REQUIRED UNDER THIS SECTION
INCLUDES MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, APPLIANCES,
TRANSPORTATION, SERVICES, AND LABOR REQUIRED TO
COMPLETE THE ENTIRE SYSTEM AS REQUIRED BY THE
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR THE
PROJECT ARE COMPLEMENTARY, AND PORTIONS OF
THE WORK DESCRIBED IN ONE, SHALL BE PROVIDED
AS IF DESCRIBED IN BOTH. IN THE EVENT OF
DISCREPANCIES, NOTIFY THE ENGINEER AND /OR
OWNER AND REQUEST CLARIFICATION PRIOR TO
PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK INVOLVED.
15A 1 -2 INSPECTION OF SITE
PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID, VISIT THE SITE OF THE
PROPOSED WORK AND BECOME FULLY INFORMED AS
TO THE CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE WORK IS TO
BE DONE. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL NOT BE
CONSIDERED SUFFICIENT JUSTIFICATION TO REQUEST
OR OBTAIN EXTRA COMPENSATION OVER AND ABOVE
THE CONTRACT PRICE.
15A 1 -3 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
PROVIDE NEW MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, AND APPARATUS
UNDER THIS CONTRACT UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
HEREIN, OF BEST QUALITY NORMALLY USED FOR THE
PURPOSE IN GOOD COMMERCIAL PRACTICE, AND FREE
FROM ANY DEFECTS. MODEL NUMBERS LISTED IN THE
SPECIFICATIONS OR SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS ARE
NOT NECESSARILY INTENDED TO DESIGNATE THE
REQUIRED TRIM, WRITTEN DESCRIPTIONS OF THE TRIM
GOVERN MODEL NUMBERS.
WORK PERFORMED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL
PROVIDE A NEAT AND "WORKMANLIKE" APPEARANCE
WHEN COMPLETED, TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE
ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. WORKMANSHIP SHALL BE
THE FINEST POSSIBLE BY EXPERIENCED MECHANICS.
INSTALLATIONS SHALL COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE
CODES AND LAWS.
THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION SHALL FUNCTION AS
DESIGNED AND INTENDED WITH RESPECT TO
EFFICIENCY, CAPACITY, NOISE LEVEL, ETC. ABNORMAL
NOISE CAUSED BY RATTLING EQUIPMENT, PIPING,
DUCTS, AIR DEVICES, AND SQUEAKS IN ROTATING
COMPONENTS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. IN GENERAL,
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE OF
COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATION GRADE IN QUALITY.
LIGHT DUTY AND RESIDENTIAL TYPE EQUIPMENT WILL
NOT BE ACCEPTED.
REMOVE FROM THE PREMISES WASTE MATERIAL
PRESENT AS A RESULT OF WORK, INCLUDING
CARTONS, CRATING, PAPER, STICKERS, AND /OR
EXCAVATION MATERIAL NOT USED IN BACKFILLING,
ETC. CLEAN EQUIPMENT INSTALLED UNDER THIS
CONTRACT TO PRESENT A NEAT AND CLEAN
INSTALLATION AT THE TERMINATION OF THE WORK.
REPAIR OR REPLACE PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY
DAMAGED AS A RESULT OF WORK PERFORMED UNDER
THIS CONTRACT TO THE SATISFACTION OF
AUTHORITIES AND REGULATIONS HAVING JURISDICTION.
15A 1 -4 COORDINATION
COORDINATE WORK WITH THAT OF OTHER TRADES SO
THAT THE VARIOUS COMPONENTS OF THE SYSTEMS
WILL BE INSTALLED AT THE PROPER TIME, WILL FIT
THE AVAILABLE SPACE, AND WILL ALLOW PROPER
SERVICE ACCESS TO THOSE ITEMS REQUIRING
MAINTENANCE. COMPONENTS WHICH ARE INSTALLED
WITHOUT REGARD TO THE ABOVE SHALL BE
RELOCATED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.
UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, THE GENERAL
CONTRACTOR WILL PROVIDE CHASES AND OPENINGS IN
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION
OF THE SYSTEMS SPECIFIED HEREIN. CONTRACTOR
SHALL FURNISH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR WITH
INFORMATION WHERE CHASES AND OPENINGS ARE
REQUIRED. KEEP INFORMED AS TO THE WORK OF
OTHER TRADES ENGAGED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF
THE PROJECT, AND EXECUTE WORK IN A MANNER AS
TO NOT INTERFERE WITH OR DELAY THE WORK OF
OTHER TRADES.
FIGURED DIMENSIONS SHALL BE TAKEN IN PREFERENCE
TO SCALE DIMENSIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE
HIS OWN MEASUREMENTS AT THE BUILDING, AS
VARIATIONS MAY OCCUR. CONTRACTOR WILL BE HELD
RESPONSIBLE FOR ERRORS THAT COULD HAVE BEEN
AVOIDED BY PROPER CHECKING AND INSPECTION.
PROVIDE MATERIALS WITH TRIM THAT WILL PROPERLY
FIT THE TYPES OF CEILING, WALL, OR FLOOR FINISHES
ACTUALLY INSTALLED. MODEL NUMBERS LISTED IN
THE SPECIFICATIONS OR SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS
ARE NOT INTENDED TO DESIGNATE THE REQUIRED
TRIM.
15A 1 -5 ORDINANCES AND CODES
WORK PERFORMED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL, AT
A MINIMUM, BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH APPLICABLE
NATIONAL, STATE AND LOCAL CODES HAVING
JURISDICTION. EQUIPMENT FURNISHED AND
ASSOCIATED INSTALLATION WORK PERFORMED UNDER
THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE IN STRICT COMPLIANCE
WITH CURRENT APPLICABLE CODES ADOPTED BY THE
LOCAL AHJ INCLUDING ANY AMENDMENTS AND
STANDARDS AS SET FORTH BY THE NATIONAL FIRE
PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA), UNDERWRITERS
LABORATORIES (UL), OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND
HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA), AMERICAN SOCIETY
OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME), AMERICAN
SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATION, AND AIR
CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE), AMERICAN
NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI), AMERICAN
SOCIETY OF TESTING MATERIALS (ASTM) AND OTHER
NATIONAL STANDARDS AND CODES WHERE
APPLICABLE. WHERE THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR REFERENCED
CODES, STANDARDS, ETC., THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE.
PROCURE AND PAY FOR PERMITS AND LICENSES
REQUIRED FOR THE ACCOMPLISHMENT OF THE WORK
HEREIN DESCRIBED. WHERE REQUIRED, OBTAIN, PAY
FOR AND FURNISH CERTIFICATES OF INSPECTION TO
OWNER. CONTRACTOR WILL BE HELD RESPONSIBLE
FOR VIOLATIONS OF THE LAW.
15A 1 -6 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
STORE AND PROTECT FROM DAMAGE EQUIPMENT AND
MATERIALS DELIVERED TO ,JOB SITE. COVER WITH
WATERPROOF, TEAR — RESISTANT, HEAVY TARP OR
POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC AS REQUIRED TO PROTECT
FROM PLASTER, DIRT, PAINT, WATER, OR PHYSICAL
DAMAGE. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL THAT HAS BEEN
DAMAGED BY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES WILL BE
REJECTED, AND CONTRACTOR IS OBLIGATED TO
FURNISH NEW EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL OF A LIKE
KIND.
KEEP PREMISES ROOM CLEAN FROM FOREIGN
MATERIAL CREATED DURING WORK PERFORMED UNDER
THIS CONTRACT. PIPING, EQUIPMENT, ETC., SHALL
HAVE A NEAT AND CLEAN APPEARANCE AT THE
TERMINATION OF THE WORK.
PLUG OR CAP OPEN ENDS OF DUCTWORK AND PIPING
SYSTEMS WHILE STORED OR INSTALLED DURING
CONSTRUCTION WHEN NOT IN USE TO PREVENT THE
ENTRANCE OF DEBRIS INTO THE SYSTEMS.
KEEP THE MANUFACTURER PROVIDED PROTECTIVE
COVERINGS ON FLOOR DRAINS, FLOOR SINKS, AND
TRENCH DRAINS DURING CONSTRUCTION. REMOVE
COVERINGS AT THE TERMINATION OF THE WORK AND
POLISH EXPOSED SURFACES.
15A 1 -7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
COLLECT AND COMPILE A COMPLETE BROCHURE OF
FIXTURES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED
AND INSTALLED ON THIS PROJECT. INCLUDE
OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS,
MANUFACTURER'S CATALOG SHEETS, WIRING DIAGRAMS.
PARTS LISTS, APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS, AND
DESCRIPTIVE LITERATURE FURNISHED BY THE
MANUFACTURER. INCLUDE AN INSIDE COVER SHEET
THAT LISTS THE PROJECT NAME, DATE, OWNER,
ARCHITECT, ENGINEER, GENERAL CONTRACTOR,
SUBCONTRACTOR, AND AN INDEX OF CONTENTS.
SUBMIT COPIES OF LITERATURE BOUND IN APPROVED
BINDERS TO THE ARCHITECT AND OWNER AT THE
TERMINATION OF THE WORK. PAPER CLIPS, STAPLES,
RUBBER BANDS, AND MAILING ENVELOPES ARE NOT
CONSIDERED APPROVED BINDERS. FINAL APPROVAL
OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS WILL BE WITHHELD UNTIL THIS
EQUIPMENT BROCHURE IS DEEMED COMPLETE BY THE
ARCHITECT, ENGINEER, AND OWNER.
15A 1 -8 WARRANTIES
WARRANT EACH SYSTEM AND EACH ELEMENT THEREOF
AGAINST ALL DEFECTS DUE TO FAULTY WORKMANSHIP,
DESIGN OR MATERIAL FOR A PERIOD OF 12 MONTHS
FROM DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, UNLESS
SPECIFIC ITEMS ARE NOTED TO CARRY A LONGER
WARRANTY IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OR
MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD WARRANTY EXCEEDS 12
MONTHS. REMEDY ALL DEFECTS, OCCURRING WITHIN
THE WARRANTY PERIOD(S), AS STATED IN THE
GENERAL CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1.
WARRANTIES SHALL INCLUDE LABOR AND MATERIAL.
MAKE REPAIRS OR REPLACEMENTS WITHOUT ANY
ADDITIONAL COSTS TO THE OWNER.
PERFORM THE REMEDIAL WORK PROMPTLY, UPON
WRITTEN NOTICE FROM THE ENGINEER OR OWNER.
AT THE TIME OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, DELIVER
TO THE OWNER ALL WARRANTIES, IN WRITING AND
PROPERLY EXECUTED, INCLUDING TERM LIMITS FOR
WARRANTIES EXTENDING BEYOND THE ONE YEAR
PERIOD, EACH WARRANTY INSTRUMENT BEING
ADDRESSED TO THE OWNER AND STATING THE
COMMENCEMENT DATE AND TERM.
15A 1 -9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
PERFORM CUTTING OF WALLS, FLOORS, CEILINGS, ETC.
AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL WORK UNDER THIS SECTION.
OBTAIN PERMISSION FROM THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO
CUTTING. DO NOT CUT OR DISTURB STRUCTURAL
MEMBERS WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE
ARCHITECT. CUT HOLES AS SMALL AS POSSIBLE.
GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH WALLS, FLOORS,
ETC. AS REQUIRED BY WORK UNDER THIS SECTION.
PATCHING SHALL MATCH THE ORIGINAL MATERIAL AND
CONSTRUCTION. REPAIR AND REFINISH AREAS
DISTURBED BY WORK TO THE CONDITION OF ADJOINING
SURFACES IN A MANNER SATISFACTORY TO THE
ARCHITECT.
15A 1 -10 ROUGH —IN
COORDINATE WITHOUT DELAY ROUGHING —IN WITH
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION. CONCEAL PIPING AND
CONDUIT ROUGH —IN EXCEPT IN UNFINISHED AREAS
AND WHERE OTHERWISE SHOWN.
15A 1 -11 STRUCTURAL STEEL
STRUCTURAL STEEL USED FOR PIPE SUPPORTS,
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, ETC., SHALL BE NEW, CLEAN,
AND CONFORM TO ASTM DESIGNATION A -36.
SUPPORT PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND
PIPING FROM THE BUILDING STRUCTURE. DO NOT
SUPPORT PLUMBING EQUIPMENT FROM CEILINGS,
OTHER MECHANICAL OR ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS,
AND OTHER NON— STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS.
15A 1 -12 ACCESS DOORS
PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS IN CEILINGS AND WALLS
WHERE INDICATED OR REQUIRED FOR ACCESS TO
CONCEALED VALVES AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLED
UNDER THIS SECTION. PROVIDE CONCEALED HINGES,
SCREWDRIVER —TYPE LOCK, ANCHOR STRAPS;
MANUFACTURED BY MILCOR, ZURN, 1ITUS, OR EQUAL.
OBTAIN ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL OF TYPE, SIZE,
LOCATION, AND COLOR BEFORE ORDERING.
15A 1 -13 PENETRATIONS
SEAL FLOOR, EXTERIOR WALL AND ROOF
PENETRATIONS WATER AND WEATHER TIGHT WITH
APPROPRIATE NON — SHRINK, NON— HARDENING
COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION SEALANT. SEAL ROOF
PENETRATIONS WITH 4 POUND PER SQUARE FOOT
LEAD FLASHING. PROVIDE A SLEEVE, AND SEAL
NON— FIRE —RATED FLOOR AND WALL PENETRATIONS
WITH FIBERGLASS PACKING AND SILICONE CAULK (FOR
ACOUSTICAL INSULATION).
COORDINATED FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS AND
LOCATIONS WITH THE ARCHITECT. SEAL
PENETRATIONS OF FIRE —RATED ASSEMBLIES WITH 3M
# CP -25 FIRE BARRIER CAULK (PROVIDE THICKNESS
AND METHOD AS REQUIRED AND RECOMMENDED BY
MANUFACTURER) TO MAINTAIN THE FIRE RESISTANCE
RATING OF FIRE —RATED ASSEMBLIES.
SEAL EXTERIOR WALL PENETRATIONS BELOW GRADE
WITH CAST IRON WALL PIPES AND MODULAR
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS, MANUFACTURED BY
THUNDERLINE /LINK SEAL, CALPICO, INC AND
METRAFLEX.
PROVIDE SLEEVES FOR HORIZONTAL PIPE PASSING
THROUGH OR UNDER FOUNDATION. SLEEVES SHALL
BE CAST IRON SOIL PIPE TWO NOMINAL PIPE SIZES
LARGER THAN THE PIPE SERVED.
PROVIDE SLEEVES FOR VERTICAL PIPE PASSING
THROUGH SLAB ON GRADE. SLEEVES SHALL BE
SCHEDULE 40 PVC PIPE, TWO NOMINAL PIPE SIZES
LARGER THAN THE PIPE SERVED. SEAL WATER —TIGHT
WITH SILICONE CAULK.
15B: HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING
15B 1 -1 DUCTWORK
ALL DUCTWORK SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH ASHRAE AND SMACNA STANDARDS
CORRESPONDING TO THE SYSTEM PRESSURE.
DUCTWORK SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE STANDARDS FOR A TWO —INCH PRESSURE
RATING AND SEAL CLASS B.
SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK INSIDE THE BUILDING
SHALL BE INSULATED WITH 1" THICK ACOUSTICAL
LINING WITH A MINIMUM R —VALUE OF 5 OR
EXTERNALLY WRAPPED WITH 2" THICK GLASS FIBER
DUCT WRAP. INSULATE SUPPLY AND RETURN
DUCTWORK LOCATED OUTSIDE THE BUILDING WITH 2"
LINER AND SEAL SEAMS WEATHER TIGHT. DEDICATED
OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY DUCTWORK LOCATED WITHIN THE
BUILDING SHALL BE INSULATED WITH 2" DUCT WRAP.
EXPOSED DUCTWORK IN SALES AREA SHALL NOT HAVE
ANY INSULATION.
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK MAINS ARE NOT PERMITTED.
PROVIDE MAXIMUM 5' -0" FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
TO CEILING DIFFUSERS.
FURNISH AND INSTALL VOLUME /BALANCE DAMPERS AT
ALL BRANCH DUCTS TO DIFFUSERS. LOCATE
DAMPERS A MINIMUM OF 4' -0" AWAY FROM
DIFFUSERS.
INSTALL VTR'S, EXHAUST FANS, AND FLUES A
MINIMUM OF 5' —O" FROM PARAPET OR OUTSIDE WALL
AND 1O' -0" MINIMUM FROM EQUIPMENT WITH OUTSIDE
AIR INTAKE.
15B 1 -2 ELECTRICAL WIRING
LINE VOLTAGE WIRING SHALL BE FURNISHED BY
DIVISION 16. LINE VOLTAGE CONTROL AND INTERLOCK
WIRING FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SHALL ALSO BE
FURNISHED BY DIVISION 16 CONTRACTOR. LOW
VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE BY THE DIVISION
15 CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE WIRING DIAGRAMS TO THE
DIVISION 16 CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED FOR PROPER
EQUIPMENT HOOKUP. COORDINATE WITH THE DIVISION
16 CONTRACTOR THE ACTUAL WIRE SIZING AMPS FOR
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT (FROM THE EQUIPMENT
NAMEPLATE) TO ENSURE PROPER INSTALLATION.
ALL TEMPERATURE SENSORS, FAN SWITCHES, AND
SPEED CONTROLS SHALL BE INSTALLED 43" ABOVE
THE FLOOR FOR ADA REQUIREMENTS.
15B 1 -3 FINAL TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS
AIR BALANCE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN
INDEPENDENT AIR BALANCE CONTRACTOR. BALANCE
EACH SUPPLY, RETURN, OUTSIDE AIR DEVICE WITHIN
5% OF REQUIREMENTS AND FURNISH A REPORT TO
THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. THE ENTIRE HVAC
SYSTEM MUST BE FULLY OPERABLE, BALANCED, AND
APPROVED BY OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON THE DAY
TENANT OPENS FOR BUSINESS.
ADJUST THERMOSTATS AND CONTROL DEVICES TO
OPERATE AS INTENDED. ADJUST BURNERS, PUMPS,
FANS, ETC. FOR PROPER AND EFFICIENT OPERATION.
CERTIFY TO ARCHITECT THAT ADJUSTMENTS HAVE
BEEN MADE AND THAT SYSTEM IS OPERATING
SATISFACTORILY. CALIBRATE, SET AND ADJUST
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS. CHECK PROPER
SEQUENCING OF INTERLOCK SYSTEMS, AND OPERATION
OF SAFETY CONTROLS.
15C: PLUMBING
15C 1 -1 PIPING MATERIALS
MATERIALS SPECIFIED OR NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS
ARE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF LOCAL CODE
AUTHORITIES. VERIFY APPROVAL BEFORE INSTALLING
ANY MATERIAL OR JOINING METHOD.
DOMESTIC WATER (COLD, HOT, SOFT): DOMESTIC
WATER PIPING INSTALLED ABOVE THE FLOOR SLAB
INSIDE THE BUILDING SHALL BE TYPE "L" HARD
TEMPER COPPER TUBE WITH WROUGHT COPPER.
FITTINGS AND SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE UP WITH
95/5 SOLDER. BRAZED MECHANICALLY FORMED TEE
CONNECTIONS (T— DRILL) MAY BE USED IN COPPER
LINES WHERE APPROVED BY CODE; CONNECTION
SHALL BE MADE WITH BRAZED SILVER SOLDER
( SILFOS) JOINTS IN CONFORMANCE WITH
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.
UNDERGROUND DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SHALL BE
TYPE "K" SOFT TEMPER COPPER TUBING WITH FLARED
COPPER ALLOY FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS, OR TYPE
"K" HARD TEMPER COPPER TUBING WITH
CONVENTIONAL WROUGHT COPPER FITTINGS AND
SILVER SOLDER (SILFOS) JOINTS. INSTALL AS FEW
UNDERGROUND COPPER PIPING JOINTS AS POSSIBLE.
AT BUILDING SERVICE ENTRANCE, NO JOINTS SHALL
BE INSTALLED UNDER OR WITHIN 5 FEET OF THE
BUILDING, INSTALL DOMESTIC WATER PIPING BELOW
GRADE OUTSIDE BUILDING AT ADEQUATE DEPTH TO
PREVENT FREEZING.
INTERIOR WASTE AND VENT BELOW SLAB: WASTE AND
VENT PIPE BELOW SLAB INSIDE BUILDING SHALL BE
STANDARD WEIGHT CAST IRON SOIL PIPE WITH HUB
AND SPIGOT FITTINGS WITH NEOPRENE GASKET JOINTS.
HUB LESS WASTE AND VENT PIPE IS NOT PERMITTED
BELOW BASE SLAB. PVC DWV PIPE WITH SOCKET
FITTINGS AND SOLVENT WELD JOINTS IS ALSO
PERMITTED WHERE APPROVED BY CODE.
INTERIOR WASTE AND VENT ABOVE SLAB: WASTE AND
VENT PIPE ABOVE SLAB INSIDE BUILDING SHALL BE
HUB LESS CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS WITH
HUB LESS COUPLINGS. PVC DWV PIPE WITH SOCKET
FITTINGS AND SOLVENT WELD JOINTS IS ALSO
PERMITTED WHERE APPROVED BY CODE.
INTERIOR STORM DRAIN: INSIDE BUILDING SHALL BE
SAME AS SPECIFIED FOR INTERIOR WASTE AND VENT
PIPE.
INDIRECT AND CONDENSATE DRAIN INSIDE BUILDING:
INDIRECT AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE INSTALLED
INSIDE THE BUILDING SHALL BE TYPE "M" HARD
COPPER WITH WROUGHT COPPER FITTINGS FOR 1" AND
SMALLER AND "DWV" COPPER WITH WROUGHT COPPER
DRAINAGE PATTERN FITTINGS FOR 1 -1/4 " AND
LARGER HARD TEMPER COPPER TUBE AND SOLDERED
CONNECTIONS MADE WITH 95/5 SOLDER. INSTALL
CLEANOUTS AT ELBOWS GREATER THAN 45 DEGREES.
GAS PIPING: GAS PIPING SHALL BE BLACK STEEL,
STANDARD WEIGHT, SCHEDULE 40 ASTM A53. PIPING
2" AND SMALL SHALL BE WELDED OR THREADED WITH
MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS. PIPING 2 1/2" AND
LARGER SHALL BE WELDED WITH BUTT — WELDED
FITTING. FITTINGS SHALL CONFORM TO ASME B16.3,
MALLEABLE IRON OR ASTM A 234, FORGED STEEL
WELDED TYPE.
15C 1 -2 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
DOMESTIC COLD WATER, HOT WATER, INDIRECT AND
CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE (WITHIN BUILDING): 1"
ONE —PIECE FIBERGLASS COVERING WITH
FIRE— RESISTANT JACKET WITH SELF — SEALING LAP TO
PROVIDE A CONTINUOUS VAPOR BARRIER BY
CERTAINTEED, OWENS— CORNING OR ARMSTRONG. FOR
PIPING AT HANGERS PROVIDE 8" LONG SECTIONS OF
HIGH DENSITY, HIGH TEMPERATURE CALCIUM SILICATE
BY JOHNS— MANVILLE, FIBERGLASS BY KNAUF, OR 8"
LONG STYROFOAM BILLETS BY DOW. INSULATION
SHALL BE CONTINUOUS ALONG THE PIPE SURFACE,
EXCEPT AT VALVES, UNIONS, AND WHERE PIPING 15
EXPOSED AT FIXTURES.
FOR HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING INSTALLED INSIDE
MASONRY UNITS OF WALLS, PROVIDE W" FLEXIBLE
UNICELLULAR INSULATION BY ARMACELL.
COVER FITTINGS WITH ZESTON, KNAUF, OR EQUAL
ONE—PIECE PVC PREMOLDED INSULATING COVERS.
FITTING COVERS, JACKETS AND ADHESIVES SHALL NOT
EXCEED FLAME SPREAD RATING OF 25 AND SMOKE
DEVELOPMENT RATING OF 50 PER ASTM E84. AT ALL
ELBOWS AND TEES, FILL VOIDS BETWEEN COVERS AND
PIPING WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION AND TAPE
JOINTS. INSTALL PIPE INSULATION IN COMPLIANCE
WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. WHERE
PREMOLDED INSULATING FITTINGS ARE NOT APPROVED
BY LOCAL AUTHORITIES, MITER INSULATION AT
FITTINGS.
15C 1 -3 PIPING INSTALLATION
GENERAL: CLEAN PIPE THOROUGHLY PRIOR TO
INSTALLATION. REAM ENDS OF PIPE TO REMOVE
BURRS. CUT PIPE ACCURATELY TO MEASUREMENTS
TAKEN ON THE JOB. INSTALL WITH ADEQUATE
CLEARANCE FOR INSTALLATION OF COVERINGS WHERE
REQUIRED. PIPE SHALL NOT BE SPRUNG OR BENT.
NEATLY ALIGN PIPE, CONNECT IT SECURELY, AND
SUPPORT IT FROM THE BUILDING STRUCTURE WITH
HANGERS AS SPECIFIED BELOW. PROVIDE
CHROME— PLATED ESCUTCHEONS ON PIPES PASSING
THROUGH CEILINGS, FLOORS OR WALLS OF FINISHED
SPACES. RUN PIPES FREELY THROUGH FLOOR AND
WALL PENETRATIONS USING PIPE SLEEVES. DO NOT
GROUT IN PLACE UNLESS REQUIRED FOR STRUCTURAL
FIRE INTEGRITY. INSTALL PIPE CONCEALED IN
FINISHED SPACES WHEREVER POSSIBLE. USE A
DIELECTRIC UNION WHERE FERROUS AND COPPER PIPE
CONNECT. DIELECTRIC UNION SHALL HAVE A ZINC
STEEL BODY, A THREADED NYLON INSERT, AND
INSULATING PRESSURE GASKET. NO FERROUS
METAL —TO— COPPER CONNECTION MADE WITHOUT
INSULATING UNIONS WILL BE ALLOWED.
HANGER & SUPPORTS: PIPE HANGERS SHALL BE AS
DESCRIBED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS BY B —LINE OR
EQUAL BY ANVIL, MICHIGAN, TRUSCON, OR UNISTRUT.
CONNECT HANGERS TO THE STRUCTURE WITH SIDE
BEAM CONNECTORS AND ALL THREAD HANGER RODS.
PROVIDE ENGINEERED SUPPORT STRUTS BETWEEN
JOISTS AND OTHER STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AS
REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A RIGID HANGING INSTALLATION.
DO NOT HANG PIPES FROM OTHER PIPES, CONDUIT OR
DUCTWORK. PROVIDE HANGER RODS AND SPACE
HANGERS AT INTERVALS AS REQUIRED.
SOIL, WASTE AND STORM: GRADE SOIL AND WASTE
PIPING TO A UNIFORM SLOPE OF NOT LESS THAN
1/8" PER FOOT FOR PIPING 4" OR LARGER, AND NOT
LESS THAN 1 /" PER FOOT FOR PIPING 3" OR SMALLER.
SLOPE STORM PIPING AT 1/8" PER FOOT. LAY PIPE
AT UNIFORM SLOPE, FREE FROM SAGS, WITH HUB END
UPSTREAM. SUPPORT PIPE AT EACH JOINT. MAKE
CHANGES IN DIRECTION FROM HORIZONTAL TO
VERTICAL, AT FIXTURE BRANCHES AND OTHER BRANCH
CONNECTIONS WITH SANITARY "TEES" OR SHORT
SWEEP "ELLS ". MAKE CHANGES IN DIRECTION FROM
VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL OR IN THE HORIZONTAL
WITH LONG RADIUS FITTINGS, LONG SWEEPING "ELLS ",
COMBINATION "Y" FITTINGS, OR 45 DEGREE "ELLS"
(1/8 BEND FITTINGS) AND "Y" FITTINGS.
DOMESTIC WATER: ARRANGE COLD, HOT AND HOT
WATER RECIRCULATION PIPING TO DRAIN AT THE
LOWEST POINT IN EACH SYSTEM. INSTALL AT LEAST
ONE PIPE UNION ADJACENT TO ALL SHUTOFF VALVES,
AT CONNECTION POINT OF EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT,
AND ELSEWHERE IN THE SYSTEM WHERE REQUIRED TO
ALLOW PROPER MAINTENANCE. PROVIDE UNIONS OF
THE GROUND JOINT TYPE. MAKE ALLOWANCE FOR
EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION WHERE REQUIRED BY
THE INSTALLATION. WHERE WATER PIPING OCCURS IN
EXTERIOR WALLS, HOLD PIPE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE
TO THE INTERIOR FACE OF WALL AND INSTALL
INSULATION BATT OR OTHER INSULATION (MINIMUM R8)
BETWEEN PIPING AND THE EXTERIOR WALL FACE.
15C 1 -4 EXTERIOR UTILITY CONNECTIONS
TERMINATE DOMESTIC WATER, STORM, AND SEWER
LINES AT A POINT APPROXIMATELY FIVE FEET FROM
THE BUILDING WALL, OR AS SHOWN ON THE
DRAWINGS. MAKE CONNECTION TO THE VARIOUS
SERVICES PROVIDED BY OTHERS AND COORDINATE
CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS WITH CIVIL ENGINEER.
VERIFY THAT INSTALLATION WILL TIE INTO THE
VARIOUS SERVICED PROVIDED BY OTHERS AT THE
INDICATED INVERT ELEVATION POINT PRIOR TO
INSTALLATION. IF THE INSTALLATION WILL NOT TIE
INTO THE INDICATED INVERT ELEVATION POINT WHILE
MAINTAINING PROPER FALL, NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND
CIVIL ENGINEER SO THAT AN ALTERNATIVE MAY BE
DETERMINED.
PROVIDE SERVICE PIPING AND ACCESSORIES REQUIRED
TO COMPLETE UTILITY CONNECTIONS THAT ARE NOT
FURNISHED BY THE SERVING UTILITY.
15C 1 -5 SYSTEM TESTING AND ADJUSTING
UPON COMPLETION OF EACH PHASE OF THE
INSTALLATION, TEST EACH SYSTEM IN CONFORMANCE
WITH LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS AND AS NOTED
BELOW. FURNISH LABOR AND EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
TO TEST PLUMBING WORK INSTALLED UNDER THIS
CONTRACT, AND ASSUME COSTS INVOLVED IN MAKING
THE TESTS, AND REPAIRING AND /OR REPLACING
DAMAGE RESULTING THEREFROM.
NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND THE AUTHORITY HAVING
JURISDICTION, THREE (3) WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO
MAKING PLUMBING SYSTEM TESTS. LEAVE CONCEALED
WORK UNCOVERED UNTIL THE REQUIRED TESTS HAVE
BEEN COMPLETED, BUT IF NECESSARY DUE TO
CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE, TESTS ON PORTIONS OF
THE WORK MAY BE MADE, AND WHEN SATISFACTORY,
THE WORK MAY BE CONCEALED. TEST PIPING BEFORE
INSULATION IS INSTALLED, AND BEFORE BACKFILL.
PIPES, JOINTS, FLANGES, VALVE STEMS, ETC., SHALL
BE LEAK TIGHT. REPAIR OR REPLACE SYSTEM
DEFECTS WITH NEW MATERIALS. CAULKING OF
DEFECTIVE JOINTS, CRACKS OR HOLES WILL NOT BE
PERMITTED. REPEAT TESTS AFTER DEFECTS HAVE
BEEN ELIMITATED. MAKE TESTS IN THE PRESENCE OF
THE ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITY AND /OR THE
OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE.
15C 1 -6 GUARANTEE
THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED UNDER THIS CONTRACT
SHALL INCLUDE THE FURNISHING, INSTALLATION, AND
CONNECTION OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS INDICATED ON
THE DRAWINGS AND IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. BY
SIGNING THE CONTRACT, THE CONTRACTOR
ACKNOWLEDGES THAT HE HAS ACQUAINTED HIMSELF
WITH THE SITE AND THE EXISTING CONDITIONS UNDER
WHICH THE WORK IS TO BE PERFORMED, AND THE
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS PERTAINING THERETO,
AND HE INDICATES THAT HE WILL COMPLY WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS AND INTENT OF PERTINENT DOCUMENTS
IN THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK.
GUARANTEE THAT THE PLUMBING INSTALLED UNDER
THIS CONTRACT IS FREE OF DEFECTS IN
WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS FOR A PERIOD OF ONE
(1) YEAR FROM THE DATE OF JOB ACCEPTANCE BY
THE OWNER. THIS SHALL INCLUDE A GUARANTEE OF
FREE CIRCULATION OF LIQUIDS THROUGHOUT THE
SYSTEM AS INTENDED WITHOUT LEAKS, EXCESSIVE
NOISE, OR WATER HAMMER.
IF DEFECTS OCCUR DURING THE ONE YEAR
GUARANTEE PERIOD, REPAIR OR REPLACE SUCH
DEFECTS AT NO EXPENSE TO THE OWNER, AND TO
THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER, ARCHITECT AND
ENGINEER.
ctl
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 ZOU8
PERMIT CENTER
zumuez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
SPACE # 2115
633 Soumcarrm
SEATTLE, WA 98188
MURPHY VAREYPs
DAVID J. MU RPHY, AIA
21o1 N st Awn Sum an
92un;, VAIIHNCTOW 98121
T: ao6 . ,341.
Fa 206 .54 1 . grn
E :..r. MmintrY.ur.cou
Harrison French and
Associates
809 S.W. "A" Street
Bentonville, AR 72712
(479) 273 -7780
fax (479) 273 -9436
DATE:
PROJECT NUMBER: 05 - 08
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
PRELIMINARY MALL
REVIEW
02 - - PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
SHEET TITLE:
r EXPIRES: 02/23/10 1
3/ (°14
MECHANICAL
SPECS
SHEET NUMBER:
MP1
HVAC SYSTEM LOAD SUMMARY
MARK
TENANT NAME: Zumiez SPACE #
2115
SQ. FT_:
3193
EF -1
NUTONE
QT100LM
DESIGN CONDTIONS:
SUMMER: 79°F D.B. & 64°F W.B. (Outside), 75 "F (Inside)
WINTER: 26T D.B. (Outside), 707 (Inside)
0.375
100
120/1/60
GENERAL INFORMATION (ALL UNITS):
1. FAN OPERATION CONTROLLED VIA MOTION SENSOR.
2. CONTRACTOR SHALL CHOOSE A SCHEDULED UNIT OR A COMPARABLE
UNIT OF A DIFFERENT MANUFACTURER.
LOAD CALCULATIONS: (below ceiling) COOLING (BTUH)
Sensible: Latent:
WALL: 0 0
Total:
0
HEATING
(BTUH)
0
GLASS: 0 0
0
0
ROOF: 0 0
0
0
PEOPLE: 19814 16018
35832
0
VENTILATION: 0 0
0
0
LIGHTS: 26905 0
26905
0
MISCELLANEOUS: 1706 0
1706
0
Total: 48425 16018
64443
0
EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE
MARK
MANUFACTURER /
MODEL
INPUT WATTS
SONES
ESP
CFM
V /PH /HZ
EF -1
NUTONE
QT100LM
38
3.5
0.375
100
120/1/60
GENERAL INFORMATION (ALL UNITS):
1. FAN OPERATION CONTROLLED VIA MOTION SENSOR.
2. CONTRACTOR SHALL CHOOSE A SCHEDULED UNIT OR A COMPARABLE
UNIT OF A DIFFERENT MANUFACTURER.
BRANCH DUCT FITTING
NTS
CD1
6"
100
EF1 100 CFM, MOUNT ABOVE f
CEILING. CONNECT 6" TO
EXISTING DUCTWORK
SPIN —IN FITTINGS
W /SCOOPS ARE
NOT ACCEPTABLE
45° LEAD IN
6"�
1/4" = 1'--0"
CONNECT TO EXISTING
LANDLORD SUPPLY
DUCT. FIELD VERIFY
= XACT OCATION
8 "0
6 "o
08.13.01
6 "o
HVAC PLAN
MARK
CD1
SAW
TG
14 "4
CD1
6"
100
GENERAL INFORMATION (ALL DEVICES):
1. CONTRACTOR MUST SELECT SCHEDULED MATERIALS OR APPROVED EQUAL.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ARE TITUS, CARNES, METAL —AIR, AND J & J.
NOTES:
1. ALL STEEL CONSTRUCTION.
2. ALL ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION.
3. BRANCH DUCT SIZE SHALL BE SAME AS NOTED DIFFUSER NECK SIZE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
4. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR DIFFUSER COLOR.
5. PROVIDE NECK FOR DUCT CONNECTION.
6. OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER IN NECK
7. SUPPORT REGISTER INDEPENDENT OF DUCTWORK.
SERVICE
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
TRANSFER
REF PLANS FOR
RUNOUT SIZES
(15.100)
VAV1
200
24/24
TG
MOUNT AS
HIGH AS
POSSIBLE
MOUNT AS
HIGH AS
POSSIBLE
MANUFACTURER/
MODEL
TITUS / TMSA
TITUS / 300RS
TITUS / 50F
H -5
AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE
STYLE
CEILING DIFFUSER
DUCT MOUNTED
WALL REGISTER
BRANCH DUCT
PIVOT BUSHING
INSULATION STAND
OFF BRACKET
200
MANUAL DAMPER
NTS
FRAME
TYPE
SURFACE
SURFACE
SURFACE
FACE
SIZE
12 X 12
REF DWGS
REF DWGS
05.17.04
200
NOTES
2, 3, 6, 7
1, 4, 5, 6
2
H -6
MARK
VAV -1
ACCESSORIES:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
DOUBLE WALL INSULATION— DENSITY.
24 VAC CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER.
POWER FUSE.
FACTORY DISCONNECT SWITCH.
DUCT SENSOR.
FACTORY ACTUATOR.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FLOW TRANSDUCER..
NOTES:
1. CONTRACTOR SHALL CHOOSE A SCHEDULED UNIT OR A COMPARABLE UNIT OF A
DIFFERENT MANUFACTURER.
PIVOT BUSHING
18 GA. DAMPER
LOCKING QUADRANT
LEVER HANDLE
MANUFACTURER/
MODEL
TRANE /VCEF
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME UNIT
DAMPER SIZE
14" ROUND
lVl
COOLING
CFM
2600
MINIMUM
CFM
850
HEATING
CFM KW
1600 15
ELEC. ACCESS.
V /PH & NOTES
480/3 A —G, 1
REMOVE ALL EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED
DUCTWORK, AIR DEVICES AND CONTROLS NOT BEING
REUSED PER PLANS. CAP OFF AND REMOVE ALL
DWV AND WATER PIPING NOT BEING REUSED.
COORDINATE ALL DEMOLITION WITH LANDLORD.
MECHANICAL SYMBOLS
x
7
CD
12"
450
DEMOLITION NOTES
&H1 THERMOSTAT
TILT
SAW
225
6
KEYED NOTES
15.100 NEW THERMOSTAT PER MALL REQUIREMENTS.
COORDINATE LOCATION WITH TENANT AND CONTROLS
WITH MALL BUILDING AUTOMATED SYSTEM. MOUNT
46" A.F.F.
1.111
- ��
ui. •111
_R
— WM
1111
J :U :I*
FJOINIMMI
RECTANGULAR DUCT 18" WIDE BY 12"
DEEP
12" DIAMETER ROUND DUCT
SUPPLY DUCT IN SECTION
RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT IN SECTION
ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES
ROUND (OR OVAL) ELBOW
SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER WITH ROUND
SUPPLY DUCT
RETURN OR EXHAUST AIR DIFFUSER WITH
ROUND DUCT
DIFFUSER OR GRILLE TYPE
BRANCH DUCT & NECK SIZE
CFM
131
HVAC NOTES
1. EACH CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING
THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND
SPECIFICATIONS AS THEY RELATE TO THIS WORK.
NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION SHALL BE
ALLOWED DUE TO LACK OF THIS KNOWLEDGE.
2. PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS FOR A COMPLETE
INSTALLATION IN ALL RESPECTS READY FOR
INTENDED USE AND IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH
STATE AND LOCAL CODES AND MANUFACTURER'S
RECOMMENDATIONS.
3. SPRINKLER HEAD AND LIGHTING FIXTURE
LOCATIONS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER DIFFUSER
LOCATIONS. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR AND FIRE PROTECTION
CONTRACTOR.
4. DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION AND INSTALLATION TO
ADHERE TO GOVERNING CODES.
5. DUCT SIZES INDICATED ARE INSIDE CLEAR
DIMENSIONS. IF DUCT LINING IS REQUIRED,
INCREASE DUCT SIZE TO MAINTAIN ORIGINAL
INSIDE DIMENSIONS.
6. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK MAINS ARE NOT PERMITTED.
PROVIDE MAXIMUM 5' -0" FLEXIBLE DUCT
CONNECTIONS TO CEILING DIFFUSERS.
7. TYPICAL BRANCH FITTING DETAILS ARE
APPLICABLE THROUGHOUT.
8. FURNISH AND INSTALL VOLUME /BALANCE
DAMPERS AT ALL BRANCH DUCTS TO DIFFUSERS.
LOCATE DAMPERS A MINIMUM 4' —O" AWAY FROM
DIFFUSERS. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS AS
REQUIRED.
9. PROVIDE FIRE SEAL WHERE PIPING AND
DUCTWORK PENETRATE FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY.
10. PROVIDE SEISMIC BRACING BASED ON
APPROPRIATE SEISMIC ZONE REQUIREMENTS PER
SMACNA PUBLISHED SEISMIC DETAILS, LOCAL
AND NATIONAL CODES. CONTRACTOR'S
RESPONSIBILITY INCLUDES STRUCTURAL
ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION ON DETAILS
SUBMITTED FOR PERMITTING.
11. INSTALL VTR'S, EXHAUST FANS, AND FLUES A
MINIMUM 5' -0" FROM PARAPET OR OUTSIDE
WALL AND 10' -0" MINIMUM FROM EQUIPMENT
WITH OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE.
12. ALL TEMPERATURE SENSORS, FAN SWITCHES,
AND SPEED CONTROLS SHALL BE MOUNTED 43
INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR FOR ADA
ACCESSIBILITY.
13. PROVIDE A COMPLETE TEST AND BALANCE FOR
HVAC SYSTEM. TEST TO BE PERFORMED BY
MALL APPROVED TEST AND BALANCE COMPANY.
AIR BALANCE SHALL BE WITHIN 10% OF
SCHEDULED AIRFLOWS.
14. PROVIDE SHEET METAL COLLAR WHERE
DUCTWORK PENETRATES DEMISING WALL.
15.ALL DUCTWORK TO BE GALVANIZED SPIRAL
DUCTWORK. USE SILICONE DUCT SEALANT IN
LIEU OF VISIBLE HARDCOAT SEALANT.
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
wmiez
SOUTHCENTER MAIL
SPACE # 2115
633 Sourraciormi.
SEATTLE, WA 98188
MURPHY VAREYPs
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
um No= Am= Boas an
Bean:, V►esmo t 98w
T: eo6 . $4[ . g675
F: sob .341. 9TH
E: yvv. Munneirsztr.con
Harrison French and
Associates
809 S.W. "A" Street
Bentonville, AR 72712
(479) 273 -7780
fax (479) 273 -9436
PROJECT NUMBER: 05.05-02008
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
PRELIMINARY MALL
REVIEW
DATE:
02 -08-08 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
SHEET TITLE:
HVAC PLAN
SHEET NUMBER:
M1
Project Info
EF
CAE
< 50 gal storage
0.56
0.71
50 to 70 gal storage
0.57
0.71
> 70 gal storage
0.55
0.70
Project Info
Project Address
•
• •
Date 3/10/2008
•
For Building Dept Use
Applicant Name.
.
, • •
• •
• . •
• • •
- • .
Applicant Address:
•
- • -
-
.,,.,,.
..... ... ........... .. .....
Applicant Rhone:
MECH -CHK Mechanical Permit Plans Checklisil
Project Address
1 Date
3/10/2008
The follow ing information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for compliance w ith the mechanical requirements in the
Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code.
Applicability Code
(yes, no, n.a.) Section
Component
Information Required
Location
on Flans
Building Department
Notes
HVAC REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1401 -1424)
1411 Equipment performance
n.a.
1411.1
Mnimum efficiency
Equipment schedule with type, capacity, efficiency
n.a.
1411.4 Flog. elec. htg.& clg.
List heat pumps on schedule
n.a.
1411,1 Combustion htg.
Indicate intermittent ignition, flue /draft damper & jacket loss
1412 I-IVAC controls
n. a.
1413.1 Wtr Econo Operation
Indicate 100% capacity at 45 degF db & 40 deg F w b
n.a.
1412.4.2
Optimum Start
Indicate optimum start controls
yes
1412.1 Temperature zones
Indicate locations on plans
yes
1412.2 Deadband control
Indicate 5 degree deadband minimum
n.a.
1412.3 Humidity control
Indicate hunidistat
yes
1412.4 Automatic setback
Indicate thermostat w it night setback and 7 Jiff. day types
yes
1412.4.1 Dampers
Indicate damper location and auto, controls & max. leakage
n.a.
1412.5 Heat pump control
Indicate microprocessor on thermostat schedule
n.a.
1412.6 Combustion htg.
indicate modulating or staged control
yes
1412.7 Balancing
Indicate balancing features on plans
yes
1422 Thermostat interlock
Indicate thermostat interlock on plans
n.a.
1423 Economizers
Equipment schedule
1413 Air economizers
n.a.
1413.2
Water Econo Doc
Indicate clg load & w ater econoe & clg tow er performance
n. a.
1413.1 Air Econo Operation
Indicate 100% capability on schedule
n, a.
1413.3 Integrated operation
Indicate capability for partial cooling
n.a.
1413.4 Humidification
Indicate direct evap or fog atomization w/ air economizer
1414 [Ducting systems
yes
1414.1
1414.2
Yes
yes
Yes
1415,1 Rping insulation
1416
Yes
1416.1&2
1416,3.2
n.a.
1416.3.3
1416.4
1424
1440
n.a.
1
1452
n.a.
1441
n.a.
1442
n.a.
1443
n.a.
1452
n.a.
1453
n.a.
1454
n.a.
1454
Duct sealing
Indicate sealing necessary
Duct insulation
Indicate R value of insulation on duct
Completion Requirements
Draw ings & Manuals
Air Balancing
Hydronic Balancing
Commissioning
Separate air sys,
M echanical
Sum mary Form
Sec. w ater heater
Shut -off controls
Rpe Insulation
Heat Ramo COP
Heater Efficiency
Pool heater controls
Pool covers
Pools 90+ degrees
Indicate R -value of insulation on piping
If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation:
Indicate requirement for record draw ings and operation dots.
Indicate air system balance requirements
Y eq
Indicate hydronic system balance requirements
Indicate requirements for commissioning and prelim. Report
Indicate separate systems on plans
Completed and attached. Equipment schedule w ith types,
input/output, efficiency, cfm, hp, economizer
Indicate R-10 insulation under tank
Indicate automatic shut -off
Indicate R-value of insulation on piping
Indicate minimum COP of 4.0
Indicate pool heater efficiency
Indicate sw itch and 65 degree control
indicate vapor retardant cover
Indicate R-12 pool cover
SERVICE WATER HEATING AND HEATED POOLS (Sections 14404454)
Service water htg.
Mechanical - General Requirements
1411.1 General: Equipment shall have a minimum performance at the
specified rating conditions not less than the values shown in Table 14 -1A
through 14-1G. If a nationally recognized certification program exists for a
product covered in Tables 14 -1A through 14 -1 G, and it includes provisions
for verification and challenge of equipment efficiency ratings, then the
product shall be listed in the certification program.
Gas -fired and oil -fired forced air furnaces with input ratings > 225,000
Btu/h (65 kW) shall also have an intermittent ignition or interrupted device
(I10), and have either mechanical draft (including power venting) or a flue
damper. A vent damper is an acceptable alternative to a flue damper for
furnaces where combustion air is drawn from the conditioned space. All
furnaces with input ratings ? 225,000 Btu/h (65 kW), including electric
furnaces, that are not located within the conditioned space shall have
jacket losses not exceeding 0.75% of the input rating.
1411.2 Rating Conditions: Cooling equipment shall be rated atARI test
conditions and procedures when available. Where no applicable
procedures exist, data shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer.
1411.3 Combination Space and Service Water Heating: For
combination space and service water heaters with a principal function of
providing space heat, the Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) may be
calculated by using ASHRAE Standard 124 -1991. Storage water heaters
used in combination space heat and water heat applications shall have
either an Energy FActor (EF) or a CAE of not less than the following:
1411.4 Packaged Electric Heating and Cooling Equipment: Packaged
electric equipment providing both heating and cooling with a total cooling
capacity greater than 20,000 Btu /h shall be a heat pump.
Exception: Unstaffed equipment shaelters or cabinets used
solely for personal wireless service facilities.
1412 Controls
1412.1 Temperature Controls: Each system shall be provided with at
least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by
individual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone.
At a minimum, each floor of a building shall be considered as a separate
zone.
1412.2 Deadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating
and cooling, zone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of
at least 5 degrees F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy
to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum.
Exceptions:
1.
Special occupancy, special usage, or code requirements
where deadband controls are not appropriate.
2. Buildings complying with Section 1141.4, if in the proposed
building energy analysis, heating and cooling thermostat
setpoints are set to the same temperature between 70
degrees F and 75 degrees F inclusive, and assumed to be
constant throughout the year.
3. Thermostats that require manual changeover between
heating and cooling modes.
1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system is equipped with a means for
adding moisture, a humidistat shall be provided.
1412.4 Setback and Shut -Off: HVAC systems shall be equipped with
automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use
through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use
or alternate use of the spaces served by the system. The automatic
controls shall have a minimum seven -day clock and be capable of being
set for seven different day types per week.
Exceptions:
1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation at
the same temperature setpoint.
2. Equipment with full load demands of 2 kW (6,826 Btu/h) or
less may be controlled by readily accessible manual off-hour
con trols.
1412.4.1 Dampe Outside air intakes, exhaust outlets and relief outlets
serving conditioned spaces shall be equipped with dampers which close
automatically when the system is off or upon power failure.
Exceptions:
1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation.
2. Combustion air intakes.
3. Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in buildings
less than 3 stories in height.
4. Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in exhaust
and relief outiets in the first story and levels below the first
story of buildings three or more stories in height.
1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with
design supply air capacities exceeding 10,000 cfm shall have optimum
start controls. Optimum start controls shall be designed to automatically
adjust the start time of an HVAC system each day to bring the space to
desired occupied temperature levels immediately before scheduled
occupancy. The control algorithm shall, as a minimum, be a function of the
difference between space temperature and occupied setpoint and the
amount of time prior to scheduled occupancy.
1412.5 Heat Pump Controls: Unitary air cooled heat pumps shall include
microprocessor controls that minimize supplemental heat usage during
start -up, set -up, and defrost conditions. These controls shall anticipate
need for heat and use compression heating as the first stage of heat.
Controls shall Indicate when supplemental heating is being used through
visual means (e.g., LED indicators).
1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating
equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu /h shall have modulating or
staged combustion control.
Exceptions:
1. Boilers.
2. Radiant Heaters.
1412.7 Balancing: Each air supply outlet or air or water terminal device
shall have a means for balancing, including but not limited to, dampers,
temperature and pressure test connections and balancing valves.
1413 Air Economizers
1413.1 Operation: Air economizers shall be of automatically modulating
outside and return air dampers to provide 100 percent of the design supply
air as outside air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling.
Water economizers shall be capable of providing the total concurrent
cooling Toad served by the conneted terminal equipment lacking airside
economizer, at outside air temperatures of 45 ° F dry- bulb /40 ° F wet -bulb
and below. For this calculation, all factors including solar and internal load
shall be the same as those used for peak load calculations, except for the
outside temperatures.
Exception: Water economizers using air - cooled heat rejection
equipment may use a 35 ° F dry-bulb outside air temperature for
this calculation. This exception is limited to a maximum of 20 tons
per building.
1413.2 Documentation: Water economizer plans submitted for approval
shall include the following information:
1. Maximum outside air conditions for which economizer is sized to
provide full cooling.
2. Design cooling load to be provided by economizer at this outside
air condition.
3. Heat rejection and terminal equipment performance data
including model number, flow rate, capacity, entering and leaving
temperature in full economizer cooling mode.
1413.3 Integrated Operation: Air economizers shall be capable of
providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is
required to meet the remainder of the cooling load.
Exceptions:
1. Individual, direct expansion units that have a rated capacity
less than 65,000 Btu /h and use nonintegrated economizer
controls that preclude simultaneous operation of the
economizer and mechanical cooling.
2. Water - cooled water chillers with waterside economizer.
1413.4 Humidification: If an air economizer is required on a cooling
system for which humidification equipment is to be provided to maintain
minimum indoor humidity levels, then the humidifier shall be of the
adiabatic type (direct evaporative media or fog atomization type).
Exceptions:
1. Health care facilities where WAC 246- 320 -525 allows only
steam injection humidifiers in ductwork downstream of final
filters. 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls:
Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000
Btu/h shall have modulating or staged combustion control.
2. Systems with water economizer
3. 100% outside air systems with no provisions for air
recirculation to the central supply fan,
4. Nonadiabatic humidifiers cumulatively serving no more than
10% of a building's air economizer capacity as measured in
cfm. This refers to the system cfm serving rooms with stand
alone or duct mounted humidifiers.
1414 Ducting Systems
1414.1 Sealing: Duct work which is designed to operate at pressures
above 1/2 inch water column static pressure shall be sealed in accordance
with Standard RS -18. Extent of sealing required is as follows:
1. Static pressure: 1/2 inch to 2 inches; seal transverse joints.
2. Static pressure: 2 inches to 3 inches; seal all transverse joints
and longitudinal seams.
3. Static pressure: above 3 inches; seal all transverse joints,
longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations.
Duct tape and other pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the
primary sealant where ducts are designed to operate at static pressures of
1 inch W.C. or greater.
1414.2 Insulation: Ducts and plenums that are constructed and function
as part of the building envelope, by separating interior space from exterior
space, shall meet all applicable requirements of Chapter 13. These
requirements include insulation installation, moisture control, air leakage,
and building envelope insulation levels. Unheated equipment rooms with
combustion air louvers must be isolated from the conditioned space by
insulating interior surfaces to a minimum of R -11 and any exterior
envelope surfaces per Chapter 13. Outside air ducts serving individual
supply air units with less than 2,800 cfm of total supply air capacity shall be
insulated to a minimum of R -7 and are not considered building envelope.
Other outside air duct runs are considered building envelope until they,
1. connect to the heating or cooling equipment, or
2. are isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper
complying with Section 1412.4.1.
Once outside air ducts meet the above listed requirements, any runs
within conditioned space shall comply with Table 14 -5 requirements.
Other ducts and plenums shall be thermally insulated per Table 14 -5.
Exceptions:
1. Within the HVAC equipment.
2. Exhaust air ducts not subject to condensation.
3. Exposed ductwork within a zone that serves that zone.
1415 Piping Systems
1415.1 Insulation: Piping shall be thermally insulated in accordance with
Table 14 -6.
Exception: Piping installed within unitary HVAC equipment.
Water pipes outside the conditioned space shall be insulated in
accordance with Washington State Plumbing Code (WAC 51 -26)
1416 Completion Requirements (Refer to NREC Section 1416 and the
Building Commissioning Guidelines, published by the Building
Commissioning Association, for complete text and guidelines for building
completion and commissioning requirements.)
Mechanical. Summary
MECH -SUM
Project Description
Briefly describe mechanical
system type and features,
❑ Includes Plans
Compliance Option
Equipment Schedules
Equip.
ID
Equip.
ID
Equip.
ID
Brand Name'
Brand Namhel
Brand Nance'
Include documentation requiring compliance w ith commissioning requirements, Section 1416.
EJ Simple System J Complex System J Systems Anaysis 0 Clear
(See Decision Flow chart (over) for qualifications. Use separate MECH -SUM for simple & complex systems.)
The following information is required to be incorporated w ith the mechanical equipment schedules on
the plans. For projects w ithout plans, fill in the required information below
Cooling Equipment Schedule
Model No.
Model No.
Model No.
Capacity
Btu/h
55F air
Capacity
Btu/h
CFM
Total CFM
2600
OSA CFM
or Econo?
SiER
or EER
Heating Equipment Schedule
Total CFM
1600
SP
OSA cfm
or Econo?
HP/BHP
Input Btuh
51195
Flow Controls
IFLV
Output Btuh
51195
Location
Eficiency
100.000
Fan Equipment Schedule
Location of Service
iif available. 2 As tested according to Table 14-IA through 14-1G. 3 if required. 4 COP, HSFF, Combustion Eficiency, or AFUE, as
applicable. 5 Flow control types: variable air volume(VAV), constant volurrle (CV), or variable speed (VS).
it-459
•
Rke
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
zumez
SoUTHCENZE.R MALL
SPACE # 2II5
633 SOUTH
c»x
SJiATrr.•F, WA 98188
MURPHY VAREYp6
DAVID j MURPHY, AIA
uoi Nam ATaox Bum ea
Bouts, V18m5C10N 98rn
T: $O6.3+1.98ZS
V: *06.341.
S: In r. MvsrraVar cor
Harrison French and
Associates
809 S.W. "A" Street
Bentonville, AR 72712
(479) 273 -7780
fax (479) 273 -9436
DATE:
EXPIRES: 02/23/10
PROJECT NUMBER: 05-08 -02008
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
PRELIMINARY MALL
REVIEW
02 -08.08 PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
SHEET TITLE:
ENERGY
CODE FORMS
SHEET NUMBER:
M2
PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
MARK
WC1
L1
S51
FIXTURE
WATER CLOSET
HANDICAP
LAVATORY
SERVICE SINK
BRANCH SIZES (MINIMUM)
CW
3/4"
1 /2"
1 /2"
HW
1/2"
1/2"
WASTE
4"
1 1/4"
3 "
VENT
2"
1 1/4"
1 1 /2"
MANUFACTURER
AMERICAN
STANDARD
AMERICAN
STANDARD
STERNS AND
WILLIAMS
MODEL
CADET
2377.100
DECLYN
0321.075
HILOW
HL -1810
/ /
DESCRIPTION
16-1/2"H ELONGATED BOWL, 1.6 GPF. PROVIDE AMERICAN
STANDARD SEAT 5311.012 "LAUREL" WITHOUT COVER.
WALL HUNG, CERAMIX 2000.100 FAUCET, MAX FLOW
AT 0.5 GPM, GRID STRAINER AND 1 -1/4 " P -TRAP
24 "Wx24 "Lx12 "H, DROP FRONT, ELKAY LK4O1 FAUCET
WITH PAIL HOOK AND LK403 MOP HOLDER
NOTES:
1. ALL FIXTURES TO BE WHITE.
2. MOUNT CONTROLS ON ACCESSIBLE SIDE OF TOILET.
3. PROVIDE TRUBRO GUARD PROTECTIVE PIPE COVERS ON EXPOSED HOT WATER AND DRAIN LINES..
4. PROVIDE WATTS SERIES USG -B MIXING VALVE OR EQUAL.
/ / /
CONNECT NEW 3/4" TO EXIST
LANDLORD SUPPLY CW.
COORDINATE WITH LANDLORDS
AND AHJ
L1
FD1
CONNECT NEW 4" 3' -10"
SAN SEWER TO EXIST.
FIELD VERIFY LOCATION
AND INVERT BEFORE
TRENCHING
SS1
WC1
WC
�l!^� WC I)
WH1 ABOVE CEIUNG
ROUTE T &P TO 551 REF
4 -P1
NOTES
1,2
1,3,4
SPECIALTY PLUMBING FIXTURES
TAG
FCO
WCO
YCO
FD1
TMV
WHA
FIXTURE
FLOOR CLEANOUT
WALL CLEANOUT
YARD CLEAN -OUT
FLOOR DRAIN
THERMOSTATIC
MIXING VALVE
WATER HAMMER
ARRESTOR
TRAP
PRIMER
REDUCED PRESSURE
BACKFLOW PREVENTER
WATER PRESSURE
REGULATOR
BALL VALVES
HEAT TRAP DOWN TO MID
POINT OF HEATER TANK, TYP.
OF 2.
MANUFACTURER
ZURN
ZURN
ZURN
ZURN
WATTS
ZURN
ZURN
WILKINS
WILKINS
WILKINS
MODEL
Z -1400
2 -1441
Z --1474
ZN- 415 -6B
MMV
Z -1700
Z -1022
975XL
500
850
NTS 05.19.04
DESCRIPTION
DURA-COATED CAST IRON BODY W/ "LEVEL- TROL ",
ADJUSTABLE TO FINISH SURFACE
DURA- COATED CAST IRON BODY W/ ROUND, SMOOTH
STAINLESS STEEL ACCESS COVER AND SECURING SCREW
DURA-COATED CAST IRON, ADJUSTABLE TO FINISH SURFACE
6 ", DURA- COATED CAST IRON BODY, POLISHED NICKEL
BRONZE TOP, BOTTOM OUTLET, ADJUSTABLE COLLAR
HEAVY CAST BRONZE BODY VALVE, BI- METALLIC
THERMOSTAT ELEMENT, CHECK STOPS, LIMIT STOP
CONFORM TO PDI WH-201, ASSE 1010; TEMP TO 300'F,
MAX 125 PSIG WORKING PRESSURE
BRONZE PRIMER VALVE WITH REMOVABLE OPERATING PARTS
INTEGRAL VACUUM BREAKER, AND GASKETED ACCESS COVER.
BRONZE BODY, WITH SHUT -OFF VALVES, Y STRAINER,
AND TEST COCKS.
BRONZE BODY WITH SHUT -OFF VALVES
FULL PORT BRASS BALL VALVE WITH LEVER HANDLE
GENERAL NOTE (APPLIES TO ALL)
1. SCHEDULE IS COMPREHENSIVE. ALL FIXTURES MAY NOT BE USED, REFER TO DRAWINGS -.
NOTES:
1. CLEANOUTS ARE TO BE THE SAME SIZE AS THE PIPES THEY SERVE, UP TO 4 ".
2. SIZE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION.
3. SET FOR 105'F DISCHARGE.
WATER HEATER SCHEDULE
MARK
WH1
AREA
SERVED
RESTROOMS
WATER HEATER
P -12
MANUFACTURER
A.O. SMITH
BALL VALVE, 1YP.
CW SUPPLY TO WATER
HEATER. RE: PLAN
DIELECTRIC UNION TYP
"PIPE FULL SIZE WITH AIR
GAP
MODEL
DEL -6
HW SUPPLY TO SYSTEM. RE:
PLAN.
EXPANSION TANK. RE: WATER
HEATER SCHEDULE.
T & P RELIEF
GALVANIZED SHEET METAL DRAIN PAN
(MIN. 24 GAUGE 1-1/2" DEEP)
DELETE DRAIN PAN FOR FLOOR
MOUNTED OR UNDERCOUNTER
APPLICATIONS.
TAN K
SIZE
6
V /PH /HZ
KW
120/1/60
1.5
GENERAL INFORMATION (ALL UNITS):
1. 1 10'F OUTLET TEMPERATURE.
2. CONTRACTOR SHALL CHOOSE A SCHEDULED UNIT OR A COMPARABLE
UNIT OF A DIFFERENT MANUFACTURER.
NOTES:
A. PROVIDE AMTROL (OR EQUAL) EXPANSION TANK, AND DRAIN PAN
SIZED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.
B. MOUNT WATER HEATER ON MANUFACTURER'S SUPPORT PLATFORM.
/31
NOTES
1
1
1
3
2
NOTES
A, B
PLUMBING NOTES
1 EACH CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING THOROUGH
KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AS
THEY RELATE TO THIS WORK. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION
SHALL BE ALLOWED DUE TO LACK OF THIS KNOWLEDGE.
2. PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION IN
ALL RESPECTS READY FOR INTENDED USE AND IN STRICT
ACCORDANCE WITH STATE AND LOCAL CODES AND
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.
3. COORDINATE SEWER, GAS, AND WATER CONNECTIONS WITH
CIVIL AND AHJ. PROVIDE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE AND
BACKFLOW PREVENTER AS SHOWN OR REQUIRED BY AHJ.
4. REFER TO RISER DIAGRAMS AND PLUMBING FIXTURE
SCHEDULE FOR ALL PIPING AND PIPE SIZES NOT SHOWN ON
PLAN.
5. FIELD ADJUST WATER CLOSET FLUSHING MECHANISM FOR
PROPER FLUSHING OPERATION.
6. SANITARY AND STORM SEWER PIPING SHOWN IS BASED ON
1/4" PER FOOT FALL FOR ALL PIPE SMALLER THAN 4"
DIAMETER AND 1/8" PER FOOT FALL FOR PIPE 4" DIAMETER
AND LARGER.
7. ALL SEWER PIPING BELOW SLAB TO BE 2" DIAMETER
MINIMUM.
8. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS TO ALL CONCEALED VALVES AND
CLEAN -OUTS; AND NOT ABOVE AN ACCESSIBLE CEIUNG.
9. PROVIDE TRAP SEAL PRIMERS AS SHOWN OR AS REQUIRED
BY AHJ. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY REQUIREMENTS.
10. INSTALL VTR'S, EXHAUST FANS, AND FLUES A MINIMUM
5' -0" FROM PARAPET OR OUTSIDE WALL AND 1O' -0"
MINIMUM FROM EQUIPMENT WITH OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE.
11. INSTALL WATER PIPE ON INSIDE OF EXTERIOR WALL
INSULATION TO PREVENT FREEZING.
12. PROVIDE SEISMIC BRACING BASED ON APPROPRIATE SEISMIC
ZONE REQUIREMENTS PER LOCAL AND NATIONAL CODES.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY INCLUDES STRUCTURAL
ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION ON DETAILS SUBMITTED FOR
PERMITTING.
13. PROVIDE FIRE SEAL WHERE PIPES PENETRATE FIRE RATED
ASSEMBLY.
KEYNOTE
15.103 LOCATE NEW WATER METER AS SHOWN ON
PLANS. IF REQUIRED BY LANDLORD, PROVIDE NEW
3/4" REMOTE READ WATER METER. PROVIDE BACK
FLOW PREVENTER IF REQUIRED BY LOCAL AHJ.
PLUMBING SYMBOLS
SS
G
CD
IiI
0
FD1
0
SANITARY SEWER
DOMESTIC COLD WATER
DOMESTIC HOT WATER
NATURAL GAS
CONDENSATE DRAIN
PLUMBING VENT
BALL VALVE
BACKFLOW PREVENTER
WATER METER
FLOOR DRAIN
GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR
GAS COCK
CONNECT TO EXISTING
PLUMBING PLAN
1/4" = 1' -0"
DWV RISER
NTS
r._ 1 CONNECT 2" VENT
TO EXISTING
LANDLORD VENT.
!%■
�I WO -)
" �1 1/2"
551
� � i 2 "
WCO
'I FD1 I I I
L1 1
3/4" - CONNECT
TO EXISTING FIELD
VERIFY
NTS
END OVER
SINK
43/4" WHA
WC1
WATER RISER
r
F
4 90 .
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
wmiez
SOUmCENTER MAIL
SPACE # 2115
633 S O U T E I C E N I E R
SEATTLE, WA 98188
MURPHY VAREYps
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
2101 Nam Amos Eltrers Sit
8iuxaa, WAm NCSaar 98121
T: io6.341.9875
P: io6.541.9x1
>� .... tivinerYarr.com
Harrison French and
Associates
809 S.W. "A" Street
Bentonville, AR 72712
(479) 273 -7780
fax (479) 273 -9436
PROJECT NUMBER: 05 - 08.02008
ZuMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
PRELIMINARY MALL
REVIEW
DATE:
02 - - PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
SHEET TITLE:
PLUMBING
PLAN
SHEET NuMBER:
P1
11
16.100 SWITCH
BANK
TO CIRCUIT BREAKER B -19
TO CIRCUIT BREAKER B -21
TO CIRCUIT BREAKER B -23
TO CIRCUIT BREAKER B -25
N.T.S.
TO SWITCH Se
TO SWITCH Sf
TO SWITCH Sg
TO SWITCH Sh
CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE "BULLET SERIES"
CURRENT UMITTNG PANEL BY LIGHTING CONTROL
AND DESIGN, INC. (323) 226 -0000
www.lightingcontrols.com. MODEL #T24-- 6--SM.
CURRENT LIMITING PANEL
TYPE MANUFACTURER
A HUBBELL
B JUNO
C RESOLUTE
D JUNO
D1 JUNO
H RESOLUTE
I UTHONIA
IE LITHONIA
J LIGHTOLIER
K UTHONIA
L UTHONIA
X UTHONIA
LIGHTING NOTES
1. FIXTURE PROVIDED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.
2. FIXTURE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.
3. PROVIDE SEISMIC BRACING AS NEEDED FOR CHAIN HUNG FIXTURES.
4. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL MOUNTING HARDWARE AS REQUIRED.
5. FURNISHED BY OTHERS, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR.
CONTACTOR #1
WINDOW LTS I---O
DISPLAY LTS-41-0— I--O
ROUTE VIA
TO Sd 11MECLOCK
1H iN
N.T.S.
CATALOG NUMBER
SWD- 175- E1 -AP -WH
#R7316L,#R20, #R23, #R34, BLACK
#3619 -TOR
#133BL/T307BL
#133BL/T307BL
#3629 -TOR
C- 2- 32- 120 -GEB
C -2 -32 -120- GEB -EL
478BKX -40ZR1 C9X
WC- 2- 17- 120 -TUBI
6ELM2P
LQM- S -1 -R- 120/277 -EL
CONTACTOR #2
LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
ROUTE VIA
11MECLOCK
L H iN
B -18 SIGNAGE-- ----�� I �� B -22
B -16 WINDOW 1--0 --16 B -5
RECEPTS
WINDOW � - I F-400----0 B -7
RECEPTS
CONTRACTOR TO
PROVIDE ENCLOSURE
FOR CONTACTORS
CONTACTOR DETAIL
REF ARCH FOR FIXTURE
QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS
REF ARCH FOR FIXTURE
QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS
VOLTS WATTS
120 218
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
50
40
50
50
40
76
76
50
30
15
5
LAMP
ORDER NUMBER
175W MH
50W MR16 /NSP
40W -A19- -CLEAR
50W PAR30 NSP
50W PAR30 NFL
40W -A19 -CLEAR
F032/741
F032/741
50W MR16 FL
F017/741
INCL W /FIXTURE
LED W /FIXTURE
QTY
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
DESCRIPTION NOTES
PENDANT 4,5
TRACK LIGHTING 4,5
PENDANT 1,4
TRACK LIGHTING 4,5
TRACK LIGHTING 4,5
PENDANT 1,4
CHAIN HUNG 2,3,4
CHAIN HUNG 2,3,4
RECESSED 4,5
VANITY 4,5
EMERGENCY 2,4
EXIT LIGHT 2,4
+13' AFT, TYP OF
SALES AREA
LIGHTING PLAN
1/4" = 1' -O"
(SYMBOLS APPLY ONLY WHEN USED ON DRAWINGS)
SYMBOL
F0
NEUTRAL
EF
GFI
WH
AFF
TYP
$os
❑ ,
w
0'
ROUND
H0._
c
ABBREVIATIONS
B6 B8 B14 B6
0
0 0
0
Sa Sb Sc Sd
B19 821 B23 B25
0
0
0
0
0
0
O 0 0 0
0 0 0
O 0 0 0
Se Sf Sg Sh
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
LEGEND
DESCRIPTION
EXIT FIXTURE
(WALL MOUNTED /CEILING MOUNTED)
EMERGENCY LIGHT
SWITCH, SINGLE POLE
SWITCH, OCCUPANCY SENSOR
RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX
RECEPTACLE, QUADRUPLEX
NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
SURFACE MOUNTED PANELBOARD
TELEPHONE /DATA
SPEAKER
MOTOR
CIRCUIT, CONCEALED WHERE
POSSIBLE, E INDICATES EXISTING
WIRING
EXHAUST FAN
GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER
WATER HEATER
ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
TYPI CAL
PROVIDE SWITCH LABELS, PER
ARCHITECTURAL
SWITCHBANK DETAIL
N.T.S.
Ob - /31
LIGHTING KEYNOTES
16.100 NEW SWITCHBANK. PROVIDE A LIGHTING SWITCH FOR
EACH LIGHTING CIRCUIT AND AS REQUIRED. ENGRAVE
EACH COVER PLATE AS FOLLOWS: SALES LTG., D.R.
LTG., CASEWORK LTG., CASH WRAP LTG., DISPLAY
WINDOW TRACK LTG., STOREFRONT LTG., SALES TRACK
LTG., SEE SWITCH BANK DETAIL.
16.101 NEON SIGN, COORDINATE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
REQUIREMENTS WITH OWNER AND LANDLORD. ROUTE
THROUGH TIMECLOCK.
16.102 PROVIDE WIREWAY AT +12' -0" AFF. USE GRAY COLOR
WIREMOLD ODS3(G3000) WITH DUPLEX RECEPTACLES
ON 3' -0" CENTERS. PROVIDE ALL HARDWARE AND
HANGERS. ALIENATE BRANCH CIRCUIT TO
RECEPTACLES THROUGHOUT.
16.103 STORE FRONT SIGN: PROVIDE AND INSTALL
DISCONNECT IN CEIUNG SPACE. COORDINATE LOCATION
WITH SIGN INSTALLER.
16.104 INSTALL QUANTITY OF UGHT FIXTURES AS INDICATED
ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. INSTALL FIXTURES
ALONG ENTIRE LENGTH OF RACEWAY AS DIRECTED.
PROVIDE MATERIALS AS REQUIRED. SEE
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR SUSPENDED LIGHT AND
PIPE HANGER DETAILS.
16.105 INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED SPEAKERS. PENDANT
MOUNT AT +13' -O" AFF COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION
WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. PROVIDE
LOOPED OR SERIES WIRING PLAN WITH 14 GAUGE
PLENUM RATED SPEAKER WIRE HIDDEN BEHIND THE
DRYWALL. PROVIDE 10' MINIMUM SPARE CABLE COILED
AT CASH WRAP FOR FINAL STEREO SYSTEM
TERMINATIONS. PROVIDEFINAL CONNECTION TO
SPEAKERS AND SOUND SYSTEM AS REQUIRED.
16.106 ROUTE CONDUIT CONCEALED UP TO STRUCTURE.
ROUTE TIGHT TO THE UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURE TO
PANELBOARD.
GEN. DEMOLITION NOTES
1. REMOVE ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING,
EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
LIGHTING GENERAL NOTES
1. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COMMISION AND
DEMONSTRATE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR STORE
PERSONNEL. SCHEDULE WITH STORE MANAGER WHEN
DEMONSTRATION SHALL TAKE PLACE.
2. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTUAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT
LOCATION AND QUANTITY OF LIGHT FIXTURES.
CONDUIT/ WIRING NOTES
1. AC CABLING, MC CABLING, AND NONMETALLIC SHEATHED
CABLING ARE NOT ALLOWED.
2. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT IS NOT ALLOWED, EXCEPT FOR WHIP (LESS
THAN 6 FEET IN LENGTH), CONNECTION TO MOTORS,
TRANSFORMERS, AND OTHER EQUIPMENT THAT PRODUCES
VIBRATIONS. USE ONLY GALVANIZED STEEL FLEX.
16.106
DIVIDE 86 LIGHTS EVENLY
BETWEEN FOUR CIRCUITS.
ROUTE VIA CLP REF 4/E1.
NIGHT LIGHT FIXTURE, NL,
PROVIDE HOT UNSWITCHED
CONDUCTOR, TYP
16.102
(16.105)TYP OF SPEAKERS
184' •
N-
t I *UU
1111 RN
off' vi.
ma
sike
Ala
Bo 1, tun
■le ��■
■N,uI ■UR■
PROVIDE LEUTRON
OCCUPANCY
SENSOR WITH NO
MORE THAN 30
MIN SETTING.
MOUNT FIXTURES IN
STOCKROOM AND
CORRIDOR +12' -O ", TYP
- SWITCH VANITY
UGHT WITH MOTION
SENSOR IN
EXHAUST FAN.
16.104
MOUNT TO INTERMEDIATE
WINDOW FRAME (TYP)
B
16.101
16.103
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERRITCENTEF
7 P
EACH SUBCONTRACTOR 15 RESPONSIBLE FOR HAy(NG A - ; 4/0
THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND SPEGLGT4QNS
IN THEIR RELATED FIELD. THE FAILURE TO ACQUAINT H(Lu1S1 LF
WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE DOES NOT RELIEVE THE RESPONSIBILITY
OF PERFORMING HIS WORK PROPERLY. NO ADDITIONAL
COMPENSATION SHALL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF CONDITIONS
THAT OCCUR DUE TO FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE WORKERS WITH
THIS KNOWLEDGE.
S
wmiez
SOCENTER MALL
SPACE # 2115
633 Sotmc r rEs
SSE, WA 98188
MURPHY VAREYPs
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
MI Nun Allan 8mn au
Burns, VASlatinn I g8iu
T: w6.341. g875
F: s06 .54
Twv. Mumfirmay.coat
Harrison French and
Associates
809 S.W. "A" Street
Bentonville, AR 72712
(479) 273 -7780
fax (479) 273 -9436
DATE:
SHEET TITLE:
1 EXPIRES: 07/22/08
h
PROJECT NUMBER: 05-08-02008
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
PRELIMINARY MALL
REvi Ew
02 - - PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
LIGHTING
PLAN
HEET NUMBER:
E1
B 100A MAIN LUG ONLY
SERVES: DISTRIBUTION NEW PANELBOARD 3PH 4WIRE 208/120V
LOCATION: CORRIDOR GROUND BAR
ISOLATED GROUND BAR
CK
LOAD SERVED
WIRE
BRKR
PL
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
PL
BRKR
WIRE
LOAD SERVED
CK
1
STOCK RECEPTS
12
20
1
0.54 0.49
31.59
N.E.C. DEMAND
1
20
12
STOCKROOM LTS
2
3
SALES RECEPTS
12
20
1
7.24
0.72 1 0.43
1
20
12
EMER /EXIT /NL (L)
4
5
WINDOW RECEPTS
12
20
1
0.54 1 0.12
032 1 0.18
1
20
12
TIMECLOCK/CONT.
6
7
WINDOW RECEPTS
12
20
1
0.72 I 1.31
1
20
12
SALES LTS
8
9
SALES RECEPTS
12
20
1
1
20
12
DRESSING RM LTS
10
11
SALES RECEPTS
12
20
1
0.36 1 0.00
1
20
SPARE
12
13
CASHWRAP IG
12
20
1
0.36 1 0.44
1
20
12
CASHWRAP LTS
14
15
CASHWRAP
12
20
1
0.36 0.60
1
20
12
STOREFRONT LTS
16
17
WATER HEATER (L)
12
20
1
1.50 1 0.90
1
20
12
DISPLAY LTS
18
19
PLUGMOLD SALES
12
20
1
1.20 1 0.00
1
20
---
SPARE
20
21
PLUGMOLD SALES
12
20
1
1.20 1 1.20
1
20
12
SIGNAGE
22
23
PLUGMOLD SALES
12
20
1
1.20 1 0.00
1
20
--
SPARE
24
25
PLUGMOLD SALES
12
20
1
1.20 1 0.00
1
20
--
SPARE
26
27
SPARE
--
20
1
0.00 1 0.00
1
20
--
SPARE
28
29
SPARE
--
20
1
0.00 1 0.00
1
20
---
SPARE
30
31
SPARE
--
20
1
0.00 1 0.00
1
20
--
SPARE
32
33
SPARE
----
20
1
0.00 1 0.00
1
20
--
SPARE
34
35
SPARE
--
20
1
0.00 1 0-00
1
20
--
SPARE
36
37
SPARE
--
20
1
0.00 1 0.00
1
20
--
SPARE
38
39
SPARE
--
20
1
0.00 1 0.00
1
20
--
SPARE
40
41
SPARE
---
20
1
0.00 1 0.00
1
20
--
SPARE
42
TOTAL
TOTAL LOAD
PER NEC ARTICLE 220 FEEDER LOAD
6.26
5.17
4.86
KVA
AMPS
AMPS
AMPS (L) INDICATES LOCKING DEVICE
52.17
43.08
40.50
16.29
KVA
KVA
45.27
17.66
49.08
CONNECTED LOADS
LOAD
LIGHTS
RECEPT.
RECEPT.
REFRIG.
KITCHEN
MISC.
WH
HVAC
TOTAL
CONNECTED LOAD (KVA)
5.79
9.12
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.18
1.50
15.00
31.59
N.E.C. DEMAND
125%
100%
50%
100%
65%
100%
100%
100%
FEEDER LOAD (KVA)
7.24
9.12
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.18
1.50
15.00
33.04
2" CONDUIT AND 200A
FEEDER PROVIDED AND
INSTALLED BY LANDLORD.
MAIN DISCONNECT
PROVIDED BY LANDLORD.
2 "C,4#3/0,1 #6GR
PANEL
A
TENANT SPACE
3/4 "C,3 #8,
1#10 GR
PUSH - BUTTON,
+48" AFF
(16.135)
3OKVA
XFMR
#8CU
BOND TO
N.T.S.
NEW PHONE
BOARD
SUSPEND XFMR
ABOVE
1 - 1 1/4"C,
4#3,1 #8GR,1 #8 IG
CT) I 1
BUILDING (2 STEEL PER -)
NEC
NOTE:
ALL EQUIPMENT IS NEW TO BE PROVIDED BY
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AS SHOWN, UNLESS
NOTED OTHERWISE.
PANEL
B
TIMECLOCK SCHEDULE
LABEL AS SHOWN
NO.
TS1
LOAD SERVED
STOREFRONT SIGN
STOREFRONT LIGHTS
WINDOW RECEPTS
ONE -LINE DIAGRAM
MANUFACTURER
CATALOG NO.
TORK
W300L
ONE -LINE KEYED NOTES:
r THEW 3OKVA TRANSFORMER TO BE SUSPENDED FROM
STRUCTURE AS SHOWN.
CD
NEW 200A 277/480V, 3PHASE PANEL TO BE
PROVIDED AS SCHEDULED.
NEW TIME CLOCK PROVIDED BY ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR.
NEW CONTACTOR ENCLOSURE REF 3/E1.
NEW CURRENT LIMITING PANEL REF 4/E1.
J NEW 100A 120/208V, 3PHASE PANEL TO BE
PROVIDED AS SCHEDULED.
PANEL A
PANEL B
MOTOR
VOLTS
CCT. NO.
120V
3P
CONTACT
40A 120V
3PST
INITIAL TIME
SETTING NOTES
INDOOR, 7 DAY,24HR
NOTES: 1,23
NOTES:
1. INDICATED SWITCH SHALL BE HEAVY DUTY TYPE.
2. FURNISH AND INSTALL DISCONNECT SWITCHES WITH DUAL ELEMENT,
3. TIME DELAY FUSES AS EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER REQUIRES.
A
SERVES: DISTRIBUTION
LOCATION: CORRIDOR
NEW PANELBOARD
200A MAIN LUG ONLY
3PH 4WIRE 480/277V
GROUND BAR
CK
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
LOAD SERVED
WIRE
BRKR
8
TRANSFORMER TB
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
50
PL
3
PER NEC ARTICLE 220
TOTAL
TOTAL LOAD
FEEDER LOAD
PHASE A
6.26 1 5.00
0.0 1 0.00
0.00 1 0.00
PHASE B
5.47 1 5.00
0.00 1 0.00
0.00 1 0.00
11.26
10.47
40.65
37.79
31.59
33.04
KVA
KVA
PHASE C
4.86 1 5.00
o.00 1 0.00
0.00 1 o.00
9.86
35.60
38.04
39.78
PL
3
BRKR
25
WIRE
10
LOAD SERVED
VAV1
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
1/4" = 1' -0"
CK
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
KVA
AMPS
AMPS
AMPS
(L) INDICATES LOCKING DEVICE
POWER PLAN
LOW VOLTAGE GEN. NOTES
1. ALL LOW VOLTAGE WIRING SHALL BE ROUTED IN CONDUIT.
GEN. DEMOLITION NOTES
1. REMOVE ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING,
EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
CONDUIT/ WIRING NOTES
1. AC CABLING, MC CABLING, AND NONMETALLIC SHEATHED
CABLING ARE NOT ALLOWED.
2. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT IS NOT ALLOWED, EXCEPT FOR WHIP (LESS
THAN 6 FEET IN LENGTH), CONNECTION TO MOTORS,
TRANSFORMERS, AND OTHER EQUIPMENT THAT PRODUCES
VIBRATIONS. USE ONLY GALVANIZED STEEL FLEX.
POWER KEYNOTES
16.121 SURFACE MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX FOR HARD -WIRED
CASEWORK LIGHT FIXTURE. COORDINATE EXACT
LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT. PROVIDE WALL SWITCH AT
SWITCH BANK LOCATION FOR ON /OFF CONTROL OF
LIGHT FIXTURE NOTED. RUN ALL ASSOCIATED CONDUIT
SURFACE MOUNTED ON FLOOR BENEATH CASEWORK.
WIRE LIGHT FIXTURE F.B.O.I.C.
16.123 POKE- THROUGH LOCATION INDICATED IS
DIAGRAMMATIC. LOCATE POKE - THROUGH DEVICE
BENEATH CASEWORK. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION
WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK.
16.124 PROVIDE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE IN WINDOW BASE.
CONCEAL CONDUIT IN WINDOW BASE. PROVIDE BLACK
OUTLET WITH BLACK COVERPLATE. ROUTE POWER
THROUGH TIMECLOCK. TYPICAL AT DISPLAY WINDOWS
UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
16.125 NEW TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD. INSTALL
4'X4'X3/4" FIRE TREATED PLYWOOD BACKBOARD WITH
#6 CU GND. WIRE TO NEAREST BUILDING GROUND
ELECTRODE. COORDINATE INSTALL WITH LANDLORD.
16.127 PROVIDE EDWARDS MINIATURE LUNGEN 115 SERIES
BUZZER IN CASHWRAP. PROVIDE BUZZER,
TRANSFORMER, PUSHBUTTON, CONDUCTORS, AND ALL
CONNECTIONS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE FUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM. RUN LOW VOLTAGE WIRING, CONCEALED IN
CLG. SPACE OR IN WALL CAVITY, BACK TO DOOR
PUSHBUTTON.
16.130 PROVIDE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED TO SOFFIT
ABOVE DISPLAY WINDOW. COORDINATE EXACT
LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
ROUTE POWER THROUGH TIMECLOCK.
16.131 RUN (2) 1" CONDUITS OVERHEAD TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE
OF STRUCTURE. EXTEND CONDUITS TO TELEPHONE
TERMINAL BOARD. SEE "CASHWRAP" DETAIL.
16.134 1" CONDUIT STUB TO CEILING SPACE FOR VIDEO,
STEREO, AND CHIME L.V. CABLE TO CASEWORK, VERIFY
LOCATION PRIOR TO ROUGH IN.
16.135 ILLUMINATED BUZZER PUSH - BUTTON AT +48" AFF
WITH 1 A" C. STUB TO CEILING SPACE. LABEL BUZZER
"ZUMIEZ" WITH PLASTIC SIGN.
S- l37
16.125
16.130
16.124
16.124
TRANSFORMER TB•
SUSPENDED ABOVE
COORDINATE -
CONNECTION OF NEW
VAV WITH MECHANICAL
WH, MOUNT ABOVE
CEILING, COORDINATE
LOCATION WITH PLUMBING
(16.131)
ROUTE ALL CONDUITS 6.134)
FOR CASH WRAP IN
CABINET, TYP OF 5
(16.127
16.123
CASH
WRAP
SWITCHED JUNCTION
16.121 BOX FOR CASE
LIGHTING
SWITCH CASE LIGHTS
WITH PENDANT LIGHTING
ABOVE.
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE,
OPERATIONAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH
ALL CODE AND MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS,
INCLUDING DEVICES REQUIRED BY LOCAL AHJ AND MALL.
FINAL CONNECTION FROM THE TENANT'S FIRE ALARM
SYSTEM TO THE MALL'S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WILL BE
BY LANDLORD'S CONTRACTOR AT TENANTS EXPENSE.
16.130
COORDINATE
LOCATION WITH
OWNER, TYP OF 4
(16.130
16.130
16.124
16.124
EACH SUBCONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING A
THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
IN THEIR RELATED FIELD. THE FAILURE TO ACQUAINT HIMSELF
WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE DOES NOT RELIEVE THE RESPONSIBILITY
OF PERFORMING HIS WORK PROPERLY. NO ADDITIONAL
COMPENSATION SHALL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF CONDITIONS
THAT OCCUR DUE TO FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE WORKERS WITH
THIS KNOWLEDGE.
zumez
SOUTHc R MALL
SPACE #2115
633 Soumo
&MOLE, WA 98188
MURPHY VmYPs
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
awl Nsra A.mvi Some so
Burns, VIMINCTON 98111
TI io6 . s¢ . 9875
F: io
E: wi r. Mvits:Yam.a!
Harrison French and
Associates
809 S.W. "A" Street
Bentonville, AR 72712
(479) 273 -7780
fax (479) 273 -9436
1 EXPIRES: 07/22/08 I
ISSUED FOR:
j9
PROJECT NUMBER: 05.08 - 02008
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
PRELIMINARY MALL
REVIEW
DATE:
dI
02 - - PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
SHEET TITLE:
SHEET NUMBER:
RECEIVED
CITY OF TuK1MLA
MAR 14 Y008
PERMIT CENTER
POWER
PLAN
E2
FLOOR
Project Address
ZUMIEZ- SOUTHCENTER MAIL
The fallow ing information is necessary to check a lighting permit application for compliance w ith the lighting requirements in the
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code.
Applicability
(yes, no, n.a.)
LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513)
no
1513.1
yes
15132
n.a.
1513.3
n.a.
n.a.
yes
1513.4
1513.5
n.a.
1513.6
yes
yes
Code
Section
1513.6.1
1513.6.2
n.a.
1513.7
yes
n.a. ® 1437
(2) 1" CONDUITS TO CASHWRAP.
(1) FOR DATA /VOICE CABLING
AND (1) SPARE.
TELE.BKBD
N.T.S.
Component
Local controVaccess
Area controls
Daylight zone control
vertical glazing
overhead glazing
Display /exhib /special
Exterior shut -off
(a) timer w /backup
(b) photocell.
Inter. auto shut -off
(a) occup. sensors
(b) auto, sw itches
Corrrriiss inning
Lighting Sum Form
Bec motor efficiency
ROUTE CONDUITS
TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE
OF STRUCTURE BELOW.
Information Required
Schedule w ith type, indicate locations
Maximum limit per sw itch
Schedule with type and features, indicate locations
Indicate vertical glazing an plans
Indicate overhead glazing on plans
Indicate separate controls
Schedule w ith type and features, indicate location
Indicate location
Indicate location
Indicate location
Schedule w ith type and locations
Schedule w ith type and features (back-up, override capability
Indicate size of zone on plans
Indicate requirements for lighting controls commissioning
Completed and attached.
Schedule with fixture types,
lamps, ballasts, w atts per fixture
MECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule w ith hp, rpm, efficiency
If "no " is circled for any question, provide explanation:
Local lighting control for the retail space lighting is not required per exception #1 of section 1513.1.
COLUMN /WALL
KICK
ti TOE
CASH WRAP DETAIL
REG. #1
Date
3/10/2008
Location
on Flans
E1
E1
E2
E3
1" CONDUIT
FOR DATA /VOICE
CABLING
Building Department
Notes
1" CONDUIT STUB TO BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE FOR VIDEO, STEREO
AND BUZZER LV. CABLE. STUB TO BENEATH CASEWORK.
Lighting Summary . .
LTG -SUM
Project Info
Location
(floor /room no.)
TENANT SPACE
STORAGE
Location
(floor /room no.)
SALES
SALES
SALES
SALES
SALES
SALES
STORAGE
CORRIDOR
SALES
SALES
SALES
Project Address ZUMIEZ- SOUTHCENTER MALL
Applicant Name: ZUMIEZ
Applicant Address: TUKWILA, WA
Applicant Phone:
Project Description
Compliance Option
Alteration Exceptions
(check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3)
❑ New Building ❑ Addition MI Alteration ❑ Plans Included
Refer to WSEC Section 1 51 3 for controls and commissioning requirements.
❑ Prescriptive 0 Lighting Pow er Allow ance ❑ Systems Analysis
(See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive & LPA spaces clearly on plans.)
❑ No changes are being made to the lighting
Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage (Interior)
❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new , installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed.
Occupancy Description
RETAIL
STORAGE
* From Table 15-1 (over) - document all exceptions on form LTG-LPA Total Allow ed Watts
Proposed Lighting Wattage (Interior)
Fixture Description
TYPE A - PENDANT
TYPE B -- SHOWCASE DISPLAY (EXEMPT)
TYPE C - CASH WRAP PENDANT
TYPE D - PORTABLE PLUG IN DISPLAY (EXEMPT)
TYPE D1 - PORTABLE PLUG IN DISPLAY (EXEMPT)
TYPE H - DRESSING RM PENDANT
TYPE I - 4 FT STRIP
TYPE IE - 4 FT STRIP
TYPE K - VANITY LIGHT
TYPE L - EMERGENCY FIXTURE (EXEMPT)
TYPE X - EXIT LIGHT (EXEMPT)
Allow ed
Watts per ft **
1. 50
0.50
Number of
Fixtures
8
11
3
5
2
1
Date 3/10/2008
For Building Department Use
Area in ft
2668.0
467.0
Notes:
1. Use manufacturer's listed maximum input w attage. For hard -w ired ballasts only,
the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used
2. Include exit lights unless less than 5 w atts per fixture.
3. List all fixtures. For exempt lighting. not exception and leave Watts /Fixture blank
Watts/
Fixture
218.0
40.0
40.0
76.0
76.0
30.0
Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allow ed Watts for Interior Total Proposed Watts
❑ Clear
Allowed x Area
4002.0
233.5
4235.5
Watts
Proposed
1744.0
440.0
120.0
380.0
152.0
30.0
2866.0
REG. #2
1" DATA CONDUIT
1" VOICE CONDUIT
(1)
TYP
1 /37
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 Z008
PERM) R
��Rp
EACH SUBCONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING A J
THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
IN THEIR RELATED FIELD. THE FAILURE TO ACQUAINT HIMSELF
WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE DOES NOT REIJEVE THE RESPONSIBIUTY
OF PERFORMING HIS WORK PROPERLY. NO ADDITIONAL
COMPENSATION SHAD- BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF CONDITIONS
THAT OCCUR DUE TO FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE WORKERS WITH
THIS KNOWLEDGE.
zumez
SO - RD:I vTER MALL
SPACE # 2II(5
633 Soumci v'ri
SEAS, WA 98188
MURPHY VAREYPS
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
aoI NISIS2 ATLI Buis as
S Tuszeivzom
T: ao6.5p . 9875
F: 2 x 6 .34 1 .9 1 l
E m. MvnraYorr.cor
Harrison French and
Associates
809 S.W. "A" Street
Bentonville, AR 72712
(479) 273 -7780
fax (479) 273 -9436
PROJECT NUMBER: 05 -08 -02008
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
PRELIMINARY MALL
REVI
DATE:
02 - - PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
SHEET TITLE:
ELECTRICAL
DETAILS
SHEET NUMBER:
I EXPIRES: 07/22/08 I
E3
7-119195
CASHWRAP DETAIL GENERAL NOTES
1.
DETAIL IS DIAGRAMMATIC. REGISTER LOCATIONS SHOWN ON PLANS MAY DIFFER FROM DETAIL
2.
SEE POWER PLAN FOR CASEWORK UGHTING ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS.
3.
SEE POWER PLAN FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
CASHWRAP DETAIL KEYED NOTES
1.
PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX BENEATH CASEWORK ACCESS PANEL, ADJACENT TO 4 -PLEX, FOR ROUTING
OF NETWORK, DATA, AND TELEPHONE CABLING.
FLOOR
Project Address
ZUMIEZ- SOUTHCENTER MAIL
The fallow ing information is necessary to check a lighting permit application for compliance w ith the lighting requirements in the
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code.
Applicability
(yes, no, n.a.)
LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513)
no
1513.1
yes
15132
n.a.
1513.3
n.a.
n.a.
yes
1513.4
1513.5
n.a.
1513.6
yes
yes
Code
Section
1513.6.1
1513.6.2
n.a.
1513.7
yes
n.a. ® 1437
(2) 1" CONDUITS TO CASHWRAP.
(1) FOR DATA /VOICE CABLING
AND (1) SPARE.
TELE.BKBD
N.T.S.
Component
Local controVaccess
Area controls
Daylight zone control
vertical glazing
overhead glazing
Display /exhib /special
Exterior shut -off
(a) timer w /backup
(b) photocell.
Inter. auto shut -off
(a) occup. sensors
(b) auto, sw itches
Corrrriiss inning
Lighting Sum Form
Bec motor efficiency
ROUTE CONDUITS
TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE
OF STRUCTURE BELOW.
Information Required
Schedule w ith type, indicate locations
Maximum limit per sw itch
Schedule with type and features, indicate locations
Indicate vertical glazing an plans
Indicate overhead glazing on plans
Indicate separate controls
Schedule w ith type and features, indicate location
Indicate location
Indicate location
Indicate location
Schedule w ith type and locations
Schedule w ith type and features (back-up, override capability
Indicate size of zone on plans
Indicate requirements for lighting controls commissioning
Completed and attached.
Schedule with fixture types,
lamps, ballasts, w atts per fixture
MECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule w ith hp, rpm, efficiency
If "no " is circled for any question, provide explanation:
Local lighting control for the retail space lighting is not required per exception #1 of section 1513.1.
COLUMN /WALL
KICK
ti TOE
CASH WRAP DETAIL
REG. #1
Date
3/10/2008
Location
on Flans
E1
E1
E2
E3
1" CONDUIT
FOR DATA /VOICE
CABLING
Building Department
Notes
1" CONDUIT STUB TO BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE FOR VIDEO, STEREO
AND BUZZER LV. CABLE. STUB TO BENEATH CASEWORK.
Lighting Summary . .
LTG -SUM
Project Info
Location
(floor /room no.)
TENANT SPACE
STORAGE
Location
(floor /room no.)
SALES
SALES
SALES
SALES
SALES
SALES
STORAGE
CORRIDOR
SALES
SALES
SALES
Project Address ZUMIEZ- SOUTHCENTER MALL
Applicant Name: ZUMIEZ
Applicant Address: TUKWILA, WA
Applicant Phone:
Project Description
Compliance Option
Alteration Exceptions
(check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3)
❑ New Building ❑ Addition MI Alteration ❑ Plans Included
Refer to WSEC Section 1 51 3 for controls and commissioning requirements.
❑ Prescriptive 0 Lighting Pow er Allow ance ❑ Systems Analysis
(See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive & LPA spaces clearly on plans.)
❑ No changes are being made to the lighting
Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage (Interior)
❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new , installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed.
Occupancy Description
RETAIL
STORAGE
* From Table 15-1 (over) - document all exceptions on form LTG-LPA Total Allow ed Watts
Proposed Lighting Wattage (Interior)
Fixture Description
TYPE A - PENDANT
TYPE B -- SHOWCASE DISPLAY (EXEMPT)
TYPE C - CASH WRAP PENDANT
TYPE D - PORTABLE PLUG IN DISPLAY (EXEMPT)
TYPE D1 - PORTABLE PLUG IN DISPLAY (EXEMPT)
TYPE H - DRESSING RM PENDANT
TYPE I - 4 FT STRIP
TYPE IE - 4 FT STRIP
TYPE K - VANITY LIGHT
TYPE L - EMERGENCY FIXTURE (EXEMPT)
TYPE X - EXIT LIGHT (EXEMPT)
Allow ed
Watts per ft **
1. 50
0.50
Number of
Fixtures
8
11
3
5
2
1
Date 3/10/2008
For Building Department Use
Area in ft
2668.0
467.0
Notes:
1. Use manufacturer's listed maximum input w attage. For hard -w ired ballasts only,
the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used
2. Include exit lights unless less than 5 w atts per fixture.
3. List all fixtures. For exempt lighting. not exception and leave Watts /Fixture blank
Watts/
Fixture
218.0
40.0
40.0
76.0
76.0
30.0
Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allow ed Watts for Interior Total Proposed Watts
❑ Clear
Allowed x Area
4002.0
233.5
4235.5
Watts
Proposed
1744.0
440.0
120.0
380.0
152.0
30.0
2866.0
REG. #2
1" DATA CONDUIT
1" VOICE CONDUIT
(1)
TYP
1 /37
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 Z008
PERM) R
��Rp
EACH SUBCONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING A J
THOROUGH KNOWLEDGE OF ALL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
IN THEIR RELATED FIELD. THE FAILURE TO ACQUAINT HIMSELF
WITH THIS KNOWLEDGE DOES NOT REIJEVE THE RESPONSIBIUTY
OF PERFORMING HIS WORK PROPERLY. NO ADDITIONAL
COMPENSATION SHAD- BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF CONDITIONS
THAT OCCUR DUE TO FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE WORKERS WITH
THIS KNOWLEDGE.
zumez
SO - RD:I vTER MALL
SPACE # 2II(5
633 Soumci v'ri
SEAS, WA 98188
MURPHY VAREYPS
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
aoI NISIS2 ATLI Buis as
S Tuszeivzom
T: ao6.5p . 9875
F: 2 x 6 .34 1 .9 1 l
E m. MvnraYorr.cor
Harrison French and
Associates
809 S.W. "A" Street
Bentonville, AR 72712
(479) 273 -7780
fax (479) 273 -9436
PROJECT NUMBER: 05 -08 -02008
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
PRELIMINARY MALL
REVI
DATE:
02 - - PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
SHEET TITLE:
ELECTRICAL
DETAILS
SHEET NUMBER:
I EXPIRES: 07/22/08 I
E3
7-119195
SECTION 16A: ELECTRICAL
16A 1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
16A 1 -1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ALL REQUIREMENTS UNDER DIVISION 1 AND THE GENERAL AND
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS APPLY TO THIS
SECTION AND DIVISION. WHERE THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
AND DIVISION EXCEED THOSE OF DIVISION 1, THIS SECTION AND
DIVISION TAKE PRECEDENCE. BECOME THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL
THEIR CONTENTS AS TO REQUIREMENTS THAT AFFECT THIS DIVISION,
SECTION OR BOTH. WORK REQUIRED UNDER THIS DIVISION INCLUDES
ALL MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, APPLIANCES, AND LABOR REQUIRED TO
COMPLETE THE ENTIRE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AS REQUIRED BY THE
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, OR REASONABLY INFERRED TO BE
NECESSARY TO FACIUTATE EACH SYSTEM'S FUNCTIONING AS IMPUED BY
THE DESIGN AND THE EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED.
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR THE PROJECT ARE
COMPLEMENTARY, AND PORTIONS OF THE WORK DESCRIBED IN ONE,
SHALL BE PROVIDED AS IF DESCRIBED IN BOTH. IN THE EVENT OF
DISCREPANCIES, NOTIFY THE ENGINEER AND REQUEST CLARIFICATION
PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK INVOLVED.
DRAWINGS ARE GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS OF THE WORK UPON WHICH
THE CONTRACT IS BASED. THEY SHOW THE MATERIALS AND THEIR
RELATIONSHIP TO ONE ANOTHER, INCLUDING SIZES, SHAPES, LOCATIONS,
AND CONNECTIONS. THEY ALSO CONVEY THE SCOPE OF WORK,
INDICATING THE INTENDED GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE EQUIPMENT,
FIXTURES, OUTLETS AND CIRCUITS WITHOUT SHOWING ALL OF THE
EXACT DETAILS AS TO ELEVATIONS, OFFSETS, CONTROL ONES, AND
OTHER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. USE OF THE DRAWINGS AS A
GUIDE WHEN LAYING OUT THE WORK AND TO VERIFY THAT MATERIALS
AND EQUIPMENT WILL FIT INTO THE DESIGNATED SPACES, AND WHICH,
WHEN INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURES' REQUIREMENTS, WILL ENSURE A
COMPLETE, COORDINATED, SATISFACTORY AND PROPERLY OPERATING
SYSTEM.
SPECIFICATIONS DEFINE THE QUALITATIVE REQUIREMENTS FOR
PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, AND WORKMANSHIP UPON WHICH THE
CONTRACT IS BASED.
16A 1 -2 PRE —BID SITE INSPECTION
PERSONALLY INSPECT THE SITE OF THE PROPOSED WORK AND BECOME
FULLY INFORMED OF CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE WORK IS TO BE
DONE. FAILURE TO DO SO WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED SUFFICIENT
JUSTIFICATION TO REQUEST OR OBTAIN EXTRA COMPENSATION OVER
AND ABOVE THE CONTRACT PRICE.
16A 1-3 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
PROVIDE ALL MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT NEW AND IN FIRST CLASS
CONDITION. PROVIDE MARKINGS OR A NAMEPLATE FOR ALL MATERIAL
AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFYING THE MANUFACTURER AND PROVIDING
SUFFICIENT REFERENCE TO ESTABUSH QUALITY, SIZE AND CAPACITY.
ALL WORKMANSHIP SHALL BE OF THE FINEST POSSIBLE BY
EXPERIENCED MECHANICS OF THE PROPER TRADE. IN GENERAL,
PROVIDE COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATION GRADE QUALITY FOR ALL
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. LIGHT DUTY AND RESIDENTIAL TYPE
EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. PROVIDE ALL HOISTS,
SCAFFOLDS, STAGING, RUNWAYS, TOOLS, MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK. STORE
AND MAINTAIN MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT IN CLEAN CONDITION, AND
PROTECTED FROM WEATHER, MOISTURE, AND PHYSICAL DAMAGE.
FURNISH ONLY MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE LISTED, LABELED,
OR BOTH, BY A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY (NRTL),
WHENEVER ANY LISTING OR LABELING EXISTS FOR THE TYPES OF
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED.
16A 1 -4 COORDINATION
COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH OTHER DIVISIONS AND TRADES SO THAT
THE VARIOUS COMPONENTS OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ARE
INSTALLED AT THE PROPER TIME, FIT THE AVAILABLE SPACE, AND
ALLOW PROPER SERVICE ACCESS TO ALL EQUIPMENT. REFER TO ALL
DRAWINGS, INCLUDING, BUT NOT UMITED TO, CIVIL, ARCHITECTURAL,
STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND PLUMBING, AND TO RELEVANT
EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS TO DETERMINE THE
EXTENT OF CLEAR SPACES. MAKE ALL OFFSETS REQUIRED TO CLEAR
EQUIPMENT, BEAMS AND OTHER STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, AND TO
FACIUTATE CONCEALING RACEWAYS IN THE MANNER ANTICIPATED IN
THE DESIGN. PROVIDE MATERIALS WITH TRIM THAT WILL HT PROPERLY
THE TYPES OF CEIUNG, WALL, OR FLOOR FINISHES ACTUALLY
INSTALLED.
16A 1 -5 DEFINITIONS
WHENEVER USED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS OR DRAWINGS, THE
FOLLOWING TERMS SHALL HAVE THE INDICATED MEANINGS:
FURNISH: "TO SUPPLY AND DELIVER TO THE PROJECT SITE, READY FOR
UNLOADING, UNPACKING, ASSEMBLING, INSTALLING AND SIMILAR
OPERATIONS. "
INSTALL "TO PERFORM ALL OPERATIONS AT THE PROJECT SITE,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, AND AS REQUIRED: UNLOADING,
UNPACKING, ASSEMBLING, ERECTING, PLACING, ANCHORING, APPLYING,
WORKING TO DIMENSION, FINISHING, CURING, PROTECTING, CLEANING,
TESTING, COMMISSIONING, STARTING UP AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS,
COMPLETE, AND READY FOR THE INTENDED USE."
PROVIDE: "TO FURNISH AND INSTALL, COMPLETE AND READY FOR THE
INTENDED USE."
FURNISHED BY OWNER (OR OWNER— FURNISHED) OR FURNISHED BY
OTHERS: AN ITEM FURNISHED BY THE OWNER OR UNDER OTHER
DIVISIONS OR CONTRACTS, AND INSTALLED UNDER THE REQUIREMENTS
OF THIS DIVISION, COMPLETE AND READY FOR THE INTENDED USE,
INCLUDING ALL ITEMS INCIDENTAL TO THE WORK NECESSARY FOR
PROPER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION. INCLUDE THE INSTALLATION
UNDER THE WARRANTY REQUIRED BY THIS DIVISION.
ENGINEER: WHERE REFERRED TO IN THIS DIVISION, "ENGINEER" IS THE
ENGINEER OF RECORD AND THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL FOR THE WORK
UNDER THIS DIVISION, AND IS A CONSULTANT TO, AND AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE OF, THE ARCHITECT, AS DEFINED IN THE GENERAL
AND /OR SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. WHEN USED IN THIS DIVISION,
IT MEANS INCREASED INVOLVEMENT BY, AND OBLIGATIONS TO, THE
ENGINEER, IN ADDITION TO INVOLVEMENT BY, AND
OBLIGATIONS TO THE "ARCHITECT"
AHJ: THE LOCAL CODE AND /OR INSPECTION AGENCY (AUTHORITY)
HAVING JURISDICTION OVER THE WORK.
NRTL: NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY, AS DEFINED AND
USTED BY OSHA IN 29 CFR 1910.7 (E.G., UL, ETL, CSA), AND
ACCEPTABLE TO THE AHJ OVER THIS PROJECT.
THE TERMS "APPROVED EQUAL ", "EQUIVALENT ", OR "EQUAL" ARE USED
SYNONYMOUSLY AND SHALL MEAN "ACCEPTED BY OR ACCEPTABLE TO
THE ENGINEER AS EQUIVALENT TO THE ITEM OR MANUFACTURER
SPECIFIED ". THE TERM "APPROVED" SHALL MEAN LABELED, LISTED, OR
BOTH, BY AN NRTL, AND ACCEPTABLE TO THE AHJ OVER THIS
PROJECT.
16A 1 -6 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS
DRAWINGS ARE SCHEMATIC IN NATURE, SHOW THE VARIOUS
COMPONENTS OF THE SYSTEMS APPROXIMATELY TO SCALE AND
ATTEMPT TO INDICATE HOW THEY SHALL BE INTEGRATED WITH OTHER
PARTS OF THE WORK. FIGURED DIMENSIONS TAKE PRECEDENCE TO
SCALED DIMENSIONS. DETERMINE EXACT LOCATIONS BY JOB
MEASUREMENTS, BY CHECKING THE REQUIREMENTS OF OTHER TRADES,
AND BY REVIEWING ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. CORRECT ERRORS
THAT COULD HAVE BEEN AVOIDED BY PROPER CHECKING AND
INSPECTION, AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.
16A 1 -7 ORDINANCES AND CODES
COMPLY, AT A MINIMUM, NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION
(NFPA) CODES, STATE AND LOCAL BUILDING CODES, AND ALL OTHER
APPUCABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES FOR PERFORMANCE,
WORKMANSHIP, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIALS. ADDITIONALLY, COMPLY
WITH RULES AND REGULATIONS OF PUBLIC UTILITIES AND MUNICIPAL
DEPARTMENTS AFFECTED BY CONNECTION OF SERVICES.
WHERE CONFLICTS BETWEEN VARIOUS CODES, ORDINANCES, RULES, AND
REGULATIONS EXIST, COMPLY WITH THE MOST STRINGENT. WHEREVER
REQUIREMENTS OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, OR BOTH, EXCEED
THOSE OF THE ABOVE ITEMS, THE REQUIREMENTS OF THESE
SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, OR BOTH, SHALL GOVERN. CODE
COMPUANCE, AT A MINIMUM, IS MANDATORY. CONSTRUE NOTHING IN
THESE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AS PERMITTING WORK NOT IN
COMPUANCE, AT A MINIMUM, WITH THESE CODES.
BRING ALL CONFLICTS OBSERVED BETWEEN CODES, ORDINANCES, RULES,
REGULATIONS AND THESE DOCUMENTS TO THE ENGINEER'S ATTENTION
FOR FINAL RESOLUTION. CONTRACTOR WILL BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR
ANY VIOLATION OF THE LAW.
PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN ALL NECESSARY SIGNAL LIGHTS AND GUARDS
FOR THE SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC. OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS
FOR WORK IN THIS DIVISION.
16A 1 -8 MANUFACTURERS
IN OTHER ARTICLES WHERE LISTS OF MANUFACTURERS ARE
INTRODUCED, THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS APPLY TO PRODUCT
SELECTION:
A. MANUFACTURERS: SUBJECT TO COMPUANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS,
PROVIDE PRODUCTS BY ONE OF THE MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED.
WHERE A UST IS PROVIDED, MANUFACTURERS ARE LISTED
ALPHABETICALLY AND NOT IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANY RANKING OR
PREFERENCE.
16A 1 -9 SUBMITTALS
ASSEMBLE AND SUBMIT TO THE ARCHITECT, FOR ENGINEER'S REVIEW,
MANUFACTURERS' PRODUCT LITERATURE FOR MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
TO BE FURNISHED, INSTALLED, OR BOTH, UNDER THIS DIVISION,
INCLUDING SHOP DRAWINGS, MANUFACTURERS' PRODUCT DATA AND
PERFORMANCE SHEETS, SAMPLES, AND OTHER SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
BY THIS DIVISION. PROVIDE THE NUMBER OF SUBMITTALS REQUIRED BY
DIVISION 1. BEFORE SUBMITTING, VERIFY THAT ALL MATERIALS AND
EQUIPMENT SUBMITTED ARE MUTUALLY COMPATIBLE AND SUITABLE FOR
THE INTENDED USE, AND FIT THE AVAILABLE SPACES, AND ALLOW
AMPLE AND CODE—REQUIRED ROOM FOR ACCESS AND MAINTENANCE.
SUBMITTALS SHALL CONTAIN THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION.
SUBMITTALS NOT SO IDENTIFIED WILL BE RETURNED TO THE
CONTRACTOR WITHOUT ACTION:
A.
C.
D.
THE PROJECT NAME.
APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTION AND PARAGRAPH.
THE SUBMITTAL DATE.
THE CONTRACTOR'S STAMP, WHICH SHALL CERTIFY THAT THE
STAMPED DRAWINGS HAVE BEEN CHECKED BY THE CONTRACTOR,
COMPLY WITH THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, AND HAVE
BEEN COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADES.
TRANSMIT SUBMITTALS AS EARLY AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT THE
PROJECT SCHEDULE. ALLOW FOR TWO WEEKS ENGINEER REVIEW TIME,
PLUS MAILING 11ME, PLUS A DUPLICATION OF THIS TIME FOR
RESUBMITTALS, IF REQUIRED. TRANSMIT SUBMITTALS AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE AFTER NOTICE TO PROCEED AND BEFORE CONSTRUCTION
STARTS. THE ENGINEER'S SUBMITTAL REVIEWS WILL NOT REUEVE THE
CONTRACTOR FROM RESPONSIBILITY FOR ERRORS IN DIMENSIONS,
DETAILS, SIZE OF MEMBERS, OR QUANTITIES; OR OMITTING COMPONENTS
OR FITTINGS; OR COORDINATING ITEMS WITH ACTUAL BUILDING
CONDITIONS.
16A 1 -10 ADJUSTING, AUGNING AND TESTING
ADJUST, ALIGN, AND TEST ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ON THIS
PROJECT PROVIDED UNDER THIS DIVISION AND ALL ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS FOR INSTALLATION OR WIRING
UNDER THIS DIVISION, FOR PROPER OPERATION.
TEST ALL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS
IN NETA ATS (LATEST EDITION).
MAINTAIN THE FOLLOWING ON THE PROJECT PREMISES AT ALL TIMES: A
TRUE RMS READING VOLTMETER, A TRUE RMS READING AMMETER, AND
A MEGOHMMETER INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTER. PROVIDE TEST
DATE READINGS AS REQUESTED OR AS REQUIRED BY THE ENGINEER.
16A 1 -11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
SUBMIT TO THE ARCHITECT, FOR ENGINEER'S REVIEW, COPIES EACH OF
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUALS,
APPROPRIATELY BOUND INTO
MANUAL FORM INCLUDING APPROVED COPIES OF THE FOLLOWING,
REVISED IF NECESSARY TO SHOW SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT AS
ACTUALLY INSTALLED PROVIDE THE NUMBER OF SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
BY DIVISION 1 AND INCLUDE AT A MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING
INFORMATION:
A. MANUFACTURERS' CATALOG AND PRODUCT DATE SHEETS
B. WIRING DIAGRAMS
C. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
D. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
E. PARTS LISTS
F. TEST REPORTS AS DEFINED IN NETA ATS FOR THE SYSTEMS AND
EQUIPMENT PROVIDED AND INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT
C. NAMES, ADDRESSES, TELEPHONE NUMBERS, AND E —MAIL
ADDRESSES OF LOCAL CONTACTS FOR WARRANTY SERVICES
AND SPARE PARTS
SUBMIT MANUALS PRIOR TO REQUESTING THE FINAL PUNCH UST AND
BEFORE ANY REQUESTS FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. ALSO PROVIDE
ADEQUATE VERBAL INSTRUCTIONS OF SYSTEM OPERATIONS TO OWNER'S
REPRESENTATIVE AT THE COMPLETION OF, AND BEFORE FINAL
ACCEPTANCE OF, THE WORK.
16A 1 -12 SYSTEM START UP
PRIOR TO STARTING UP THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, CHECK ALL
COMPONENTS AND DEVICES, LUBRICATE ITEMS ACCORDINGLY, AND
TIGHTEN SCREWS AND BOLTS FOR CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS
ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S PUBUSHED TORQUE—TIGHTENING
VALUES. IF MANUFACTURE'S TORQUE VALUES ARE NOT INDICATED, USE
THOSE SPECIFIED IN UL 486A. ADJUST TAPS ON EACH TRANSFORMER
FOR RATED SECONDARY VOLTAGE. CHECK AND RECORD BUILDING'S
SERVICE ENTRANCE VOLTAGE, GROUNDING CONDITIONS, GROUNDING
RESISTANCE, AND PROPER PHASING. BALANCE ALL SINGLE —PHASE
LOADS AT EACH PANELBOARD, REDISTRIBUTING BRANCH CIRCUIT
CONNECTIONS UNTIL BALANCE IS ACHIEVED. DO NOT TYPE UP FINAL
PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES UNTIL ALL RE— BALANCING AND
REDISTRIBUTION OF CIRCUITS ARE COMPLETE. REPLACE ALL
BURNED —OUT LAMPS AND LAMPS USED FOR TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
LIGHTING IN PERMANENT UGHT FIXTURES. AFTER ALL SYSTEMS HAVE
BEEN INSPECTED AND ADJUSTED, CONFIRM ALL OPERATING FEATURES
REQUIRED BY THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND MAKE FINAL
ADJUSTMENTS AS NECESSARY.
16A 1 -13 WARRANTIES
WARRANT EACH SYSTEM AND EACH ELEMENT THEREOF AGAINST ALL
DEFECTS DUE TO FAULTY WORKMANSHIP, DESIGN OR MATERIAL FOR A
PERIOD OF 12 MONTHS FROM DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION,
UNLESS SPECIFIC ITEMS ARE NOTED TO CARRY A LONGER WARRANTY IN
THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OR MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD
WARRANTY EXCEEDS 12 MONTHS. REMEDY ALL DEFECTS, OCCURRING
WITHIN THE WARRANTY PERIOD(S), AS STATED IN THE GENERAL
CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1. ALSO WARRANT THE FOLLOWING
ADDITIONAL ITEMS:
A. ALL RACEWAYS ARE FREE FROM OBSTRUCTIONS, HOLES,
CRUSHING, OR BREAKS OF ANY NATURE
B. ALL RACEWAY SEALS ARE EFFECTIVE
C. THE ENTIRE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IS FREE FROM ALL SHORT
CIRCUITS AND UNWANTED OPEN CIRCUITS AND GROUNDS.
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES SHALL INCLUDE LABOR AND MATERIAL. MAKE
REPAIRS OR REPLACEMENTS WITHOUT ANY ADDITIONAL COSTS TO THE
OWNER.
PERFORM THE REMEDIAL WORK PROMPTLY, UPON WRITTEN NOTICE FROM
THE ENGINEER OR OWNER.
AT THE TIME OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, DELIVER TO THE OWNER
ALL WARRANTIES, IN WRITING AND PROPERLY EXECUTED, INCLUDING
TERM LIMITS FOR WARRANTIES EXTENDING BEYOND THE ONE YEAR
PERIOD, EACH WARRANTY INSTRUMENT BEING ADDRESSED TO THE
OWNER AND STATING THE COMMENCEMENT DATE AND TERM.
16A 2 ELECTRICAL WORK
16A 2 -1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFIWNG
EXCAVATE ALL MATERIALS ENCOUNTERED INCLUDING ROCK REQUIRED
FOR WORK UNDER THIS SECTION. BACKFILL ALL TRENCHES,
COMPACTING IN 6—INCH LAYERS. TEST UNDERGROUND SYSTEMS,
CONFIRM WATERTIGHT INTEGRITY, AND OBTAIN ACCEPTANCE FROM
ENGINEER AND AHJ BEFORE BACKFILLING. REMOVE FROM PREMISES
ALL EXCESS MATERIAL NOT USED IN BACKFIWNG. REPAIR ALL
STREETS, SIDEWALKS, DRIVES, PAVING AND OTHER FACIUTIES DAMAGED.
REPAIR MATERIALS SHALL GENERALLY MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION.
ALL BACKFILLING AND REPAIRING SHALL MEET ALL REQUIREMENTS OF
THE OWNER, CITY AND OTHERS HAVING JURISDICTION. REPAIR WORK
SHALL BE THOROUGHLY FIRST CLASS. CONFORM TO ALL
REQUIREMENTS OF DIVISION 2 OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
16A 2 -2 CLEANING
IN ADDITION TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF DIVISION 1, REMOVE FROM THE
PREMISES DIRT AND REFUSE RESULTING FROM THE PERFORMANCE OF
THE ELECTRICAL WORK, AS REQUIRED, TO PREVENT ACCUMULATION.
COOPERATE IN MAINTAINING REASONABLY CLEAN PREMISES AT ALL
TIMES. IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION, MAKE A FINAL
CLEANUP OF DIRT AND REFUSE RESULTING FROM THE WORK. CLEAN
ALL MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLED UNDER THIS DIVISION.
REMOVE DIRT, DUST, PLASTER, STAINS AND FOREIGN MATTER FROM ALL
SURFACES. TOUCH UP AND RESTORE ALL DAMAGED FINISHES TO THEIR
ORIGINAL CONDITION.
16A 2 -3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
FOLLOWING THE REQUIREMENTS IN DIVISION 1, CUT WALLS, FLOORS,
CEIUNGS, AND OTHER PORTIONS OF THE FACILITY AS REQUIRED TO
PERFORM WORK UNDER THIS DIVISION. OBTAIN PERMISSION OF THE
ENGINEER, OWNER, OR BOTH, BEFORE DOING ANY CUTTING. CUT ALL
HOLES AS SMALL AS POSSIBLE. PATCH WALLS, FLOORS, AND OTHER
PORTIONS OF THE FACILITY AS REQUIRED BY WORK UNDER THIS
DIVISION. ALL PATCHING SHALL BE THOROUGHLY FIRST CLASS AND
SHALL MATCH THE ORIGINAL MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING
FIRE RATINGS IF APPLICABLE.
16A 2 -4 ROUGH —IN
COORDINATE WITHOUT DELAY ALL ROUGHING —IN WITH OTHER DIVISIONS.
CONCEAL ALL RACEWAYS EXCEPT IN UNFINISHED AREAS ANS WHERE
OTHERWISE INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS.
16A 2 -5 RACEWAYS
METALUC CONDUIT AND TUBING:
A. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING AND FITTINGS (EMT): ANSI C80.3,
UL 797
B. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC): ZINC — COATED STEEL, UL 1
C. INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC): HOT— DIPPED
GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT: ANSI C80.6, UL 1242
D. LIQUIDTICHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC): FLEXIBLE STEEL
CONDUIT WITH PVC JACKET: UL 360
E. RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC):
1. HOT —DIP GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
(GRS): ANSI C80.1 UL 6
2. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT (RAC): ANSI C80.5, UL 6A
F. PLASTIC — COATED IMC, RMC, AND FITTINGS: NEMA RN 1, UL
LISTED.
G. IMC AND RMC FITTINGS: NEMA FB 1; COMPATIBLE WITH CONDUIT
TYPE AND MATERIAL, UL USTED
NON— METALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING:
A. ELECTRICAL NONMETALUC TUBING (ENT): NEMA TC 13, UL USTED
B. UQUIDTTGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETAWC CONDUIT (LFNC): UL 1660
C. RIGID NONMETALUC CONDUIT (RNC): SCHEDULE 40 PVC: NEMA
TC 2, UL 651
D. ENT AND RNC FITTINGS: NEMA TC 3, TC 6; UL 514, COMPATIBLE
WITH CONDUIT /TUBING TYPE AND MATERIAL, UL LISTED
16A 2 -6 RACEWAY INSTALLATION
INSTALL ALL CIRCULAR RACEWAYS CONCEALED ABOVE SUSPENDED
CEIUNGS OR CONCEALED IN WALLS OR FLOORS WHEREVER POSSIBLE
EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE INDICATED. PROVIDE GRS FOR ALL
CONDUITS RUN UNDERGROUND, EXPOSED TO WEATHER, OR EXPOSED TO
OTHER HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS. PROVIDE GRS INSTALLED BELOW
GRADE WITH A CORROSION RESISTANT BONDED — PLASTIC OR APPROVED
MASTIC COATING. THIS SHALL INCLUDE THE 90— DEGREE ELBOW BELOW
GRADE AND THE ENURE VERTICAL TRANSITION TO ABOVE GRADE. ALL
OTHER RACEWAY MAY BE EMT WHERE APPROVED BY LOCAL CODE.
USE COMPRESSION TYPE FITTINGS FOR EMT, WITH ALL FITTINGS UL
LISTED FOR THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THEY ARE USED. AT
CONTRACTOR'S OPTION, PVC CONDUIT MAY BE USED UNDERGROUND
WHERE PERMITTED BY LOCAL CODE AND WHERE NOT SPECIFICALLY
RESTRICTED BY THESE DOCUMENTS.
USE FMC FOR FINAL CONNECTION TO EACH MOTOR AND TRANSFORMER,
AND TO ANY DEVICE THAT WOULD OTHERWISE TRANSMIT MOTION,
VIBRATION, OR NOISE. WHERE EXPOSED TO UQUIDS, VAPORS OR
SUNUGHT, USE LFMC. PROVIDE ALL FMC AND LFMC WITH AN
INSULATED GROUND WIRE
USE ONLY METAL RACEWAYS FOR ALL POWER WIRING FROM THE
OUTPUT OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES TO THEIR RESPECTIVE
MOTORS.
INSTALL RACEWAYS PARALLEL TO BUILDING LINES.
INSTALL RACEWAYS TO REQUIREMENTS OF STRUCTURE AND TO
REQUIREMENTS OF ALL OTHER WORK ON THE PROJECT. INSTALL
RACEWAY TO CLEAR ALL OPENINGS, DEPRESSIONS, PIPES, DUCTS,
REINFORCING STEEL, AND OTHER IMMOVABLE OBSTACLES. INSTALL
RACEWAYS SET IN FORMS FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURE IN SUCH A
MANNER THAT INSTALLATION WILL NOT AFFECT THE STRENGTH OF
STRUCTURE. EXCEPT WHERE APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE ENGINEER,
INSTALL NO RACEWAY IN A SLAB —ON— GRADE. LOCATE RACEWAY
BELOW GRANULAR FILL BELOW SLABS —ON— GRADE.
INSTALL RACEWAYS CONTINUOUS BETWEEN CONNECTIONS TO OUTLETS,
BOXES AND CABINETS WITH A MINIMUM POSSIBLE NUMBER OF BENDS
AND NOT MORE THAN THE EQUIVALENT OF FOUR 90— DEGREE BENDS
BETWEEN CONNECTIONS. USE MANUFACTURED ELBOWS FOR ALL 45—
AND 90— DEGREE BENDS, UNLESS APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER IN
ADVANCE. MAKE OTHER BENDS SMOOTH AND EVEN AND WITHOUT
FLATTENING RACEWAY OR FLAKING GALVANIZING OR ENAMEL. RADII OF
BENDS SHALL BE AS LONG AS POSSIBLE AND NEVER SHORTER THAN
THE CORRESPONDING TRADE ELBOW. USE LONG RADIUS ELBOWS
WHERE NECESSARY, INDICATED, OR BOTH.
SECURELY FASTEN RACEWAYS IN PLACE WITH APPROVED STRAPS,
HANGERS AND STEEL SUPPORTS AS REQUIRED. ATTACH RACEWAY
SUPPORTS TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE. HANG SINGLE RACEWAYS FOR
FEEDERS WITH MALLEABLE SPLIT RING HANGERS WITH ROD AND
TURNBUCKLE SUSPENSION FROM INSERTS SPACED NOT OVER 10 FEET
APART IN CONSTRUCTION ABOVE. CLAMP GROUPS OF HORIZONTAL
FEEDER RACEWAYS TO STEEL CHANNELS THAT ARE SUSPENDED FROM
INSERTS SPACED NOT OVER 10 FEET APART IN CONSTRUCTION ABOVE.
SECURELY CLAMP VERTICAL FEEDER RACEWAYS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL
MEMBERS ATTACHED TO STRUCTURE. INSTALL CABLE CLAMPS FOR
SUPPORT OF VERTICAL FEEDERS WHERE REQUIRED. ADD RACEWAY
SUPPORTS WITHIN 12 INCHES OF ALL BENDS, ON BOTH SIDES OF THE
BENDS. DO NOT SUPPORT RACEWAYS FROM SUSPENDED CEILING
COMPONENTS.
REAM RACEWAY ENDS, THOROUGHLY CLEAN RACEWAYS BEFORE
INSTALLATION, AND KEEP CLEAN AFTER INSTALLATION. PLUG OR
COVER OPENINGS AND BOXES AS REQUIRED TO KEEP RACEWAYS CLEAN
DURING CONSTRUCTION AND FISH ALL RACEWAYS CLEAR OF
OBSTRUCTIONS BEFORE PULLING CONDUCTORS WIRES. PROVIDE
RACEWAYS OF AMPLE SIZE FOR PULLING OF WIRE AND NOT SMALLER
THAN CODE REQUIREMENTS AND NOT LESS THAN 36—INCH IN SIZE,
UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS.
PROTECT ALL RACEWAY INSTALLATIONS AGAINST DAMAGE DURING
CONSTRUCTION. REPAIR ALL RACEWAYS DAMAGED OR MOVED OUT OF
UNE AFTER ROUGHING —IN TO MEET ENGINEER'S APPROVAL WITHOUT
ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.
ALIGN AND INSTALL TRUE AND PLUMB ALL RACEWAY TERMINATIONS AT
PANELBOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS, MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT AND
JUNCTION BOXES.
INSTALL APPROVED EXPANSION /DEFLECTION FITTINGS WHERE RACEWAYS
PASS THROUGH OR ACROSS EXPANSION JOINTS.
INSTALL A PULL WIRE IN EACH EMPTY RACEWAY THAT 15 LEFT FOR
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS OR CABLES UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS OR
CONTRACTS. USE POLYPROPYLENE OR MONOFILAMENT PLASTIC UNE
WITH NOT LESS THAN 200 —LB TENSILE STRENGTH. LEAVE AT
LEAST 12 INCHES OF SLACK AT EACH END OF PULL WIRE.
MAKE ALL JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS IN A MANNER THAT WILL ENSURE
MECHANICAL STRENGTH AND ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY.
INSTALL CONDUIT — SEAUNG FITTINGS IN ALL RACEWAYS PASSING FROM
NON— HEATED TO HEATED SPACES.
16A 2 -7 BUSHINGS AND LOCKNUTS
RIGIDLY CLAMP CONDUITS ENTERING SHEET METAL BOXES TO THE BOX
WITH A BUSHING AND LOCKNUT ON THE INSIDE AND A LOCKNUT ON
THE OUTSIDE. CONDUIT SHALL ENTER THE BOX SQUARELY. PROVIDE
BUSHINGS AND LOCKNUTS MADE OF GALVANIZED MALLEABLE IRON WITH
SHARP, CLEAN —CUT THREADS. WHERE EMT ENTERS A BOX, PROVIDE
APPROVED EMT COMPRESSION CONNECTORS. USE INSULATED AND /OR
GROUNDING BUSHINGS WHEREVER CONNECTION IS SUBJECT TO
VIBRATION OR MOISTURE, WHEN REQUIRED BY NFPA 70, OR BOTH.
16A 2 -8 SUPPORT SYSTEMS
STEEL SLOTTED SUPPORT SYSTEMS (SLOTTED CHANNEL): COMPLY WITH
MFMA -3, FACTORY — FABRICATED COMPONENTS FOR FIELD ASSEMBLY;
12— GAUGE, 1 -5/8 —INCH BY 1 -5/8 —INCH; COPPER B --UNE, ERICO
INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION, POWER— STRUT, THOMAS & BETTS
CORPORATION, UNISTRUT.
FINISHES:
METALUC COATINGS: HOT —DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION AND
APPUED ACCORDING TO MFMA -3
NONMETAWC COATINGS: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD PVC,
POLYURETHANE, OR POLYESTER COATING APPLIED ACCORDING TO
MFMA-3.
PAINTED COATINGS: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD PAINTED COATING
APPLIED ACCORDING TO MFMA -3.
STAINLESS STEEL TYPE 304, PER ASTM A240.
ALUMINUM (EXTRUDED): TYPE 6063 —T6, PER ASTM 8221
FIELD FABRICATION:
WHERE FIELD CUTTING OF STANDARD LENGTHS OF CHANNEL ARE
REQUIRED, MAKE CUTS STRAIGHT AND PERPENDICULAR TO
MANUFACTURED SURFACES.
FOR FIELD —CUT OR DAMAGED SURFACES OF COATED CHANNELS, DRESS
CUT ENDS, DAMAGED SURFACES, OR BOTH, WITH AN ABRASIVE
MATERIAL (E.G., FILE, GRINDING STONE, OR SIMILAR) AND CLEANSER TO
REMOVE OILS, RUST, SHARP EDGES AND SHARDS.
FOR CHANNEL WITH A FACTORY— APPLIED COATING, RE— FINISH CUT
EDGES WITH A COATING COMPATIBLE WITH THE FACTORY FINISH AND
AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER (E.G., MANUFACTURER'S
TOUCH —UP PAINT OR ZINC —RICH COLD — GALVANIZING COMPOUND, AS
APPLICABLE).
16A 2 -9 CONDUCTORS
PROVIDE COPPER CONDUCTORS, WITH UL LABEL, AND 600V INSULATION.
SERVICE LATERAL CONDUCTORS: TYPE THWN OR XHHW WITH STRANDED
CONDUCTORS.
ALL FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS NO. 8 AWG AND
LARGER: STRANDED, TYPE THWN OR XHHW INSULATION.
ALL CONDUCTORS, NO. 10 AWG AND SMALLER, USED FOR POWER AND
LIGHTING CIRCUITS: SOLID COPPER, TYPE THWN (WET OR DAMP
LOCATIONS, OR IN CONDUIT BELOW GRADE OR SLAB), TYPE THHN (DRY
LOCATIONS ONLY AND ABOVE GRADE) INSULATION, OR DUAL —RATED
TYPE THHN /THWN.
ALL BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING: NOT SMALLER THAN NO. 12 AWG. IF
NO CONDUCTOR SIZE IS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS FOR A BRANCH
CIRCUIT, PROVIDE NO. 12 AWG CONDUCTORS AND A 20A CIRCUIT
BREAKER.
CONDUCTORS FIELD — INSTALLED WITHIN FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE
CHANNELS: TYPE THHN.
CONTROL WIRING: STRANDED COPPER CONDUCTORS, 600V INSULATION,
OF THE PROPER TYPE, SIZE AND NUMBER AS REQUIRED TO
ACCOMPUSH SPECIFIED FUNCTION. MINIMUM SIZE: NO. 18 AWG, UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED.
16A 2 -10 WIRING INSTALLATION
EXCEPT WHERE SPECIFIED OR INDICATED, FOR LOW— VOLTAGE WIRING,
INSTALL ALL WIRING IN APPROVED RACEWAY AND ENCLOSURES.
SUPPORT ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES IN VERTICAL INSTALLATIONS,
AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 70, BY INSTALUNG CABLE SUPPORTS OR
PLUG —TYPE CONDUIT RISER SUPPORTS, OR WIRE —MESH SAFETY GRIPS.
INSTALL ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLE IN RACEWAYS CONTINUOUS
WITHOUT TAPS OR SPUCES. SPLICE OR TAP ONLY IN APPROVED
BOXES AND ENCLOSURES WITH APPROVED SOLDERLESS CONNECTORS,
OR CRIMP CONNECTORS AND TERMINAL BLOCKS FOR CONTROL WIRING,
AND KEEP TO THE MINIMUM REQUIRED. INSULATE ALL SPUCES, TAPS,
AND JOINTS AS REQUIRED BY CODES.
ALL MATERIALS USED TO TERMINATE, SPUCE, OR TAP CONDUCTORS:
DESIGNED FOR, PROPERLY SIZED FOR, AND UL LISTED FOR THE
SPECIFIC APPUCA11ON AND CONDUCTORS INVOLVED, AND INSTALLED IN
STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS,
USING THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED TOOLS.
WHERE WIRING IS INDICATED AS INSTALLED, BUT THE CONNECTION IS
INDICATED "FUTURE" OR "BY OTHER DIVISION, TRADES, OR CONTRACTS ",
LEAVE A MINIMUM 3 —FOOT "PIGTAIL" AT THE BOX, TAPE THE ENDS OF
THE CONDUCTORS, AND COVER THE BOX.
THE NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS IN A SPECIFIC RACEWAY "HOME RUN" IS
INDICATED WITH CROSS LINES (TICK MARKS) ON EACH "CIRCUIT RUN"
ON THE DRAWINGS. IN GENERAL, THE DIRECTION OF BRANCH CIRCUIT
"HOME RUN" ROUTING IS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS COMPLETE WITH
CIRCUIT NUMBERS AND PANELBOARD DESIGNATION. CONTINUE ALL
SUCH "HOME RUN" WIRING TO THE DESIGNATED PANELBOARD, AS
THOUGH "CIRCUIT
RUNS" WHERE INDICATED IN THEIR ENTIRETY.
WHEN MULTIPLE HOME RUNS ARE COMBINED INTO A SINGLE RACEWAY
SUCH THAT THE NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS EXCEEDS FOUR (CONDUCTOR
COUNT IS MADE UP OF ANY COMBINATION OF PHASE AND NEUTRAL
CONDUCTORS), THE FOLLOWING RESTRICTIONS APPLY, WHICH ARE IN
ADDITION TO THOSE IN NFPA 70:
NORMAL OR NONESSENTIAL CIRCUITS
MAXIMUM OF 16 CONDUCTORS IN A SINGLE RACEWAY. FOR UP TO
EIGHT CONDUCTORS IN A RACEWAY, MINIMUM RACEWAY SIZE: 3/4
—INCH. FOR GREATER THAN EIGHT CONDUCTORS, MINIMUM RACEWAY
SIZE: 1 —INCH. DO NOT INSTALL ANY OTHER TYPE OF CIRCUIT IN THIS
RACEWAY.
THE MINIMUM WIRE SIZE FOR ALL CONDUCTORS IN THIS RACEWAY:
N0.10 AWG. ONLY 15A AND 20A BRANCH CIRCUIT HOMERUNS MAY BE
COMBINED INTO ONE RACEWAY.
GFCI CIRCUITS
DO NOT USE MULTI— CONDUCTOR CIRCUITS, WITH A SHARED NEUTRAL,
FOR ANY GFCI CIRCUIT BREAKER OR RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT.
FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS FED FROM GFCI CIRCUIT BREAKERS, UMIT THE
ONE —WAY CONDUCTOR LENGTH TO 100 FEET BETWEEN THE
PANELBOARD AND THE MOST REMOTE RECEPTACLE OR LOAD ON THE
GFCI CIRCUIT.
WIRING SHALL HAVE INSULATION OF THE PROPER COLOR TO MATCH
COLOR CODE SYSTEM IN THE TABLE BELOW. IN LARGER SIZES, WHERE
PROPERLY COLORED INSULATION IS NOT AVAILABLE, USE VINYL PLASTIC
ELECTRICAL TAPE OF THE APPROPRIATE COLOR AROUND EACH
CONDUCTOR AT ALL TERMINATION POINTS, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES.
System Voltage Conductor Type
208Y/120 Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Equipment Ground
Isolated Ground
480Y/277
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral
Equipment Ground
Isolated Ground
Color
Black
Red
Blue
White
Green
Green
w /yellow stripe
Brown
Orange
Yellow
Grey
Green
Green
w /yellow stripe
PROPERLY NUMBER ALL TERMINAL BLOCKS AND WIRE TERMINALS FOR
CONTROL WRING FOR IDENTIFICATION WITH VINYL STICK —ON MARKERS
OR EQUIVALENT. PROVIDE AN EQUIPMENT — GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, OR
BONDING JUMPER, AS APPUCABLE, IN ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS AND
FEEDERS, SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 70 TABLES 250.66 OR
250.122, AS APPLICABLE, UNLESS INDICATED AS LARGER ON THE
DRAWINGS.
VOLTAGE DROP IN BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL NOT EXCEED 2 PERCENT.
16A 2 -11 JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES, CABINETS AND WIREWAYS
PROVIDE JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES, CABINETS AND WIREWAYS
WHEREVER NECESSARY FOR PROPER INSTALLATION OF VARIOUS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ACCORDING TO NFPA 70 AND WHERE INDICATED
ON THE DRAWINGS. SIZE AS REQUIRED FOR THE SPECIFIC FUNCTION
OR AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 70, WHICHEVER IS LARGER. CONSTRUCTION
SHALL BE OF A NEMA DESIGN SUITABLE FOR THE ENVIRONMENT
INSTALLED.
JUNCTION BOXES INSTALLED BEHIND WALL CASES, AND IN OR ON
OTHER STORE FIXTURES, EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, SHALL
BE 4 —INCH SQUARE OR LARGER, WITH GALVANIZED COVERS.
16A 2 -12 OUTLET BOXES
ALL OUTLETS INCLUDING LIGHT FIXTURE, SWITCH, RECEPTACLE, AND
SIMILAR OUTLETS: NATIONAL ELECTRICAL, APPLETON, STEEL CITY, RACO,
OR APPROVED EQUAL, GALVANIZED STEEL KNOCKOUT BOXES, SUITABLE
IN DESIGN TO THE PURPOSE THEY SERVE AND THE SPACE THEY
OCCUPY. SIZE AS REQUIRED FOR THE SPECIFIC FUNCTION OR AS
REQUIRED BY NFPA 70, WHICHEVER IS LARGER. SET ALL OUTLET
BOXES IN WALLS, COLUMNS, FLOORS, OR CEIUNGS SO THEY ARE FLUSH
WITH THE FINISHED SURFACE, ACCURATELY SET, AND RIGIDLY SECURED
IN POSITION. PROVIDE PLASTER RINGS, EXTENSION RINGS AND /OR
MASONRY RINGS AS REQUIRED FOR FLUSH MOUNTING. PROVIDE
APPROVED CAST OUTLET BOXES, WITH HUBS AND WEATHERPROOF
COVERS, IN ALL AREAS SUBJECT TO DAMP, WET, OR HARSH
CONDITIONS.
16A 2 -13 OUTLET LOCATIONS
COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF OUTLET BOXES, OUTLETS ARE ONLY
APPROXIMATELY LOCATED ON THE SMALL SCALE DRAWINGS. USE
GREAT CARE IN THE ACTUAL LOCATION BY CONSULTING THE VARIOUS
LARGE SCALE DETAILED DRAWINGS USED BY OTHER DIVISION TRADES,
AND BY SECURING DEFINITE LOCATIONS FROM THE ARCHITECT.
16A 2 -14 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, INSTALL WIRING DEVICES AS INDICATED
BELOW (NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO THE BOTTOM OF THE OUTLET
BOX UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE):
A. RECEPTACLES:
1. GENERAL:
A. VERTICALLY WITH THE GROUND SLOT MOUNTED
AT THE TOP: 16 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
B. HORIZONTALLY, WITH NEUTRAL SLOT MOUNTED AT
THE BOTTOM: 16 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR.
2. ABOVE COUNTERS:
A. FOR 36 —INCH HIGH COUNTER TOPS: 44
INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, VERTICALLY.
B. FOR 34 —INCH HIGH COUNTER TOPS: 40 INCHES
ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, VERTICALLY
B.
C.
NAMEPLATES:
b 437
3. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND
JANITORS CLOSETS: 44 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR,
VERTICALLY.
4. WEATHERPROOF EXTERIOR RECEPTACLES: 24 INCHES
ABOVE FINISHED GRADE OR AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS,
VERTICALLY.
5. GFCI RECEPTACLES: SAME AS GENERAL RECEPTACLES.
6. ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES: SAME AS GENERAL
RECEPTACLES.
7. TVSS RECEPTACLES: SAME AS GENERAL RECEPTACLES.
8. CONCRETE BLOCK WALLS: DIMENSIONS ABOVE MAY BE
ADJUSTED SLIGHTLY, AS REQUIRED TO COMPENSATE FOR
VAIABLE JOINT DIMENSIONS, SUCH THAT BOTTOM OR TOP
OF BOXES, AS APPLICABLE, ARE AT BLOCK JOINTS.
SWITCHES:
1.
GENERAL: 44 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR.
2. ABOVE COUNTERS: SAME AS FOR RECEPTACLES.
3. CONCRETE BLOCK WALLS: 40 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED
FLOOR (DIMENSIONS MAY BE ADJUSTED SLIGHTLY, AS
REQUIRED TO COMPENSATE FOR VARIABLE JOINT
DIMENSIONS, SUCH THAT BOTTOM OF BOXES ARE AT
BLOCK JOINTS).
TELEPHONE /DATA OUTLET BOXES:
1. GENERAL MATCH MOUNTING HEIGHT OF ADJACENT WIRING
DEVICE LISTED ABOVE.
2. WALL — MOUNTED TELEPHONE: 40 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED
FLOOR.
16A 2 -15 WIRING DEVICES
PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING WIRING DEVICES WHERE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS
OR REQUIRED. MINOR CHANGES RELATIVE TO THE LOCATION OF
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY BE MADE TO COMPLY WITH STRUCTURAL
AND BUILDING REQUIREMENTS AS DETERMINED IN THE COURSE OF
CONSTRUCTION. PROVIDE ALL WIRING DEVICES OF THE SAME
MANUFACTURER AND NOT MIXED ON THE PROJECT, TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT POSSIBLE. PROVIDE THE COLOR OF TOGGLES AND
RECEPTACLES AS REQUESTED BY THE ENGINEER.
Cocper
Pass & wring
Type of Device Hubbell Seymour Levitan Devices
Simplex Receptacle HBL 5361 5361 5361 5361
Duplex Receptade HBL 5362 5362 5362 5362
Single Pole Switch HBL1221 PS 20 AC1 1221 -2 2221
Three —way Switch HBL1223 PS 20 AC3 1223 -2 2223
16A 2 -16 SWITCH AND OUTLET COVER PLATES
SWITCH AND OUTLET PLATES: COLORED, SMOOTH NYLON; BY THE SAME
MANUFACTURER AS THE WIRING DEVICES, WHEREVER POSSIBLE. VERIFY
DESIRED MATERIALS AND COLORS WITH ENGINEER BEFORE INSTALLATION.
SWITCH PLATES IN UNFINISHED ROOMS AND SPACES: STAMPED STEEL,
CADMIUM PLATED. INSTALL GROUPS OF SWITCHES UNDER ONE
GANGED — PLATE, USUALLY HORIZONTALLY; OR, WHERE REQUIRED BY
DETAILS, VERTICALLY. SET ALL COVER PLATES PLUMB, PARALLEL, AND
FINISHED FLUSH WITH THE WALL.
16A 2 -17 WEATHERPROOF COVER PLATES
PROVIDE GFCI RECEPTACLES FOR DESIGNATED WEATHERPROOF
RECEPTACLES, UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS.
FOR UNATTENDED, WET LOCATIONS: IN —USE NEMA 3R, UL— LABELED
PLATES MOLDED FROM A CLEAR HIGH IMPACT ULTRAVIOLET STABILIZED
POLYCARBONATE MATERIAL FOR EASY VERIFICATION THAT CORDS ARE
PLUGGED IN AND THAT THE GFCI IS FUNCTIONING.
FOR ATTENDED WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS: WEATHERPROOF COVER
PLATES, UL —LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS WITH COVER(S) CLOSED;
DIE —CAST ALUMINUM OR TYPE 302 STAINLESS STEEL; SINGLE —COVER
FOR SWITCHES AND VERTICALLY MOUNTED RECEPTACLES;
DOUBLE —COVER FOR HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED RECEPTACLES;
SELF—CLOSING COVERS.
COVER PLATES: BY THE SAME MANUFACTURER AS THE WIRING DEVICES;
COMPLYING WITH NFPA 70 406.8 (A) OR (B) REQUIREMENTS FOR
ATTENDED OR UNATTENDED USE AS APPLICABLE.
16A 2 -18 FIRESTOPPING FLOOR AND WALL PENETRATIONS
FIRE — RESISTANT PENETRATION SEALANTS: TWO —PART,
FOAMED —IN- -- PLACE, SILICONE SEALANT FORMULATED FOR USE IN
THROUGH — PENETRATION FIRE — STOPPING AROUND CABLES, RACEWAYS,
AND CABLE TRAY PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE —RATED WALLS AND
FLOORS. SEALANTS AND ACCESSORIES SHALL HAVE F1RE— RESISTANCE
RATINGS INDICATED, AS ESTABUSHED BY TESTING IDENTICAL
ASSEMBLIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E 814, BY UNDERWRITERS'
LABORATORIES, INC., OR OTHER NRTL ACCEPTABLE TO AHJ.
PRODUCTS: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
1. "3M FIRE STOP FOAM #2001, " 3M CORP.
2. "METACAULK 835 +, " RECTORSEAL
3. "SPECSEAL PENSIL 200 SIUCONE FOAM," SPECIFY
TECHNOLOGY INC.
4. "FIRE STOP SYSTEM," UNITED STATES GYPSUM
COMPANY.
16A 2 -19 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
PROVIDE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES ON ALL
PANELBOARDS, SWITCHES, AND WHERE INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS.
A. ENGRAVED, CONTRASTING COLOR, THREE— LAYER, LAMINATED
PLASTIC INDICATING THE NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT, LOAD, OR
CIRCUIT AS DESIGNATED ON THE DRAWINGS AND IN THE
SPECIFICATIONS.
B. FIELD — APPUED PERMANENT EPDXY ADHESIVE, COMPATIBLE WITH
THE EQUIPMENT FINISH, ATTACHMENT METHOD SHALL BE
ACCEPTABLE TO THE MANUFACTURERS OF THE EQUIPMENT TO
WHICH THE NAMEPLATES ARE BEING APPUED.
C. COLOR: BLACK BACKGROUND WIN WHITE LETTERS FOR NORMAL
POWER; LETTER HEIGHT: 1/2 —INCH MINIMUM
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 14 2008
PERMIT CENTER
zumez
SOUTHCENTER MALL
SPACE # 2115
633 SorrracamER
SEATTLE, WA 98188
MuxY VAR.EYPS
DAVID J. MURPHY, AIA
2101 Nuns AT/2101 Bum as
Sarnia, Vuremax 98151
T: aa6 , gp . 9875
F! 1a6.841.9ra
E: m. MonErVam cos
Harrison French and
Associates
809 S.W. "A" Street
Bentonville, AR 72712
(479) 273 -7780
fax (479) 273 -9436
PRELIMINARY MALL
REVI Ew
PROJECT NUMBER: 05 -08 -02008
ZUMIEZ STORE NUMBER: 19
ISSUED FOR:
DATE:
02 -08 -08
SHEET TITLE:
SHEET NUMBER:
1 EXPIRES: 07/22/08 1
E4
PRELIMINARY MALL REVIEW
ELECTRICAL
SPECS